BMW Owner's+Handbook 01405A11294

LINK:
CONTENT & A-Z
The Ultimate
Driving Machine
OWNER'S HANDBOOK.
THE BMW Z4 ROADSTER.
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A11294 - VI/20

WELCOME TO BMW.
Owner's Handbook.
Congratulations on your choice of a BMW.
The better you are acquainted with your vehicle, the easier you will find it is to
operate. We would therefore like to offer you the following advice:
Please read the Owner's Handbook before setting out in your new BMW.
Also use the integrated Owner's Handbook in your vehicle. It contains impor‐
tant notes on how to operate the vehicle, enabling you to derive maximum
benefit from the technical advantages of your BMW. It also contains informa‐
tion which will help you to maintain both the operating and road safety of your
BMW as well as its full resale value.
At the time of production in the factory, the printed Owner's Handbook is the
most up-to-date medium. After a vehicle software update – for example, a
Remote Software Upgrade – the integrated Owner's Handbook for the vehi‐
cle will contain updated information.
Supplementary information is provided in the other documents of on-board
literature.
We wish you a safe and pleasant journey.
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
After a vehicle software update – for example, a Remote Software Up‐

grade – the integrated Owner's Handbook for the vehicle will contain up‐
dated information.
NOTES
Notes .................................................................................................................................... 6
Owner's Handbook media ........................................................................................... 20
QUICK REFERENCE
Getting in .......................................................................................................................... 22
Adjustment and operation ........................................................................................... 26
On the move ................................................................................................................... 30
CONTROLS
Driving area ...................................................................................................................... 38
Vehicle operating state ................................................................................................. 43
iDrive .................................................................................................................................. 46
BMW Remote Software Upgrade ............................................................................. 61
General settings ............................................................................................................. 64
Personal settings ........................................................................................................... 68
Connections .................................................................................................................... 74
Opening and closing ..................................................................................................... 83
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel .......................................................................... 110
Carrying children safely ............................................................................................. 121
Driving ............................................................................................................................. 131
Displays .......................................................................................................................... 150
Lights .............................................................................................................................. 169
Safety .............................................................................................................................. 177
Driving Stability Control Systems ........................................................................... 199
Driver Assistance Systems ....................................................................................... 202
Driving comfort ............................................................................................................. 234
Air conditioning ............................................................................................................ 235
4
Interior equipment ....................................................................................................... 249
Storage compartments .............................................................................................. 257
Luggage compartment .............................................................................................. 261
DRIVING HINTS
Driving precautions ..................................................................................................... 264
Saving fuel ..................................................................................................................... 269
MOBILITY
Refuelling ....................................................................................................................... 276
Wheels and tyres ......................................................................................................... 278
Engine compartment ................................................................................................. 304
Operating fluids ............................................................................................................ 307
Maintenance ................................................................................................................. 314
Replacing parts ............................................................................................................ 317
Help in case of a breakdown .................................................................................... 322
General care .................................................................................................................. 331
REFERENCE
Technical data .............................................................................................................. 336
Seats for child restraint systems ............................................................................. 339
Appendix ........................................................................................................................ 342
Everything from A to Z ............................................................................................... 344
© 2020 Bayerische Motoren Werke

Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Not to be reproduced, wholly or in part, without written permission from BMW AG, Munich.
English ID7 VI/20, 07 20 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
5
NOTES Notes
Notes
About this Owner's Additional sources of
Handbook information
Orientation Service Partner
The quickest way to find information on a partic‐ A Service Partner of the manufacturer will be
ular topic or feature is to consult the alphabetical happy to answer any further questions.
index.
We recommend that you read through the first Internet
chapter to obtain an initial overview of the vehi‐ Vehicle information and general information on
cle. BMW – on technology, for example – are avail‐
able on the Internet: www.bmw.com.
Validity of Owner's Handbook
Integrated Owner's Handbook in
Vehicle production the vehicle
At the time of production in the factory, the prin‐ The integrated Owner's Handbook describes the
ted Owner's Handbook provides up-to-date in‐ specific equipment and functions present in the
formation. Updates following the copy deadline vehicle. The integrated Owner's Handbook can
can result in differences between the printed be displayed on the control display.
Owner's Handbook and the integrated Owner's
Handbook in the vehicle.
BMW Driver's Guide App
You will find notes on any updates in the appen‐
The BMW Driver's Guide app specifically de‐
dix of the printed Owner's Handbook for the ve‐
scribes the equipment and functions included in
hicle.
the vehicle. The app can be displayed on smart‐
phones and tablets.
After a software update in the
vehicle BMW Driver’s Guide web version
After a vehicle software update – for example, a
The Driver’s Guide web version shows the most
Remote Software Upgrade – the integrated
appropriate information for the selected vehicle.
Owner's Handbook for the vehicle will contain
Where possible, only the equipment and func‐
updated information.
tions actually installed in the vehicle will be de‐
scribed. The Driver’s Guide web version can be
Owner's Handbook for displayed in any up-to-date browser.
Navigation, Entertainment,
Communication
The Owner's Handbook for navigation, entertain‐
ment and communication is available as a printed
book from Service.
These topics are also covered in the integrated
Owner's Handbook in the vehicle.
6
Notes NOTES
Symbols and displays Vehicle equipment

This Owner's Handbook describes all models
Symbols in the Owner's
and all the standard, national and optional equip‐
Handbook ment available for the model series. As a result,
this Owner's Handbook may also contain de‐
Symbol Meaning scriptions and illustrations of equipment and
Precautions that must be followed in functions which are not installed in your vehicle,
order to avoid the possibility of injury for example on account of the optional equip‐
to yourself and to others as well as ment selected or the country specification.
serious damage to the vehicle. This also applies to safety-relevant functions and
systems.
Measures that can be taken to help
protect the environment. Please comply with the relevant laws and regula‐
tions when using the corresponding functions
"..." Texts on a display in the vehicle for and systems.
selecting functions.
If certain equipment and models are not descri‐
›...‹ Commands for the voice control bed in this Owner's Handbook, refer to the Sup‐
system. plementary Owner's Handbooks provided.
››...‹‹ Replies by the voice control system. In right-hand drive vehicles, some controls are
arranged differently from those shown in the il‐
lustrations.
Actions
Actions that need to be carried out are shown as
a numbered list. The list of steps must be carried Production date
out in the specified sequence.
The production date of your vehicle can be
1. First action. found at the bottom of the door pillar on the driv‐
2. Second action. er's door.
The production date is defined as the calendar
Lists month and the calendar year in which the vehicle
Alternative options and lists of items with no im‐ body and the powertrain assemblies are joined
plied sequence are shown as bullet point lists: and the vehicle is driven or moved from the pro‐
▷ First option. duction line.
▷ Second option.
Status of the Owner's
Symbol on components and
assemblies
Handbook
This symbol on a vehicle component
indicates that further information on the
General
component is available in the Owner's The high standards of safety and quality that
Handbook. characterise the vehicles are ensured through
ongoing development. On rare occasions, this
7
NOTES Notes
may mean that the features described in this After a software update in the
handbook will vary from those in your vehicle. vehicle
For Australia/New Zealand: Remote Software Upgrade – the integrated
general Owner's Handbook for the vehicle will contain
When reading this Owner's Handbook, please updated information.
bear the following in mind: to ensure that our ve‐
hicles continue to embody the highest quality
and safety standards, we pursue a policy of con‐ Your own safety
tinuous, ongoing development. Because modifi‐
cations in the design of both vehicles and acces‐ Intended use
sories may be introduced at any time, your own
Please comply with the following when using the
vehicle's equipment may vary from that descri‐
vehicle:
bed in this handbook. For the same reason, it is
also impossible to guarantee that all descriptions ▷ Owner's Handbook.
will be completely accurate in all respects. ▷ Information attached to the vehicle. Do not
We must therefore request your understanding remove stickers.
of the fact that the manufacturer of your vehicle ▷ Technical data of the vehicle.
is unable to recognise legal claims based on dis‐ ▷ The applicable laws and safety standards of
crepancies between the data, illustrations and the country in which the vehicle is used.
descriptions in this Owner's Handbook and your
own vehicle's equipment. Please note, too, that ▷ Vehicle papers and legal documents.
some of the optional equipment described in this
manual is not available on Australian models due Warranty
to restrictions imposed by Australian Design The vehicle is technically designed for the oper‐
Rules and other requirements. ating conditions and approval (homologation) re‐
Should you require any further information, quirements of the country to which it was first
please contact your Service centre, who will be delivered. If the vehicle is to be driven in another
pleased to advise you. country, it may need to be adapted beforehand
to any different operating conditions and appro‐
Validity of Owner's Handbook val requirements prevailing in that country. If the
vehicle does not comply with the homologation
requirements in a certain country, no warranty
Vehicle production
claims can be lodged there for the vehicle. War‐
At the time of production in the factory, the prin‐ ranty claims may also be invalidated if the on-
ted Owner's Handbook provides up-to-date in‐ board network has been modified, e.g. through
formation. Updates following the copy deadline the use of control units, hardware or software
can result in differences between the printed which the vehicle manufacturer classifies as un‐
Owner's Handbook and the integrated Owner's suitable. A Service Partner is able to provide fur‐
Handbook in the vehicle. ther information.
You will find notes on any updates in the appen‐
dix of the printed Owner's Handbook for the ve‐ Maintenance and repairs
hicle.
The advanced technology used in your vehicle,
for example the state-of-the-art materials and
8
Notes NOTES
high-performance electronics, requires appropri‐ BMW vehicles, and some of them therefore are
ate maintenance and repair methods. insufficient.
Consequently, the manufacturer of the vehicle
recommends having corresponding work carried
out by a BMW Service Partner. If another BMW Vehicle data and data
authorised workshop is chosen, BMW recom‐ protection
mends choosing one that performs work, for ex‐
ample maintenance and repair, according to
BMW specifications with properly trained per‐
Responsibility and rights
sonnel. In the Owner's Handbook, facilities of this
kind are referred to as "another qualified Service Responsibility for data
Partner or a specialist workshop". Within the scope of data protection directives
If work such as maintenance and repair is carried and legislation, the manufacturer of the vehicle is
out incorrectly, it could result in consequential responsible for the processing of personal data
damage with associated safety risks. which is collected when the vehicle is used or
from web pages, customer support, online serv‐
Work performed incorrectly on the vehicle paint‐
ices and marketing measures.
work can cause components, for example the ra‐
dar sensors, to fail or malfunction, resulting in a
Personal identification
safety risk.
Every vehicle has a unique vehicle identification
Parts and accessories number. Depending on the country, a vehicle
owner can be identified with the assistance of
BMW recommends using parts and accessories the vehicle identification number, the number
that are approved by BMW and are therefore plate and the relevant authorities. There are also
suitable for this purpose. other ways of tracing data collected in the vehicle
You are recommended to consult a BMW Serv‐ back to the driver or vehicle owner, for example
ice Partner for advice on genuine BMW parts and via the ConnectedDrive account used.
accessories, other BMW approved products and
expert advice on all related matters. Data protection laws
The safety and compatibility of these products in In accordance with current data protection law,
conjunction with BMW vehicles have been vehicle users have certain rights they may assert
checked by BMW. against the vehicle manufacturer or companies
BMW accepts product responsibility for genuine that collect or process their personal data.
BMW parts and accessories. On the other hand, Vehicle users have a free and comprehensive
BMW cannot accept liability for parts or acces‐ right to information from organisations which
sory products of any kind which it has not ap‐ save their personal data.
proved.
These organisations could be:
BMW is unable to assess each individual product
▷ Vehicle manufacturer.
of outside origin as to its suitability for use on
BMW vehicles without safety risk. Likewise no ▷ Qualified Service Partners.
guarantee can be be assumed even if the prod‐ ▷ Specialist workshops.
uct has been granted official approval in a spe‐ ▷ Service providers.
cific country. Tests performed for such approvals
Vehicle users may request information about
cannot always cover all operating conditions for
what personal data has been saved, what it is
used for and where it has come from. Proof of
9
NOTES Notes
ownership or use is required in order to obtain ▷ Fulfilling legal obligations, for example infor‐
this information. mation regarding Technical Campaigns.
The right of access also extends to information ▷ Processing warranty claims.
about data that has been transferred to other
companies or bodies. Data collection
Please refer to the vehicle manufacturer's web‐
site for the applicable data privacy policy. This Type of data collected
data privacy policy contains information about Depending on the situation, the following per‐
the right to have data deleted or corrected. The sonal data may be collected.
vehicle manufacturer's website also provides its
contact details and those of its data protection Contact details
officer.
Name, address, phone number, email address.
The vehicle owner can have the data that is
stored in the vehicle read out by a Service Part‐ Personal data
ner of the manufacturer or another qualified
▷ Personal information provided by customers,
Service Partner or a specialist workshop, on pay‐
for example date of birth, education, house‐
ment of a fee where applicable.
hold size or occupation.
The legally required on-board diagnosis OBD
▷ Data to determine identity, for example driv‐
socket in the vehicle is used to read out the vehi‐
er's licence.
cle data.
Contract data
Data processing
▷ Customer number, contract number, booked
The collection of personal data may be neces‐ online services.
sary to enable the manufacturer of the vehicle to
fulfil obligations to the customer or legislator or ▷ Stored payment information, for example
to offer high-quality products and services. credit card number.
These include, for example: Credit rating

▷ Fulfilling contractual obligations regarding the ▷ Information about transactions.
sale, servicing and repair of vehicles, for ex‐
ample sales processes, services. ▷ Information about fraud or criminal offences.
▷ Fulfilling contractual obligations for the provi‐ Interests

sion of digital services relating to the vehicle,
for example BMW ConnectedDrive. Information provided by the customer regarding
areas of interest, for example product preferen‐
▷ Ensuring product quality, research and devel‐ ces, hobbies and other personal preferences.
opment for new products, as well as optimis‐
ing service processes. Use of web pages and communication
▷ Performing sales, service and administration ▷ Information on how web pages are used and
processes, inclunding branches and national whether messages are opened or forwarded.
National Sales Companies.
▷ Account information regarding online serv‐
▷ Customer support, for example contract pro‐ ices, customer portals and prospective cus‐
cessing. tomer portals.
▷ Advertising communication and market re‐
search on the basis of personal consent.
10
Notes NOTES
Transaction and interaction data ▷ When responding to the customer regarding

Information regarding product and service pur‐ direct marketing activities, for example when
chases, interactions with customer support and personal data is provided.
participation in market research studies. ▷ When using vehicles, products, services and
digital offers, for example web pages, apps.
Use of apps and services of the vehicle ▷ When transferring personal data through
manufacturer qualified partners of the vehicle manufacturer
Information on the use of apps on mobile devi‐ or through third-party providers, provided that
ces and online services. data protection requirements are met.
▷ When providing personal data through certi‐
Information on vehicle functions and fied address providers, provided that data
settings protection requirements are met.
Information on functions and settings for the ve‐ ▷ When reading out vehicle data, including the
hicle, for example when using online services. vehicle identification number, during service
and repair activities.
Vehicle-related sensor data and usage
data
Data in the vehicle
Data which is generated and/or processed in the
vehicle. General
▷ Driver assistance systems: processing sensor A number of electronic control devices are instal‐
data which is used to evaluate the vehicle led in your vehicle. Electronic control units proc‐
surroundings or the driver's behaviour. ess data that they receive from vehicle sensors,
▷ Personal settings: settings saved in the vehi‐ generate themselves or exchange with one an‐
cle profile, for example seat setting. other, for example. A high number of control
▷ Multimedia, navigation, for example destina‐ units are necessary for the vehicle to function
tions. safely or provide assistance during driving, for ex‐
ample driver assistance systems. There are also
Time of data collection control devices which manage comfort or info‐
tainment functions.
Personal data may be collected at the following
times: Data saved in the vehicle can be deleted at any
time. This data is only transmitted to third parties
▷ When the customer makes direct contact if expressly requested in the course of using on‐
with the manufacturer of the vehicle, for ex‐ line services. The transfer depends on the set‐
ample via the web page. tings selected for using the services.
▷ When requesting information on products
and services or direct purchases, for example Sensor data
on web pages or in apps.
Driver assistance systems, for example Active
▷ When making direct purchases, for example Cruise Control, collision warning or Attentiveness
on the web page. Assistant, process sensor data which is used to
▷ When purchasing services directly, for exam‐ evaluate the vehicle surroundings or the driver's
ple online services. behaviour.
These include, for example:
11
NOTES Notes
▷ Status reports relating to the vehicle and its Personal settings

individual components, for example wheel Convenience functions, such as seat, climate or
speed, wheel circumferential velocity, decel‐ light settings, make every journey even more
eration, lateral acceleration, fastened seat pleasant. The personal settings for these func‐
belts. tions can be saved in a profile within the vehicle
▷ Ambient conditions, for example temperature, and retrieved on request, for example if the set‐
rain sensor signals. tings have been changed by another driver. De‐
The data is processed within the vehicle and is pending on the equipment, these profiles can be
usually transient. It is only saved for longer than saved in the vehicle manufacturer's secure data
the operating period if it is required in order to systems. When the driver changes vehicle, these
perform services agreed with the customer. saved profiles can simply be applied to a differ‐
ent vehicle.
Electronic components The vehicle settings saved in the vehicle profile
Electronic parts, for example control devices and can be changed or deleted at any time.
vehicle keys, contain components for storing
technical information. Information about the vehi‐ Multimedia and navigation
cle's condition, component use and wear, main‐ Data can also be imported into the vehicle enter‐
tenance requirements, events or errors can be tainment and communication system, for exam‐
stored temporarily or permanently. ple via a smartphone or MP3 player. The impor‐
This information generally documents the condi‐ ted data can be processed within the vehicle, for
tion of a component, a module, a system or the example to play the user's favourite music.
vehicle surroundings, including: Depending on the vehicle equipment, this data
▷ Operating states of system components, includes:
for example fill levels, tyre inflation pressure, ▷ Multimedia data such as music, films or pho‐
battery status. tos for playback in an integrated multimedia
▷ Malfunctions and faults of important system system.
components, for example lights and brakes. ▷ Address book data for use in conjunction with
▷ Responses of the vehicle to particular driving an integrated hands-free system or an
situations, for example triggering of an airbag, integrated navigation system.
activation of the drive stability control sys‐ ▷ Destinations: depending on the equipment,
tems. route guidance can be started automatically
▷ Information on vehicle-damaging events. with the aid of destinations which have been
taught in by the navigation system.
The data is required so that the control units can
perform their functions. It is also used for detect‐ ▷ Data on usage of Internet services.
ing and rectifying malfunctions, as well as to opti‐ This data may be saved locally in the vehicle or
mise vehicle functions. stored on a device that has been connected to
Most of this data is transient and is only pro‐ the vehicle, for example a smartphone, USB stick
cessed within the vehicle itself. Only a small pro‐ or MP3 player.
portion of the data is stored in event or error
memories in response to specific circumstances.
12
Notes NOTES
Service data components and systems may be read out, for

example lights, brakes, power windows, displays.
General This data helps the vehicle manufacturer to opti‐
mise the design of components and systems.
When service work is required, for example re‐
Data analysis also provides the basis for Techni‐
pairs, service operations, warranty work and qual‐
cal Campaigns and statutory recalls.
ity assurance measures, this technical informa‐
tion can be read out from the vehicle together Furthermore, the manufacturer has product
with the vehicle identification number. monitoring obligations to meet in line with prod‐
uct liability law. To fulfil these obligations, the ve‐
Saved data hicle manufacturer requires technical data from
the vehicle.
Electronic vehicle components may contain data
storage media which save technical information
Goodwill and warranty claims
relating to the vehicle condition, events and er‐
rors. The data required for service measures is Data from the vehicle can also be used to check
processed locally and is deleted automatically customer warranty claims. If goodwill or warranty
once the work is complete. A Service Partner of claims are asserted, the read out data is transfer‐
the manufacturer or another qualified Service red to the vehicle manufacturer to resolve the
Partner or a specialist workshop can read out the claims promptly.
information. As part of service and repair orders, Error and event memories in the vehicle can be
data is read out via the OBD diagnostic socket reset when a Service Partner of the manufacturer
using special diagnosis systems and transferred or another qualified Service Partner or a special‐
to the vehicle manufacturer. The customer is en‐ ist workshop performs repair or servicing work.
titled to object to the data being read out and for‐
warded. Control over data
Data transferred to the vehicle manufacturer for
Optimising service processes the purposes of ensuring product quality or opti‐
The vehicle manufacturer maintains documenta‐ mising service processes can be prevented upon
tion relating to each vehicle to ensure the best request.
possible service is provided. Within the scope of
legal requirements, this documentation may be Legal requirements regarding
made available to independent operators, for ex‐ data disclosure
ample specialist workshops.
According to current law, the vehicle manufac‐
The independent operators may only use this turer is obliged to provide the authorities with any
data for the purposes of performing the service data it has stored. Data is provided to the extent
or repair order in question. This prevents work required and on a case-by-case basis, for exam‐
from being duplicated unnecessarily on the vehi‐ ple to investigate a criminal offence.
cle, for example.
The current law also gives state bodies authori‐
sation to read out data from the vehicle them‐
Ensuring product quality
selves for individual cases. This could include
The data logs the technical conditions of the ve‐ reading out data from the airbag control device
hicle and helps in locating errors, complying with to shed light on the circumstances of an acci‐
warranty obligations and improving quality. dent, for example.
To ensure product quality and the development
of new products, data on the usage of individual
13
NOTES Notes
Mobile devices BMW ConnectedDrive

Depending on the equipment, mobile devices BMW ConnectedDrive networks the vehicle with
such as smartphones can be connected to the a whole host of digital services. When used, only
vehicle and used to control vehicle functions, for the data saved in the vehicle that is required to
example BMW Connected, Apple CarPlay. For perform the agreed service is transferred online,
example, sound and images from the mobile de‐ for example information on identifying and locat‐
vice can be played back and displayed through ing the vehicle. The basis is a contractual agree‐
the multimedia system in the vehicle. ment with the user.
Selected information is transferred to the mobile In individual cases, the transfer of data is trig‐
device at the same time. Depending on the type gered as a result of predefined events, such as
of integration, this includes position data and an intelligent emergency call. The wireless net‐
other general vehicle information, for example. work connection is established via an in-vehicle
This optimises the way in which selected apps, transmitter and receiver unit or via personal mo‐
for example navigation or music playback, work. bile devices brought into the vehicle, for example
How the data is processed further is determined smartphones. Data transfer can be deactivated
by the provider of the particular app being used. on request.
The wireless network connection enables online
Services functions to be used. These include online serv‐
ices and apps supplied by the vehicle manufac‐
General turer or by other providers.
If the vehicle has a wireless network connection,
this enables data to be exchanged between the Services from other providers
vehicle and other systems, for example with When using online services from other providers,
BMW ConnectedDrive. these services are the responsibility of the rele‐
vant provider and subject to their data privacy
Services from the vehicle conditions and terms of use. The vehicle manu‐
manufacturer facturer has no influence over the data that is ex‐
changed.
In the case of online services provided by the
manufacturer of the vehicle, the respective func‐ Information as to how personal data is collected
tions are described at a suitable point, for exam‐ and used in relation to services from third parties,
ple, in the Owner's Handbook, on the manufac‐ the scope of such data and its purpose, can be
turer's web page. The relevant legal information obtained from the relevant provider.
pertaining to data protection is also provided.
Personal data may be used to provide online Personal decision
services. Data is exchanged over a secure con‐ Every user decides for themselves whether they
nection, for example with the data systems of the wish to enter into a contract for a service such as
vehicle manufacturer intended for this purpose. BMW ConnectedDrive. Information is provided in
Any collection, processing and use of personal writing regarding the scope and content of data
data above and beyond that needed to provide processing before the service is acquired and
the services always requires legal permission, a forms part of the vehicle handover.
contractual agreement or consent of the user. The user has the option to deactivate the serv‐
ices at any time and, as a result, to stop the pro‐
cessing of data required for the services. It is also
possible to have the entire data connection acti‐
14
Notes NOTES
vated or deactivated. Excluded from this are If a serious accident occurs, the eCall statutory
functions and services which are required by law, emergency call system is activated automatically
for example emergency call systems. by on-board sensors as a standard feature. It is
also triggered automatically if the vehicle is
Transparency concerning vehicle equipped with an intelligent emergency call sys‐
data tem that fails to work in the event of a serious ac‐
cident.
BMW CarData provides transparency regarding
how vehicle data is handled when BMW Con‐ The eCall statutory emergency call system can
nectedDrive is used. BMW CarData enables also be triggered manually if required.
users to control whether vehicle data that is pro‐ If a critical system failure occurs that would put
cessed in the context of BMW ConnectedDrive the eCall statutory emergency call system out of
is transferred to third parties. Users can decide operation, the passengers receive a warning.
for each individual service offering whether data For further information:
access is to be granted or refused for third par‐
ties, for example for insurance companies. ▷ Emergency call, see page 324.
An archive from BMW CarData can also be re‐ ▷ Malfunction, see page 325.
quested at any time. The archive provides infor‐
mation regarding the data that has been trans‐ Information on data processing
mitted and saved in the context of BMW The eCall statutory emergency call system pro‐
ConnectedDrive. BMW CarData can only be ac‐ cesses personal data in accordance with the
cessed by third-party providers via servers of the following regulations:
vehicle manufacturer. No direct access to the ve‐ ▷ Protection of personal data: regulation
hicle and its data is granted. 2016/679/EU of the European Parliament
More information on BMW CarData is available and of the Council.
on the BMW ConnectedDrive customer portal. ▷ Protection of personal data: directive
2002/58/EC of the European Parliament and
Statutory emergency call system of the Council.
Personal data is only processed for the purpose
Principle of transmitting eCall emergency calls to the
The eCall emergency call system required by law standardised European emergency call number
enables manual or automatic emergency calls to 112.
be issued in the event of accidents, for example.
The emergency calls are answered by the public SIM card
rescue coordination centre. The eCall statutory emergency call system oper‐
ates via mobile communications through the SIM
General card installed in the vehicle. The SIM card is not
For information on the eCall statutory on-board permanently connected to the mobile telephone
emergency call system based on the 112 emer‐ network; rather, it remains connected only as
gency call, as well as its operation and its func‐ long as the emergency call is active.
tions, see the chapter on emergency calls.
The eCall service based on the 112 emergency
Data types and their recipients
call is a public service of general interest and is The eCall statutory emergency call system may
provided free of charge. only collect and process the following data:
15
NOTES Notes
▷ The vehicle identification number for rapidly The vehicle's location data is continuously over‐
identifying the vehicle, for example the model. written in the system's internal memory so that
▷ Vehicle type, for example passenger car. only the vehicle's last three locations - which the
system needs for normal operation - are ever
▷ Type of vehicle drive, for example petrol or
stored.
diesel, for assessing the risks involved in a
rescue, for example the risk of fire caused by The activity data log of the eCall statutory emer‐
fuel. gency call system is retained only for as long as
is necessary to handle the eCall emergency call
▷ The vehicle's position at the time of the acci‐
and under no circumstances for any longer than
dent, its last three locations and the driving
13 hours after the eCall emergency call was trig‐
direction in order to locate the vehicle more
gered.
quickly on very complex route sections,
for example.
Rights of individuals affected by
▷ A log of the automatic system activation, data processing
along with the time stamp.
The individual affected by data processing,
▷ Control information, which tells rescue serv‐ for example the vehicle owner, has the right to
ices whether the emergency call was trig‐ access the data and can request that data con‐
gered automatically or manually, for example. cerning him or her that is not processed in ac‐
▷ A time stamp for determining the time of the cordance with the statutory regulations be cor‐
accident in order to optimise the deployment rected, deleted or blocked as applicable. Each
plans of the rescue services. time that data is corrected, deleted or blocked in
▷ The driving direction for establishing which line with these regulations, the third parties to
side of a motorway carriageway is affected, whom the data was transmitted must be notified,
for example. insofar as this is reasonably practical.
The authorities of the state in whose territory the The individual affected by data processing has
eCall system emergency call is made determine the right to complain to the relevant data protec‐
which emergency call centres receive and proc‐ tion body if he or she believes that his or her
ess the statutory emergency call. rights have been violated by having their that
personal data processed.
Data processing configuration For matters relating to access rights, please con‐
The eCall statutory emergency call system en‐ tact a Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐
sures that the data contained in the system other qualified Service Partner or a specialist
memory cannot be accessed outside the system workshop.
before an emergency call is triggered.
The data collected for the eCall statutory emer‐ Intelligent emergency call
gency call system is only saved in the vehicle system
and sent to the rescue coordination centre when
an emergency call is triggered. Principle
The eCall statutory emergency call system en‐ The intelligent emergency call system enables
sures that it cannot be traced and there is no manual or automatic emergency calls to be
permanent tracking during normal operation. placed, for example in the event of an accident.
The eCall statutory emergency call system en‐ The emergency calls are answered by an emer‐
sures that the data in the internal system mem‐ gency call centre appointed by the vehicle manu‐
ory is deleted automatically and continuously. facturer.
16
Notes NOTES
In addition to the intelligent emergency call sys‐ SIM card

tem, the eCall statutory emergency call system is The intelligent emergency call system operates
present in the vehicle and is active depending on via mobile communications through the SIM card
the situation. installed in the vehicle. The SIM card is perma‐
The vehicle owner has the right to use either the nently logged into the mobile telephone network
intelligent emergency call system or the eCall so a connection can be established quickly. The
statutory emergency call system. data is sent to the vehicle manufacturer in the
For further information: event of an emergency.
Emergency call, see page 324.
Improving quality
Legal basis The vehicle manufacturer also uses the data sent
as part of an emergency call to improve product
The intelligent emergency call system processes
and service quality.
personal data in accordance with the following
regulations:
Position determination
▷ Protection of personal data: directive
95/46/EC of the European Parliament and of Only the provider of the mobile telephone net‐
the Council. work is able to determine the position of the ve‐
hicle based on mobile telephone mast locations.
▷ Protection of personal data: directive The network operator is not able to link the vehi‐
2002/58/EC of the European Parliament and cle identification number to the telephone num‐
of the Council. ber of the installed SIM card. Only the vehicle
The ConnectedDrive contract concluded for this manufacturer is able to link the vehicle identifica‐
function, as well as the relevant laws, ordinances tion number to the telephone number of the in‐
and directives of the European Parliament and stalled SIM card.
the European Council provide the legal basis for
the activation and function of the intelligent Log data for emergency calls
emergency call system.
The log data for emergency calls is saved in a
The relevant ordinances and directives govern vehicle memory. The oldest log data is regularly
the protection of individuals in terms of process‐ deleted. The log data includes information on
ing personal data. when and where an emergency call was placed,
The intelligent emergency call system processes for example in the event of an accident.
personal data in accordance with European di‐ In exceptional cases, the log data can be read out
rectives on the protection of personal data. from the vehicle memory. It is usually only possi‐
The intelligent emergency call system processes ble for log data to be read out with a court order
personal data only with the vehicle owner's con‐ and if the corresponding devices are directly
sent. connected to the vehicle.
The intelligent emergency call system and other
added-value services may only process personal Automatic emergency call
data with the express consent of the individual The system has been designed so that an emer‐
affected by data processing, for example the ve‐ gency call is triggered automatically following an
hicle owner. accident of a certain severity, which is detected
by the sensors in the vehicle.
17
NOTES Notes
Sent information Statutory emergency call system

If an emergency call is made by the intelligent The owner of a vehicle equipped with an intelli‐
emergency call system, the same information is gent emergency call system and the eCall statu‐
conveyed to the appointed emergency call cen‐ tory emergency call system has the right to use
tre as is normally conveyed to the public rescue the on-board eCall system instead of the intelli‐
coordination centre by the eCall statutory emer‐ gent emergency call function.
gency call system. To request deactivation, please contact a Serv‐
Furthermore, the intelligent emergency call sys‐ ice Partner of the manufacturer or another quali‐
tem also conveys the following additional infor‐ fied Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
mation to an emergency call centre appointed by The eCall statutory emergency call system is al‐
the vehicle manufacturer and, where applicable, ways on standby in addition to the intelligent
to the public rescue coordination centre: emergency call system. The eCall statutory
▷ Accident data, for example the direction of emergency call system takes over the emer‐
the collision as detected by the vehicle sen‐ gency call function if the intelligent emergency
sors in order to facilitate the deployment call system is not functional for technical rea‐
plans of the rescue services. sons, for example if the emergency call centre
▷ Contact data, for example the telephone appointed by the vehicle manufacturer cannot be
number of the installed SIM card and the reached.
driver's telephone number, if available, so that The eCall statutory emergency call system uses
those involved in the accident can be contac‐ the infrastructure of the 112 public emergency
ted quickly if necessary. call number.
The system can be configured so that emer‐
Data storage gency calls are always made via the eCall statu‐
The data relating to an emergency call that has tory emergency call system and not via the intel‐
been triggered is saved in the vehicle. The data ligent emergency call system. Have the setting
contains information about the emergency call, configured by a Service Partner of the manufac‐
for example the place and time it was issued. turer or another qualified Service Partner or a
The emergency call centre saves audio record‐ specialist workshop.
ings of the emergency call.
Audio recordings of the customer are saved for Vehicle identification
24 hours, in case details of the emergency call
need to be analysed. After that, the audio record‐ number
ings are deleted. Audio recordings of the emer‐
gency call centre employee are saved for General
24 hours for quality assurance purposes.
Depending on the national-market version, the
vehicle identification number is located at differ‐
Disclosure of personal data ent positions in the vehicle. This chapter de‐
The data obtained in the context of an intelligent scribes all the positions that are possible for the
emergency call is only used to process the model range.
emergency call. If legally obliged to do so, the ve‐
hicle manufacturer will disclose the data it has
processed and, where applicable, still has saved.
18
Notes NOTES
Engine compartment Windscreen
The vehicle identification number is engraved in The vehicle identification number is additionally
the engine compartment, on the right-hand side located behind the windscreen.
of the vehicle.
iDrive
Right-hand side of type plate It is also possible to display the vehicle identifica‐
tion number via iDrive.
For further information:
Viewing the vehicle identification number and
software part number, see page 75.
The vehicle identification number is on the type

plate, on the right-hand side of the vehicle.
Left-hand side of type plate
The vehicle identification number is on the type

plate, on the left-hand side of the vehicle.
19
NOTES Owner's Handbook media
Owner's Handbook media

Vehicle equipment Owner's Handbook for the vehicle will contain
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐
cific and optional equipment available for the
model series. It may therefore describe equip‐
Printed Owner's Handbook
ment and functions which are not installed in
your vehicle, for example on account of the op‐ Principle
tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐ The printed Owner's Handbook describes all
cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ standard, country-specific and optional equip‐
tions and systems. Please comply with the ment available for the model series.
relevant laws and regulations when using the
corresponding functions and systems.
General
The Owner's Handbook for navigation, entertain‐
General ment and communication is available as a printed
book from Service.
Media overview Supplementary Owner's

Content from the Owner's Handbook can be ac‐ Handbooks
cessed in different formats. The following Own‐
Please also follow the supplementary Owner's
er's Handbook media formats are available:
Handbooks which are attached in addition to the
▷ Printed Owner's Handbook. on-board literature as necessary.
▷ Integrated Owner's Handbook in the vehicle.
Validity of Owner's Handbook Integrated Owner's

Handbook in the vehicle
Vehicle production
At the time of production in the factory, the prin‐
Principle
ted Owner's Handbook provides up-to-date in‐
formation. Updates following the copy deadline The integrated Owner's Handbook describes the
can result in differences between the printed specific equipment and functions present in the
Owner's Handbook and the integrated Owner's vehicle.
Handbook in the vehicle. The integrated Owner's Handbook can be dis‐
You will find notes on any updates in the appen‐ played on the control display.
dix of the printed Owner's Handbook for the ve‐
hicle. Selecting the Owner's Handbook
After a software update in the 1. Press the button.

vehicle 2. "CAR"
20
Owner's Handbook media NOTES
3. "Owner's Handbook" ▷ "Operating tips"

4. Select the required method of accessing the ▷ "Quick reference"
contents. ▷ "Chapters"
▷ "Quicklist"
Scrolling within the Owner's
Handbook 2. Press and hold the desired button
Turn the Controller until the next or previous until the bar shown on the Control Display
contents are displayed. has fully loaded.
Context-sensitive help Calling up

Press the appropriate button.
General
Owner's Handbook is displayed directly
The integrated Owner's Handbook can be called with the selected shortcut.
up from any menu. Depending on the selected
function, the associated description or main
menu of the integrated Owner's Handbook is
displayed.
Calling up when using iDrive

To switch from the function on the Control Dis‐
play directly to the Options menu:
1. Press the button.

2. "Help"
Calling up when a Check Control

message is displayed
To switch directly from the Check Control mes‐
sage on the Control Display:
"Owner's Handbook"
Functional bookmarks
General
Shortcuts to the Owner's Handbook can be
saved to functional bookmarks and called up di‐
rectly.
Saving
1. Select the required jump using iDrive:
▷ "Keyword search"
▷ "Picture search"
21
QUICK REFERENCE Getting in
Getting in
Opening and closing Central locking buttons
Overview
Buttons on the vehicle key
Central locking buttons.

1 To unlock
2 To lock
Locking
3 Unlocking the boot lid
Press the button with the front doors
4 Home lights
closed.
Unlocking the vehicle The fuel tank filler flap remains unlocked.
Press the button on the vehicle key. To unlock

Press the button.
Depending on the settings, only the driver's door
or all vehicle access points are unlocked.
If only the driver's door is unlocked, press the Comfort Access
button on the vehicle key again to unlock the
other vehicle access points.
Principle
This feature allows you to access the vehicle
Locking the vehicle
without having to operate the vehicle key.
1. Close the driver's door.
Simply having the vehicle key with you, for exam‐
ple in your trouser pocket, is sufficient.
2. Press the button on the vehicle key.
The vehicle automatically recognises the vehicle
All vehicle entrances are locked.
key when it is in the immediate vicinity or inside
the vehicle.
22
Getting in QUICK REFERENCE
Unlocking the vehicle ▷ Press and hold the button on the ve‐
hicle key for approximately 1 sec‐
ond.
If applicable, the doors are also unlocked.
Closing
Close the boot lid manually.
Convertible top
Fully grip the handle of a vehicle door. Overview

With manual transmission:
Locking the vehicle
With Steptronic transmission:

With your finger, touch the grooved area on the
handle of a closed vehicle door for approximately
1 second, without gripping the door handle.
Boot lid
Opening
Convertible top switch
Opening
Pull and hold the switch.
The windows are lowered and the convertible

▷ Unlock the vehicle, then press the button on top opens for as long as the switch is pulled.
the outside of the boot lid. After the convertible top has been completely
opened, the switch can be held or briefly pulled
again, to raise the windows again.
23
QUICK REFERENCE Getting in
Closing Driver's door

Push and hold the switch.
The windows are lowered, the convertible top

closes and the windows are raised again for as
long as the switch is pressed.
Displays, control functions

Around the steering wheel 1 Central locking system
2 Seats, comfort functions
3 Power window switches
4 Exterior mirror
5 Unlocking the boot lid
Switch cluster
1 Light switch element

2 Turn indicator, high-beam headlights
3 Instrument cluster
4 Wipers
Indicator and warning lamps

1 Selector lever
Instrument cluster 2 Controller
Indicator and warning lamps can illuminate in a 3 Convertible top
variety of combinations and colours.
4 Parking brake, Automatic Hold
When drive-ready state is switched on, the func‐
5 Driving Experience Control
tionality of some lights is checked and they illu‐
minate briefly. 6 Start/stop button
7 Assistance systems
24
Getting in QUICK REFERENCE
Button Function
To call up the previous screen.
To call up the Options menu.
Voice control
1 Gearshift lever Activating the voice control system

2 Convertible top
1. Press the button on the steering
3 Controller
wheel.
4 Parking brake
2. Wait for the acoustic signal.
5 Driving Experience Control
3. Say the command.
6 Start/stop button
This symbol indicates that the voice con‐
7 Assistance systems
trol system is active.
iDrive It is possible that no further spoken commands

are available for the function selected. In this
case, switch to iDrive to operate the function.
Principle
iDrive brings together the functions of a number Switching off the voice control system
of switches. These functions can be operated
using the Controller. Press the button on the steering wheel
or say ›Cancel‹.
Buttons on the Controller
trol system is deactivated.
Button Function
To call up the main menu.
To call up the Apps menu.
To call up the Media/Radio menu.
To call up the Communication menu.
To call up the navigation map.
To call up the destination entry menu

of the navigation system.
25
QUICK REFERENCE Adjustment and operation
Adjustment and operation

Seats, mirrors and steering To adjust the exterior mirrors
wheel
Manually adjustable seats
1 Adjusting
2 To select a mirror, automatic parking function
3 To fold in and out
1 Thigh support
2 Seat angle To adjust the steering wheel
3 Forward/back
Manual steering wheel adjustment
4 Lumbar support
5 Backrest width
6 Height
7 Backrest angle
Electrically adjustable seats
1. Fold the lever downwards.

2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seated position.
3. Swing the lever back up.
Memory function
1 Forward/back, height, seat angle
Principle
2 Backrest angle
The memory function enables the following set‐
3 Backrest width tings to be stored and retrieved when required:
4 Lumbar support ▷ Seat position.
▷ Exterior mirror position.
26
Adjustment and operation QUICK REFERENCE
▷ Height of the Head-Up Display. Navigation destination entry

Saving Entering the destination using the
1. Set the desired position. quick-search function
2. Press the button on the door. The 1. Press the button on the Controller.
lettering in the button is illuminated. 2. "Search"
3. Press the desired button 1 or 2 at the door 3. Enter at least two letters or characters.
while the lettering is illuminated. A signal
If applicable, the search term will be automati‐
sounds.
cally completed in grey text.
Retrieving settings Press the Controller or tilt it upwards to ac‐

cept the suggested search term.
Press the desired button 1 or 2.
4. Select symbol as appropriate.
The results are shown as a list.
Infotainment 5. "Search location": select search location if
applicable.
Depending on the national- 6. Tilt the Controller to the right.
market version: radio 7. Select the desired destination.
Connecting mobile telephone
General
Once the mobile telephone has been connected
in the vehicle, it can be operated using iDrive and
the buttons on the steering wheel.
Connecting the mobile telephone via

1 To change the entertainment source Bluetooth
2 Sound output on/off, volume 1. "COM"
3 Functional bookmarks 2. If applicable, set the following setting:
4 To change station/track "Telephone"
5 Traffic information 3. "Connect new telephone"
To change waveband 4. To perform other operations on the mobile
telephone; see the user manual of the mobile
telephone: for example finding/connecting
Bluetooth device or new device.
27
QUICK REFERENCE Adjustment and operation
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is shown 4. Enter the numbers.

on the display of the mobile telephone. Se‐ 5. Select the symbol. The call is made using
lect the vehicle's Bluetooth name. the mobile telephone to which the telephone
5. Depending on the mobile device, either a function is assigned.
control number is displayed, or you will have To make a call via the additional telephone:
to enter the control number yourself.
▷ Compare the control number shown on 1. Press the button.
the Control Display with the control num‐
2. "Call via"
ber on the device display.
Confirm the control number on the device
Apple CarPlay preparation
and on the Control Display.
▷ Enter the same control number on the de‐ Principle
vice and via iDrive then confirm.
CarPlay makes it possible to operate certain
The device is connected and displayed in the functions of a compatible Apple iPhone by Siri
device list. voice operation and using iDrive.
Telephony Operating requirements

▷ Compatible iPhone.
Accepting a call
iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, incoming
calls can be accepted in different ways. ▷ Corresponding mobile radio contract.
▷ Via iDrive: ▷ The data connection may need to be activa‐

ted on the smartphone.
"Accept"
▷ Bluetooth, WLAN and Siri voice operation are
▷ / activated on the iPhone.
Press the relevant button on the steering ▷ WLAN is activated in the vehicle.
wheel.
Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay
▷ Via the selection list in the instrument cluster:
1. "COM"
Select using the knurled wheel on the steer‐
ing wheel: "Accept" 2. "Mobile devices"
▷ Via the touchscreen: tap the corresponding 3. "New device"

entry on the Control Display. 4. "Phone calls and audio"
▷ By gestures: point towards the Control Dis‐ The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is shown
play using your index finger. on the Control Display.
5. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth
Dialling a number devices in the vicinity and select the vehicle.
1. "COM" A control number is displayed.
2. If necessary, "Telephone" 6. Compare the control number shown on the
3. "Dial number:" Control Display with the control number on
28
Adjustment and operation QUICK REFERENCE
the mobile device display, and confirm that

the two match.
7. Select CarPlay:
"Confirm note and connect with Apple
CarPlay"
29
QUICK REFERENCE On the move
On the move
Driving Steptronic transmission:
▷ By releasing the brake pedal.
Drive-ready state ▷ With Automatic Hold activated: press the ac‐

celerator pedal.
Switching on drive-ready state
Parking brake
Engaging
Pull the switch.
The LED on the switch and the indicator
1. Press the brake. lamp in the instrument cluster are illuminated.
2. With manual transmission: press the clutch
and engage neutral.
Releasing
3. Press the start/stop button.
With drive-ready state switched on:
Switching off drive-ready state Steptronic transmission: press the switch
Manual transmission: with the brakes applied or selector lever posi‐
tion P engaged.
1. Press the Start/Stop button when the vehicle
Manual transmission: press the button with the
is at standstill.
brakes applied.
The engine is switched off.
LED and indicator lamp turn off.
2. Engage first gear or reverse.
The parking brake is released.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Steptronic transmission:
Steptronic transmission: parking
1. With the vehicle at a standstill, engage selec‐ The parking brake is automatically applied when
tor lever position P. the vehicle is held by Automatic Hold and the
2. Press the start/stop button. drive-ready state is switched off or the vehicle is
exited.
The engine is switched off.
Manual transmission
Auto Start Stop function Shifting gears
The Auto Start Stop function switches the en‐
When shifting into a lower gear, high engine
gine off automatically at a standstill to save fuel.
speeds can damage the engine. There is a risk of
For driving off, the engine automatically starts
material damage. Push the shift lever to the right
under the following conditions:
while shifting into the 5th or 6th gear.
Manual transmission:
▷ By pressing the clutch pedal.
30
On the move QUICK REFERENCE
Reverse gear Cancelling the selector lever lock

Engage this position only when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary.
To overcome the resistance, move the shift lever
firmly to the left towards the left and engage the
reverse gear with a gear shift movement for‐
wards.
Steptronic transmission
Engaging selector lever positions D, Press the button.

N, R
Engaging P
Only engage selector lever position P when the
vehicle is stationary.
▷ D drive position.
▷ N neutral.
▷ R reverse.
With the driver's seat belt fastened, briefly press Press button P.
the selector lever in the desired direction, possi‐
bly overcoming a resistance point. Selector lever
returns to centre position in each case.
Steptronic transmission, sport
programme and manual
Apply the brakes until ready to drive off, other‐
wise the vehicle will move when a drive position operation
or reverse gear is selected.
A selector lever lock prevents inadvertently shift‐
ing to selector lever position R or inadvertently
shifting from selector lever position P.
Only engage selector lever position R when the
Activate sport programme/manual operation:

Press the selector lever out of selector lever po‐
sition D to the left.
31
Manual operation: High-beam headlights, headlight

▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐ flasher
wards.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever backwards.
Deactivate sport programme/manual operation:

Press the selector lever to the right.
Turn indicators, high-beam

headlights, headlight flasher
Turn indicator Push the lever forwards or pull it back.

▷ High-beam headlights on, arrow 1.
The high-beam headlights are illuminated
when the low-beam headlights are switched
on.
▷ High-beam headlights off/headlight flasher,
arrow 2.
Light and lighting

▷ On: press the lever beyond the resistance
point. Light functions
▷ Off: press the lever in the opposite direction
Symbol Function
beyond the resistance point.
▷ Triple turn signal: lightly tip the lever up or Rear fog light.
down.
▷ To indicate a turn briefly: press the lever as
Lights off.
far as the resistance point and hold it there
for as long as you wish to indicate a turn. Daytime running lights.
Side lights.
Automatic driving lights control.

Adaptive light functions.
Low-beam headlights.
Instrument lighting.
32
Symbol Function ▷ To flick-wipe: press the lever downwards

from the home position.
Parking light, right.
Rain sensor
Parking light, left.
Activating/deactivating
Wiper system
Switching the wipers on/off and

flick-wiping
Switching on
To activate: press the lever up once from its

home position, arrow 1.
To deactivate: press the lever back to the home
position.
To adjust the sensitivity
Press the lever upwards to the desired position.

▷ Rest position of the wipers: position 0.
▷ Rain sensor: position 1.
▷ Normal wiper speed: position 2.
▷ Fast wiper speed: position 3.
Switching off and flick-wiping

Turn the knurled wheel on the wiper lever.
Press the lever down.

▷ To switch off: press the lever downwards to
the home position.
33
To clean the windscreen Automatic air conditioning with

extended functionality
Button Function
Temperature.
Recirculated-air mode.
Maximum cooling.
Pull the wiper lever.
AUTO programme.
Air conditioning Air flow, manual.

Switch off.
Automatic air conditioning Air distribution, manual.
Button Function
Defrost the windscreen and re‐
Temperature. move condensation.
Rear window heating.

Seat heating.
Maximum cooling.
Air-conditioning mode.
AUTO programme.
To call up the air conditioning
menu.
Air distribution, manual.
For the following settings, for ex‐
ample: upper body temperature
Switch off. adjustment, independent venti‐
lation.
move condensation.
Seat heating.
Air-conditioning mode.
Air flow, manual.
34
Pit stop After adjusting the tyre inflation

pressure
For runflat indicator RPA:
Refuelling
Reinitialise the runflat indicator RPA.
Fuel tank cap With the Tyre Pressure Monitor:
1. To open the fuel tank filler flap, push on the The corrected tyre inflation pressures are applied
upper edge, arrow. The fuel tank filler flap automatically. Make sure that the correct tyre
opens. settings have been made.
For tyres that cannot be found in the tyre infla‐
tion pressure information on the control display,
reset the Tyre Pressure Monitor.
Checking the tyre inflation pressure

Check regularly and adjust as necessary:
▷ At least twice a month.
▷ Before a long journey.
2. Turn the fuel tank cap anticlockwise.

Electronic oil measurement
3. Place the fuel tank cap in the holder on the
fuel tank filler flap. Operating requirements
A current measurement is available after approxi‐
Petrol
mately 30 minutes of normal driving with the in‐
For optimal fuel consumption, the petrol should ternal combustion engine running.
be sulphur-free or have a low sulphur content.
Fuels labelled on the pump as containing metal Displaying the engine oil level
must not be used. 1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
Wheels and tyres
3. "Engine oil level"
Tyre inflation pressure information Different messages are shown on the Control
Display, depending on the engine oil level. Pay
attention to these messages.
Adding engine oil
General
Safely stop the vehicle and switch off drive-ready
state before topping up with engine oil.
The tyre inflation pressure inscriptions can be

found on the tyre pressure plate on the door pil‐
lar.
35
Adding engine oil ConnectedDrive
Concierge Service
The Concierge Service provides information
about hotels, restaurants etc. and can send an
SMS with the required information to the vehicle.
Addresses can also be sent directly to the navi‐
gation system.
1. "COM"
2. "BMW Assistance"
Do not top up engine oil unless a message is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster. 3. Select the entry for the Concierge Service if
applicable.
Note the top-up quantity in the message. A voice connection to the Concierge Service is
Do not add too much engine oil. established.
Note recommended engine oil types.
Teleservices
Teleservices are services that help to keep the
Breakdown Assist vehicle mobile.
Teleservices may include the following services:
Hazard warning lights ▷ BMW Roadside Assistance.
▷ BMW Accident Assistance.
▷ Teleservice Call.
▷ Teleservice Report.
▷ Teleservice Battery Guard.
▷ Your Service Partner.
▷ Online logbook.
The button is located in the centre console.
Help in case of a breakdown
BMW Emergency Service

1. "APPS"
2. "Installed apps"
3. "BMW Assistance"
4. If necessary, "BMW Roadside Assistance"
A voice connection is established.
36
37
CONTROLS Driving area
Driving area
Vehicle equipment your vehicle, for example on account of the op‐
tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐
cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐
tions and systems. Please comply with the
Around the steering wheel
1 Power window switches 103 To unlock 93
2 Exterior mirror operation 116 To lock 93

3 Unlocking the boot lid 97
5 Seat comfort functions
4 Central locking system Memory function 118
6 Lights
38
Driving area CONTROLS
Rear fog light 174 Manual Speed Limiter 202
Light switch 169 Depending on the equipment ver‐

sion:
Cruise Control on/off 204
Lights off
Daytime running lights 171
Side lights 170 Active Cruise Control on/off 207
Automatic driving lights con‐ Cruise Control: to store a speed

trol 169
Speed Limit Assist: accept the sug‐
Adaptive light functions 172 gested speed 214
High-beam assistance 172 Interrupting Cruise Control
Low-beam headlights 170
Resuming Cruise Control

Instrument lighting 174
Active Cruise Control: to increase

Right parking light 170 the distance
Active Cruise Control: to reduce the

Left parking light 170 distance
Rocker switch for Cruise Control

7 Steering-column lever, left 10 Instrument cluster 150
Turn indicator 137 11 Buttons on steering wheel, right
Selection lists 164
High-beam headlights, headlight
flasher 138
Volume, see Owner's Handbook for
High-beam assistance 172 Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐
munication 6
Voice control system 54
Full Black Panel Display: widg‐
ets 151
Journey data 164 Telephone, see Owner's Handbook
for Navigation, Entertainment,
8 Shift paddles 142 Communication 6
9 Buttons on steering wheel, left Knurled wheel for selection lists 164
12 Steering-column lever, right
39
Wipers 138 14 Steering wheel heating 118
Rain sensor 138 15 To adjust the steering wheel 118

16 Glove compartment 257
Cleaning windscreen and head‐ 17 To release the bonnet 305
lights 138
13 Horn, entire area
Around the centre console
1 Control Display 49 6 Radio/multimedia, see Owner's Handbook for

2 Hazard warning lights 322 Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐
tion 6
7 Controller with buttons 49
Intelligent Safety 181
8 To open and close the convertible
top 104
3 Ventilation 244
4 Glove compartment 258
5 Automatic air conditioning 239
40
Driving area CONTROLS
9 Parking brake 134 ECO PRO drive mode
Automatic Hold 135 ADAPTIVE drive mode
10 Driving Experience Control 147 11 To switch drive-ready state on/

SPORT drive mode off 131
COMFORT drive mode 12 Auto Start Stop function 131
Park Distance Control, PDC 216

Rear-view camera 221
Crossing traffic warning 231
Park Assistant 224
Dynamic Stability Control,
DSC 199
13 Steptronic transmission selector lever 142
41
Around the headliner
1 Emergency call, SOS 324 3 Reading lights 175
2 Front passenger airbag indicator 4 Interior light 175

lamp 180
42
Vehicle operating state CONTROLS
Vehicle operating state

Vehicle equipment Safety notes
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ WARNING

An unsecured vehicle can start moving and roll‐
ing away. There is a risk of accident. Before
leaving the vehicle, secure it to prevent it from
your vehicle, for example on account of the op‐
rolling away.
cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ Observe the following to ensure that the vehi‐
tions and systems. Please comply with the cle is secured against rolling away:
relevant laws and regulations when using the ▷ Apply the parking brake.
corresponding functions and systems. ▷ Turn the front wheels towards the kerb on
upward or downward gradients.
General ▷ Additionally secure the vehicle on upward

or downward gradients, for example with a
chock.
Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in one
of the three states:
▷ Rest state. WARNING
▷ Standby state. Unsupervised children or pets in the vehicle
▷ Drive-ready state. can set the vehicle in motion and endanger
themselves or other road users, for example by
the following actions:
Rest state ▷ Pressing the start/stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
Principle ▷ Opening and closing doors or windows.
If the vehicle is in rest state, it is switched off. All
▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
electrical consumers are deactivated.
▷ Operating vehicle equipment.
General There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not
leave children or pets unsupervised in the vehi‐
The vehicle is in rest state before you open it
cle. When leaving the vehicle, take the vehicle
from outside and once you have left the vehicle
key with you and lock the vehicle.
and locked it.
Automatic rest state

The vehicle switches automatically to rest state
under the following conditions:
▷ After a few minutes, if no operation is per‐
formed on the vehicle.
43
CONTROLS Vehicle operating state
▷ When the battery state of charge is low. General

▷ When leaving the vehicle, if one of the front The vehicle switches to standby state after the
doors is opened, depending on the iDrive front doors are opened from the outside.
setting.
Rest state is not established automatically during Display in the instrument cluster
a telephone call.
OFF is shown in the instrument
cluster. The drive is switched off
Establishing rest state on and standby state switched on.
opening the front doors
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Doors/Vehicle access" Drive-ready state
4. "Switch off after door opening"
Principle
Manual rest state
Switching on drive-ready state corresponds to
To establish rest state in the vehicle at the end of starting the engine.
a journey:
General
Some functions, for example Dynamic Stability
Control DSC, can only be operated when drive-
ready state is switched on.
Safety notes
DANGER
Press and hold the button, until A blocked exhaust pipe or inadequate ventila‐
the OFF display on the instru‐ tion can allow harmful exhaust fumes to enter
ment cluster turns off. the vehicle. The exhaust fumes contain pollu‐
tants which are colourless and odourless. In en‐
closed spaces, exhaust fumes can also build up
outside the vehicle. There is a risk of death.
Keep the exhaust pipe clear and ensure suffi‐
Standby state cient ventilation.
Principle
WARNING
When standby state is activated, most functions
can be operated while the vehicle is still station‐ An unsecured vehicle can start moving and roll‐
ary. Any desired settings can be performed. ing away. There is a risk of accident. Before
rolling away.
44
Vehicle operating state CONTROLS
Observe the following to ensure that the vehi‐ The starting process is activated automatically
cle is secured against rolling away: for a short time and stops as soon as the engine
▷ Apply the parking brake. starts.
▷ Turn the front wheels towards the kerb on Most of the indicator and warning lamps in the
upward or downward gradients. instrument cluster are illuminated for different
lengths of time.
▷ Additionally secure the vehicle on upward
chock.
Petrol engine
Depending on the engine version, full drive
power may only be available approx. 30 seconds
NOTE after starting the engine. In this case, the vehicle
will not accelerate in the usual way.
Repeated attempts to start the vehicle or start‐
ing it several times in quick succession result in
unburned or insufficiently burned fuel. The cat‐ Display in the instrument cluster
alytic converter can overheat. There is a risk of When drive-ready state is switched on, the revo‐
material damage. Avoid repeatedly starting in lution counter shows the current engine speed.
quick succession.
Switching off drive-ready state
Switching on drive-ready state Steptronic transmission
1. With the vehicle at a standstill, engage selec‐
Principle tor lever position P.
The drive-ready state is switched 2. Press the start/stop button.
on using the start/stop button.
The engine is switched off. The vehicle
changes to standby state.
Steptronic transmission Manual transmission

1. Depress the brake pedal. 1. Press the Start/Stop button when the vehicle
is at standstill.
The engine is switched off. The vehicle
The starting process is activated automatically
changes to standby state.
for a short time and stops as soon as the engine
starts. 2. Engage first gear or reverse.
Most of the indicator and warning lamps in the 3. Apply the parking brake.
instrument cluster are illuminated for different
lengths of time.
Manual gearbox
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the clutch and engage idle position.
45
CONTROLS iDrive
iDrive
Vehicle equipment Entry and display
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Main menu

model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ General
ment and functions which are not installed in The main menu is divided into two areas. The
your vehicle, for example on account of the op‐ left area contains menu items that can be used
tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐ to call up all the iDrive functions. The right area
cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ contains widgets that provide quick access to
tions and systems. Please comply with the certain functions.
Operating concept
Principle
iDrive comprises a wide range of functions.
These functions can be operated using the Con‐
troller and, depending on the equipment, the
touchscreen or the voice control system. Media/Radio
All of the entertainment system functions, for
Safety note example radio stations, connection with external
devices.
WARNING
Communication
Operating integrated information systems and
Telephone and message functions, e-mail
communication devices during a journey may
and calendar, as well as the connection and
distract you from the road. You could lose con‐
management of mobile devices such as smart‐
trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
phones.
Only operate the systems or devices if the traf‐
fic conditions allow you to do so. Stop if neces‐
Navigation
sary and operate the systems or devices with
the vehicle at a standstill. Access to navigation system, destination en‐
try and traffic information. Configurable map
views as well as other functions such as Points of
Interest and avoid areas.
My vehicle
Information on vehicle status and journeys.
Access to the integrated Owner's Handbook as
46
iDrive CONTROLS
well as management of driver profiles and setting ▷ Only letters and characters for which data is
options for the vehicle and iDrive. available are offered when making an entry.
▷ Destination search: place names can be en‐
Apps tered in all languages available in iDrive.
Management of apps, access to apps as well
as vehicle functions. Additional apps can be ob‐ Enabling/disabling functions
tained from the BMW Store. Some menu items are preceded by a checkbox.
The box indicates whether the function is ena‐
Widgets bled or disabled. Selecting the menu item ena‐
Widgets provide quick access to fre‐ bles or disables the function.
quently used functions. The defined widgets dis‐ Function is enabled.
play dynamic content – for example, the naviga‐
tion map – and also serve as buttons. Function is disabled.
Letters and numbers Status information

Letters and numbers can be selected when the General
destination is entered, for example.
The status field is located in the top area of the
Letters and numbers can be entered using the Control Display. Status information is displayed
Controller and, depending on the vehicle equip‐ in the form of symbols.
ment, using the touchscreen or voice control
system. The keyboard display changes automati‐ Symbols for telephone
cally.
Symbol Function Symbol Meaning
Switch between upper and Incoming or outgoing call.

lower case.
Missed call.
To enter a space.
Reception level of mobile telephone
Switch between languages. network.
To use the voice control. Searching for network.
To confirm your entry. No mobile telephone network avail‐

able.
Move the entry area to the left
or right. Mobile telephone charge level is crit‐
ically low.
Entry comparison Data transfer not possible.
When entering names and addresses, the selec‐ Roaming active.
tion is gradually narrowed down and possibly
supplemented with every subsequent letter and Location active.
character entered.
Text message received.
Inputs are continuously compared with the data
saved in the vehicle. Message received.
47
CONTROLS iDrive
Symbol Meaning shortcuts to the menu or pages of the integrated

Owner's Handbook, can be saved to functional
Reminder. bookmarks and called up directly.
Sending not possible. The settings are saved for the current driver pro‐
file.
Symbols for entertainment
Overview
Symbol Meaning
Bluetooth audio.
USB device.
Connected Music.
WLAN.
Apple CarPlay.
Functional bookmarks
Other symbols
Symbol Meaning
Saving a function
Check Control message. A function can be saved to a functional book‐
Sound output active. mark. A button that has already been assigned a
function can be overwritten with a different func‐
Sound output deactivated. tion.
Voice control system active. 1. Select function via iDrive, e.g. radio station.
Current vehicle position.
2. Press and hold the desired button
Traffic information. until the bar shown on the Control Display
has fully loaded.
Driver profile.
Notifications. Performing a function

Service requirements. Press the button.
Information.
The function is carried out immediately. If you
Stop. have selected a telephone number for example,
the connection will also be established.
Data protection.
Displaying the button assignment
Functional bookmarks Touch the buttons with your finger. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.
General The button assignment is displayed in the upper
iDrive functions, for example radio stations, navi‐ area of the control display.
gation destinations, telephone numbers and
48
iDrive CONTROLS
Removing all button assignments Switching on/off automatically

It is possible to remove the assignments of all The control display is switched on automatically
buttons. when the vehicle is unlocked or as soon as the
control display is required for operation.
1. Press and hold buttons 1 and 8 simultane‐
ously. In certain situations, the Control Display is
switched off automatically, for example if no op‐
2. "OK"
eration is performed on the vehicle for several
minutes.
Control Display and Switching on/off manually
Controller The Control Display can also be switched off
manually.
Principle 1. Tilt the Controller up.
The iDrive functions are shown on the Control
2. "Screen off"
Display. The Control Display can be operated us‐
ing the Controller, touchpad and touch screen. Press the Controller or any button on the Con‐
troller to switch it back on again.
Overview
System limits
If the Control Display is exposed to very high
temperatures, for example because of strong
sunlight, the brightness may be reduced and the
Control Display may even switch itself off. Nor‐
mal functions will be restored when the tempera‐
ture is reduced, for example by shading or using
the air conditioning system.
Controller
1 Control Display with touchscreen
2 Controller with buttons and touchpad General
The buttons can be used to call up menus di‐
Control Display rectly. The Controller can be used to select
menu items and perform settings.
Safety note Some of the functions of the iDrive can be oper‐
ated with the touchpad of the Controller.
NOTE
Operation
Objects located in front of the Control Display
▷ Turn to switch between menu items, for ex‐
may slip and damage the Control Display.
ample.
There is a risk of material damage. Do not place
objects in front of the Control Display.
49
CONTROLS iDrive
Button Function
To call up the navigation map.
To call up the destination entry menu

of the navigation system.
To call up the previous screen.
▷ Press to select a menu item, for example. To call up the Options menu.
Operation using the

Controller
Calling up the main menu
Press the button.
▷ Tilt in four directions to switch between

screens, for example.
The main menu is displayed.
Buttons on the Controller Selecting menu
Button Function Selecting menu items

1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu
To call up the main menu.
item is highlighted.
2. Press the Controller.
To call up the Apps menu.
Selecting widgets
To call up the Media/Radio menu. 1. Tilt the Controller to the right in the main
menu.
To call up the Communication menu. 2. Turn the Controller until the desired widget is
selected.
50
iDrive CONTROLS
3. Press the Controller. Switching between screens

It is also possible to select widgets in the instru‐ After a menu item has been selected, for exam‐
ment cluster. ple "Settings", a new screen is displayed.
▷ Tilt the Controller to the left.
Adapting the menu
The current screen is closed and the previ‐
ous screen is displayed.
Adapting widgets
You can adapt the widgets in the main menu. It is ▷ Press the button.
possible to create multiple pages with widgets
The previous screen is opened again.
and switch between the pages. It is only possible
to make adaptations with the vehicle at a stand‐ ▷ Tilt the Controller to the right.
still. The new screen is opened.
1. Select the required page in the main menu. It An arrow indicates that further screens can be
is only possible to adapt the page that is cur‐ called up.
rently selected.
2. Tilt the Controller up. Calling up the Options menu
3. "Adjust main menu" Press the button.
4. Select the desired adaptation:
The "Options" menu is displayed.
▷ Select the symbol and the desired
widget: add new widget. The menu consists of various areas, such as:
The desired widget will be added at the ▷ "MEDIA": operating options for the selected
relevant position. It is possible to display a main menu.
maximum of four widgets per page. ▷ "Help": help for selected menu.
▷ Select the symbol: delete the selected ▷ "Screen off": system settings.
widget.
▷ Add a new page: "Add page". Entering letters and numbers
▷ Delete the selected page: "Delete page".
Entry
▷ Adapt the widget content: select the
widget. 1. Turn the Controller: to select a letter or num‐
ber.
5. "Done"
2. : to confirm your entry.
Adapting the content
Deleting
Depending on the equipment, the content of the
"MEDIA", "COM" and "NAV" menus can be
Symbol Function
adapted, for example to remove the entries for
unused functions from the menu. Press the Controller: to delete a let‐
ter or number.
1. Select menu.
2. "Personalise menu" Press and hold the Controller: to de‐
3. Select the desired setting. lete all letters or numbers.
51
CONTROLS iDrive
Using alphabetical lists Entering special characters

For alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries,
the letters for which entries exist can be dis‐ Entry Operation
played in a letter field. To delete a char‐ Swipe to the left on the
1. Turn the Controller quickly to the left or right. acter. touchpad.
2. Select the initial letter of the desired entry. To enter a space. From the centre of the
The first entry for the selected letter is dis‐ touchpad, swipe to the
played in the list. right.
To enter a hy‐ At the top of the touchpad,

phen. swipe to the right.
Operation via touchpad
To enter an un‐ At the bottom of the
derscore. touchpad, swipe to the
General
right.
Some of the functions of the iDrive can be oper‐
ated with the touchpad of the Controller.
Operating map
Selecting functions The map of the navigation system can be moved
using the touchpad.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings" Function Operation
3. "General settings" To move the map. Swipe in the appropriate
4. "Touchpad" direction.
5. Select the desired setting: To enlarge/reduce On the touchpad, pinch
▷ "Character input": to enter letters and the map. together or move apart
numbers. your fingers.
▷ "Map": to operate the map. To display the Tap once.
▷ "Search fields": to write letters without se‐ menu.
lecting the list field.
▷ "Audio confirmation": to have the entered
letters and numbers read out. Operation by touchscreen
Entering letters and numbers General
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on the The Control Display is equipped with a touch‐
Control Display. screen.
▷ Always enter associated characters, for ex‐ It is possible to tap menu items and widgets.
ample accents or dots, so that the letter can Touch the touchscreen with your fingers. Do not
be clearly identified. use any objects.
▷ The input options depend on the language
that has been set. You may need to enter Calling up the main menu
special characters using the Controller. Tap the symbol.
52
iDrive CONTROLS
▷ To hide the display bar, pull up the display bar

at the top edge of the screen.
Switching between screens

After a menu item has been selected, a new
screen is displayed.
An arrow indicates that further screens can be
called up.
The main menu is displayed. ▷ Swipe to the left.

▷ Tap the arrow.
Adapting widgets The new screen is opened.
You can adapt the widgets in the main menu. It is
possible to create multiple pages with widgets Entering letters and numbers
and switch between the pages. It is only possible
to make adaptations with the vehicle at a stand‐ Entry
still. 1. Depending on the equipment, tap the
1. Select the required page in the main menu. It symbol on the touchscreen or a keyboard will
is only possible to adapt the page that is cur‐ appear on the control display when you ap‐
rently selected. proach the touchscreen.
2. Tap the symbol in the main menu. 2. Enter the required letters and numbers.
3. Select the desired adaptation:
Deleting
▷ Tap the symbol and select the desired
widget: add new widget.
Symbol Function
The desired widget will be added at the
relevant position. It is possible to display a Tap the symbol: to delete letter or
maximum of four widgets per page. number.
▷ Tap the symbol: delete selected Tap and hold the symbol: to delete
widget. all letters or numbers.
▷ Add a new page: tap "Add page".
▷ Delete the selected page: tap "Delete Operating the map
page". The navigation map can be moved via the touch‐
▷ Adapt the content of the widget: tap the screen.
centre of the widget.
Function Operation
4. Tap "Done".
To move the map. Swipe in the appropriate
direction.
Showing/hiding the display bar
In the top part of the control display, it is possible To enlarge/reduce Pinch together or move
to show or hide a display bar with additional func‐ the map. apart your fingers.
tions.
To display the menu. Tap once.
▷ To show the display bar, pull down the dis‐
play bar at the top edge of the screen.
53
CONTROLS iDrive
Operation via voice control Then say the command. It is possible that no fur‐
ther spoken commands are available for the
function selected. In this case, switch to iDrive to
Principle operate the function.
The voice activation system can be used to op‐ Voice control can be interrupted:
erate functions with spoken commands. The
system provides spoken announcements to as‐ ▷ Press the button on the steering
sist you with input. wheel again.
The voice control system and the feedback it ▷ ›Cancel‹
provides are not a substitute for the printed or
integrated Owner's Handbook. This symbol indicates that the voice con‐
trol system is deactivated.
General
▷ Functions that can only be used when the ve‐ Button on the steering wheel
hicle is stationary can only be operated via
the voice control system to a limited extent. 1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
▷ The system includes special microphones on
the driver side and the front passenger side. 2. Wait for the acoustic signal.
▷ ›...‹ indicates commands for the voice control 3. Say the command.
system.
Wake word
Operating requirements
General
▷ A language must be set using iDrive that is
supported by the voice control system. Saying the wake word ›Hello BMW‹ or the cus‐
tomised wake word starts the system.
To select the language, see page 65.
▷ Always say the commands in the language of Preset wake word
the voice control system.
The preset wake word "Hello BMW" can be acti‐
vated and deactivated.
Activating the voice control
›Hello BMW‹ activates the preset and personal
system activation word.
General 1. "CAR"
Voice control can be activated in various ways: 2. "Settings"
3. "General settings"
▷ Press the button on the steering 4. "Voice control"
wheel.
5. "Say "Hello BMW" for activation"
▷ Say the wake word ›Hello BMW‹ or the per‐
sonalised wake word.
▷ Active speech processing.
trol system is active.
54
iDrive CONTROLS
Personalised wake word Commands and numbers should be spoken flu‐

A personalised wake word can be set in addition ently, with the usual emphasis and at a normal
to the preset wake word "Hello BMW". volume and speed.
The voice recognition status is displayed in the
1. "CAR"
upper area of the Control Display.
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings" Functional examples
4. "Voice control"
Menu items
5. "Personal activation word"
The commands for the menu items are spoken
6. "Start recording"
in the same way as they are selected using the
For the "Start recording" option, offboard Controller.
voice processing must be available and acti‐
vated. Alternatively, the personal wake word
can be entered using the Controller.
wheel.
7. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
2. ›MEDIA‹
play.
3. ›Saved stations‹
Active speech processing The saved stations are displayed on the Control
Display.
General
Active speech processing recognises keywords Navigation
that are said inside the vehicle. If, for example, The voice control system can be used to enter
the name of a town/city is mentioned, relevant destinations in the navigation. It is also possible
navigation information is shown on the Control to state Points of Interest or have traffic reports
Display. read aloud.
▷ ›Drive me to 1 High Street in Manchester‹
▷ ›Take me home‹
1. "CAR"
▷ ›Are there any traffic messages‹
2. "Settings"
3. "General settings" Communication
4. "Voice control" When a mobile phone is connected, it is possible
5. "Active speech processing" to start calls or send short messages, for exam‐
ple, using the voice control system.
Possible commands ▷ ›Call John Smith on the mobile phone‹
▷ ›Dial the number 0370 505 0160‹
General ▷ ›New text message to John Smith: I'm on my
Most of the contents on the Control Display can way‹
be said as commands; for example, menu items
or list entries. When doing this, say the list en‐ Media and radio
tries as they are shown in the list. Most radio functions can be operated via the
voice control system.
▷ ›Switch on music‹
55
CONTROLS iDrive
▷ ›Music off‹ 5. "Length of answers"

▷ ›Next track‹ 6. Select the desired setting.
Air conditioning Speaking during voice output

Most air conditioning functions can be operated It is possible to answer while the voice control
by voice commands. system is querying your previous spoken instruc‐
▷ ›Activate climate control‹ tion. The function can be deactivated if the quer‐
ies are frequently cancelled inadvertently, for ex‐
▷ ›Deactivate air recirculation‹
ample due to background noise or conversations
▷ ›Temperature [...] at ...‹ in the vehicle.
Help with the voice control system 1. "CAR"

▷ ›Voice commands‹: to have voice command 2. "Settings"
options read aloud. 3. "General settings"
▷ ›General information on voice control‹: to have 4. "Voice control"
information about the voice control system 5. "Speaking during voice output"
read aloud.
▷ ›Help‹: to have help on the current menu read Online speech processing
aloud. Online speech processing enables use of the
dictation function, facilitates the natural input of
Information for emergency calls destinations and improves the quality of voice
The voice control system should not be used for recognition. To use the function, data is sent
emergency calls. Under stress, a person's across an encrypted connection to a service pro‐
speech and voice pitch can change. This could vider and stored locally there.
unnecessarily delay connection of your call.
1. "CAR"
Instead, use the SOS button located near the
2. "Settings"
rear-view mirror.
4. "Voice control"
Emergency call, see page 324.
5. "Online speech processing"
Settings
Adjusting the volume
Selecting the speech dialogue Turn the volume knob during the spoken instruc‐
You can select whether the system uses the tions until the desired volume is obtained.
standard dialogue or the short variant. ▷ The volume setting is retained even if you
If the short variant is selected, the system an‐ change the volume of other audio sources.
nouncements are played in shortened form. ▷ The volume setting is saved for the current
driver profile.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Voice control"
56
iDrive CONTROLS
Using the voice control system Activation in the BMW Connected

on the smartphone app
Depending on the device, a smartphone connec‐ Systems from third-party providers are set up in
ted to the vehicle can be operated via voice con‐ the BMW Connected app.
trol. Follow the instructions in the app.
This requires voice control to be activated on the
smartphone. Activation in the vehicle
Authorisation to use the voice system needs to
1. Press and hold the button on the be provided before the start of each journey.
steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.
1. Authorise voice systems from third-party pro‐
Voice control on the smartphone is activated. viders:
▷ Connect the smartphone to the vehicle
2. Release the button. via Bluetooth.
If activation is successful, a confirmation ap‐ ▷ Select the appropriate driver profile.
pears on the Control Display.
Driver profiles, see page 69.
Voice systems from third-party

providers wheel and wait for the acoustic signal.
3. Say the specific activation word from the
Principle
third-party provider and the required com‐
Some third-party providers make digital voice mand.
systems available. Supported voice systems can
Information about the active function appears
be used in the vehicle.
on the Control Display.
General
Activating/deactivating the specific
Some functions may only work to a limited extent activation word
in the vehicle to ensure they do not create a
The specific activation word of the third-party
safety risk when driving.
provider can be activated or deactivated in addi‐
tion to the activation word of the voice control
system.
▷ Connected Voice Services acquired via the
ConnectedDrive Store. 1. "APPS"
▷ The same ConnectedDrive account is used 2. "Installed apps"
in the vehicle and in the BMW Connected 3. "Personal assistant"
app. 4. "Voice control"
▷ Vehicle added in the BMW Connected app. 5. "Activation word"
▷ Third-party provider account and BMW ac‐ 6. "Activation by speech"
count linked in the BMW Connected app.
7. Select the desired setting.
▷ Smartphone connected to the vehicle via
Bluetooth.
57
CONTROLS iDrive
Malfunction Not all the functions described are available in

In the event of a malfunction, switch drive-ready full.
state off and on again. ▷ With active driver profile: this version can be
used in various vehicles and can be personal‐
System limits ised. All the functions described are available
in full.
▷ Certain noises may be detected and could re‐
sult in problems. Keep doors, windows and
the convertible top closed. Operating requirements
▷ Noise from passengers or the rear bench Make the following settings for the full range of
may interfere with the system. Avoid back‐ functions:
ground noise in the vehicle while you are ▷ The driver profile is activated.
speaking. ▷ Corresponding ConnectedDrive Services
▷ Strong dialects may prevent voice recognition have been purchased via the ConnectedDrive
from working properly. Speak loudly and Store.
clearly. ▷ Registered in the ConnectedDrive Store.
▷ "Online speech processing" is activated.
BMW Intelligent Personal ▷ "Synchronise driver profile" is activated under
"Personalisation".
Assistant Data protection, see page 68.
▷ All settings are activated under "BMW
Principle ConnectedDrive".
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant expands the Data protection, see page 68.
voice control system to include intelligent func‐
tions and improves interaction in the vehicle.
Functional example
General 1. Say the wake word ›Hello BMW‹ or the per‐
sonalised wake word.
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is available
depending on the national-market version. The 2. ›Is my tyre pressure still OK?‹
Personal Assistant is operated using spoken The Personal Assistant provides information
commands. Voice control is supplemented with about the tyre inflation pressure.
personalised recommendations and messages,
as well as automated habits. Settings
The Personal Assistant is connected to other
digital services such as the Concierge Service Displaying notifications
and is continually being developed. An active
driver profile is required to access the full scope General
of functions. Depending on the situation, various states can
There are two versions of BMW Intelligent Per‐ be activated.
sonal Assistant:
▷ In the guest profile: this version is linked to a
single vehicle and cannot be personalised.
58
iDrive CONTROLS
State Description Operating requirements

▷ The Experience Modes app is installed in the
"Do not Incoming calls and some
vehicle.
disturb" messages are not displayed.
▷ The drive-ready state is switched on.
"Passenger on Private information such as
board" the sender and content of the Selecting a mode
e-mails is not displayed.
1. "CAR"
2. "Experience Modes"
3. Select the required mode.
1. "APPS"
2. "Installed apps" Deactivating
3. "Personal assistant" 1. "CAR"
4. "Notification display" 2. "Experience Modes"
5. Select the desired setting. 3. "End"
Automating habits Adapting the mode

1. "CAR"
General
2. "Experience Modes"
The Personal Assistant is able to learn habits; for
3. Select the required mode.
example, automatically activating the seat heat‐
ing once a certain outside temperature is 4. "Settings"
reached. This involves creating rules that can be 5. Confirm the desired setting.
activated and deactivated at any time.
Caring Car
Creating rules
1. "APPS" General
2. "Installed apps" A short program harmonises various vehicle
3. "Personal assistant" functions in the interior with one another for the
driver. A program lasts for 3 minutes.
4. "Automate habits"
5. Select the desired setting. Activating/deactivating
1. "CAR"
Functions 2. "Caring Car"
Experience Modes 3. Select the desired channel.

The program can be ended prematurely:
General "End programme"
Experience Modes combine a range of vehicle
functions in the interior into an overall experi‐ Connected Command
ence. Selecting a mode harmonises the ambient
light and seat climate control with one another, General
for example. Connected Command allows passengers to con‐
trol various functions in the vehicle and obtain in‐
59
CONTROLS iDrive
formation about the journey using a smartphone

and the BMW Connected app.
▷ The smartphone is connected to the vehicle
via Bluetooth and WLAN.
▷ The BMW Connected app is installed on the
smartphone.
Managing rights
1. "COM"
2. "Mobile devices"
3. Select the required setting for the corre‐
sponding device.
Owner's Handbook by voice control
Principle
It is possible to ask simple questions about the
vehicle functions and about operating the vehi‐
cle.
General
The voice control system and the feedback it
provides are not a substitute for the printed or
integrated Owner's Handbook. The voice recog‐
nition function and the quality of the feedback
may vary.
The system support questions starting with
"How" or "What".
Functional example
1. ›Hello BMW‹
2. ›How do you disable the front passenger
airbag‹
The voice control system provides feedback. If
applicable, the section of the integrated Owner's
Handbook is displayed on the Control Display
while at a standstill.
60
BMW Remote Software Upgrade CONTROLS
BMW Remote Software Upgrade

Vehicle equipment Validity of Owner's Handbook
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Vehicle production

cific and optional equipment available for the At the time of production in the factory, the prin‐
model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ ted Owner's Handbook provides up-to-date in‐
ment and functions which are not installed in formation.
tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐ After a software update in the
cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ vehicle
Owner's Handbook for the vehicle will contain
BMW Remote Software
Upgrade An active ConnectedDrive contract is required in
order to use the Remote Software Upgrade.
Principle
The Remote Software Upgrade can be used to Version information
update the vehicle software. The Remote Soft‐
ware Upgrade provides new functions, functional General
enhancements or quality improvements. The version information describes the updates
contained in the Remote Software Upgrade. The
General version information can be shown on the Control
BMW recommends carrying out the Remote Display during the download and following suc‐
Software Upgrade as soon as it becomes avail‐ cessful completion of the installation. The infor‐
able. mation is available at all times in the Connected‐
The data for the Remote Software Upgrade is Drive customer portal.
automatically downloaded to the vehicle when Register with the ConnectedDrive customer por‐
available. tal on the Internet at:
For safety reasons, it is only possible to install www.bmw-connecteddrive.com.
the downloaded upgrade while at a standstill.
The installation will not begin until it has been Displaying the version information
confirmed at the vehicle. 1. "CAR"
▷ Installation can take around 20 minutes. 2. "Settings"
▷ Installation cannot be interrupted. 3. "General settings"
▷ The vehicle cannot be used during installa‐ 4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
tion.
5. "Installed version:"
▷ You may leave the vehicle during installation.
61
CONTROLS BMW Remote Software Upgrade
Safety note 5. "Search for upgrades"

6. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
WARNING
Unsupervised children or pets in the vehicle Via BMW Connected app
can set the vehicle in motion and endanger
themselves or other road users, for example by 1. Download the upgrade to your smartphone in
the following actions: the BMW Connected app when available.
▷ Pressing the start/stop button. 2. Follow the instructions in the BMW Connec‐
ted app.
3. Establish the connection to the vehicle.
▷ Opening and closing doors or windows.
▷ iOS: Bluetooth audio and WLAN.
▷ Android: WLAN in the vehicle.
The upgrade data will only transfer from the
There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not smartphone to the vehicle while driving.
cle. When leaving the vehicle, take the vehicle 4. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
key with you and lock the vehicle. play.
Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle, see
Searching for and downloading page 74.
an upgrade
Installing the upgrade
General immediately
There are various ways of searching for and
downloading an upgrade: General
▷ Automatically. If the upgrade has downloaded successfully, it
▷ Via iDrive. can be installed once the vehicle has been
parked. The installation can be carried out imme‐
▷ Via BMW Connected app.
diately after download.
Automatic download Follow the instructions on the Control Display.
The data for the Remote Software Upgrade is Following a successful upgrade, booked services
automatically downloaded to the vehicle when – for example RTTI – are automatically activated
available. There is no need to approve the down‐ again while driving.
load.
Via iDrive ▷ Adequate charge state of the battery.
1. "CAR" ▷ The outside temperature is above —
2. "Settings" 10 ℃/14 ℉.
3. "General settings" ▷ Vehicle is standing on level ground.
4. "Remote Software Upgrade" ▷ Hazard warning lights switched off.
▷ Selector lever position P is engaged.
▷ Engine is sufficiently cooled.
62
BMW Remote Software Upgrade CONTROLS
Preparing the vehicle The driver's door can be unlocked and locked
▷ Park the vehicle in a safe place off the public from outside with the integrated key.
roads.
▷ Mobile phone reception must be guaranteed
Malfunction
so that an error message can be sent if the In the event of a malfunction, follow the instruc‐
installation is cancelled, for example. tions on the Control Display or in the BMW Con‐
nected app.
▷ Close convertible top.
If the malfunction cannot be rectified, contact a
▷ Close the windows.
Service Partner of the manufacturer or another
▷ Close the boot lid. qualified Service Partner or a specialist work‐
▷ Remove devices that consume energy, for shop.
example mobile telephone.
▷ The vehicle key is in the vehicle to start the
installation.
▷ Switch off the exterior lights.
Other vehicle-dependent operating requirements
are shown on the Control Display.
Installing an upgrade later

The upgrade can be installed later on.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5. "Start upgrade now"
Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
Functional limitations
During the upgrade, many of the functions are
temporarily unavailable, for example:
▷ Hazard warning lights.
▷ Central locking system.
▷ Side lights.
▷ Horn.
▷ Alarm system.
▷ Emergency call.
▷ Power window switches.
▷ Locking of the fuel tank filler flap.
63
CONTROLS General settings
General settings
Vehicle equipment Setting the time format
1. "CAR"
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ 2. "Settings"
ment and functions which are not installed in 4. "Date and time"
your vehicle, for example on account of the op‐ 5. "Time format:"
tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐ 6. Select the desired setting.
The setting is saved for the current driver profile.
corresponding functions and systems. Automatic time setting
Depending on the equipment, the time, date and,
if necessary, time zone are updated automati‐
Time cally.
1. "CAR"
Setting the time zone 2. "Settings"
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Date and time"
5. "Automatic time setting"
4. "Date and time"
5. "Time zone:"
Date
Setting the time Setting the date

1. "CAR" 1. "CAR"
2. "Settings" 2. "Settings"
3. "General settings" 3. "General settings"
4. "Date and time" 4. "Date and time"
5. "Time:" 5. "Date:"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired hours are 6. Turn the Controller until the desired day is
displayed. displayed.
7. Press the Controller. 7. Press the Controller.
8. Turn the Controller until the desired minutes 8. Select the month and year.
are displayed. 9. "OK"
9. "OK"
64
General settings CONTROLS
Setting the date format Journey data settings

1. "CAR"
2. "Settings" Principle
3. "General settings" The intervals at which the journey data is reset
4. "Date and time" can be adjusted.
5. "Date format:"
Resetting journey data
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Language 4. "Reset journey data"
Selecting the language
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Speed warning
4. "Language"
Principle
A speed limit can be set which triggers a warning
when it is reached.
General
Selecting the units of The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed ex‐
ceeds the set speed limit again, after it has drop‐
measurement ped below 5 km/h/3 mph.
Depending on the country specifications, it is

Adjusting
possible to select the units of measurement for
various values, for example consumption, distan‐ 1. "CAR"
ces and temperature. 2. "Settings"
1. "CAR" 3. "General settings"
2. "Settings" 4. "Speed warning"
3. "General settings" 5. "Warning at:"
4. "Units" 6. Turn the Controller until the desired speed is

displayed.
5. Select the desired menu item.
The setting is saved for the current driver profile. Activating/deactivating
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
65
CONTROLS General settings
4. "Speed warning" The setting is saved for the current driver profile.
5. "Speed warning" Depending on the lighting conditions, the bright‐
ness adjustment may not be immediately appa‐
Setting the current speed as the rent.
speed warning
1. "CAR" Resetting the vehicle
2. "Settings"
configuration
4. "Speed warning" All individual settings can be reset to the factory
5. "Select current speed" settings when the drive-ready state is switched
off.
1. "CAR"
Activating/deactivating 2. "Settings"
information windows 3. "General settings"
Information windows are automatically shown on 4. "Reset vehicle data"

the Control Display for some functions. Some of 5. "Reset vehicle data"
these information windows can be activated or If the settings saved in a driver profile are
deactivated. synchronised with a ConnectedDrive account,
1. "CAR" these settings will be retained in the Connected‐
Drive account.
2. "Settings"
4. "Pop-ups" Notifications
The setting is saved for the current driver profile. Principle
The menu shows all messages received by the
vehicle, centrally in the form of a list.
Control Display
General
Brightness The following messages can be displayed:
1. "CAR" ▷ Traffic messages.
2. "Settings" ▷ Check Control messages.
3. "Displays" ▷ Service requirement messages.
4. "Control display" ▷ Communication messages, for example e-
5. "Brightness at night" mail, SMS or reminders.
6. Press the Controller. ▷ Messages from the Concierge Service or the
BMW Connected app, for example.
7. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐
ness is obtained. ▷ Messages from the vehicle manufacturer.
8. Press the Controller. The number of notifications is also displayed in
the status field.
66
General settings CONTROLS
The Notifications menu can also be created as a

widget.
Calling up notifications
1. Tilt the Controller up.
2. "Notifications"
3. Select the required notification.
Deleting notifications
All notifications which are not Check Control
messages or messages from the vehicle manu‐
facturer can be deleted from the list.
Check Control messages or messages from the
vehicle manufacturer remain for as long as they
are relevant.

2. "Notifications"
3. Select the desired notification; for example,
SMS.

5. ▷ "Delete this notification"
▷ "Delete all notifications"
Settings
The following settings can be performed:
▷ Select the applications from which notifica‐
tions are allowed.
▷ All notifications or a limited time span of re‐
ceived notifications.
2. "Notifications"
3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
4. "Settings"
67
CONTROLS Personal settings
Personal settings
Vehicle equipment Deleting personal data in the
vehicle
cific and optional equipment available for the Principle
model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ Depending on use, the vehicle stores personal
ment and functions which are not installed in data such as saved radio stations. This personal
your vehicle, for example on account of the op‐ data can be permanently deleted using iDrive.
cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ General
Depending on the equipment in your vehicle,
data such as the following can be deleted:
▷ Driver profile settings.
▷ Saved radio stations.
Data protection ▷ Saved functional bookmarks.
▷ Trip and on-board computer values.
Data transfer
▷ Navigation, for example saved destinations.
Principle ▷ Phone book.
The vehicle offers various services which require ▷ Online data, for example Favourites, cookies.
data to be transferred to BMW or a service pro‐ ▷ Office data, for example voice memos.
vider. The transfer of data can be deactivated for ▷ Login accounts.
some services.
It may take up to 15 minutes in total to delete
data.
General
If data transfer has been deactivated for a serv‐ Operating requirements
ice, then that service cannot be used.
Data can only be deleted with the vehicle at a
Only perform settings with the vehicle at a stand‐ standstill.
still.
Deleting data
Settings
Personal data in the vehicle is deleted when the
The data transfer can be configured individually vehicle is reset to its factory settings.
in various stages or for individual services.
1. "CAR" Resetting the vehicle configuration, see page 66.
2. "Settings"
4. "Data privacy"
68
Personal settings CONTROLS
Driver profiles This option is offered for a limited time in new

vehicles.
As soon as the engine is started or any button is
Principle pressed, the welcome screen disappears.
Driver profiles can be created in order to store
personalised vehicle settings. If multiple drivers Setup assistant
use a vehicle, each driver can create a personal‐
The setup assistant is offered on the welcome
ised driver profile. If a driver profile is selected,
screen in new vehicles for a limited time in order
the vehicle automatically adopts the settings
to define the key settings for the vehicle.
stored in the driver profile.
Select "Getting started" to start the setup assis‐
General tant.
You can create three personal driver profiles. The setup assistant can be started at any time
using iDrive.
There is also a guest profile available which can
be selected by any driver. The guest profile is ac‐ 1. "CAR"
tive if no personal driver profile has been selec‐ 2. "Settings"
ted.
Changes to the vehicle settings are saved auto‐
4. "Getting started"
matically in the active driver profile or in the guest
profile. The driver is guided through the following func‐
tions step by step:
The vehicle settings can be adjusted to the rele‐
vant driver as soon as the vehicle is unlocked. To ▷ Set the system language.
achieve this, recognition via a vehicle key and a ▷ ConnectedDrive countries:
digital key and via a digital key must be assigned If the setup assistant has been called up in
to a driver profile. the guest profile: create the driver profile.
ConnectedDrive countries: The settings saved in ▷ Register mobile devices with the vehicle.
the driver profile can be synchronised with the
▷ If the setup assistant has been called up from
personal BMW ConnectedDrive account. This
a previously defined driver profile: set up the
makes it possible to use these settings in other
Personal Assistant.
BMW vehicles as well.
▷ Depending on whether the setup assistant
Operating requirements has been called up from a previously defined
driver profile or a guest profile: set up serv‐
If the driver profile is changed, the vehicle cannot ices or confirm the declaration regarding the
move at any more than walking speed. transfer of vehicle data.
▷ Set up other operating methods.
Welcome screen
The selected settings are saved in the active
The welcome screen is shown once the Control
driver profile.
Display is switched on.
The following actions can be performed on the Guest profile
welcome screen:
The guest profile can be activated by any driver.
▷ Switch the driver profile. Vehicle settings that are made when the guest
▷ Start the setup assistant. profile is active are saved in the guest profile.
69
The guest profile is automatically active in the ▷ "Via BMW Connected app"
following cases: Scanning the displayed QR code transfers
▷ No driver profiles have been created yet. the login details from the BMW Connected
▷ No driver profile is assigned to the vehicle key app to the ConnectedDrive account.
used to unlock the vehicle. ▷ "Log in"
▷ No driver profile is assigned to the digital key The login details must be entered via iDrive.
used to unlock the vehicle. ▷ "New registration"
The following restrictions apply: If the driver does not have a ConnectedDrive
▷ The guest profile cannot be renamed. account, one can be created via iDrive.
▷ Recognition cannot be assigned to the guest
profile. Selecting recognition
▷ It is not possible to assign a PIN to the guest 1. "CAR"
profile. 2. "Driver profiles"
▷ ConnectedDrive countries: Synchronisation 3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
with a ConnectedDrive account is not possi‐
As an alternative to steps 1 to 3, it is possible
ble.
to tap the profile picture in the upper status
The guest profile is selected on the welcome bar.
screen or via iDrive:
4. "Driver recognition"
1. "CAR" 5. Select the desired setting:
2. "Driver profiles" ▷ "with vehicle key"
As an alternative to steps 1 and 2, it is possi‐ The vehicle key that is detected in the ve‐
ble to tap the profile picture in the upper sta‐ hicle interior is assigned to the driver pro‐
tus bar. file. If multiple vehicle keys are detected,
3. "Guest" the unwanted vehicle keys must be re‐
4. "OK" moved from the vehicle interior.
▷ "With Digital Key"
Creating a driver profile The digital key that is detected in the ve‐
1. "CAR" hicle interior is assigned to the driver pro‐
file. If multiple digital keys are detected,
2. "Driver profiles"
the unwanted digital keys must be re‐
3. Tilt the Controller to the right. moved from the vehicle interior.
As an alternative to steps 1 to 3, it is possible 6. "Activate linkage"
As soon as the vehicle key or the digital key is
bar.
detected by the vehicle, the relevant driver profile
4. "Add driver profile" is activated. If the driver does not have the vehi‐
Non-ConnectedDrive countries: A name must be cle key or the smartphone with the digital key
entered for the driver profile. with him/her, or if the vehicle key or digital key is
ConnectedDrive countries: An existing Connec‐ not detected, the driver profile can only be selec‐
tedDrive account must be assigned to a driver ted on the welcome screen if PIN protection has
profile. There are several possible ways of doing been set up.
this:
70
Setting up PIN protection If the vehicle and the vehicle key are handed over
for a service, for example, carry out the following
A driver profile with recognition cannot be activa‐
steps first:
ted without a vehicle key and without a digital
key. In this case, it is possible to set up PIN pro‐ ▷ Set up PIN protection.
tection that can be used to activate the driver ▷ Cancel recognition via the vehicle key.
profile. ▷ Switch to the guest profile.
Countries in which ConnectedDrive is not avail‐ This means the vehicle key that is handed over
able: If PIN protection has not been set up or the can no longer be used to access the personal
PIN is not known, the driver profile cannot be ac‐ driver profile.
tivated.
Countries in which ConnectedDrive is available: If Selecting a driver profile
PIN protection has not been set up or the PIN is
The driver profile is selected automatically based
not known, the driver profile can be activated
on the recognition of the key/remote control.
with the login details for the relevant Connected‐
Drive account. If the guest profile is active, the driver profile is
selected on the welcome screen or via iDrive. A
1. "CAR" PIN may need to be entered.
1. "CAR"
As an alternative to steps 1 and 2, it is possi‐
ble to tap the profile picture in the upper sta‐
bar.
tus bar.
4. "Driver recognition"
3. Select a driver profile.
5. "using PIN"
4. "OK"
Changing/cancelling recognition The settings saved in the selected driver profile

are applied automatically.
If a different vehicle key or a different digital key
is assigned to a driver profile, the current assign‐
ment must be cancelled first.
Switching synchronisation with
the ConnectedDrive account
1. "CAR" on/off
2. "Driver profiles" ConnectedDrive countries:
3. Tilt the Controller to the right. The settings saved in the driver profile are
As an alternative to steps 1 to 3, it is possible synchronised with the personal ConnectedDrive
to tap the profile picture in the upper status account. This makes it possible to use the per‐
bar. sonal settings in other BMW vehicles with Con‐
4. "Driver recognition" nectedDrive access as well, provided that this
function is supported.
5. Select the desired setting:
▷ "with vehicle key"
▷ "With Digital Key"
6. "Activate linkage"
71
Synchronisation with the ConnectedDrive ac‐ 4. "Avatar"

count is enabled when a driver profile is created 5. Select the desired profile picture.
or via iDrive:
ConnectedDrive countries:
1. "CAR" The profile picture is taken from the Connected‐
2. "Driver profiles" Drive customer portal or the BMW Connected
3. Tilt the Controller to the right. app.
to tap the profile picture in the upper status Deleting a driver profile
bar. 1. "CAR"
4. "Settings" 2. "Driver profiles"
5. "Synchronise driver profile" 3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
6. "Synchronise driver profile" As an alternative to steps 1 to 3, it is possible
Renaming the driver profile bar.
Non-ConnectedDrive countries: 4. "Settings"

5. "Remove driver profile"
1. "CAR"
6. Select the desired driver profile.
7. "Remove now"
As an alternative to steps 1 and 2, it is possi‐
ble to tap the profile picture in the upper sta‐ ConnectedDrive countries: If the driver profile
tus bar. has been synchronised with a ConnectedDrive
account, the data saved in the ConnectedDrive
account is retained.
4. "Settings"
5. Enter a profile name. System limits
6. Select the symbol. It is not always possible to detect the desired ve‐
ConnectedDrive countries: hicle key uniquely. This may be the case in the
following scenarios, for example:
The name of the driver profile is transferred from
the ConnectedDrive account. Changes to the ▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort
profile name must be made in the Connected‐ Access.
Drive account. ▷ If there is a change of driver without the vehi‐
cle being locked and unlocked.
Selecting a profile picture ▷ If a number of vehicle keys are located in the
Non-ConnectedDrive countries: area outside of the vehicle, on the driver's
side.
1. "CAR"
ConnectedDrive countries:
It is only possible to create a driver profile and
3. Tilt the Controller to the right. synchronise it with the ConnectedDrive account
As an alternative to steps 1 to 3, it is possible if mobile telephone reception is available.
to tap the profile picture in the upper status Using the personal settings saved in the Con‐
bar. nectedDrive account in other vehicles is subject
to certain technical restrictions. For example,
72
there may be stored settings for a system that is

not available in other vehicles, or only in an in‐
compatible version.
73
CONTROLS Connections
Connections
Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle

Principle General
Various types of connection are available in the The following list shows possible functions and
vehicle for using mobile devices. Which connec‐ the appropriate connection types for them. The
tion type to select depends on the mobile device level of functionality depends on the mobile de‐
and the function you wish to use. vice.
Function Connection type Symbol in the

device list
Making calls using the hands-free sys‐ Bluetooth.

tem.
Operating telephone functions via
iDrive or touchscreen.
Other functions, for example contacts
or SMS.
Play music from the smartphone or au‐ Bluetooth audio.

dio system.
WLAN in the vehicle: WLAN.

Use apps in the vehicle.
Wi-Fi hotspot: WLAN.

Using the vehicle's Internet access.
Screen Mirroring: WLAN.

Showing the smartphone display on
the control display.
USB port: USB.

Playing music or video from a USB de‐
vice.
74
Connections CONTROLS
Function Connection type Symbol in the

device list
Apple CarPlay: Bluetooth and WLAN.

Operating apps via iDrive and by voice
commands.
Android Auto: Bluetooth and WLAN.

Operating apps via iDrive and by voice
commands.
The following connection types require a one-off Viewing the vehicle identification
pairing process with the vehicle: number and software part number
▷ Bluetooth. When looking for compatible devices, the vehicle
▷ WLAN. identification number and software part number
Paired devices are then automatically recognised may have to be stated. These numbers can be
and connected to the vehicle. displayed in the vehicle.
1. "COM"
Safety note 2. "Mobile devices"
WARNING 4. "Settings"
Operating integrated information systems and 5. "Bluetooth information"
communication devices during a journey may
6. "System information"
distract you from the road. You could lose con‐
trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
Only operate the systems or devices if the traf‐
fic conditions allow you to do so. Stop if neces‐
Managing mobile devices
sary and operate the systems or devices with
the vehicle at a standstill. General
▷ Following one-off pairing, the devices are au‐
tomatically detected and connected again
Compatible devices when standby state is switched on.
▷ The data saved on the SIM card or in the mo‐
General
bile telephone – for example, contacts – is
Information about mobile devices compatible transferred to the vehicle following detection
with the vehicle is available at www.bmw.com/ and can be used via iDrive.
bluetooth.
▷ Some devices may require particular settings,
Malfunctions may occur when using unlisted de‐ for example authorisation; see the user man‐
vices or different software versions. ual of the device.
Displaying the device list

All devices paired or connected to the vehicle are
displayed in the device list.
75
A maximum of 4 devices can be connected to ▷ "Disconnect device"

the vehicle via Bluetooth and 10 devices via The device remains paired and can be
WLAN. A maximum of 20 devices can be detec‐ connected again.
ted.
▷ "Delete device"
1. "COM" The device is disconnected and deleted
2. "Mobile devices" from the device list.
A symbol to the right of the device name indi‐ ▷ "Connection mode"
cates which function the device is used for. Select a connection mode, for example
If the symbol is shown in white, there is an active Apple CarPlay.
connection to the vehicle with this function. The ▷ "Telephone"
symbol is shown in grey when the device func‐
Set the telephone.
tion is inactive.
▷ "Bluetooth audio"
Symbol Meaning
Playback of music files via Bluetooth from
Telephone. external devices, for example audio devi‐
ces or mobile telephones.
Bluetooth audio.
▷ "Apps"
WLAN in the vehicle, Wi-Fi hotspot. If the BMW Connected app is installed,
Apps. smartphone apps can be displayed in the
vehicle.
Screen Mirroring.
▷ "Wi-Fi"
Apple CarPlay. Connects the device to the WLAN in the
Android Auto. vehicle.
Telephone priority
Configuring the device
If several mobile phones are connected to the
Functions can be activated or deactivated on a vehicle, it is possible to define reconnection pri‐
paired or connected device. orities for them.
The level of functionality depends on the mobile
device. 1. "COM"
Observe the information on the Control Display. 2. "Mobile devices"

1. "COM"
4. "Settings"
2. "Mobile devices"
5. "Priorities for telephony"
3. Select the required device.
6. Select the required device.
7. Move to select the desired priority.
▷ "Connect device"
Functions assigned to the device before
disconnection are reassigned to the de‐
vice upon reconnection. If applicable,
these functions are deactivated for an al‐
ready connected device.
76
Bluetooth connection Enabling/disabling telephone

functions
Operating requirements To be able to use all supported functions of a
mobile telephone, the desired functions may
▷ Compatible device with Bluetooth interface.
need to be activated in the vehicle before regis‐
Compatible devices, see page 75. tering the mobile telephone with the vehicle.
▷ The vehicle key is in the vehicle.
1. "COM"
▷ The device is operational.
2. "Personalise menu"
▷ Bluetooth is activated on the device and
3. Select the desired settings, for example "Text
switched on in the vehicle.
messages".
▷ The Control Display indicates that the system
is ready for registration. Frequently Asked Questions
▷ The device may require certain Bluetooth de‐ For the mobile device to work correctly, the pre‐
fault settings, for example visibility; see the conditions have to be met and all the necessary
user manual of the device. steps have to be carried out in the correct order.
Even when this is done, however, there may still
Activating Bluetooth be instances where the mobile device does not
1. "COM" function as expected.
2. "Mobile devices" In such cases, the following explanations may
3. Tilt the Controller to the right. provide assistance:
4. "Settings" Why could the mobile telephone not be paired or

connected?
5. "Bluetooth"
▷ Too many Bluetooth devices are paired to
6. Select the setting. the mobile telephone or the vehicle.
In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connections
Connecting a device with other devices.
1. "COM"
Delete the Bluetooth connection from the de‐
2. "Mobile devices" vice list on the mobile telephone and start a
3. Tilt the Controller to the right. new device search.
4. "New device" Too many Bluetooth devices with the same
5. "Phone calls and audio" function are registered.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is shown ▷ The mobile telephone is in power-save mode
on the Control Display. or the battery is low.
6. Compare the control number shown on the Charge the mobile telephone and deactivate
Control Display with the control number on power-save mode if necessary.
the mobile device display, and confirm that Why does the mobile telephone no longer re‐
the two match. spond?
7. A Bluetooth connection is established. ▷ The applications on the mobile telephone are
The mobile device is connected to the vehicle no longer functioning.
and displayed in the device list. Switch the mobile telephone off and on
again.
77
▷ Ambient temperature too high or too low to ▷ Insert the mobile telephone in the wireless
operate the mobile telephone. charging dock.
Do not subject the mobile telephone to ex‐ ▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone sepa‐
treme ambient conditions. rately in the sound settings.
Why can telephone functions not be operated via If all the points on the list have been reviewed
iDrive? and the desired function cannot be performed,
▷ No telephone functions are configured for the contact the Hotline, a Service Partner of the
mobile telephone. manufacturer or another qualified Service Partner
or a specialist workshop.
Connect the mobile telephone with the tele‐
phone function.
Why are no phone book entries, not all entries or WLAN connection
incomplete entries displayed?
▷ The transfer of the phone book entries is not General
yet completed.
For certain applications, for example apps, data is
▷ Under certain circumstances only the phone exchanged between the vehicle and a smart‐
book entries saved in the mobile telephone or phone via WLAN.
on the SIM card are transferred.
▷ It may not be possible to display phone book Operating requirements
entries containing special characters.
▷ Standby state is switched on.
▷ It may not be possible to transfer contacts
▷ Compatible device with activated WLAN in‐
from social networks.
terface.
▷ The number of phone book entries to be
transferred is too high.
Activating WLAN in the vehicle
▷ The data volume of the contact is too large,
1. "COM"
for example due to saved information such as
memos. 2. "Mobile devices"
Reduce the data volume of the contact. 3. Tilt the Controller to the right.
▷ A mobile telephone can only be connected as 4. "Settings"

an audio source or as a telephone. 5. "Wi-Fi"
Configure the mobile telephone and connect
it to the telephone function.
▷ A contact was created in the telephone con‐
Wi-Fi hotspot
tact list after the last synchronisation.
Re-synchronise the contacts: "Reload
Principle
contacts" Compatible devices with a WLAN interface can
use the vehicle's Internet connection via the Wi-
How can the telephone connection quality be
Fi hotspot.
improved?
▷ Adjust the strength of the Bluetooth signal on
the mobile telephone; the procedure varies
General
from mobile telephone to mobile telephone. Up to 10 devices can be connected at the same
time using the Wi-Fi hotspot.
78
Operating requirements A QR code is also displayed on the Control Dis‐

play. Alternatively, this QR code can be used to
▷ Compatible device with activated WLAN in‐
pair the mobile device with the hotspot.
terface.
This data volume is used by all devices connec‐
Compatible devices, see page 75.
ted via the hotspot.
▷ WLAN is activated in the vehicle.
▷ Internet usage is activated in the vehicle. Deactivating Internet usage via
▷ Registration and, if necessary, data contract the Wi-Fi hotspot
with a service provider. Internet usage may be deactivated if the data
▷ Standby state is switched on. volume is used up, for example.
1. "COM"
Connecting a device to the
2. "Mobile devices"
Internet via a Wi-Fi hotspot
Registration will be required and a data volume
may need to be purchased from a service pro‐ 4. "Settings"
vider when you first connect to the Internet via 5. "Internet use"
the Wi-Fi hotspot. 6. Select the desired setting.
Data volumes can be purchased via the connec‐
ted mobile telephone or the ConnectedDrive
Store, depending on the country version. Screen Mirroring
1. "COM"
2. "Mobile devices" General
3. Tilt the Controller to the right. Screen Mirroring enables you to display your
smartphone screen on the Control Display.
4. "New device"
5. "Internet, apps" Operating requirements
The hotspot name and hotspot code are dis‐ ▷ Compatible smartphone with Screen Mirror‐
played on the Control Display. ing interface.
6. Activate Internet usage via WLAN if neces‐ Compatible devices, see page 75.
sary.
▷ Screen Mirroring is activated in the smart‐
"Open settings" phone.
7. Activate Internet usage. ▷ WLAN is activated in the vehicle.
"Internet use"
8. Tilt the Controller to the left. Pairing the smartphone with
9. On the mobile device, search for WLAN net‐ Screen Mirroring
works. Select the network name on the de‐ 1. "COM"
vice.
2. "Mobile devices"
10. Enter the hotspot code on the device and
connect.
4. "New device"
The device is displayed in the device list.
5. "Screen Mirroring"
79
The WLAN name of the vehicle is shown on The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is shown
the Control Display. on the Control Display.
6. On the smartphone, search for WLAN devi‐ 6. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth
ces in the vicinity. devices in the vicinity and select the vehicle.
The vehicle's WLAN name is shown on the A control number is displayed.
display of the device. Select the vehicle's 7. Compare the control number shown on the
WLAN name. Control Display with the control number on
7. Confirm the connection via iDrive. the mobile device display, and confirm that
The device is connected and displayed in the the two match.
device list. 8. "Confirm note and connect with Apple
CarPlay"
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and dis‐
Apple CarPlay preparation played in the device list.
Principle Operation
CarPlay makes it possible to operate certain For further information, see the integrated Own‐
functions of a compatible Apple iPhone by Siri er's Handbook or the Owner's Handbook for
voice operation and using iDrive. Navigation, Entertainment and Communication.
Operating requirements Frequently Asked Questions

▷ Compatible iPhone, iPhone 5 or later with For the mobile device to work correctly, the pre‐
iOS 7.1 or later. conditions have to be met and all the necessary
Compatible devices, see page 75. steps have to be carried out in the correct order.
Even when this is done, however, there may still
▷ Corresponding mobile radio contract.
be instances where the mobile device does not
▷ Bluetooth, WLAN and Siri voice operation are function as expected.
activated on the iPhone.
In such cases, the following explanations may
▷ The setting for mobile data may need to be provide assistance:
activated on the iPhone.
The iPhone has already been paired with Apple
▷ Booking of the ConnectedDrive service: CarPlay. When a new connection is established,
smartphone integration. CarPlay can no longer be selected.
▷ WLAN and Bluetooth are activated in the ve‐ ▷ Delete the iPhone concerned from the device
hicle. list.
▷ On the iPhone, delete the vehicle concerned
Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay from the list of saved connections under
1. "COM" Bluetooth and under WLAN.
2. "Mobile devices" ▷ Pair the iPhone as a new device.
3. Tilt the Controller to the right. If the steps listed have been carried out and the
4. "New device" desired function still cannot be run: contact the
hotline, a Service Partner of the manufacturer or
5. "Phone calls and audio"
another qualified Service Partner or a specialist
workshop.
80
Android Auto preparation 8. "Confirm note and connect to Android Auto"

9. If applicable, complete setup on the mobile
device.
Principle
The smartphone is connected to the vehicle and
Android Auto makes it possible to operate cer‐ displayed in the device list.
tain functions of a compatible smartphone via
voice control and via iDrive.
Operation
Operating requirements For further information, see the integrated Own‐
er's Handbook or the Owner's Handbook for
▷ Compatible Android smartphone with Navigation, Entertainment and Communication.
Android 9.0 or later.
Compatible devices, see page 75. Frequently Asked Questions
▷ Corresponding mobile radio contract. For the mobile device to work correctly, the pre‐
▷ Bluetooth and WLAN are activated on the conditions have to be met and all the necessary
smartphone. steps have to be carried out in the correct order.
▷ The setting for mobile data may need to be Even when this is done, however, there may still
activated on the smartphone. be instances where the mobile device does not
function as expected.
▷ Booking of the ConnectedDrive service:
smartphone integration. In such cases, the following explanations may
provide assistance:
▷ The Android Auto app is installed on the
smartphone. The smartphone has already been paired with
Android Auto. When a new connection is estab‐
▷ WLAN and Bluetooth are activated in the ve‐
lished, Android Auto can no longer be selected.
hicle.
▷ Delete the smartphone concerned from the
device list.
Pairing the smartphone with
Android Auto ▷ On the smartphone, delete the vehicle con‐
cerned from the list of saved connections un‐
1. "COM" der Bluetooth and under WLAN.
2. "Mobile devices" ▷ Pair the smartphone as a new device.
3. Tilt the Controller to the right. If the steps listed have been carried out and the
4. "New device" desired function still cannot be run: contact the
5. "Phone calls and audio" hotline, a Service Partner of the manufacturer or
another qualified Service Partner or a specialist
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is shown
workshop.
on the Control Display.
6. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth
devices in the vicinity and select the vehicle. USB connection
A control number is displayed.
7. Compare the control number shown on the General
Control Display with the control number on
The following mobile devices can be connected
the mobile device display, and confirm that
to the USB port:
the two match.
▷ Mobile telephones.
81
▷ Audio devices, for example MP3 players. ▷ Devices such as fans or lamps.
▷ USB storage devices.
Common file systems are supported. For‐ Operating requirements
mats FAT32 and exFAT are recommended. Compatible device with USB port.
A connected USB device is charged via the USB For further information:
port if the device supports this. Note the maxi‐ Compatible devices, see page 75.
mum charging current of the USB port.
The following can be done at USB ports compat‐ Connecting a device
ible with data transfer: Connect the USB device to a USB port using a
▷ Playback of music files. suitable adapter cable.
▷ Playback of video films. The USB device is displayed in the device list.
When connecting, bear the following in mind: For further information:
▷ Do not use force when inserting the connec‐ USB port, see page 254.
tor into the USB port.
▷ Use a flexible adapter cable.
▷ Protect the USB device from mechanical
damage.
▷ Due to the large variety of USB devices avail‐
able on the market, operation via the vehicle
cannot be ensured for every device.
▷ Do not expose the USB devices to extreme
environmental conditions, for example very
high temperatures; see the operating instruc‐
tions of the device.
▷ Due to the large variety of different compres‐
sion techniques, correct playback of the me‐
dia stored on the USB device cannot be
guaranteed in every case.
▷ To ensure correct transmission of the stored
data, do not charge a USB device from the
12 V power socket in the vehicle when the
device is also connected to the USB port.
▷ Depending on how the USB device is being
used, it may be necessary to perform settings
on the USB device; see the operating instruc‐
tions of the device.
Unsuitable USB devices:
▷ USB hard drives.
▷ USB hubs.
▷ USB memory card reader with several slots.
▷ HFS-formatted USB devices.
82
Opening and closing CONTROLS
Opening and closing

Vehicle equipment injury. Carry the vehicle key with you so that
you can open the vehicle from the outside.
model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ WARNING
ment and functions which are not installed in On some national-market versions, unlocking
your vehicle, for example on account of the op‐ from the inside is only possible with special
tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐ knowledge.
There is a risk of injury or danger to life if per‐
sons remain in the vehicle for extended periods
and are exposed to extreme temperatures as a
result. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
when there is someone inside it.
Vehicle key
WARNING
General
Unsupervised children or pets in the vehicle
The delivery specification includes two vehicle can set the vehicle in motion and endanger
keys with integrated keys. themselves or other road users, for example by
Each vehicle key contains a replaceable battery. the following actions:
Various settings are possible for the button func‐ ▷ Pressing the start/stop button.
tions. Depending on the equipment and the na‐ ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
tional-market version.
A driver profile with personalised settings can be
assigned to a vehicle key.
To provide information on maintenance require‐
ments, the service data is saved in the vehicle There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not
key. leave children or pets unsupervised in the vehi‐
To prevent the vehicle key from being locked in,
take it with you whenever you leave the vehicle.
Safety notes
WARNING
Persons remaining in the vehicle or pets left in‐
side can lock the doors from the inside and lock
themselves in. In this case, the vehicle cannot
be opened from the outside. There is a risk of
83
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Overview ▷ If a driver profile has been assigned to the ve‐

hicle key, this driver profile is activated and
the settings saved in it are configured.
▷ The interior light is switched on unless it was
switched off manually.
▷ Folded-in exterior mirrors are folded out.
If the exterior mirrors were folded in using the
button in the interior, they are not folded out
when the vehicle is unlocked.
▷ With anti-theft security system: The anti-theft
1 To unlock security system is switched off.
2 To lock ▷ With alarm system: The alarm system is
Standing air conditioning via Remote Engine switched off.
Start 246 Press the button on the vehicle key
3 Unlocking the boot lid twice in direct succession to activate
4 Home lights comfort entry.
Depending on the settings, the window is low‐
ered further when opening a door.
Unlocking
The vehicle is operational after one of the front
General doors is opened.
The vehicle's response when unlocked with the The lighting functions may depend on the ambi‐
vehicle key depends on the following settings: ent brightness.
▷ Whether only the driver's door and the fuel
tank filler flap or all vehicle access points are Comfort opening
unlocked with the first press of the button.
▷ Whether the unlocking of the vehicle is ac‐ Safety note
knowledged with a light signal or an acoustic
signal. WARNING
▷ Whether the welcome light is switched on Parts of the body can become trapped when
when the vehicle is unlocked. opening and closing the convertible top. There
▷ Whether the window can be lowered further is a risk of injury. When opening and closing the
to make it easier to get in. convertible top, observe its movement and
keep the area of movement clear.
Unlocking the vehicle
Press the button on the vehicle key. Opening
Press and hold the button on the vehi‐
If only the driver's door and the fuel tank filler flap
cle key.
have been unlocked due to the settings, press
the button on the vehicle key again to unlock the The windows open for as long as the button on
other vehicle access points. the vehicle key remains pressed.
The following functions are also carried out: With Comfort Access:
84
The convertible top is also opened in the area Comfort closing

near the vehicle.
Press and hold the button on the vehi‐ Safety notes
cle key until the convertible top is com‐
pletely open. Exiting close range stops the WARNING
movement.
Parts of the body can become trapped when
Exterior mirrors which were folded in via the the comfort closing feature is operated. There
comfort closing feature are folded out. is a risk of injury. When the comfort closing fea‐
ture is operating, make sure that the area of
Locking movement is kept clear.
General
Closing
The vehicle's response when locked with the ve‐
hicle key depends on the following settings: Keep the button on the vehicle key
pressed after locking.
▷ Whether locking of the vehicle is acknowl‐
edged with a light signal or an acoustic signal. The windows close for as long as the button on
▷ Whether the exterior mirrors are automatically the vehicle key remains pressed.
folded in when the vehicle is locked. If the With Comfort Access:
hazard warning lights are switched on, the ex‐
When in close range of the vehicle, the
terior mirrors are not folded in.
convertible top is also closed.
▷ Whether the home lights are activated when
Press and hold the button on the vehicle
the vehicle is locked.
key until the convertible top is completely
closed. Exiting close range stops the movement.
Locking the vehicle
1. Close the driver's door. The exterior mirrors are folded in.
If the hazard warning lights are switched on, the
2. Press the button on the vehicle key. exterior mirrors are not folded in.
The following functions are carried out:
▷ All the doors, the boot lid and fuel tank filler Switching on the interior light
flap are locked. and exterior lights
▷ With anti-theft security system: The anti-theft With the vehicle locked, press the button
security system is switched on. This prevents on the vehicle key.
the doors from being unlocked using the
locking buttons or the door handles. The function is not available for the first 10 sec‐
▷ With alarm system: The alarm system is onds after locking.
switched on. ▷ The interior light is switched on unless it was
If the drive-ready state is still switched on when switched off manually.
locking, the vehicle horn sounds twice. In this Interior lighting, see page 175.
case, switch off the drive-ready state using start/ ▷ Depending on the settings, the exterior lights
stop button. are switched on.
Welcome light, see page 171.
85
The lighting functions may depend on the ambi‐ Home lights, see page 171.
ent brightness.
Replacing the battery
Boot lid 1. Remove the integrated key from the vehicle
key.
General Integrated key, see page 92.
To prevent the vehicle key from being locked in,
2. Place integrated key under the battery com‐
do not place it in the luggage compartment.
partment cover, arrow 1, and pry off the cover
It is possible to set whether the doors are un‐ with a lever motion of the integrated key, ar‐
locked when the boot lid is opened with the vehi‐ row 2.
cle key.
Safety notes
WARNING
the boot lid is operated. There is a risk of injury.
When opening and closing, make sure that the
area of movement of the boot lid is kept clear.
3. Use a pointed object to push the battery in
the direction of the arrow and lift it out.
NOTE
The boot lid swings rearwards and upwards
when opened. There is a risk of material dam‐
age. When opening and closing, make sure that
the area of movement of the boot lid is kept
clear.
Unlocking
Press and hold the button on the vehi‐ 4. Insert a new type CR 2032 battery with the
cle key for approximately 1 second. positive side facing upwards.
5. Press the cover back into position and close
On some equipment versions, the doors are also
it.
unlocked each time.
6. Push the integrated key into the vehicle key
Switching on the home lights until the integrated key engages.
Press and hold the button on the vehi‐ Dispose of old batteries at a Service
cle key for approximately 1 second. Partner of the manufacturer or another
qualified Service Partner or a specialist
It is possible to adjust the duration of the home workshop or hand them in to an authorised col‐
lights. lecting point.
86
Additional vehicle keys If there is a malfunction, the vehicle can be un‐

locked and locked from the outside with the
Additional vehicle keys are available from a Serv‐
integrated key.
ice Partner of the manufacturer or another quali‐
fied Service Partner or an authorised workshop. For further information:
Integrated key, see page 92.
Loss of vehicle keys
A lost vehicle key can be blocked and replaced Switching on drive-ready state via
by a Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐ the emergency detection feature of
other qualified Service Partner or an authorised the vehicle key
workshop.
If a driver profile has been assigned to the lost
vehicle key, the connection to this vehicle key
must be removed. A new vehicle key can then be
assigned to the driver profile.
Malfunction
General
A Check Control message is shown. Drive-ready state cannot be switched on if the
It may be difficult for the vehicle to detect the ve‐ vehicle key has not been detected.
hicle key in some conditions, including the If this happens, proceed as follows:
following:
1. Hold the rear side of the vehicle key against
▷ The battery of the vehicle key is discharged. the mark on the steering column. Pay atten‐
▷ Disruption of the radio link by transmission tion to the display in the instrument cluster.
masts or other equipment transmitting pow‐ 2. If the vehicle key is detected:
erful signals.
Switch on drive-ready state within 10 sec‐
▷ Shielding of the vehicle key by metallic ob‐ onds.
jects.
If the vehicle key is not detected, change the po‐
Do not transport the vehicle key together with sition of the vehicle key slightly and repeat the
metallic objects. procedure.
▷ Disruption of the radio link by mobile tele‐
phones or other electronic devices in the im‐ Frequently Asked Questions
mediate vicinity of the vehicle key. What provisions can be made to enable a vehicle
Do not transport the vehicle key together with to be opened if the vehicle key has accidentally
electronic devices. been locked inside the vehicle?
▷ Interference with the radio transmission ▷ The Remote Services of the BMW Connec‐
caused by the charging of mobile devices, for ted app can be used to lock and unlock a ve‐
example a mobile phone. hicle.
▷ The vehicle key is located in the immediate This requires an active BMW Connected‐
vicinity of the wireless charging tray. Drive contract and the BMW Connected app
Place the vehicle key somewhere else. must be installed on a smartphone.
87
▷ Unlocking of the vehicle can be requested via There is a risk of injury or danger to life if per‐
the BMW ConnectedDrive call centre. sons remain in the vehicle for extended periods
This requires an active BMW Connected‐ and are exposed to extreme temperatures as a
Drive contract. result. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
Key card
WARNING
Principle Unsupervised children or pets in the vehicle
The Key Card can be used to lock, unlock and can set the vehicle in motion and endanger
start the vehicle. themselves or other road users, for example by
General ▷ Pressing the start/stop button.
The Key Card is available with Comfort Access. ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
Depending on the national-market version, the ▷ Opening and closing doors or windows.
Key Card may not be available. ▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
A digital key that has already been paired with ▷ Operating vehicle equipment.
the vehicle is installed on the key card. The digi‐
There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not
tal key must be activated via iDrive.
When you exit the vehicle, deactivate the Key cle. When leaving the vehicle, take the vehicle
Card or take the Key Card with you, as it can be key with you and lock the vehicle.
used to start the vehicle when activated. Always
take the vehicle key with you to a service ap‐
pointment. Connection to the vehicle
Communication between the vehicle and the
Safety notes Key Card takes place via near field communica‐
tion NFC.
WARNING
Persons remaining in the vehicle or pets left in‐ Activating/deactivating the Key
side can lock the doors from the inside and lock Card in the vehicle
themselves in. In this case, the vehicle cannot To activate and deactivate the Key Card, there
be opened from the outside. There is a risk of must be a vehicle key in the vehicle.
injury. Carry the vehicle key with you so that
If BMW Digital Key is activated for the vehicle, a
you can open the vehicle from the outside.
digital key can be used instead of the vehicle
key.
WARNING 1. "CAR"
On some national-market versions, unlocking 2. "Settings"

from the inside is only possible with special 3. "Doors/Vehicle access"
knowledge. 4. "BMW Digital Key"
5. Select Key Card.
6. "Digital Key active"
88
A deactivated Key Card will remain in the list of

registered digital keys.
BMW Digital Key
Unlocking and locking the Principle

vehicle BMW Digital Key allows you to use a compatible
smartphone to lock, unlock and start the vehicle.
General
BMW Digital Key is available with Comfort Ac‐
cess. Depending on the national-market version,
BMW Digital Key may not be available.
To unlock and start a vehicle with a compatible
smartphone, this function must be offered by the
smartphone manufacturer. Users can check
Hold the activated Key Card directly and centrally whether the smartphone and the vehicle are
up against the outside door handle on the driv‐ compatible in the BMW Connected app.
er's door. A driver profile with individual settings can be as‐
signed to a digital key.
Starting the engine When using a smartphone with a digital key, al‐
ways have a vehicle key or the activated Key
Card about your person too. This will mean that
you can still access the vehicle even if the smart‐
phone is not working. It is also useful to have the
vehicle key or Key Card about your person if the
vehicle has to be handed over to another person.
The vehicle key or Key Card can then be handed
over, instead of the smartphone. Always take the
vehicle key with you to a service appointment.
1. Open the cover of the smartphone dock. Safety notes

2. Place the activated Key Card in the middle of
the smartphone tray. WARNING
3. Press the Start/Stop button to start the en‐ Persons remaining in the vehicle or pets left in‐
gine. side can lock the doors from the inside and lock
With wireless charging tray: The Key Card can themselves in. In this case, the vehicle cannot
be taken out of the tray after starting the engine be opened from the outside. There is a risk of
so that the tray can be used to charge compati‐ injury. Carry the vehicle key with you so that
ble smartphones. you can open the vehicle from the outside.
Malfunction
Objects between the sensors and the Key Card,
for example a purse or wallet, may prevent the
vehicle from detecting the Key Card.
89
▷ The smartphone battery is sufficiently

WARNING charged. The minimum battery charge re‐
On some national-market versions, unlocking quired depends on the smartphone in ques‐
from the inside is only possible with special tion.
knowledge.
There is a risk of injury or danger to life if per‐
Registering the main digital key
sons remain in the vehicle for extended periods The digital key installed on the vehicle owner's
and are exposed to extreme temperatures as a smartphone is registered as the main key in the
result. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside vehicle. The vehicle owner must provide evi‐
when there is someone inside it. dence of his/her authorisation for the vehicle for
this purpose.
Evidence of authorisation is provided via the
WARNING BMW Connected app and the two vehicle keys.
Both vehicle keys must be in the vehicle during
registration.
can set the vehicle in motion and endanger
themselves or other road users, for example by Open the BMW Connected app and follow the
the following actions: instructions.
▷ Pressing the start/stop button. Digital keys have limited validity periods that cor‐
respond to the duration of the booked service.
The expiry date can be checked in the BMW
▷ Opening and closing doors or windows. Connected app and in the vehicle.
▷ Engaging selector lever position N. If a digital key has expired, it can still be used to
▷ Operating vehicle equipment. drive the vehicle until the vehicle is operated with
There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not a different vehicle key or digital key.
cle. When leaving the vehicle, take the vehicle Sharing digital keys
General
Digital Key enables digital keys to be shared with
Connection to the vehicle other people. This option is provided via the
Communication between the vehicle and the smartphone on which the main digital key is
smartphone takes place via near field communi‐ stored.
cation, NFC.
Passing on authorisation
Operating requirements To share the digital key, select the correspond‐
▷ The smartphone is compatible with BMW ing menu item on the smartphone.
Digital Key. As soon as a digital key is shared with a person,
▷ The vehicle is linked with the Connected‐ this person receives a message. After confirming
Drive account of the vehicle owner. this message, the digital key is activated on the
recipient's smartphone.
▷ The BMW Connected app must be installed
on the smartphone in order to register the
main digital key.
90
Registering shared digital keys in 5. Select a digital key as necessary.

the vehicle 6. "Remove Digital Key"
The shared key is registered at the outside door The digital key is removed from the list of
handle or in the smartphone tray. The procedure registered digital keys.
can take a few seconds to complete. Corre‐
sponding information is displayed for your atten‐ Deleting all shared keys
tion on the smartphone or control display.
To enable all digital keys to be deleted, there
Once the digital key has been registered, its must be an authorised vehicle key in the vehicle
name appears in the list of digital keys. or the main digital key must be in the smart‐
phone tray.
Authentication
1. "CAR"
Depending on the recipient's smartphone model,
authentication may be required for security rea‐ 2. "Settings"
sons. 3. "Doors/Vehicle access"
An authorised vehicle key, the main digital key or 4. "BMW Digital Key"
another method can be used to perform the au‐ 5. "Remove all Digital Keys"
thentication. Corresponding information is dis‐
played for your attention on the smartphone or
Resetting the function
control display.
To reset BMW Digital Key function, there must
be an authorised vehicle key in the vehicle.
Deleting a shared key
All digital keys, including the main key, are de‐
General leted when the BMW Digital Key function is re‐
set.
Shared keys can be deleted via the smartphone
associated with the main digital key, via the Following the reset, it will no longer be possible
smartphone associated with a shared key or in to lock, unlock or start the vehicle with a digital
iDrive. key.
A shared key will only be deleted via the smart‐ The main digital key must be registered again in
phone associated with the main digital key if the order to be able to use BMW Digital Key again.
vehicle is being used with a key other than the 1. "CAR"
one that is to be deleted.
2. "Settings"
Deleted digital keys cannot be restored.
3. "Doors/Vehicle access"
Deletion in iDrive 4. "BMW Digital Key"
To enable a digital key to be deleted in iDrive, 5. "Reset function"

there must be an authorised vehicle key in the
vehicle or the main digital key must be in the
smartphone tray.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "BMW Digital Key"
91
Unlocking and locking the Selling the vehicle

vehicle Before selling a vehicle, reset the digital key
function or remove the vehicle from the Connec‐
tedDrive account of the current vehicle owner.
If the vehicle is removed from the Connected‐
Drive account, all digital keys for the vehicle are
deleted.
Malfunction
It may be difficult for the vehicle to detect the
digital key in some circumstances, including the
Hold the NFC antenna on the smartphone di‐ following:
rectly and centrally up against the outside door ▷ The smartphone is shielded from the sensors
handle on the driver's door. in the vehicle by an unsuitable smartphone
The position of the NFC antenna will depend on cover.
the smartphone model. ▷ There are objects between the smartphone
When using a smartphone to lock the vehicle, and its cover, such as a card with a chip or
make sure that all doors and the tailgate are the Key Card.
closed.
Integrated key
Starting the engine
General
With the integrated key, the driver's door can be
unlocked and locked without the vehicle key.
Depending on the national-market version, the
integrated key also fits in the glove compartment.
Use the integrated key to operate the key switch
for front passenger airbags.
1. Open the cover of the smartphone dock. Safety notes

2. Place the smartphone in the middle of the
smartphone tray. WARNING
3. Press the Start/Stop button to start the en‐ On some national-market versions, unlocking
gine. from the inside is only possible with special
knowledge.
Selling the smartphone There is a risk of injury or danger to life if per‐
Delete all digital keys from the smartphone be‐ sons remain in the vehicle for extended periods
fore selling it. This ensures that the smartphone and are exposed to extreme temperatures as a
has been deactivated for the vehicle. result. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
92
Support the cover with your thumb, to stop it

NOTE falling out of the door handle.
The door lock is fixed to the door. The door
handle can be moved. Pulling the door handle
when the integrated key is inserted can dam‐
age the paint or the integrated key. There is a
risk of material damage. Pull out the integrated
key before pulling on the outer door handle.
Removing
3. Remove the cover.
4. Unlock or lock the door lock with the
integrated key.
Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the

integrated key, arrow 2.
Unlocking/locking using the door The other doors must be unlocked or locked
lock from the inside.
1. Pull the door handle outwards with one hand
and hold it. Alarm system
The switched-on alarm system is triggered when
the door is opened after being unlocked via the
door lock.
The alarm system is not switched on if the vehi‐
cle is locked with the integrated key.
Central locking buttons

2. Slide one finger of your other hand under the General
cover from behind and push the cover out‐ In the event of an accident of sufficient severity,
wards. the vehicle is automatically unlocked. The hazard
warning lights and interior lights illuminate.
93
Overview The vehicle automatically recognises the vehicle

key when it is in the immediate vicinity or inside
the vehicle.
General
Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle using the
door handle.
▷ Contactless vehicle unlocking and locking.
Central locking buttons. ▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle using the
BMW Digital Key.
Locking ▷ Unlock the boot lid.
Press the button with the front doors

closed. Operating requirements
▷ To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must be
▷ The fuel tank filler flap remains unlocked. located outside the vehicle in the vicinity of
▷ Locking does not activate the vehicle's anti- the doors.
theft protection system. ▷ The vehicle can only be unlocked and locked
again after approximately 2 seconds.
To unlock
Press the button. To unlock
General
Opening The behaviour of the vehicle when unlocked via
▷ Press the button to unlock all the Comfort Access depends on the following set‐
doors together. tings:
Pull the door opener above the armrest. ▷ Whether the unlocking of the vehicle is ac‐
knowledged with a light signal or an acoustic
▷ Turn the door opener on the door to be
signal.
opened. The other doors remain locked.
▷ Whether the welcome light is switched on
Comfort Access
Principle
This feature allows you to access the vehicle
without having to operate the vehicle key.
Simply having the vehicle key with you, for exam‐
ple in your trouser pocket, is sufficient.
94
Unlocking the vehicle Locking the vehicle

Close the driver's door.
Fully grip the handle of a vehicle door.

With your finger, touch the grooved area on the
The following functions are also carried out:
handle of a closed vehicle door for approximately
▷ If a driver profile has been assigned to the ve‐ 1 second, without gripping the door handle.
hicle key, this driver profile is activated and
the settings saved in it are configured. The following functions are carried out:
▷ The interior light is switched on unless it was ▷ All the doors, the boot lid and fuel tank filler
switched off manually. flap are locked.
▷ Folded-in exterior mirrors are folded out. ▷ With anti-theft security system: The anti-theft
If the exterior mirrors were folded in using the security system is switched on. This prevents
button in the interior, they are not folded out the doors from being unlocked using the
when the vehicle is unlocked. locking buttons or the door handles.
▷ With anti-theft security system: The anti-theft ▷ With alarm system: The alarm system is
security system is switched off. switched on.
▷ With alarm system: The alarm system is

switched off. Unlocking the boot lid
Locking General
If the boot lid is opened using Comfort Access,
General locked doors are not unlocked.
The behaviour of the vehicle when locked via To prevent the vehicle key from being locked in,
Comfort Access depends on the following set‐ do not place it in the luggage compartment.
tings:
▷ Whether locking of the vehicle is acknowl‐
Safety notes
edged with a light signal or an acoustic signal.
▷ Whether the exterior mirrors are automatically WARNING
folded in when the vehicle is locked. If the Parts of the body can become trapped when
hazard warning lights are switched on, the ex‐ the boot lid is operated. There is a risk of injury.
terior mirrors are not folded in. When opening and closing, make sure that the
▷ Whether the home lights are activated when area of movement of the boot lid is kept clear.
95
If a person is detected on the front passenger

NOTE seat during locking and if the front passenger's
The boot lid swings rearwards and upwards seat belt is in the belt buckle during locking:
when opened. There is a risk of material dam‐ ▷ The vehicle is locked, but not protected
age. When opening and closing, make sure that against theft.
the area of movement of the boot lid is kept ▷ The fuel tank filler flap remains unlocked.
clear.
The behaviour of the vehicle in the case of con‐
tactless unlocking/locking depends on the
following settings:
Unlocking
▷ Whether automatic unlocking is active.
▷ Whether automatic locking is active.
▷ Whether only the driver's door and the fuel
tank filler flap or all vehicle access points are
unlocked.
Only driver's door and fuel tank filler flap: driv‐
er's door and fuel tank filler flap are only un‐
locked when the driver approaches the vehi‐
cle on the driver's side.
Press the button on the outside of the boot lid. All vehicle access points: the vehicle is un‐
locked regardless of which side the driver ap‐
proaches the vehicle from.
Contactless vehicle unlocking
▷ Whether the locking and unlocking of the ve‐
and locking
hicle is acknowledged with a light signal or an
acoustic signal.
Principle
▷ Whether the welcome light is switched on
The vehicle is unlocked when the driver ap‐
proaches the locked vehicle with the vehicle key.
▷ Whether the home lights are activated when
If the driver moves away from the unlocked vehi‐
cle with the vehicle key, the vehicle is locked.
▷ Whether the exterior mirrors are automatically
General folded out and in when the vehicle is un‐
locked and locked.
The vehicle is unlocked when an authorised ve‐
hicle key is detected in the unlocking zone.
The unlocking zone is an area with a radius of
▷ Drive-ready state must be switched off.
approximately 1 m, 3 ft from the door handles.
▷ Unlock: on entering the unlocking zone, the
The vehicle is locked when the vehicle key
doors and boot lid must be closed.
leaves the locking zone.
▷ Lock: on leaving the locking zone, the doors
The locking zone is an area with a radius of ap‐
and boot lid must be closed.
proximately 2 m, 7 ft from the door handles.
▷ There must not be a second vehicle key
If the vehicle key remains within the unlocking
within a radius of six metres of the vehicle in
zone without moving for a prolonged period of
order to use contactless vehicle locking.
time, the vehicle is locked automatically.
96
▷ If the vehicle has been in rest state for several Safety notes
days, contactless unlocking/locking is not
possible until the vehicle has been driven.
WARNING
Malfunction Parts of the body can become trapped when
the boot lid is operated. There is a risk of injury.
It may be difficult for the vehicle to detect the ve‐
When opening and closing, make sure that the
hicle key in some conditions, including the
area of movement of the boot lid is kept clear.
following:
▷ The battery of the vehicle key is discharged.
To replace the battery, see page 86. NOTE
▷ Disruption of the radio link by transmission The boot lid swings rearwards and upwards
masts or other equipment transmitting pow‐ when opened. There is a risk of material dam‐
erful signals. age. When opening and closing, make sure that
▷ Shielding of the vehicle key by metallic ob‐ the area of movement of the boot lid is kept
jects. clear.
Do not transport the vehicle key together with
metallic objects.
Opening and closing
▷ Disruption of the radio link by mobile tele‐
phones or other electronic devices in the im‐
mediate vicinity of the vehicle key.
Opening from outside
Do not transport the vehicle key together with
electronic devices.
Wet or snowy conditions may affect the ability of
the door handles to detect a lock request.
If a fault occurs, unlock and lock the vehicle with
the buttons on the vehicle key or with the
integrated key.
Integrated key, see page 92. ▷ Unlock the vehicle, then press the button on
the outside of the boot lid.
▷ With Comfort Access: have the vehicle key
Boot lid about your person and press the button on
the outside of the boot lid.
General
▷ Press and hold the button on the ve‐
To prevent the vehicle key from being locked in, hicle key for approximately 1 sec‐
do not place it in the luggage compartment. ond.
The tailgate may not open when the vehicle is in When you unlock with the vehicle key, the
parking service mode. doors may also be unlocked.
Parking service mode, see page 98.
97
Depending on the country: opening Operating requirements

from inside ▷ At least one driver profile has been created.
Press the button in the driver's door stor‐ ▷ A driver profile or the guest profile is active.
age compartment. ▷ A ConnectedDrive account is assigned to at
least one driver profile.
Closing
Calling up the menu for parking
service mode
Via the switch-off screen

The switch-off screen is displayed after switch‐
ing off the drive-ready state. Select the entry for
parking service mode in the switch-off screen.
Via the display bar at the top of the

Pull the boot lid down using the handle recess. Control Display
2. "Valet parking mode"
Parking service mode
Via the vehicle settings
Principle 1. "CAR"
The control display is disabled in parking service 2. "Settings"
mode. Operation via iDrive is no longer possible. 3. "General settings"
This mode can be used, for example, if the vehi‐ 4. "Valet parking mode"
cle is to be handed over to a parking service.
Activating parking service mode
General
In parking service mode, the vehicle settings General
cannot be changed via iDrive. The Personal Pro‐ Before activating parking service mode, a PIN
file cannot be changed. Personal data cannot be must be defined so that parking service mode
displayed. can be deactivated later on.
In addition, the following actions are performed: The procedure for entering a PIN varies depend‐
▷ The volume of the audio system is limited. ing on the active driver profile.
▷ The integrated remote control is deactivated.
▷ DSC cannot be switched off.
Driver profile with PIN
A PIN has been defined for the active driver pro‐
▷ Depending on the vehicle, the boot lid can be
file.
locked and disconnected from the central
locking system. It is not necessary to enter another PIN.
1. Depending on the vehicle, select the desired

setting as applicable:
98
"Lock tailgate as well" How parking service mode is deactivated de‐

The boot lid is locked and disconnected from pends on which driver profile is selected on the
the central locking system. lock screen.
2. "Activate now"
Driver profile with PIN
Driver profile without PIN Regardless of which driver has activated parking
service mode, a driver can deactivate parking
A PIN must be assigned to the driver profile.
service mode by entering his/her PIN.
1. "PIN"
2. PIN required.
2. Enter the PIN assigned to the driver profile.
3. Depending on the vehicle, select the desired
If you have forgotten the PIN, parking service
setting as applicable:
mode must be deactivated by entering the as‐
▷ "Lock tailgate as well" signed ConnectedDrive login details.
The boot lid is locked and disconnected
from the central locking system. Driver profile without PIN
▷ "Activate linkage" Parking service mode was activated by a differ‐
This PIN is defined for the active driver ent person. To deactivate parking service mode,
profile. a driver without a PIN must enter the login details
for his/her ConnectedDrive account.
4. "Activate now"
Guest profile 2. Enter the ConnectedDrive login details as‐
The active driver profile is the guest profile. signed to the driver profile.
A PIN must be entered.
Guest profile
1. "PIN"
It is only possible to deactivate parking service
2. PIN required. mode in the guest profile if the mode was activa‐
3. Select the desired setting: ted in the guest profile.
"Lock tailgate as well" 1. Select the guest profile.
The boot lid is locked and disconnected from 2. Enter the PIN that was set during activation.
the central locking system.
If you have forgotten the PIN, parking service
4. "Activate now" mode must be deactivated via a personal driver
This PIN can be used once to deactivate profile.
parking service mode when the guest profile
is active.
Settings
Deactivating parking service
mode General
Various settings are possible for opening and
General closing, depending on the equipment and the
The lock screen for parking service mode is dis‐ country specifications.
played on the Control Display.
99
These settings are saved for the current driver Automatic folding of the mirrors
profile. 1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Unlocking and locking
Doors 4. "Fold mirrors in when locked"
1. "CAR"
Automatic unlocking
2. "Settings"
1. "CAR"
3. "Key button assignment"
2. "Settings"
4. Select the symbol.
4. "Unlock at end of journey"
▷ "Driver's door only"
After drive-ready state has been switched off
Only the driver's door and fuel tank filler
by pressing the start/stop button, the locked
flap are unlocked. Pressing again unlocks
vehicle is automatically unlocked.
the entire vehicle.
▷ "All doors" Automatic locking
The entire vehicle is unlocked. 1. "CAR"
▷ "Comfort entry" 2. "Settings"
The entire vehicle is unlocked. 3. "Doors/Vehicle access"
Pressing the button on the vehicle key 4. Select the desired setting:
twice in direct succession causes the win‐
▷ "Lock automatically"
dow to be lowered further when the door
is subsequently opened. The vehicle is automatically locked again
after a short while if no doors are opened
Vehicle acknowledgement signals after unlocking.
1. "CAR" ▷ "Lock after pulling away"
2. "Settings" On driving off, the vehicle is locked auto‐

matically.
4. Deactivate or activate desired acknowledge‐ Boot lid
ment signals:
▷ "Flash for lock/unlock" Boot lid and doors
Unlocking is acknowledged by flashing Depending on the equipment and the country
twice, locking by flashing once. specifications, these settings may not be avail‐
▷ With alarm system: able.
"Acoustic signal for lock/unlock" 1. "CAR"
Unlocking is acknowledged by an acous‐ 2. "Settings"
tic signal sounding twice, locking by the
3. "Key button assignment"
acoustic signal sounding once.
4. Select the symbol.
100
▷ "Tailgate" ▷ Improper use of the socket for on-board diag‐

The boot lid is opened. nosis OBD.
▷ "Tailgate and door(s)" ▷ Locking of the vehicle while a device is con‐
nected to the socket for on-board diagnosis
The boot lid is opened and the doors are
OBD.
unlocked.
The alarm system indicates these changes visu‐
ally and audibly:
Comfort Access
▷ Audible alarm:
Contactless locking and unlocking Depending on local regulations, the acoustic
1. "CAR" alarm may be suppressed.
2. "Settings" ▷ Visual alarm:
3. "Doors/Vehicle access" By flashing of the hazard warning lights and, if
applicable, the headlights.
4. "Comfort access"
To ensure that the alarm system functions prop‐
erly, do not modify the system.
▷ "Unlock by approaching"
▷ "Lock by leaving" Switching on/off
The alarm system is switched off or on as soon
Establishing rest state after as the vehicle is unlocked or locked with the ve‐
opening the front doors hicle key or using Comfort Access.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings" Opening the doors when the
alarm system is switched on
The alarm system is triggered on opening a door
4. "Switch off after door opening"
if the door has been unlocked using the
Rest state, see page 43. integrated key in the door lock.
Opening the boot lid with the

Alarm system
alarm system switched on
The boot lid can be opened even with the alarm
General system switched on.
The alarm system responds to the following
On closing the boot lid, it is locked again and
changes in a locked vehicle:
monitored, as long as the doors are locked. The
▷ A door, the front flap or the tailgate is opened. hazard warning lights flash once.
▷ Movements inside the vehicle.
▷ A change in vehicle inclination, for instance if
an attempt is made to jack it up and steal the
wheels or to raise it prior to towing away.
▷ An interruption in the power supply from the
battery.
101
Indicator lamp on the rear-view system, including the interior movement detec‐
mirror tor, is switched on even when the convertible top
is open. Falling objects such as leaves can acci‐
dentally trigger false warnings.
Avoiding false warnings
General
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior movement
detector may trigger an alarm without any unau‐
thorised activity taking place.
▷ Indicator lamp flashes every 2 seconds: Situations where false warnings may occur:
The alarm system is switched on. ▷ In washing bays or car washes.
▷ Indicator lamp flashes for approximately ▷ In two-level garages.

10 seconds then switches to flashing every ▷ When transporting the vehicle via motorail,
2 seconds: car ferry or trailer.
The interior movement detector and tilt alarm ▷ When there are pets in the vehicle.
sensor are not active because the doors, ▷ When the vehicle is locked after starting to
front flap or tailgate are not closed correctly. refuel.
Correctly closed access points are secured.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior movement de‐
Once the remaining open access points have tector can be switched off for such situations.
been closed, the interior movement detector
and tilt alarm sensor are switched on. Switching off the tilt alarm sensor
▷ The indicator lamp extinguishes after the ve‐ and interior movement detector
hicle has been unlocked:
Within 10 seconds of locking the vehicle,
This means that the vehicle is not being tam‐ press the button on the vehicle key.
pered with.
The indicator lamp illuminates for approximately
▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking un‐ 2 seconds and then flashes again.
til drive-ready state is switched on, but for no
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior movement
longer than approximately 5 minutes:
detector are switched off until the next time the
The alarm has been triggered. vehicle is locked.
Tilt alarm sensor Stopping the alarm

The incline of the vehicle is monitored. ▷ Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key.
The alarm system responds, for example when ▷ Unlock the vehicle with the integrated key
there is an attempt to steal a wheel or tow the and switch on drive-ready state using the
vehicle away. emergency detection feature of the vehicle
key.
Interior movement detector Malfunction, see page 87.
The passenger compartment is monitored to the
height of the seat cushions. Therefore the alarm
102
▷ With Comfort Access: fully grip the handle of Operating requirements

the driver's or front passenger door while car‐
The windows can be operated under the
rying the vehicle key.
following conditions.
Power window switches ▷ Drive-ready state is switched on.
▷ For a short while after rest state has been es‐
General tablished.
The windows can be opened and closed from The vehicle key must be in the vehicle interior.
outside with the vehicle key.
If a window is often opened to the same point, Opening
this task can be carried out by the BMW Intelli‐ ▷ Push the switch as far as the resist‐
gent Personal Assistant. For example, if you of‐ ance point.
ten use the same car park. The window opens for as long as the switch
For further information: is held.
Vehicle key, see page 83. ▷ Push the switch past the resistance
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, see point.
page 58. The window is opened automatically. Press‐
ing the switch again stops the movement.
Safety note
Closing
WARNING ▷ Pull the switch as far as the resist‐
ance point.
the windows are operated. There is a risk of in‐ The window closes for as long as the switch
jury or material damage. When opening and is held.
closing, make sure that the area of movement ▷ Pull the switch past the resistance
of the windows is kept clear. point.
The window closes automatically if the door
is closed. Pulling the switch again stops the
Overview movement.
Anti-trap mechanism
Principle
The anti-trap mechanism prevents objects or
parts of the body from becoming trapped be‐
tween the door frame and window while a win‐
dow is being closed.
Power window switches
103
General If you exceed a speed of approximately 50 km/h,

If resistance or a blockage is detected while a 30 mph while the convertible top is moving, the
window is being closed, the closing operation is movement will be halted.
interrupted. Comply with the following notes:
The window is opened slightly. ▷ Close the convertible top when the vehicle is
parked. A closed convertible top protects the
Safety note vehicle against weather damage and, to a
limited extent, against theft.
▷ Even if the convertible top is closed, always
WARNING
stow valuable items in the locked boot.
Accessories on the windows, for example aer‐
▷ At higher speeds, the negative pressure gen‐
ials, can impair the anti-trap mechanism. There
erated in the interior of the vehicle can cause
is a risk of injury. Do not attach any accessories
the convertible top to start wobbling. Use the
within the area of movement of the windows.
ventilation system to increase the air flow so
that no partial vacuum is created in the vehi‐
Closing without the anti-trap cle.
mechanism ▷ The engine cannot be started at the same
time the convertible top is operated. When
If an external hazard or ice prevents you from
starting the motor using the start/stop button
closing the windows normally, proceed as fol‐
or through the Auto Start Stop function, the
lows:
roof movement is briefly interrupted.
▷ Closing of the convertible top is interrupted
1. Pull the switch past the resistance
when a door is opened.
point and hold it in this position.
▷ To save battery power, move the convertible
The window is closed but with limited anti-
top only when the engine is running.
trap function. If the closing force exceeds a
certain level, the closing operation is interrup‐ ▷ Before opening the convertible top, remove
ted. any objects stored in its compartment.
▷ Before closing the convertible top, remove
2. Pull the switch past the resistance any foreign objects from the windscreen
point again within approximately 4 seconds frame, otherwise they may prevent the top
and hold it in this position. from closing.
The window is closed with no anti-trap func‐
tion. Safety notes
Convertible top WARNING

opening and closing the convertible top. There
General is a risk of injury. When opening and closing the
The convertible top can be opened or closed convertible top, observe its movement and
while travelling at speeds up to approximately keep the area of movement clear.
50 km/h, 30 mph.
104
▷ Do not leave the convertible top open for

WARNING more than one day if wet.
When operating the convertible top during the ▷ Do not open the convertible top if it is wet,
journey, the rear view may be obstructed. The covered with snow, iced over or dirty.
convertible top stops in its current position ▷ Do not place any objects on the
when the vehicle speed exceeds 50 km/h, convertible top.
30 mph. There is a risk of accident and material
▷ The roll-over protection system must not
damage. When operating the convertible top
be triggered.
during the journey, pay close attention to traffic
conditions and reduce speed if necessary. Do ▷ Do not operate the convertible top on un‐
not operate while driving in reverse or in windy even roads.
conditions. ▷ Always open or close the convertible top
all the way. The convertible top is only
locked when it is in its end positions.
WARNING
The convertible top is not suitable for installing Overview
roof rack systems. The roof rack system could
become loose. There is a risk of accident. Do With manual transmission
not install any roof rack systems on the
convertible top.
WARNING
If the convertible top is not fully open or closed,
it will not be locked and consequently it may
come open of its own accord as a result of the
airstream. There is a risk of injury or material
damage. Make sure that the convertible top is
Roof switch
fully opened or closed.
With Steptronic transmission

NOTE
The convertible top and other parts of the vehi‐
cle can become damaged if operated incor‐
rectly.
There is a risk of material damage. Observe the
following points during operation:
▷ The convertible top swings out and up‐
wards. Make sure that this area of move‐
ment is kept clear. Maximum range of
movement: 2.5 m/98.5 in.
Roof switch
▷ Close the boot lid fully.
105
Operating requirements The convertible top movement is interrupted if

the switch is released. The sequence can be
The following conditions must be met so that the
continued in the desired direction using the
convertible top can move.
switch.
▷ Drive-ready state is switched on.
In this case, the convertible top is not locked.
▷ Standby state is switched on and the brake Operate the switch again until the convertible top
pedal is depressed. operation is finished.
▷ The outside temperature is above
-10 ℃/14 ℉. Operating from outside
▷ The on-board voltage is sufficient. For vehicles equipped with Comfort Access, the
▷ The convertible top drive has not overheated. convertible top can also be operated from the
▷ The vehicle speed is not too high. outside.
▷ The windows can be opened and closed au‐ The convenient opening and convenient closing
tomatically. functions are performed using the vehicle key.
If one of these conditions is not met, a Check For further information:

Control message is displayed. Vehicle key, see page 83.
Operating from inside Closing the convertible top

manually
Opening
Pull and hold the switch. General
In the event of a fault, the convertible top can be
The windows are lowered and the convertible closed manually. This requires two persons.
top opens for as long as the switch is pressed. If possible, have an opened convertible top
After the convertible top has been completely closed manually by a Service Partner of the man‐
opened, the switch can be held or briefly pulled ufacturer or another qualified Service Partner or a
again, to raise the windows again. specialist workshop.
Closing Safety notes

Push and hold the switch.
WARNING
The windows are lowered, the convertible top In the event of an electrical fault, the convertible
closes and the windows are raised again for as top cannot be locked in the fully open position.
long as the switch is pressed. The convertible top will rise up while the vehi‐
cle is moving. There is a risk of accident. Do not
Avoiding interruption open the convertible top manually.
Push or pull the switch until the convertible top is
opened or closed all the way and the end of the
process is indicated by a Check Control mes‐
sage. Ensure that the side cover flaps are always
fully closed. The convertible top only locks if it is
fully open or closed.
106
3. Turn the screw on the left side of the vehicle

WARNING anticlockwise as far as it will go. Turn the
Parts of the body can become trapped when screw on the right side of the vehicle clock‐
closing the convertible top manually. Operating wise as far as it will go.
the convertible top on one side only may dam‐
age the convertible top. There is a risk of injury
or material damage. Make sure that the area of
movement of the convertible top and
convertible top compartment lid is kept clear.
Only close the convertible top manually with
two persons.
Before closing
4. Lift out the front part of the convertible top at
1. Lower the side windows fully. both sides and swivel it forwards.
2. Switch off standby state.
Start/stop button, see page 131.
3. Take the hexagon key from the on-board tool
kit.
Lifting out the convertible top

1. Swivel the covers up carefully on both sides
until they are open.
2. Insert the hexagon key into the screw.
107
Locking the convertible top To open the lock hooks, turn the hexagon
1. Carefully remove the cover in the middle of key to the right as far as it will go.
the front convertible top frame.
5. While one person presses the middle of the

2. Take the square socket adapter out of the front convertible top frame against the wind‐
cover. screen frame from the outside: to close the
lock hooks, turn the hexagon key to the left
as far as it will go. The front convertible top
frame must be locked in the windscreen
frame.
6. Have the convertible top checked by a Serv‐
ice Partner of the manufacturer or another
qualified Service Partner or a specialist work‐
shop.
3. Attach the square socket adapter to the hex‐ NOTE

agon key. Driving in the rain or on wet roads with the
convertible top only locked at the front will al‐
low water to get into the interior. There is a risk
of material damage. If it is raining or the roads
are wet, do not drive with the convertible top
only locked at the front.
NOTE
Driving at speeds above 80 km/h, 50 mph with
4. Attach the hexagon key, with the adapter the convertible top only locked at the front may
connected to it, to the convertible top lock damage the convertible top. There is a risk of
(arrow). material damage. Do not exceed a speed of
80 km/h, 50 mph with the convertible top only
locked at the front.
Have the convertible top checked by a Service

Partner of the manufacturer or another qualified
Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
108
Wind deflector The magnetic retention force must be noticea‐

ble.
Principle
Removing
The wind deflector reduces air movement inside
the vehicle when driving with the convertible top
open.
The wind deflector works best if the side win‐
dows are closed.
General
The integrated wind deflector is held in position
by magnets.
The magnets are located at the bottom of the Pull the wind deflector up evenly.
wind deflector mount.
The magnetic retention force must be overcome
Do not keep any electronic storage media, cards when pulling the wind deflector out of the
with magnetic strips or smart cards in the imme‐ guides.
diate vicinity of the magnets.
Safety note
WARNING
A wind deflector that is not attached to the ve‐
hicle correctly may come loose and be flung
into the vehicle or endanger other road users.
There is a risk of injury or material damage.
Before driving off, check that the wind deflector
is pushed down as far as it will go and attached
properly.
Attaching
Push the wind deflector down evenly as far as it

will go.
109
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

Vehicle equipment
WARNING
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ If the backrest is angled back too far, the pro‐
cific and optional equipment available for the tective function of the seat belt will no longer
model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ be guaranteed. There is a risk of sliding under
ment and functions which are not installed in the seat belt in the event of an accident. There
your vehicle, for example on account of the op‐ is a risk of injury or even death. Adjust the seat
tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐ before starting the journey. Adjust the backrest
cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ to the most upright position possible, and do
tions and systems. Please comply with the not change it during the journey.
WARNING
Safe seating position There is a risk of entrapment when the seats

are moved. There is a risk of injury or material
damage. Before making any adjustment, make
A seating position that suitably meets the needs
sure that the area of movement of the seat is
of the occupants is essential for relaxed driving
clear.
with minimum fatigue.
In an accident, the correct seating position plays
an important role. Comply with the notes in the Manually adjustable seats
following chapters.
For further information: Overview
▷ Seats, see page 110.
▷ Seat belts, see page 113.
▷ Head restraints, see page 115.
▷ Airbags, see page 177.
Seats
Safety notes 1 Thigh support
2 Seat angle
WARNING 3 Forward/back
Adjusting the seat during a journey could cause 4 Lumbar support
the seat to move unexpectedly. You could lose
5 Backrest width
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of acci‐
dent. Only adjust the seat on the driver's side 6 Height
when at a standstill. 7 Backrest angle
110
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS
Forward/back Backrest angle
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired di‐ Pull the lever and apply your weight to or lift your
rection. weight off the backrest as required.
After releasing the lever, move the seat gently
forward or back to make sure it engages prop‐ Electrically adjustable seats
erly.
General
Seat angle The driver's seat setting is saved for the current
profile. If a driver profile is selected, the saved
position is retrieved automatically.
The current seat position can be saved using the
memory function.
Overview
Pull the lever up or press the lever down repeat‐

edly until the seat reaches the desired angle.
Height
1 Forward/back, height, seat angle

2 Backrest angle
3 Backrest width
4 Lumbar support
Pull the lever up or press the lever down repeat‐

edly until the seat reaches the desired height.
111
Forward/back Backrest angle
Press the switch forwards or backwards. Tilt the switch forwards or backwards.
Height Thigh support
Sport seat
Press the switch up or down.
Seat angle Pull the lever on the front of the seat and adjust
the thigh support forwards or backwards.
Lumbar support
Principle
The curvature of the backrest can be changed to
provide support for the lumbar region, or lordo‐
sis. The upper edge of the pelvis and the spinal
column are supported to encourage an upright
Tilt the switch up or down. posture.
Adjusting
▷ Press the button at the front/
rear:
The curvature is increased/
decreased.
112
▷ Press the button at the top/bottom: Safety notes

The curvature is shifted upwards/downwards.
WARNING
Backrest width If a seat belt is used by more than one person
at the same time, the protective function of the
Principle seat belt is no longer guaranteed. There is a
To adjust the backrest width can improve lateral risk of injury or even death. Only one person
support when taking corners. should use each seat belt at any one time. Do
not allow infants and children to travel on the
General lap of another occupant. Instead, secure the in‐
fant or child in a child restraint system intended
The backrest width is changed by adjusting the for this purpose.
side sections of the backrest on the driver's side.
Adjusting
WARNING
▷ Press the button at the front:
The protective function of the seat belts may
Backrest width is reduced. be limited or may even fail completely if the
▷ Press the button at the rear: seat belts are worn incorrectly. If a seat belt is
not worn correctly, additional injuries can be
Backrest width is increased.
caused, for example in the event of an accident,
braking or evasive action. There is a risk of in‐
jury or even death. Make sure that all vehicle
Seat belts occupants have fastened their seat belts cor‐
rectly.
Number of seat belts and belt
buckles
WARNING
For the safety of the vehicle occupants, the vehi‐
cle is equipped with two seat belts. However, Seat belts are designed to bear upon the bony
they can only provide effective protection when structure of the body and should be worn low
worn correctly. across the front of the pelvis, or the pelvis,
chest and shoulders, as applicable. Wearing the
General lap section of the belt across the abdominal
area must be avoided.
Before each journey, always make sure that all
occupants have fastened their seat belts. The Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as pos‐
airbags supplement the seat belts as an addi‐ sible, consistent with comfort, to provide the
tional safety device. The airbags are not a substi‐ protection for which they have been designed.
tute for the seat belts. A slack seat belt will greatly reduce the protec‐
tion afforded to the wearer.
The belt anchorage is suitable for adults of any
stature if the seat is adjusted correctly. Care should be taken to avoid contamination of
the webbing by polishes, oils and chemicals
and particularly battery acid. Cleaning may
safely be carried out using a mild soap and wa‐
ter solution. The seat belt should be replaced if
the seat belt strap becomes frayed, contamina‐
113
ted or damaged. Seat belts should not be worn ▷ Make sure that the seat belt is positioned low
with straps twisted. Each seat belt assembly at the hips in the area of the pelvis. The seat
must only be used by one occupant; it is forbid‐ belt must not press on the abdomen.
den to put a belt around a child being carried ▷ The seat belt must not be allowed to rub
on the occupant's lap. against sharp edges, be routed over solid or
It is essential to replace the entire assembly af‐ breakable objects or be trapped.
ter it has been worn in a severe impact even if ▷ Avoid wearing bulky clothing.
damage to the assembly is not obvious.
▷ Keep the seat belt taut by occasionally pulling
upwards on the upper section.
WARNING
Adjustment for automatic
No modifications or additions should be made retracting seat belts
by the user that will either prevent the seat belt
▷ Draw the buckle tongue attached to the seat
adjusting devices from operating to remove
belt across the body and press it into the
slack, or prevent the seat belt assembly from
buckle catch until a ‘click’ is heard.
being adjusted to remove slack.
▷ Adjustment of the belt length is very impor‐
tant. To adjust the lap belt and check
whether the buckle has locked correctly, pull
WARNING
upwards on the shoulder strap until the lap
The protective function of the seat belts may belt fits tightly.
be limited or may even fail completely in the
▷ The length of the diagonal shoulder strap ad‐
following situations:
justs itself automatically to allow freedom of
▷ If the seat belts or belt buckles are dam‐ movement.
aged, dirty or have been modified in an‐
▷ To release the seat belt, press the button on
other way.
the buckle catch unit.
▷ If the belt tensioners or belt retractors
have been modified.
Fastening the seat belt
Seat belts can be damaged in an accident with‐
1. When fastening the seat belt, guide it slowly
out the damage necessarily being apparent.
over the shoulder and pelvis.
There is a risk of injury or even death. Do not
modify seat belts, belt buckles, belt tensioners, 2. Insert the seat belt tongue in the belt buckle.
belt retractors and belt anchor points and en‐ The seat belt buckle must be heard to en‐
sure that they are kept clean. After an accident, gage.
have the seat belts inspected at a Service Part‐
ner of the manufacturer or another qualified
Correct seat belt use

▷ Insert the seat belt into the belt guide.
▷ Place the seat belt tightly over the pelvis and
shoulder, close to the body and without twist‐
ing.
114
Unfastening the seat belt Front head restraints

1. Hold the seat belt firmly.
2. Press the red button on the belt buckle. Safety notes
3. Guide the seat belt back up to the reel mech‐
anism.
WARNING
If the head restraints are removed or incorrectly
Belt guide
adjusted, they cannot provide protection as in‐
tended and head and neck injuries may result.
There is a risk of injury.
▷ Before a journey, re-install any removed
head restraints on all occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so that its centre
supports the back of the head at eye level
where possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
straint is as close as possible to the back
When fastening the seat belts, make sure that
of the head. If necessary, adjust the dis‐
the belt guide is closed.
tance by adjusting the backrest angle.
The magnet may open if the seat position has
been changed.
WARNING
Seat belt reminder for driver and Parts of the body can become trapped when
front passenger seat the head restraints are moved. There is a risk of
injury. When moving the head restraint, make
General sure that the area of movement is kept clear.
The seat belt reminder is activated when the

seat belt on the driver's side is not fastened.
WARNING
The seat belt warning will also be activated if a
seat belt is unfastened during the journey. Objects on the head restraint impair the protec‐
tive function of the head restraint in the head
On some national-market versions, the seat belt
and neck area. There is a risk of injury.
reminder is also active if the front passenger seat
belt is not fastened and heavy objects are on the ▷ Do not fit any covers on the seats or head
front passenger seat. restraints.
▷ Do not hang objects such as coat hangers
Display in the instrument cluster directly on the head restraint.
A Check Control message is shown. ▷ Only use accessories that have been clas‐
Check whether the seat belt has been sified as safe for attaching to the head re‐
fastened correctly. straint.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for example
cushions, during the journey.
115
Adjusting the height Overview

The head restraints cannot be adjusted in height.
Adjusting the distance

The distance from the back of the head is adjus‐
ted by the seat backrest angle.
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is
as close as possible to the back of the head.
Removing
1 Adjusting
The head restraints cannot be removed.
2 To select a mirror, automatic parking function
3 To fold in and out
Exterior mirror
Electrical adjustment
General
Press the button.
The mirror setting is saved for the current driver
The selected mirror moves in response to
profile. If a driver profile is selected, the saved
the button movement.
position is retrieved automatically.
The current exterior mirror position can be saved
with the memory function. Selecting a mirror
To switch to the other mirror:
Safety note Push the switch.
WARNING
Malfunction
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than
In the event of an electrical fault, press the edges
they appear. The distance to road users behind
of the mirror glass to adjust the mirror.
the vehicle could be incorrectly estimated, for
example when changing lane. There is a risk of
accident. Look over your shoulder to estimate To fold in and out
the distance from following traffic.
NOTE
Because of its width, the vehicle could sustain
damage in car washes. There is a risk of mate‐
rial damage. Before washing, fold the mirrors in
manually or with the button.
Press the button.
The mirrors can be folded in at vehicle speeds

up to approx. 20 km/h, 15 mph.
116
Folding the mirrors in and out is useful in the

Rear-view mirror, manual-
▷ In car washes.
dim
▷ In narrow streets.
Mirrors which are folded in automatically fold out
when the vehicle reaches a speed of approxi‐
mately 40 km/h, 25 mph.
Automatic heating
If required, both exterior mirrors are automatically
heated when drive-ready state is switched on.
Automatic dimming To reduce glare tilt the lever on the rear-view

mirror forward.
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto‐
matically dimmed. Photocells in the rear-view
mirror are used to control this function.
Rear-view mirror with
Automatic parking function, automatic anti-dazzle
exterior mirror function
Principle
When reverse gear is engaged, the passenger-
General
side mirror glass is tilted downwards. This pro‐ The rear-view mirror is dimmed automatically.
vides a better view of the kerb or other obstacles The function is controlled by photocells:
near the ground, for example when parking. ▷ In the mirror glass.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
Activating
1. Push the switch to the driver's mirror Overview

position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
Deactivating
Push the switch to the passenger-side mirror po‐
sition.
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not obstruct the zone between the rear-
view mirror and the windscreen.
117
Steering wheel Switching on/off

Press the button.
Safety note A Check Control message is shown.
If a journey is resumed within about 15 minutes

WARNING following a temporary stop, the steering wheel
Adjusting the steering wheel while driving may heating is activated automatically again, provided
cause the steering wheel to move unexpect‐ that the function was switched on at the end of
edly. You could lose control of the vehicle. the last journey.
There is a risk of accident. Only adjust the
steering wheel when the vehicle is at a stand‐ Manual transmission: electric
still. steering wheel lock
Manual steering wheel WARNING

adjustment If steering wheel lock is activated, the vehicle
cannot be steered. There is a risk of accident.
Switch on the standby state prior to moving the
vehicle.
The steering wheel locks automatically when the

driver's door is opened from inside.
Switch on standby state to unlock.
Memory function
1. Fold the lever downwards.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seated position.
Principle
The memory function enables the following set‐
3. Swing the lever back up.
tings to be stored and retrieved when required:
Steering wheel heating ▷ Seat position.

▷ Exterior mirror position.
Overview ▷ Height of the Head-Up Display.
General
For each driver profile, two memory slots can be
assigned with different settings.
The following settings are not saved:
▷ Backrest width.
▷ Lumbar support.
Button for steering wheel heating
118
Safety notes The operation is halted when you press a seat

adjustment switch or press one of the memory
buttons again.
WARNING
Once underway, adjustment of the seat position
Using the memory function while driving may on the driver's side is disabled after a short while.
cause the seat or steering wheel to move unex‐
pectedly. You could lose control of the vehicle.
There is a risk of accident. Only call up the Seat heating
memory function when the vehicle is at stand‐
still.
Overview
WARNING
There is a risk of entrapment when the seats
are moved. There is a risk of injury or material
damage. Before making any adjustment, make
sure that the area of movement of the seat is
clear.
Overview Seat heating
Switching on
Press the button once for each temper‐
ature level.
The highest level is selected if the three LEDs
are illuminated.
If ECO PRO is activated, the heater output is re‐

The memory buttons are on the front doors. duced.
Saving ECO PRO, see page 270.
1. Set the desired position.
Switching off
2. Press the button. The lettering in the Press and hold the button until the
button is illuminated. LEDs are extinguished.
3. Press the desired button 1 or 2 while the let‐
tering is illuminated. A signal sounds.
Recalling
Press the desired button 1 or 2.
The saved position is called up.
119
Regulation climate control

Principle
Some heating and cooling functions can be acti‐
vated automatically depending on the outside
temperature.
General
The outside temperature from which the func‐
tions are to be activated automatically can be set
using iDrive.
Activation is performed if the outside tempera‐
ture exceeds or falls below the set temperature
in the first few minutes after drive-ready state
has been switched on. A new alignment is car‐
ried out after the settings have been changed.
Depending on the equipment version, the
following functions can be activated automati‐
cally:
▷ Seat heating.
▷ Steering wheel heating.
If the journey is continued within about 15 mi‐
nutes after a temporary stop, the functions are
automatically activated with the most recent set‐
tings.
▷ The seat belt of the driver's seat is fastened.
▷ The drive-ready state is switched on.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Climate comfort"
4. "Regulation climate control"
5. Select the desired function.
6. Activate the required rule.
7. If applicable, adjust the level.
120
Carrying children safely CONTROLS
Carrying children safely

Vehicle equipment
WARNING
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Hot vehicles can have fatal consequences, in
cific and optional equipment available for the particular for children or pets. There is a risk of
model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ injury or even death. Do not leave anyone unsu‐
ment and functions which are not installed in pervised in the vehicle, especially children or
your vehicle, for example on account of the op‐ pets.
tions and systems. Please comply with the WARNING
Child restraint systems and their parts can get
very hot when exposed to direct sunlight. Con‐
tact with hot parts can cause burns. There is a
Important considerations risk of injury. Do not expose the child restraint
system to direct sunlight; cover the child re‐
straint system if necessary. It may be necessary
Safety notes to allow the child restraint system to cool down
before strapping a child in. Do not leave chil‐
dren unsupervised in the vehicle.
WARNING
can set the vehicle in motion and endanger Not for Australia/New Zealand:
themselves or other road users, for example by Children on the front passenger
seat
▷ Pressing the start/stop button.
▷ Releasing the parking brake. General
▷ Opening and closing doors or windows. When using a child restraint system on the front
▷ Engaging selector lever position N. passenger seat, make sure that the front and
side airbags on the passenger side are deactiva‐
ted. Front passenger airbags can only be deacti‐
There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not vated with the key switch for front passenger air‐
leave children or pets unsupervised in the vehi‐ bags. If the front passenger airbags cannot be
cle. When leaving the vehicle, take the vehicle deactivated, do not carry children on the front
key with you and lock the vehicle. passenger seat, even in suitable child restraint
systems.
Key switch for front passenger airbags, see
page 179.
121
CONTROLS Carrying children safely
Safety note avoidance manoeuvres. There is a risk of injury

or even death.
WARNING Child restraint systems that are damaged or

have been subjected to stresses in an accident
Active front passenger airbags can injure a child must not be used further.
in a child restraint system if they are deployed.
There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the front If attachment systems have been damaged or
passenger airbags are deactivated and the subjected to stresses in an accident, have them
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is il‐ checked and replaced by a Service Partner of
luminated. the manufacturer, another qualified Service
Partner or a specialist workshop.
WARNING
WARNING
Children under 150 cm, 5 ft tall cannot wear
the seat belt correctly without using additional If the seat is not adjusted properly or the child
child restraint systems. The protective function seat has been installed incorrectly, the child re‐
of the seat belts may be limited or may even fail straint system may have limited stability or may
completely if the seat belts are worn incorrectly. not be stable at all. There is a risk of injury or
If a seat belt is not worn correctly, additional in‐ even death. Make sure that the child restraint
juries can be caused, for example in the event system rests firmly against the backrest. Wher‐
of an accident, braking or evasive action. There ever possible, adapt the backrest angle of all
is a risk of injury or even death. Children under the relevant seat backrests and adjust the seats
150 cm, 5 ft tall must be secured in suitable correctly. Make sure that the seats and their
child restraint systems. backrests are correctly engaged or locked. If
possible, adjust the height of the head re‐
straints, or remove them.
Fitting child restraints

For Australia/New Zealand:
General installation of child restraints
Please note the following warning because your
Please comply with the operating and safety in‐
vehicle has been equipped with a front airbag for
structions provided by the child restraint system
the front passenger's seat that cannot be deacti‐
manufacturer when selecting, attaching and us‐
vated:
ing child restraint systems.
It is recommended not to use any kind of
Safety notes child restraint system on the front pas‐
senger's seat.
WARNING
If child restraint systems and their attachment Extreme hazard
systems have been damaged or subjected to Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a
stresses in an accident, their protective func‐ seat protected by an airbag in front of it.
tion may be limited or may fail completely. A
child might not be adequately restrained, for ex‐
ample in the event of an accident, braking or
122
Not for Australia/New Zealand:

On the front passenger seat
Deactivating airbags
WARNING
Active front passenger airbags can injure a child
in a child restraint system if they are deployed.
There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the front Follow the information on the front passenger
passenger airbags are deactivated and the sun visor.
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is il‐ Never use a rearward-facing child restraint on a
luminated. seat protected by an active airbag in front of it, as
death or serious injury to the child can occur.
Before fitting a child restraint on the front pas‐
senger seat, make sure that the front and side
airbags on the passenger side are disabled. If the Seat position and height
airbag cannot be deactivated, do not fit child re‐ Before installing a universal child restraint sys‐
straint systems. tem, move the front passenger seat as far back
For further information: as it will go and adjust to the highest position.
This seat position and height achieves the best
Key switch for front passenger airbags, see
possible routing of the belt and protection in the
page 179.
event of an accident.
Rearward-facing child restraint If the upper attachment point of the seat belt is
located ahead of the child seat's belt guide, care‐
systems
fully move the front passenger seat forwards until
the best possible belt guidance is achieved.
DANGER
When deployed, active front passenger airbags Backrest width
can fatally injure a child in a rearward-facing With adjustable backrest width: before fitting a
child restraint system. There is a risk of injury or child restraint system on the front passenger
even death. Make sure that the front passenger seat, fully open the backrest width. Do not
airbags are deactivated and the PASSENGER change the backrest width from this point on and
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is illuminated. do not call up a memory position.
ISOFIX child safety seat

fasteners
General
Please comply with the operating and safety in‐
structions provided by the child restraint system
manufacturer when selecting, attaching and us‐
ing ISOFIX child restraint systems.
123
Suitable ISOFIX child restraint Before fitting ISOFIX child

systems restraints
Only certain ISOFIX child restraints may be used Pull the seat belt away from the area of the child
in the seats intended for this purpose. The corre‐ seat mountings.
sponding size class and size category are deno‐
ted by a letter or ISO reference on a plate on the Fitting ISOFIX child restraint
child seat. systems
For further information: 1. Install the child restraint system, see the
Suitable seats for child restraint systems, see manufacturer's instructions.
page 126. 2. Make sure that both ISOFIX anchors are en‐
gaged correctly.
Fixtures for lower
ISOFIX anchors i-Size child restraint systems
Safety note General
i-Size is a regulation for child restraint systems,
WARNING which is used for the approval of child restraint
If the ISOFIX child restraint systems are not en‐ systems.
gaged correctly, the protective effect of the Symbol Meaning
ISOFIX child restraint systems will be limited.
There is a risk of injury or even death. Make If this symbol is seen in the vehi‐
sure the lower anchor point has engaged cor‐ cle, the vehicle has also been
rectly and the ISOFIX child restraint system approved in accordance with i-
rests firmly against the backrest. Size. The symbol shows the
mounts for the system's lower
anchors. The lower anchors
Not for Australia/New Zealand:Front meet the European i-Size re‐
passenger seat quirements.
The corresponding symbol

shows the mounting point for
the upper retaining strap.
The fixtures for the lower ISOFIX anchors are lo‐

cated in the gap between the seat and backrest.
124
Fixtures for the upper

retaining strap
Safety notes
WARNING
If the upper retaining strap is used incorrectly
on the child restraint system, the protective ef‐ There is a mounting point for the upper retaining
fect will be reduced. There is a risk of injury. strap of ISOFIX child restraint systems.
Make sure that the upper retaining strap is not
twisted and is not routed to the upper mount‐
ing point over sharp edges. Routing the retaining strap
NOTE
The mounting points for the upper retaining
straps of child restraint systems are only inten‐
ded for these retaining straps. The mounting
points can be damaged if other objects are at‐
tached. There is a risk of material damage. Only
attach child restraint systems to the upper
mounting points. 1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for the upper retaining strap
Mounting points
4 Mounting point/eyelet
Symbol Meaning 5 Vehicle floor
The corresponding symbol 6 Seat
shows the mounting point for 7 Upper retaining strap
the upper retaining strap.
Attaching the upper retaining

strap to the mounting point
1. Open the cover of the mounting point.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap over the head
restraint to the mounting point.
3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the
mounting point.
4. Pull the retaining strap taut.
125
Suitable seats for child restraint systems

General
The legal provisions determining which child seat For detailed information about using child re‐
is permitted for which age and body size may straint systems:
vary from country to country. Please comply with Seats for child restraint systems, see page 339.
the relevant national legal provisions.
Additional information is available from a Service
Seats and child restraint systems

The following section provides information on
which child restraint system is suitable for which
seat in the vehicle.
Left-hand drive vehicles, seats:
Seat Airbag, Fastening

front pas‐
senger
3 a, b) ON
OFF
c) c)
a) Adapt the fore/aft position of the front passenger seat and, if necessary, move it to the highest
position to achieve the best possible belt fit.
b) When using child seats with a support stand on the front passenger seat, remove the foot mat.
c) Depending on the equipment or national-market version.
Right-hand drive vehicles, seats:
126
Seat Airbag, Fastening

front pas‐
senger
1 a, b) ON
OFF
c) c)
b) When using child seats with a support stand on the front passenger seat, remove the foot mat.
c) Depending on the equipment or national-market version.
Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning
Not suitable for child restraint systems. Suitable for ISOFIX child re‐
straint systems.
Suitable for Universal-category child restraint sys‐ Suitable for ISOFIX and i-
tems approved for use in this weight group. Size child restraint systems.
Suitable for child restraint systems in the Semi- Suitable for child restraint
Universal category if the vehicle and the seat are systems with an upper re‐
listed in the list of vehicle models from the manu‐ taining strap.
facturer of the child restraint system.
Suitable seats for child restraint systems with a belt

Information about which child restraint systems
can be used on the seats in question in accord‐
ance with the ECE-R 16 standard.
127
Group Weight of child Approximate Front passenger Front passenger

age seat, airbag ON seat, airbag
OFF– a)
0 Up to 10 kg Up to 9 months X U, L
0+ Up to 13 kg Up to 18 months X U, L
I 9 – 18 kg Up to 4 years X U, L
II 15 – 25 kg Up to 7 years X U, L
III 22 – 36 kg 7 years and over X U, L
U: suitable for Universal-category child restraint systems approved for use in this weight group.
L: suitable for child restraint systems in the Semi-Universal category if the vehicle and the seat are
listed in the list of vehicle models from the manufacturer of the child restraint system.
X: unsuitable for Universal-category child restraint systems approved for use in this weight group.
Suitable seats for ISOFIX child restraint systems

The following ISOFIX child restraint systems may In the case of vehicles that are intended to be
be used on the seats designated as appropriate sold in the European Union, the specifications
for this purpose. The corresponding size class before the / in the table apply.
and size category are denoted by a letter or ISO
reference on a plate on the child seat.
Group Weight of child Approximate age Class/category Front Front

pas‐ pas‐
senger senger
seat, seat,
airbag airbag
ON OFF –
a)
Carrycot F - ISO/L1 X X
G - ISO/L2 X X
0 Up to 10 kg Approximately E - ISO/R1 X IL
9 months
0+ Up to 13 kg Approximately E - ISO/R1 X IL
18 months D - ISO/R2 X IL/X
C - ISO/R3 X X
128
Group Weight of child Approximate age Class/category Front Front

pas‐ pas‐
senger senger
seat, seat,
airbag airbag
ON OFF –
a)
I 9 - 18 kg Up to approxi‐ D - ISO/R2 X IL/X

mately 4 years C - ISO/R3 X X
B - ISO/F2 X IL, IUF
B1 - ISO/F2X X IL, IUF
A - ISO/F3 X IL, IUF
a) Only if equipped with ISOFIX child safety seat fasteners.
IL: suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in the Semi-Universal category if the vehicle and the
seat are listed in the list of vehicle models provided by the manufacturer of the child restraint system.
IUF: suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child restraint systems in the Universal category that have
been approved for use in this weight class.
X: the seat is not approved or equipped with mounting points for the ISOFIX system.
Suitable seats for i-Size child restraint systems

Information on the suitability of the different vehi‐ In the case of vehicles that are intended to be
cle seats for the installation of child restraint sys‐ sold in the European Union, the specifications
tems suitable for i-Size or meeting i-Size require‐ before the / in the table apply.
ments - in accordance with standard ECE-R 129:
Group Front passenger seat, airbag Front passenger seat, airbag

ON OFF – a, b)
i-Size X i-U/X
i-U, suitable for rearward and forward-facing i-Size child restraint systems.
X: not suitable for i-Size child restraint systems.
a) When using child seats with a support stand on the front passenger seat, remove the foot mat.
b) When using child seats on the front passenger seat, adjust the backrest adjustment if necessary,
and also adjust the height of the head rest or remove it.
Recommended child seats manufacturer when selecting, attaching and us‐

ing child restraint systems.
Please comply with the operating and safety in‐ The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
structions provided by the child restraint system the following child restraint systems:
▷ Maxi-Cosi CabrioFix.
129
▷ Maxi-Cosi FamilyFix base.

▷ Maxi-Cosi 2wayPearl & 2wayFix.
▷ Römer KIDFIX XP.
130
Driving CONTROLS
Driving
Vehicle equipment 3. Releasing the parking brake.
4. Drive off.
model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ Auto Start Stop function
The Auto Start Stop function helps you to save
fuel. The system stops the engine when station‐
ary, for example in a traffic jam or at traffic lights.
The drive-ready state remains switched on. For
driving off, the engine starts automatically.
Start/stop button General

Each time the engine is started via the start/stop
button, the Auto Start/Stop function is switched
Principle
to standby. The function is activated from a
Drive-ready state is switched on speed of around 5 km/h, 3 mph.
and off by pressing the start/stop Depending on the selected driving mode, the
button. system is activated or deactivated automatically.
Steptronic transmission: drive-
ready state is switched on by Stopping the engine
pressing the start/stop button while the brake
pedal is depressed. Operating requirements
Manual transmission: the drive-ready state is
switched on if the brake pedal is depressed Steptronic transmission
when the start/stop button is pressed. The engine is automatically shut down when sta‐
Pressing the start/stop button again switches tionary under the following conditions:
drive-ready state off again and standby state is ▷ Selector lever in selector lever position D.
switched on.
▷ Brake pedal remains pressed while the vehi‐
For further information: cle is at a standstill or vehicle is kept station‐
ary by Automatic Hold.
▷ Drive-ready state, see page 44.
▷ Driver's seat belt buckled or driver's door
▷ Standby state, see page 44.
closed.
Driving off Manual gearbox

1. Switch on drive-ready state.
The engine is automatically shut down when sta‐
2. Apply the drive position. tionary under the following conditions:
131
CONTROLS Driving
▷ Gearbox in neutral and clutch pedal not The total time can be reset via the journey data.
pressed.
▷ Driver's seat belt buckled or driver's door
closed. ECO PRO, see page 270.
Steptronic transmission: manual Functional limitations

engine stop The engine is not shut down automatically in the
If the engine was not switched off automatically following situations:
when the vehicle came to a stop, it can be ▷ On steep downward gradients.
switched off manually: ▷ Brake not pressed strongly enough.
▷ Rapidly press the brake pedal from the cur‐ ▷ High outside temperature and operation of
rent position. the automatic air conditioning.
▷ Engage selector lever position P. ▷ Interior not heated or cooled to the desired
If all the operating requirements have been met, temperature.
the engine is stopped. ▷ Where there is a risk of condensation when
the automatic air conditioning is switched on.
Air conditioning system when the ▷ Engine or other parts not at operating tem‐
vehicle is parked perature.
The air flow rate of the air conditioning system is ▷ Engine cooling is required.
reduced when the engine is not running.
▷ Sharp steering angle or steering operation.
Displays in the instrument cluster ▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.

▷ At high altitudes.
General ▷ Front flap is unlocked.
The display in the revolution ▷ Park Assistant is activated.
counter indicates that the Auto ▷ Stop-and-go traffic.
Start Stop function is ready for
automatically starting the engine. ▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever posi‐
tion in N or R.
▷ After reversing.
The display indicates that the pre‐
conditions for an automatic en‐ ▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content.
gine stop are not met.
Engine start
Total time for switched-off engine
ECO PRO driving mode: depend‐ Steptronic transmission
ing on the equipment, the total For driving off, the engine automatically starts
time during which the engine is under the following conditions:
shut down by the Auto Start/Stop ▷ By releasing the brake pedal.
function is displayed during an
▷ With Automatic Hold activated: press the ac‐
automatic engine shutdown.
celerator pedal.
132
Driving CONTROLS
Manual gearbox Auto Start/Stop additional

For driving off, the engine automatically starts function
under the following conditions: Depending on the equipment version and na‐
▷ By pressing the clutch pedal. tional-market version, the vehicle has various
sensors to record the traffic situation. This ena‐
Driving off bles the Automatic Start/Stop function to adapt
After starting the engine, accelerate as normal. to various traffic situations and, where necessary,
behave in an anticipatory manner.
Safety function For example, in the following situations:
After an automatic shut down, the engine will not ▷ If a situation is detected in which the duration
restart automatically, if one of the following con‐ of the stop is likely to be very short, the en‐
ditions is met: gine is not stopped automatically. Depending
▷ Driver's seat belt unbuckled and driver's door on the situation, a message is shown on the
open. Control Display.
▷ Front flap has been unlocked. ▷ If a situation is detected in which the vehicle
should drive off immediately, the stopped en‐
Several indicator lamps illuminate for various gine is started automatically.
lengths of time.
The function may be limited if the navigation data
The engine can only be started using the start/ is invalid, outdated or not available, for example.
stop button.
Deactivating/activating the
System limits
system manually
Even if you do not want to drive off, the engine
restarts automatically in the following situations:
Principle
▷ Very high temperature in the interior when
The engine is not switched off automatically.
the cooling function is switched on.
During an automatic engine stop, the engine is
▷ Very low temperature in the interior when the
started.
heating is switched on.
▷ Where there is a risk of condensation when Using the button
the automatic air conditioning is switched on.
▷ When the steering wheel is turned.
▷ Steptronic transmission:
Shift from selector lever position D to N or R.
▷ Steptronic transmission:
Shift from selector lever position P to N, D or
R.
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ Start of an oil level measurement. Press the button.
133
CONTROLS Driving
Steptronic transmission: via Automatic deactivation

selector lever position
The Auto Start Stop function is also deactivated General
in selector lever position M/S. In certain situations the Auto Start Stop function
is deactivated automatically for safety reasons,
Via the Driving Experience Control for example if the absence of the driver is detec‐
The Auto Start Stop function is also deactivated ted.
in the SPORT drive mode of the Driving Experi‐
ence Control. Malfunction
The Auto Start Stop function no longer shuts
Display down the engine automatically. A Check Control
▷ LED illuminates: Auto Start Stop function is message is shown. It is possible to keep driving.
deactivated. Have the system checked by a Service Partner
of the manufacturer or another qualified Service
▷ The LED is extinguished: Auto Start Stop
function is activated.
Parking the vehicle during Parking brake

automatic engine stop
Principle
General
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehicle
With automatic engine stop, the vehicle can be
from rolling when it is parked.
parked safely, for example in order to leave it.
Steptronic transmission
Safety notes
WARNING
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.
▷ Selector lever position P is automatically leaving the vehicle, secure it to prevent it from
engaged. rolling away.
2. Apply the parking brake. Observe the following to ensure that the vehi‐
cle is secured against rolling away:
Manual gearbox ▷ Apply the parking brake.
▷ Turn the front wheels towards the kerb on
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off. upward or downward gradients.
▷ Standby state is switched on. ▷ Additionally secure the vehicle on upward
2. Engage first gear or reverse. or downward gradients, for example with a
chock.
134
Driving CONTROLS
While the vehicle is in motion

WARNING
Unsupervised children or pets in the vehicle General
can set the vehicle in motion and endanger Use during the journey serves as an emergency
themselves or other road users, for example by brake.
Pull and hold the switch. Vehicle brakes
▷ Pressing the start/stop button. strongly for as long as the switch is pulled.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster is illuminated red, a signal sounds
▷ Engaging selector lever position N. and the brake lights illuminate.
▷ Operating vehicle equipment. A Check Control message is shown.
There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not
leave children or pets unsupervised in the vehi‐ Apply the parking brake when the vehicle is sta‐
cle. When leaving the vehicle, take the vehicle tionary.
Releasing
Overview Releasing manually

2. Steptronic transmission: press the

switch with the brakes applied or selector
lever position P engaged.
Manual transmission: press the button

with the brakes applied.
LED and indicator lamp turn off.
Parking brake The parking brake is released.
Automatic release
Engaging The parking brake is automatically released on
driving off.
When the vehicle is stationary LED and indicator lamp turn off.
Pull the switch.
The LED is illuminated. Steptronic transmission:
Automatic Hold
cluster is illuminated red. The parking Principle
brake is engaged.
This system provides assistance by automatically
applying and releasing the brake, for example in
stop-and-go traffic.
135
CONTROLS Driving
The vehicle is held automatically when at a ▷ Releasing the parking brake.

standstill. ▷ Opening and closing doors or windows.
On upward gradients, it prevents the vehicle ▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
from rolling back when driving off.
General There is a risk of accident or injury. Do not

The parking brake is automatically applied in the
following conditions:
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.
▷ When the driver's door is opened with the ve‐
hicle at a standstill. NOTE
▷ If the vehicle is brought to a standstill with the Automatic Hold applies the parking brake when
parking brake during a journey. the vehicle is stationary and prevents the vehi‐
cle from rolling in car washes. There is a risk of
Display material damage. Deactivate Automatic Hold
The indicator lamp changes from green before driving into the car wash.
to red.
Overview
Safety notes
WARNING
rolling away.
Observe the following to ensure that the vehi‐
Automatic Hold
▷ Apply the parking brake.
upward or downward gradients. Establishing operational readiness
▷ Additionally secure the vehicle on upward of Automatic Hold
chock.
WARNING The LED is illuminated.
Unsupervised children or pets in the vehicle The indicator lamp illuminates green.
can set the vehicle in motion and endanger Automatic Hold is ready to operate.
themselves or other road users, for example by
When the vehicle is restarted, the last se‐
lected setting is retained.
▷ Pressing the start/stop button.
136
Driving CONTROLS
Automatic Hold holds the vehicle Malfunction

Operational readiness is established and the If the parking brake has failed or malfunctioned,
driver's door is closed. secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away
Once the brake has been applied, the ve‐ before leaving the vehicle.
hicle is secured from rolling as soon as A Check Control message is shown.
the indicator light is illuminated green. After getting out, secure the vehicle to prevent it
from rolling away, for example with a chock.
Driving off
To drive off, press the accelerator pedal.
After a power failure
To restore parking brake functionality after a
The brake is released automatically and the indi‐
power failure:
cator lamp for the parking brake is no longer illu‐
minated. 1. Switch on standby state.
Automatic activation of the parking 2. Pull the switch with the brakes applied
brake or selector lever position P engaged and then
The parking brake is automatically applied when press it.
the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold and The procedure can take a few seconds. Any
drive-ready state is switched off or the vehicle is sounds that occur are normal.
exited.
The indicator lamp no longer illuminates
The indicator lamp changes from green as soon as the parking brake is once
to red. again operational.
The parking brake is not applied automatically if

drive-ready state was switched off while the ve‐
hicle was still rolling. Automatic Hold is switched
Turn indicator
off in this case.
Turn indicator in exterior mirror
Switching off operational readiness Do not fold in the exterior mirrors while driving or
Press the button. while operating the turn indicators or hazard
warning lights to ensure that the indicator lamps
The LED is extinguished.
in the exterior mirrors are well recognisable.
The indicator lamp extinguishes.
Automatic Hold is switched off.

If the vehicle is being held stationary by Auto‐
matic Hold, also depress the brake pedal when
switching off.
137
CONTROLS Driving
Indicating
▷ High-beam headlights on, arrow 1.

The high-beam headlights are illuminated
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
when the low-beam headlights are switched
on.
Triple turn signal ▷ High-beam headlights off/headlight flasher,
Briefly press the lever up or down. arrow 2.
The duration of the triple turn signal can be set.
1. "CAR"
Wiper system
2. "Settings"
3. "Exterior lighting"
General
4. "One-touch indicator"
Do not use the wipers on a dry windscreen, oth‐
5. Select the desired setting. erwise the wiper blades will wear or become
The setting is saved for the current driver profile. damaged more quickly.
Indicating a turn briefly Safety notes

Press the lever as far as the resistance point and
hold it there for as long as you wish to indicate a WARNING
turn.
If the wipers start moving when they are folded
away from the windscreen, parts of the body
may become trapped or the vehicle may be
High-beam headlights, damaged. There is a risk of injury or material
headlight flasher damage. Make sure that the vehicle is switched
off when the wipers are folded away from the
Push the lever forwards or pull it back. windscreen, and that the wipers are in contact
with the windscreen when switching on.
138
Driving CONTROLS
Press the lever down.

NOTE ▷ To switch off: press the lever downwards to
If the wipers are frozen to the windscreen, the home position.
switching them on may cause the wiper blades ▷ To flick-wipe: press the lever downwards
to tear off and the wiper motor to overheat. from the home position.
There is a risk of material damage. Defrost the
The lever returns to the home position when
windscreen before switching on the wipers.
released.
Switching on Rain sensor
Principle
The rain sensor automatically controls the wiper
operation depending on the level of rainfall.
General
The sensor is mounted on the windscreen, di‐
rectly in front of the rear-view mirror.
Press the lever upwards to the desired position. Safety note

▷ Rest position of the wipers, position 0.
▷ Rain sensor, position 1. NOTE
▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2. In car washes, the wipers may inadvertently
start moving if the rain sensor is activated.
When the vehicle is at a standstill, the wipers There is a risk of material damage. Deactivate
switch to intermittent operation. the rain sensor in car washes.
▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3.
When the vehicle is at a standstill, the wipers
switch to normal speed. Activating
If a journey is interrupted with the wiper system
switched on: when the journey is resumed, the
wipers continue operating at the previously set
level.
Switching off and flick-wiping
Press the lever upwards once from the home po‐

sition, arrow 1.
Wiping is started.
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
If there is frost, wiping may not start.
139
CONTROLS Driving
Deactivating Cleaning the windscreen

Press the lever back to the home position.
Setting the sensitivity of the rain

sensor
Pull the lever.

Fluid from the washer fluid reservoir is sprayed
onto the windscreen and the wipers are operated
briefly.
Turn the knurled wheel to set the sensitivity of
the rain sensor. Windscreen washer jets
Upwards: high sensitivity of the rain sensor. The windscreen washer jets are automatically
Downwards: low sensitivity of the rain sensor. heated when standby state is switched on.
Windscreen washer Fold-out position of the wipers
Safety notes Principle

In the fold-out position, the wipers can be folded
away from the windscreen.
WARNING
At low temperatures, the washer fluid can General
freeze onto the windscreen and restrict visibil‐
This is necessary for example when replacing the
ity. There is a risk of accident. Only use the
wiper blades or to keep them away from the
washer systems if there is no possibility of the
windscreen when there is frost.
washer fluid freezing. Use antifreeze if required.
Safety notes
NOTE
WARNING
If the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the
washer pump cannot operate as intended. If the wipers start moving when they are folded
There is a risk of material damage. Do not use away from the windscreen, parts of the body
the washer system with the washer fluid reser‐ may become trapped or the vehicle may be
voir empty. damaged. There is a risk of injury or material
damage. Make sure that the vehicle is switched
off when the wipers are folded away from the
windscreen, and that the wipers are in contact
with the windscreen when switching on.
140
Driving CONTROLS
3. The wipers move back to the rest position

NOTE and are operational once again.
If the wipers are frozen to the windscreen,
switching them on may cause the wiper blades
to tear off and the wiper motor to overheat.
Manual transmission
There is a risk of material damage. Defrost the
windscreen before switching on the wipers. Safety notes
Folding out the wipers WARNING

1. Switch on standby state. An unsecured vehicle can start moving and roll‐
2. Press the wiper lever down and hold until the
wipers stop in an approximately vertical posi‐
rolling away.
tion.
Observe the following to ensure that the vehi‐
upward or downward gradients.
chock.
3. Lift the wipers completely away from the

windscreen. NOTE
When shifting into a lower gear, high engine
speeds can damage the engine. There is a risk
of material damage. Push the shift lever to the
right while shifting into the 5th or 6th gear.
Schematic diagram
Folding in the wipers

After folding the wipers in, the wiper system
must be reactivated.
1. Fold the wipers fully down onto the wind‐
screen.
2. Switch on standby state and press and hold ▷ 1 – 6: forward gears.
the wiper lever down again. ▷ R: reverse.
141
CONTROLS Driving
Shifting gears Selector lever positions
General D drive position

Depending on the engine version, the engine Selector lever position for all normal driving. All
speed is automatically adjusted as required dur‐ gears for forward driving are selected automati‐
ing a gear shift for a harmonious and dynamic cally.
gear change.
R Reverse
Reverse gear Only engage selector lever position R when the
Engage this position only when the vehicle is sta‐ vehicle is stationary.
tionary.
To overcome the resistance, move the shift lever N neutral
firmly to the left towards the left and engage the In selector lever position N, the vehicle can be
reverse gear with a gear shift movement for‐ pushed or can roll without power from the en‐
wards. gine, for example in car washes.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle P Park

In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without
its own power, for example in a car wash, or be General
pushed. Selector lever position for parking the vehicle, for
example. In selector lever position P, the trans‐
1. Switch on standby state.
mission blocks the individual wheels.
2. Press the clutch and change out of a forward
Only engage selector lever position P when the
gear or reverse.
3. Releasing the parking brake.
P is engaged automatically
Selector lever position P is automatically en‐
Steptronic transmission gaged in the following situations, for example:
▷ After switching off drive-ready state if selec‐
Principle tor lever position R, D or M/S is engaged.
The Steptronic transmission combines the func‐ ▷ After switching off standby state if selector
tions of an automatic transmission with the lever position N is engaged.
option to change gear manually if required.
▷ If, while the vehicle is at a standstill and selec‐
tor lever position D, M/S or R is engaged, the
Safety note driver's seat belt is unfastened, the driver's
door is opened and the brake pedal is not de‐
WARNING pressed.
An unsecured vehicle can start moving and roll‐ Before leaving the vehicle, ensure that the selec‐
ing away. There is a risk of accident. Before tor lever is engaged in the P position. The vehicle
leaving the vehicle, secure it to prevent it from could otherwise start to move. Also apply the
rolling away, for example by applying the park‐ parking brake.
ing brake. For further information:
Parking brake, see page 134.
142
Driving CONTROLS
Engaging selector lever point. The selector lever returns to the middle
positions position when released.
General
Apply the brakes until you are ready to drive off,
otherwise the vehicle will move when a drive po‐
sition is selected.
The selector lever will only move from position P
to another selector lever position if drive-ready
state is switched on and the brake pedal is de‐
pressed.
Engaging selector lever position P
It may not be possible to move out of selector
lever position P until all technical requirements
are fulfilled.
Engaging selector lever positions D,

N, R
A selector lever lock prevents the following incor‐
rect operation:
▷ Inadvertent shifting to selector lever posi‐
Press button P.
tion R.
▷ Inadvertent change from selector lever posi‐
tion P to another selector lever position. Rolling or pushing the vehicle
1. Fasten the driver's seat belt.
General
2. Press and hold the button to cancel the se‐
In some situations, the vehicle may need to be
lector lever lock.
rolled a short distance without power, for exam‐
ple in a car wash, or may need to be pushed.
Engaging selector lever position N

1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing
the brake.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.
3. If necessary, switch off Automatic Hold.
Automatic Hold, see page 135.
3. Briefly press the selector lever in the desired 4. Press the brake.
direction, possibly overcoming a resistance
5. Touch the selector lever lock and engage se‐
lector lever position N.
6. Switch off drive-ready state.
143
CONTROLS Driving
Standby state then remains switched on and Activating the sport programme
a Check Control message is shown.
The vehicle can now roll.
NOTE
gaged when standby state is switched off.
There is a risk of material damage. Do not
switch off standby state in car washes.
Selector lever position P is automatically en‐ Press the selector lever out of selector lever po‐
gaged after approximately 35 minutes. sition D to the left.
If there is a fault, it may not be possible to The gear selected appears on the instrument
change the selector lever position. cluster, for example S1.
Unlock the transmission lockout electronically if The sport programme of the gearbox is activa‐
necessary. ted.
Kick-down Exiting sport programme

Kick-down is used to achieve maximum perform‐ Press the selector lever to the right.
ance.
D is shown in the instrument cluster.
Press the accelerator pedal down beyond the
regular full-throttle position; some resistance will Manual operation M/S
be felt.
Principle
Sport programme M/S The gears can be changed manually in manual
operation.
Principle
In the sport programme, the gear shift points and Activating manual operation
gear shift times are configured for more sporty
1. Press the selector lever from selector lever
driving. For example, the transmission shifts up
position D to the left, arrow 1.
later and the gearshift times are shorter.
2. Press the selector lever forwards or pull it

backwards, arrows 2.
144
Driving CONTROLS
Manual operation becomes active and the gear is Short-term manual operation
shifted. In selector lever position D, operating a shift pad‐
The gear selected appears on the instrument dle causes the system to switch to manual oper‐
cluster, for example M1. ation temporarily.
The gearbox reverts to automatic operation from
Shifting gears manual operation after a certain period of time of
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐ moderate driving without acceleration or gear
wards. shifts using the shift paddles.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever backwards. It is possible to change to automatic mode:
In certain situations, the transmission continues ▷ Pull and hold the right shift paddle until D is
to shift automatically, for example when engine shown in the instrument cluster.
speed limits are reached. ▷ In addition to pulling the right shift paddle,
pull the left shift paddle.
Steptronic sport transmission:
preventing automatic upshift in Permanent manual operation
manual operation M/S In selector lever position S, operating a shift pad‐
Depending on the motorisation: when SPORT dle causes the system to switch permanently to
driving mode is selected, the Steptronic Sport manual operation (mode).
transmission does not automatically shift up in
M/S manual mode when certain engine speed Steptronic sport transmission
limits are reached. In the corresponding gearbox version, operating
In addition, there is no down shift for kick-down. the kick-down and the left shift paddle at the
For further information: same time allows you to change down to the
lowest possible gear. This is not possible in
SPORT, see page 148. short-term manual operation.
Exiting manual operation Shifting gears

Press the selector lever to the right.
D is shown in the instrument cluster.
Shift paddles
Principle
Shift paddles on steering wheel enable fast gear‐
shifting without taking hands off steering wheel.
General ▷ To change up: pull the right shift paddle.

▷ To change down: pull the left shift paddle.
Gearshift
▷ To change down to the lowest possible gear:
Gear shifting is only carried out at the appropriate pull and hold the left shift paddle.
engine RPM and vehicle speed.
145
CONTROLS Driving
The gear selected appears briefly on the instru‐ A Check Control message is shown.
ment cluster, followed by the gear currently in
use.
Displays in the instrument

cluster
The selector lever position is dis‐
played, for example P.
4. Release the start/stop button and selector

lever.
Unlocking the transmission 5. Release the brake as soon as the starter

stops.
lockout electronically
6. Manoeuvre the vehicle out of danger and
General then secure it against rolling away.
Unlock the transmission lockout electronically to For further information:

manoeuvre the vehicle out of danger. Tow-starting/towing, see page 328.
Before releasing the transmission lockout, apply
the parking brake to prevent the vehicle from roll‐ Launch Control
ing away.
Principle
Engaging selector lever position N When the ambient conditions are dry, Launch
Unlocking is possible if the starter is able turn the Control permits optimised acceleration on a road
engine. surface that offers plenty of grip.
1. Apply the brakes and keep them applied.

General
2. Press the start/stop button. The starter must
Use of Launch Control causes premature com‐
be heard to start turning. Press and hold the
ponent wear, as the function subjects the vehicle
start/stop button.
to very high stresses and loads.
3. With your free hand, press the button on the
Do not use Launch Control when running in.
selector lever, arrow 1, push the selector
lever to selector lever position N and hold it When starting with Launch Control, do not turn
there, arrow N, until selector lever position N the steering wheel.
is displayed in the instrument cluster. For further information:
Running in, see page 264.
Launch Control is available when the engine is at
operating temperature. The engine is at operat‐
ing temperature after an uninterrupted journey of
at least 10 km, 6 miles.
146
Driving CONTROLS
Starting with Launch Control Driving Experience Control

Principle
The Driving Experience Control influences the
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument
driving dynamics characteristics of the vehicle.
cluster and the DSC OFF indicator lamp is il‐
luminated. The vehicle can be adapted depending on the
situation using various driving modes.
3. Engage selector lever position S.
4. Press the brake firmly with the left foot. General
5. Press the accelerator pedal down beyond the The following systems are influenced, for exam‐
resistance at the full-throttle position and ple:
hold, kick-down.
▷ Engine characteristics.
A flag symbol is shown in the instrument
cluster. ▷ Steptronic transmission.
6. The starting engine speed is adjusted. Wait ▷ Adaptive M suspension.

briefly until the engine speed is constant. ▷ Steering.
Keep the accelerator pedal in this position. ▷ Display in the instrument cluster.
7. Release the brake within 3 seconds of the ▷ Cruise Control.
flag symbol illuminating.
The vehicle accelerates. Overview
Upshifts are automatic as long as the flag
symbol is displayed and the accelerator pedal
is not released.
Using again during a journey

Once Launch Control has been used, the trans‐
mission requires approximately 5 minutes to cool
down before Launch Control can be used again.
Launch Control adapts to the ambient conditions
when used again.
After using Launch Control cluster
To assist driving stability, re-activate Dynamic
The selected drive mode is
Stability Control, DSC as soon as possible.
shown in the instrument cluster.
System limits
An experienced driver may be able to achieve
better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.
147
CONTROLS Driving
Drive modes SPORT INDIVIDUAL

Buttons in the vehicle
Principle
Individual settings can be made in SPORT INDI‐
VIDUAL drive mode.
Configuring
Button Drive mode Configura‐
1. "CAR"
tion
2. "Settings"
SPORT SPORT INDIVIDUAL
3. "Driving mode"
SPORT SPORT 4. "SPORT INDIVIDUAL"
PLUS
COMFORT COMFORT ▷ "Damping"
ECO PRO ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL ▷ "Steering"
▷ "Engine"
ADAPTIVE ADAPTIVE
▷ "Transmission"
The COMFORT drive mode is automatically se‐ ▷ Manual transmission: "Gear Shift
lected when drive-ready state is switched on. Assistant"
When changing down, the engine speed
Drive modes in detail is adapted for the gear change.
COMFORT Reset SPORT INDIVIDUAL to default setting:
Principle "Reset to SPORT STANDARD".
Balanced configuration between dynamic and ef‐

SPORT PLUS
ficient driving.
Principle
Switching on
Dynamic configuration for maximum agility with
Press the button until COMFORT is an adapted drive.
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Switching on
SPORT Press the button repeatedly until
SPORT PLUS is displayed in the instru‐
Principle ment cluster.
Dynamic configuration for greater agility with an
optimised suspension.
ECO PRO
Switching on
Principle
Press the button until SPORT is dis‐ Efficient driving setting.
played in the instrument cluster.
148
Driving CONTROLS
Switching on Activating the configuration of the

Press the button until ECO PRO is dis‐ drive mode
played in the instrument cluster. Press the button of the desired drive several
times.
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL
Principle
Individual settings can be made in ECO PRO IN‐
DIVIDUAL drive mode.
Configuring
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driving mode"
4. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"
Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the default set‐
ting:
"Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD".
ADAPTIVE
Principle
Balanced drive mode with a configuration that
automatically adapts to the driving situation and
driving style.
Using the navigation system, upcoming route
stages are also taken into account.
Switching on
Press the button. ADAPTIVE is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
INDIVIDUAL configuration
General
The individual configuration of the drive mode is
saved for the current driver profile. The configu‐
ration set last is directly activated when the drive
mode is called up again.
149
CONTROLS Displays
Displays
Vehicle equipment Overview

1 Fuel gauge 156
Range 159
2 Speedometer
Instrument cluster 3 Central display area 151
Navigation display
Principle 4 Depending on the vehicle equipment: Driver
The instrument cluster is a variable display. Attention Camera
When the Driving Experience Control is used to
5 Revolution counter 157
change programmes, the displays in the instru‐
ment cluster are adapted to the driving mode in Selection lists 164
question. Widgets in the instrument cluster 151
Trip distance recorder, see Journey
General data 164
Depending on the equipment, changes to the ECO PRO displays 270
displays in the instrument cluster can be deacti‐ Performance display 157
vated via iDrive.
Status of Driving Experience Control 147
The displays in the instrument cluster can some‐
times differ from the illustrations in the Owner's Gear indicator 142
Handbook. 6 Engine temperature 158
7 Outside temperature 158
8 Check Control 152
9 Speed Limit Assist 214
Speed Limit Info 161
Time 64
150
Displays CONTROLS
Central display area Widgets

Depending on the equipment and setting, the
following is displayed in the central display area
Principle
of the instrument cluster:
Displays for particular functions can be shown in
▷ Navigation displays such as the map view or,
the instrument cluster.
if route guidance is active, a route preview
with route guidance information. The following displays can be selected:
▷ Displays showing service requirements. ▷ Current entertainment source, for example

radio.
Some displays in the central display area can be
configured individually. ▷ Torque and power.
The displays may vary depending on the equip‐ ▷ G meter.

ment and country specifications. ▷ Journey data.
▷ Efficiency display.
Driving mode view
Selecting
Principle
Depending on the equipment and if the driving
mode view is activated, the displays in the instru‐
ment cluster are adapted to the driving mode in
question when the Driving Experience Control is
used to change programmes.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings" Press the button on the turn indicator lever re‐
3. "Displays" peatedly until the desired widget is selected.
4. "Driving mode view"
Display
Settings
Individual displays in the instrument cluster can
be configured individually.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument cluster"
G meter
The G meter shows the forces which act on the
passengers in the longitudinal and transverse di‐
rection during the journey.
151
CONTROLS Displays
Efficiency display Check Control

Principle
Principle
Information on the driving style and consumption
can be shown as a widget in the instrument clus‐ The Check Control monitors vehicle functions
ter, taking the form of a consumption display, for and alerts you to any faults in the monitored sys‐
example. tems.
General General
Various information is displayed, depending on A Check Control message is displayed as a com‐
the activated driving mode: bination of indicator or warning lamps and text
messages in the instrument cluster and, if appli‐
Drive Display cable, in the Head-Up Display.
mode
If required, an acoustic signal is also output and a
COMFORT Average consumption. text message shown on the Control Display.
SPORT Current consumption.
Hiding Check Control messages
Energy recuperation.
ECO PRO ECO PRO bonus range.

The route covered in the coast‐
ing drive state.
Current consumption.
Average consumption
Average consumption indicates the fuel con‐
sumption over a specific route.
Press the button on the turn indicator lever.
Current consumption
The current consumption indicates how much Continuous display
fuel is currently being used. It is possible to Some Check Control messages are displayed
check the economy and environmental compati‐ permanently and remain until the fault has been
bility of your driving style. repaired. If a number of malfunctions have occur‐
red at the same time, the messages are dis‐
Energy recuperation played in succession.
Energy recuperation involves converting the ki‐ The messages can be hidden for approximately
netic energy of the vehicle into electrical energy 8 seconds. Afterwards they are displayed again
in overrun mode. The vehicle battery is partially automatically.
charged and fuel consumption can be lowered.
Temporary display
ECO PRO bonus range Some Check Control messages are automati‐
In ECO PRO driving mode, the ECO PRO bonus cally hidden after approximately 20 seconds. The
range shows how the range is increased by Check Control messages remain saved and can
adopting a fuel-efficient driving style. be displayed again.
152
Displays CONTROLS
Displaying saved Check Control Indicator and warning

messages
lamps
1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
Principle
3. "Check Control"
Indicator and warning lamps in the instrument
4. Select a text message. cluster show the status of some functions in the
vehicle and indicate any malfunctions in moni‐
Display tored systems.
Check Control General

At least one Check Control message is Indicator and warning lamps can illuminate in a
displayed or saved. variety of combinations and colours.
When drive-ready state is switched on, the func‐
tionality of some lights is checked and they illu‐
Text messages
minate briefly.
Text messages and symbols in the instrument
cluster explain what a Check Control message
Red lights
means and what the indicator and warning lamps
signify.
Seat belt reminder
Supplementary text messages The driver's side seat belt is not fas‐
tened. On some national-market ver‐
Additional information, for example the cause of
sions: the front passenger seat belt is not
the fault and any action required, can be called
fastened or objects are detected on the front
up via Check Control.
passenger seat.
If the message is urgent, the supplementary text
Check whether the seat belt has been fastened
is shown in the Control Display automatically.
correctly.
It is possible to select additional assistance de‐
pending on the Check Control message.
Airbag system
1. "CAR"
Airbag system and belt tensioner may be
2. "Vehicle status"
faulty.
3. "Check Control"
Immediately have the vehicle checked by
4. Select the required text message. a Service Partner of the manufacturer or another
5. Select the desired setting. qualified Service Partner or a specialist work‐
shop.
Messages displayed at the end of
a journey Parking brake
Certain messages displayed when driving are
The parking brake is engaged.
displayed again when drive-ready state is
switched off.
Release the parking brake, see page 135.
153
CONTROLS Displays
Brake system Have the vehicle checked immediately by a Serv‐

Brake system malfunctioning. Continue
fied Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
driving at moderate speed.
Immediately have the vehicle checked by
a Service Partner of the manufacturer or another Dynamic Stability Control DSC
qualified Service Partner or a specialist work‐ If the indicator lamp is flashing: DSC is
shop. regulating the acceleration and braking
forces. The vehicle is being stabilised.
Front-end collision warning with Decrease speed and adjust driving style to the
road conditions.
light braking function
If the indicator lamp is illuminated: DSC has
Indicator lamp is illuminated: advance failed.
warning. Brake and increase the dis‐
tance. Immediately have the system checked by a Serv‐
Indicator lamp flashes and an acoustic signal fied Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
sounds: acute warning. Brake and perform an
evasive manoeuvre if necessary. For further information:
For further information: Dynamic Stability Control DSC, see page 199.
Front-end collision warning with light braking

Dynamic Stability Control DSC
function, see page 182.
deactivated, or Dynamic Traction
Control DTC activated
Person warning with light braking
function DSC is deactivated or DTC is activated.
Indicator lamp is illuminated and an

acoustic signal sounds: imminent colli‐ For further information:
sion with a detected pedestrian or a cy‐
▷ Dynamic Stability Control DSC, see
clist.
page 199.
Take action yourself immediately by braking or
▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC, see
swerving.
page 200.
Person warning with light braking function, see Runflat indicator RPA
page 186. RPA reports a loss of tyre inflation pres‐
sure in a tyre.
Yellow lights Reduce your speed and carefully stop
the vehicle. Avoid heavy braking and sudden
Anti-lock Brake System ABS steering manoeuvres.
Braking force boost may be faulty. Avoid For further information:
sudden braking. Bear in mind that stop‐
ping distances will be longer. Runflat indicator RPA, see page 295.
154
Displays CONTROLS
Tyre Pressure Monitor Socket for on-board diagnosis, see page 315.
Indicator light illuminates: the Tyre Pres‐

sure Monitor is reporting a low tyre infla‐
Rear fog light
tion pressure or a flat tyre. Note the infor‐ Rear fog light is switched on.
mation in the Check Control message.
Indicator lamp flashes and then illuminates con‐
tinuously: no flat tyres or loss of tyre inflation
pressure can be detected. Rear fog light, see page 174.
▷ Fault due to systems or devices with the
same radio frequency: the system is auto‐ Green lights
matically reactivated upon leaving the field of
interference. Turn indicator
▷ In the case of tyres with special approval: the The turn indicator is switched on.
Tyre Pressure Monitor was unable to com‐ If the indicator bulb flashes more rapidly
plete the reset. Reset the system again. than usual, a turn indicator has failed.
▷ A wheel without wheel electronics is moun‐
ted: if necessary have it checked by a Service For further information:
Partner of the manufacturer or another quali‐ Turn indicators, see page 137.
fied Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a Side lights
Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐ The side lights are switched on.
other qualified Service Partner or a specialist
workshop.
Side lights/low-beam headlights, see page 170.
Tyre Pressure Monitor, see page 288.
Low-beam headlights
Steering system
Low-beam headlights are switched on.
The steering system may be faulty.
Have the system checked by a Service
Partner of the manufacturer or another For further information:
qualified Service Partner or a specialist work‐ Side lights/low-beam headlights, see page 170.
shop.
Lane Departure Warning
Engine warning light If the indicator lamp is illuminated: the
Engine malfunction. system is switched on. At least one lane
marking has been detected and warnings
Have the vehicle checked by a Service
can be issued on at least one side of the vehicle.
Partner of the manufacturer or another
qualified Service Partner or a specialist work‐ For further information:
shop.
Lane Departure Warning, see page 189.
155
CONTROLS Displays
High-beam assistance Speed Limit Assist

High-beam assistance is switched on. Depending on the equipment, indicator
The high-beam headlights are switched light illuminates together with the symbol
on and off automatically according to for a cruise control system: Speed Limit
traffic conditions. Assist is active and detected speed limits can be
adopted manually for the displayed system.
High-beam assistance, see page 172. Indicator lamp illuminates: the detected
speed limit can be adopted with the SET
button. As soon as the speed limit has
Automatic Hold
been adopted, a green tick is displayed.
Automatic Hold is activated. The vehicle
is held automatically when at a standstill. For further information:
Speed Limit Assist, see page 214.
Automatic Hold, see page 135. Blue lights
Manual Speed Limiter High-beam headlights
If the indicator lamp is illuminated: the The high-beam headlights are switched
system is switched on. on.
If the indicator lamp is flashing: set speed
limit is exceeded. For further information:
High-beam headlights, see page 138.
Manual Speed Limiter, see page 202.
Fuel gauge
Cruise Control
Indicator lamp is illuminated: the system Principle
is active. The current fill level of the fuel tank is displayed.

General
Cruise Control, see page 204.
The angle of the vehicle may cause the display
to fluctuate.
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go
function
Refuelling, see page 276.
If the indicator lamp is illuminated: the
system is switched on.
Display
An arrow next to the petrol pump
symbol indicates on which side of
For further information: the vehicle the fuel tank filler flap
is located.
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function,
see page 207.
156
Displays CONTROLS
The current range is displayed as a number. 5. "Engine display"

6. "Power meter"
If the setting for the driving mode view is activa‐
Revolution counter ted, the activated performance display is only
shown in the COMFORT driving mode.
General
It is vital to avoid engine speeds in the red warn‐
Display
ing zone. In this zone, the fuel supply is interrup‐
ted to protect the engine.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument cluster"
5. "Engine display" Pointer in the area of arrow 1: display of the en‐
ergy recuperation achieved when coasting or
6. "Rev counter"
when decelerating, CHARGE.
If the setting for the driving mode view is activa‐
Pointer in the area of arrow 2: power as a per‐
ted, the activated revolution counter is only
centage, POWER.
shown in the COMFORT or SPORT driving
mode.
Shift Lights
Performance display
Principle
Principle The shift lights indicate the maximum shift point
The display shows the available drive power at which the best possible acceleration can be
(POWER) as a percentage of the overall power. achieved.
The CHARGE area displays the energy recuper‐
ation achieved when coasting or decelerating. Operating requirements
Full Black Panel Display: Shift Lights are dis‐
General played when the SPORT or SPORT PLUS trans‐
The available power may be reduced due to cer‐ mission mode is activated.
tain factors, for example a cold engine.
Switching on/off
Activating/deactivating Steptronic sport transmission:
1. "CAR"
1. Select SPORT or SPORT PLUS driving
2. "Settings" mode.
3. "Displays" To do this, press the Driving Experience Con‐
4. "Instrument cluster" trol.
157
CONTROLS Displays
2. Activate M manual operation of the gearbox. The letters READY in the revolu‐
Manual transmission: tion counter indicate that the Auto
Start Stop function is ready for
Select SPORT or SPORT PLUS driving mode.
automatic engine starting.
To do this, press the Driving Experience Control.

Display
Vehicle operating condition, see page 43.
Engine temperature
Display
▷ Cold engine: the pointer is lo‐
cated at a low temperature
value. Drive at moderate en‐
gine and road speeds.
Information about the driving ▷ Normal operating tempera‐
style ture: the pointer is in the mid‐
▷ Current engine speed is shown in the revolu‐ dle or the bottom half of the
tion counter. temperature display.
▷ Arrow 1: yellow buttons lighting up succes‐ ▷ Hot engine: the pointer is located at a high
sively indicate the increase in revs. temperature value. A Check Control message
is also displayed.
▷ Arrow 2: orange buttons lighting up succes‐
sively indicate when an upshift is due. For further information:
▷ Arrow 3: buttons illuminate red. Latest point Coolant level, see page 311.
to upshift.
When the maximum permissible engine speed is
reached, the entire display flashes red and the Outside temperature
fuel supply is limited to protect the engine.
General
Standby state and drive- If the display drops to +3 ℃/+37 ℉ or lower, a
signal sounds.
ready state A Check Control message is shown.
OFF in the revolution counter in‐ There is an increased risk of black ice.
dicates that the drive-ready state
is switched off and the standby
state is switched on.
158
Displays CONTROLS
Safety note Display

The current range is displayed as
WARNING a number next to the fuel gauge.
Even at temperatures above +3 ℃/+37 ℉
there may be an increased risk of black ice, for
example on bridges or on shaded sections of
road. There is a risk of accident. At low temper‐
atures, adjust driving style to the weather con‐
ditions.
Service requirements
Principle
Range The function shows the current service require‐
ments and related maintenance jobs.
Principle General
The range shows what distance can still be cov‐ The distance or time remaining until the next
ered with the amount of fuel currently in the tank. service is displayed briefly in the instrument clus‐
ter after drive-ready state is switched on.
General The current service requirements can be read
The estimated range available with the remaining out from the vehicle key by a service advisor.
fuel is permanently displayed in the instrument
cluster. Display
A Check Control message is displayed briefly if
the remaining range is low. If a dynamic driving Detailed information on service
style is adopted, for example fast cornering, en‐ requirements
gine function cannot be ensured at all times.
More detailed information on the maintenance
If the range drops below approximately 50 km, work required can be displayed on the Control
30 miles the Check Control message is dis‐ Display.
played continuously.
1. "CAR"
Safety note 2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service requirements"
NOTE Maintenance routines and any statutory in‐
spections required are displayed.
If the range drops below 50 km, 30 miles, the
engine may no longer be supplied with suffi‐ 4. Select an entry to display more detailed infor‐
cient fuel. Engine function is no longer ensured. mation.
There is a risk of material damage. Refuel in
good time.
159
CONTROLS Displays
Symbols Displays
1. "CAR"
Sym‐ Description
2. "Vehicle status"
bols
3. "Service requirements"
No servicing is currently needed.
Essential maintenance routines and any stat‐
utory inspections required are displayed.
Maintenance or a statutory inspection 4. "Service history"
is due soon. 5. Select an entry to display more detailed infor‐
mation.
Service interval has been exceeded.
Symbols
Symbols Description
Entering deadlines
Green: maintenance has been
Enter deadlines for statutory vehicle inspections.
carried out on time.
Ensure that the date and time are set correctly in
the vehicle. Yellow: maintenance has been
1. "CAR" carried out later than scheduled.
2. "Vehicle status"
Maintenance has not been car‐
3. "Service requirements" ried out.
4. "Vehicle inspection"
5. "Date:"
6. Select the desired setting. Optimum shift indicator
Service history Principle
The system recommends the most efficient gear
Principle
for the current driving situation.
Maintenance that has been performed can be
displayed on the Control Display. The function is
General
available as soon as a maintenance visit has
been logged in the vehicle data. Depending on the equipment and the national-
market version, the optimum shift indicator is ac‐
tive in M manual operation of the Steptronic
General
transmission and with the manual gearbox.
Have maintenance work performed by a Service
Service Partner or a specialist workshop. The
Manual transmission: displays
maintenance work carried out is entered in the Information on up or down shifting are displayed
vehicle data. in the instrument cluster.
For vehicles without optimum shift indicator, the
gear engaged is shown.
160
Displays CONTROLS
Example Description vehicle data, for example the windscreen wiper

signal. The road sign and associated additional
Most efficient gear is engaged. instructions are then displayed in the instrument
cluster and the Head-Up Display, if applicable, or
ignored, depending on the situation. Some addi‐
Shift to a more efficient gear. tional signs are taken into account in the speed
limit evaluation, but are not displayed in the in‐
strument cluster.
If a navigation system is installed, the system
takes the information saved in the navigation
displays data into account where applicable and also dis‐
Information on up or down shifting are displayed plays the speed limits for sections of road with
in the instrument cluster. no road signs.
For vehicles without optimum shift indicator, the If a navigation system is not installed, the system
gear engaged is shown. has certain technical limitations. Only road signs
with speed limits are detected and displayed.
Example Description
Speed limits when driving into and leaving built-
Most efficient gear is engaged. up areas and motorway signs, for example, are
not displayed. Speed limits with textual supple‐
mentary signs are always shown.
Shift to a more efficient gear.
No-overtaking indicator
Principle
Speed Limit Info with no- Overtaking restriction signs and end of restriction
signs which have been detected by the camera
overtaking indicator are indicated by corresponding symbols in the
instrument cluster and, if applicable, the Head-
Speed Limit Info Up Display.
Principle General
Speed Limit Info shows the currently applicable The system considers overtaking restrictions and
speed limit in the instrument cluster and, if appli‐ ends of restrictions that are indicated by means
cable, the Head-Up Display, as well as additional of signs.
signs where necessary; for example, in wet con‐ Nothing will be displayed in the following situa‐
ditions. tions:
▷ In countries where overtaking restrictions are
General primarily shown by road markings.
The camera located near the interior mirror de‐ ▷ On routes without road signs.
tects road signs at the edge of the road as well
as variable overhead signs. ▷ In the case of railway crossings, lane mark‐
ings and other situations which imply an over‐
Road signs with additional instructions, for exam‐ taking restriction though there are no sign‐
ple restrictions applicable in wet conditions, are posts to this effect.
taken into account and compared with internal
161
CONTROLS Displays
Depending on the equipment version, an addi‐ 4. If necessary, "Driving"

tional symbol with distance information may also 5. "Speed Assistant"
be displayed to indicate the end of the no-over‐
6. "Speed limits"
taking indicator.
7. "Show current limit"
Safety note
Display
WARNING General
The system does not relieve you of your per‐ Depending on the national equipment, additional
sonal responsibility to assess the visibility con‐ signs and overtaking restrictions are displayed
ditions and traffic situation correctly. There is a together with Speed Limit Info.
risk of accident. Adapt your driving style to the
traffic conditions. Observe the traffic situation
Speed Limit Info
and intervene actively if the situation warrants it.
Present speed limit.
If no navigation system is instal‐
Overview led, the traffic sign is greyed out
after turning off or on longer sec‐
Camera tions of road.
Depending on the vehicle equip‐

ment, Speed Limit Info may not
be available.
The camera is located near the rear-view mirror.

Keep the windscreen clean and clear in this area. The display flashes if the detected speed limit
has been exceeded.
Displaying Speed Limit Info
No-overtaking indicator
General No overtaking.
Depending on the equipment, Speed Limit Info
is displayed permanently in the instrument clus‐
ter or via iDrive.
Activating End of overtaking restriction.

1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Driver assistance"
162
Displays CONTROLS
Additional signs ▷ "Warning when speeding": activate or de‐

activate the flashing of the Speed Limit
Symbols Description Info display in the instrument cluster and,
if applicable, the Head-Up Display when
Speed limit with time limit. the currently applicable speed limit is ex‐
Speed limit only applies in wet ceeded. The warning that is issued when
conditions. a speed limit is exceeded may depend on
the Speed Limit Assist settings.
Speed limit only applies in
▷ "Show speeding": the speed limit detec‐
snowy conditions.
ted by the Speed Limit Info is indicated by
Speed limit only applies in foggy a mark in the speedometer in the instru‐
conditions. ment cluster.
Speed limit applies to exit on

System limits
left.
Functionality may be limited or incorrect informa‐
Speed limit applies to exit on tion may be displayed in some situations such
right. as:
▷ In thick fog, wet conditions or snow.
Speed Limit Info with preview ▷ If road signs are fully or partially obscured by
Depending on the equipment version, an addi‐ objects, stickers or paint.
tional symbol with distance information may also ▷ If the vehicle is too close to the vehicle ahead.
be displayed to indicate that a change in speed
limit is ahead. Depending on the equipment, ▷ In the case of bright oncoming light or strong
temporary speed limits may also be displayed; reflections.
for example, speed limits at roadworks or traffic ▷ If the area of windscreen in front of the rear-
management systems. view mirror is covered with condensation, dirt,
Temporary speed limits can only be displayed if stickers, labels, etc.
the following services are selected in the data ▷ If the camera has overheated due to exces‐
protection menu for the navigation system: sively high temperatures and has been tem‐
▷ "Learning map" porarily deactivated.
▷ "Map update" ▷ As a result of incorrect detection by the cam‐

era.
▷ In the case of navigation data that is invalid,
Data protection, see page 68. outdated or not available.
▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
Settings tem.
1. "CAR"
▷ If there are navigation discrepancies, for ex‐
2. "Settings" ample due to changes in road layout.
3. "Driver assistance" ▷ For electronic road signs.
4. If necessary, "Driving" ▷ When overtaking buses or trucks with road
5. "Speed Assistant" sign stickers.
6. Select the desired setting: ▷ If traffic signs do not correspond to the stand‐
ard.
163
CONTROLS Displays
▷ If road signs are detected that apply to a par‐ Displaying and using the list
allel road.
▷ If the signs or road layouts are specific to one Button Function
country.
To change the entertainment
▷ During the camera calibration process imme‐ source.
diately after vehicle delivery.
Press the button again to close
the list currently displayed.
Selection lists Display the last calls list.
Principle Turn the knurled wheel to se‐

The instrument cluster or the Head-Up Display lect the desired setting.
can show lists for certain functions and can be Press the knurled wheel to con‐
used for operation where applicable. firm the setting.
▷ Entertainment source. The list that is currently selec‐
▷ Current audio source. ted can be displayed in the in‐
strument cluster again by turn‐
▷ Recent calls list.
ing the knurled wheel.
If applicable, the relevant menu is opened on the
Control Display.
Journey data
Display
Principle
Values relating to the journey, such as the aver‐
age consumption or the trip distance, are dis‐
played.
General
The journey data can be shown on the Control
Display and in the instrument cluster.
Depending on the equipment, the list in the in‐ The values can be displayed and reset according
strument cluster may differ from the illustration. to different intervals; for example, after refuelling.
Display on the Control Display
Overview
The following information is shown as a function
of the set interval:
▷ Set interval for displaying the journey data.
▷ Average fuel consumption as a function of
the set interval.
164
Displays CONTROLS
▷ Average speed. 4. "Values since"

▷ Total time engine is switched off by Auto 5. Select the desired setting:
Start Stop function. ▷ "Start of journey ( )": the values are reset
▷ The route covered in the coasting drive state. automatically if the vehicle is at a standstill
▷ Consumption history as a diagram. for approximately four hours.
▷ "Refuel ( )": the values are reset automati‐
Displays cally after refuelling with a significant
1. "CAR" amount of fuel.
2. "Driving information" ▷ "Ex works": Average consumption

since leaving the factory.
3. "Journey data"
The values since leaving the factory are
displayed.
Consumption history
▷ "Individual ( )": the values since the last
The consumption history shows the average
manual reset are displayed. The values
consumption in a diagram as a function of the
can be reset at any time.
route covered and the driving mode.
Display in the instrument cluster Resetting average values

manually
Depending on the equipment, information on the
distance travelled can be displayed as a widget in The following interval can be reset manually at
the instrument cluster. any time: "Individual ( )".
The following information is displayed: Via the button on the turn indicator lever:
▷ Total distance driven 1. Press the button on the turn indicator lever
▷ Set interval for displaying the journey data. repeatedly until the widget for the journey
data is selected.
▷ Route covered, depending on the set interval.
▷ Average speed.
Selecting and setting widgets in the instrument
cluster.
Widgets in the instrument cluster, see page 151.
Configuring the journey data

display
2. Press and hold the button on the turn indica‐
The intervals for displaying the journey data in
tor lever.
the instrument cluster and on the Control Display
can be configured. Via iDrive:
1. "CAR" 1. "CAR"
2. "Driving information" 2. "Driving information"
3. "Journey data" 3. "Journey data"
4. "Values since"
5. "Reset individual"
165
CONTROLS Displays
The average values and counters are reset.

Once the average values and counters have
Vehicle status
been reset, the following interval is automatically
set: "Individual ( )". General
It is possible to show the status of some systems
and perform actions on them.
Sport displays
Calling up the vehicle status
Principle 1. "CAR"
The sport displays primarily assist a sporty driv‐ 2. "Vehicle status"
ing style.
Overview of information shown
Symbols Description
Overview
"Flat Tyre Monitor": status of the
The following information is displayed:
runflat indicator RPA, see
▷ Charging pressure. page 295.
▷ Engine oil temperature.
"Tyre Pressure Monitor": status
▷ G meter. of the Tyre Pressure Monitor,
▷ Torque. see page 288.
▷ Power. "Engine oil level": Electronic oil
measurement, see page 308.
Displays
"Check Control": to display
1. "CAR"
saved Check Control messages,
2. "Driving information" see page 152.
3. "Sport displays"
"Service requirements": to dis‐
play service requirements, see
Display in the instrument cluster page 159.
The sport displays can be shown as widgets in
The following widgets can be selected: Head-Up Display
▷ Widget for torque and performance.
▷ Widget for G meter. Principle
For further information: The system projects important information, for
example the speed, into the driver's field of vi‐
Widgets in the instrument cluster, see page 151.
sion.
The driver can absorb this information without
having to divert attention from the road.
166
Displays CONTROLS
General 3. "Displays"
Follow the instructions on cleaning the Head-Up 4. "Head-up display"
Display. 5. Select the desired setting.
Overview
Adjusting the brightness
The brightness is automatically adapted to the
ambient light.
The default setting can be adjusted manually.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-up display"
Switching on/off 5. "Brightness"
1. "CAR" 6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐

ness is obtained.
2. "Settings"
3. "Displays"
The brightness of the Head-Up Display can also
be adjusted with the instrument lighting if the
5. "Head-up display" low-beam headlights are switched on.
Display Adjusting the height

1. "CAR"
Overview
2. "Settings"
The following information is displayed in the
3. "Displays"
Head-Up Display:
▷ Speed.
5. "Height"
▷ Navigation instructions.
6. Turn the Controller until the desired height is
▷ Check Control messages.
obtained.
▷ Selection list in the instrument cluster.
▷ Driver Assistance Systems.
▷ Sport displays.
The height of the Head-Up Display can also be
Some of this information is only shown briefly saved with the memory function.
when needed.
Adjusting the rotation
Selecting displays in the Head-Up
The Head-Up Display view can be rotated.
Display
1. "CAR" 1. "CAR"
2. "Settings" 2. "Settings"
167
CONTROLS Displays
3. "Displays" If the image is distorted, have the default settings

4. "Head-up display" checked by a Service Partner of the manufac‐
turer or another qualified Service Partner or a
5. "Rotation"
specialist workshop.
6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is
reached. Special windscreen
7. Press the Controller. The windscreen is an integral part of the system.
The shape of the windscreen enables a sharp
Additional settings
image to be projected.
1. "CAR"
A film in the windscreen prevents the projection
2. "Settings" of double images.
3. "Displays" Therefore if the special windscreen needs to be
4. "Head-up display" replaced, it is strongly recommended that this be
5. Select the desired setting: carried out by a Service Partner of the manufac‐
▷ "Speed Assistant": call up settings for
speed assistance.
▷ "Display infotainment lists in": set whether
the selection lists are displayed in the in‐
strument cluster or in the Head-Up Dis‐
play.
▷ "Sport displays": show revolution counter
and shift lights in the Head-Up Display.
▷ "Off": the sport displays are not shown
in the Head-Up Display.
▷ "In SPORT mode": the sport displays
are only shown in the SPORT driving
mode.
▷ "Always": the sport displays are per‐
manently shown in the Head-Up Dis‐
play.
Visibility of the display

The visibility of the information shown on the
Head-Up Display can be affected by the
following:
▷ Seat position.
▷ Objects placed on the Head-Up Display
cover.
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarisation filters.
▷ Wet roads.
▷ Adverse lighting conditions.
168
Lights CONTROLS
Lights
Vehicle equipment Symbol Function
Automatic driving lights control.

cific and optional equipment available for the Adaptive light functions.
model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ Low-beam headlights.
tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐ Instrument lighting.
relevant laws and regulations when using the Parking light, right.
Parking light, left.

Light and lighting
Switches in the vehicle
Automatic driving lights
control
Principle
Depending on ambient light conditions, the sys‐
tem switches the low-beam headlights on or off
automatically, for example in a tunnel, at twilight
and in rain or snow.
The light switch panel is located next to the
steering wheel. General
The headlights may also come on when the sun
Symbol Function is low against a blue sky.
Rear fog light. If the low-beam headlights are switched on man‐
ually, the automatic driving lights control is deac‐
tivated.
Lights off.
Daytime running lights. Activating
Side lights. Press the button on the light switch ele‐
ment.
The LED in the button illuminates.
169
CONTROLS Lights
The indicator lamp in the instrument Switching off

cluster is illuminated when the low-beam
Press the button on the light switch ele‐
headlights are switched on.
ment or switch on the drive-ready state.
System limits After switching on the drive-ready state, the au‐

tomatic driving lights control is activated.
The automatic driving lights control is no substi‐
tute for using your own judgement to assess the
light conditions.
Low-beam headlights
The sensors are unable to recognise fog or hazy Switching on
weather, for example. In such situations, switch
on the lights manually. Press the button on the light switch ele‐
ment.
Side lights, low-beam The low-beam headlights illuminate if drive-

ready state is switched on.
headlights and parking The indicator lamp in the instrument
light cluster is illuminated.
To switch on the low-beam headlights as soon

General as the standby state is switched on, press the
If the driver's door is opened when drive-ready button again.
state is switched off, the exterior lights are
switched off automatically after a given time. Switching off
Depending on the country specifications, the
Side lights low-beam headlights may be switched off in the
low speed range.
General
The side lights can only be switched on in the
ment.
low speed range.
Switching on Parking lights

Press the button on the light switch ele‐ When parking the vehicle, it is possible to switch
ment. on a parking light on one side.
Button Function
cluster is illuminated. Parking lights, right on.
The vehicle is illuminated all round.

Parking lights, left on.
Do not leave the side lights on for extended peri‐
ods of time, as this could drain the battery and it
may no longer be possible to switch on drive- Switch off parking lights:
ready state.
ment or switch on the drive-ready state.
170
Lights CONTROLS
Welcome lights Daytime running lights

General General
The exterior lights are switched on automatically The daytime running lights illuminate when
when the vehicle is approached or unlocked. De‐ drive-ready state is switched on.
pending on the equipment version, the exterior
lights of the vehicle can be individually adjusted.
cluster is illuminated when the daytime
running lights are switched on.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
In some countries, daytime running lights are
3. "Exterior lighting" compulsory, in which case the daytime running
4. Select the desired setting: lights cannot be deactivated.
▷ "Welcome and goodbye" 1. "CAR"
When the vehicle is unlocked, individual 2. "Settings"
light functions are switched on for a limi‐
ted time. 3. "Exterior lighting"
4. Depending on national-market version:
"Daytime driving lights" or "Daytime driving
Home lights lights rear"
General
The exterior lights can be switched on for a cer‐
tain period of time to illuminate the surroundings
Dynamic ECO light function
after exiting the vehicle.
General
Activating The brightness of the low-beam headlights is re‐
Push the turn indicator lever forwards briefly after duced, depending on the speed and distance
switching off the drive-ready state. from the vehicle in front.
Setting the duration Activating

1. "CAR" Press the button on the light switch ele‐
2. "Settings" ment.
3. "Exterior lighting" The LED in the button illuminates.

4. "Home lights" Activate ECO PRO driving mode.
5. Select the desired setting. For further information:
6. "OK" ECO PRO, see page 148.
171
CONTROLS Lights
Adaptive light functions Motorway beam pattern

The range of the low-beam headlights is in‐
creased.
Principle
Adaptive light functions makes it possible to illu‐
minate the road responsively. Cornering light
General In sharp turns up to a specified speed, for exam‐
The adaptive light functions consist of one sys‐ ple in hairpin bends or when turning off, a corner‐
tem or multiple systems, depending on the ing light is added to illuminate the inside area of
equipment version: the bend.
▷ Variable light distribution. The cornering light is activated automatically de‐
pending on the steering angle or, where appro‐
▷ Cornering light.
priate, use of the turn indicators.
▷ Roundabout light.
When reversing, the cornering light is activated
automatically as appropriate, irrespective of the
Activating steering angle.
ment.
Roundabout light
The LED in the button illuminates.
The adaptive light functions are active when Shortly before driving onto a roundabout, the
drive-ready state is switched on. cornering light on both sides is switched on. The
edge of the road is illuminated more effectively.
Shortly before leaving a roundabout, the corner‐
Variable light distribution ing light on both sides is switched off again.
Principle
Adaptive headlight beam
Variable light distribution illuminates the road
even more effectively. throw adjustment
Adaptive headlight beam throw adjustment com‐
General
pensates for acceleration and braking manoeu‐
The light distribution is automatically adapted to vres and vehicle load conditions to prevent on‐
the speed. coming vehicles from being dazzled. Illumination
If equipment includes a navigation system, the of the road is optimised.
light distribution is automatically adapted de‐
pending on the navigation data and speed.
High-beam assistance
City light
The light beam from the low-beam headlights is Principle
extended at the sides. High-beam assistance detects other road users
in good time and activates or deactivates the
high beam according to traffic conditions.
172
Lights CONTROLS
General The system will switch automatically between

low-beam and high-beam headlights.
High-beam assistance ensures that the high-
beam headlights are switched on when the traffic The blue indicator lamp in the instrument
situation allows. The system does not switch on cluster illuminates if the high beam is
the high-beam headlights at low speeds. switched on by the system.
The system responds to the lights from oncom‐
If a journey is interrupted with high-beam assis‐
ing traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
tance activated: when the journey is resumed,
ambient lighting, for example in built-up areas.
high-beam assistance remains activated.
The high-beam headlights can be switched on
The high beam assistant is deactivated by
and off manually at any time.
switching the high beams on and off manually.
If the no-dazzle high-beam assistance is instal‐
To reactivate high-beam assistance, press the
led, the high-beam headlights are not switched
button on the turn indicator lever.
off for oncoming vehicles or vehicles driving
ahead of you. The system only masks those
areas of the beam which would otherwise dazzle Deactivating
oncoming traffic or traffic driving ahead. In this
case, the blue indicator lamp continues to illumi‐
nate.
If the headlights are converted, the high beam
assistant may only function to a limited extent.
Left-hand/right-hand traffic, see page 174.
Activating Press the button on the turn indicator lever.
1. Press the button on the light switch

element. System limits
The LED in the button illuminates. High-beam assistance cannot replace the driv‐
2. Press the button on the turn indicator lever. er's own judgement as to when to use the high-
beam headlights. Therefore activate the dipped
headlights manually if the situation requires it.
In the following situations, the system will not op‐
erate or its operation will be impaired and your
intervention may be required:
▷ In extremely adverse weather conditions such
as fog or heavy precipitation.
▷ When detecting poorly lit road users such as
pedestrians, cyclists or horse riders or car‐
riages and when trains or ships are close to
the road, or when animals are crossing the
cluster is illuminated when the low-beam
road.
headlights are switched on.
▷ On tight bends, on steep brows or hollows of
hills, when there is crossing traffic or if the
173
CONTROLS Lights
view of oncoming vehicles on a motorway is

obstructed.
Left-hand/right-hand traffic
▷ In poorly lit towns or where there are highly
reflective signs.
General
▷ If the area of windscreen in front of the rear- When driving in countries where vehicles drive
view mirror is covered with condensation, dirt, on the opposite side of the road to your vehicle's
stickers, labels, etc. country of registration, you will need to prevent
your headlights from dazzling oncoming vehicles.
Fog lights Converting the headlights

1. "CAR"
Rear fog light 2. "Settings"
3. "Exterior lighting"
Operating requirements 4. "Right/left-hand traffic"
The low-beam headlights must be switched on 5. Select the desired setting.
before the rear fog light can be activated.
System limits
Switching on/off
High-beam assistance may only function to a
Press the button. limited extent.
The availability of the adaptive light functions
The yellow indicator lamp in the instru‐ might be restricted.
ment cluster is illuminated when the rear
fog light is switched on.
If automatic driving lights control has been acti‐

Instrument lighting
vated, the low-beam headlights switch on auto‐
matically when the rear fog light is switched on. Operating requirements
The brightness can only be adjusted when the
Guiding fog lights side lights or the low-beam headlights are
switched on.
Principle
The light distribution of the low-beam headlights Adjusting
may be adapted to the foggy conditions accord‐ The brightness can be adjusted
ing to the speed. using the knurled wheel.
▷ Automatic driving lights control is active.
▷ Rear fog light is switched on.
174
Lights CONTROLS
Interior light Ambient lighting

General General
Depending on the equipment, the interior light, Depending on the equipment, the lighting for
the footwell lights, door entry lighting, ambient some of the interior lights can be adjusted.
lighting and loudspeaker lighting are controlled
automatically. Switching on/off
The ambient lighting is switched on when the
Overview vehicle is unlocked and switched off when the
vehicle is locked.
Buttons in the vehicle If the ambient light was deactivated using iDrive,
it is not switched on when the vehicle is un‐
locked.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. "Ambient light"
The selected setting is saved for the current
driver profile.
Interior light
Selecting the colour scheme
Reading lights 1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
Switching the interior light on/off
4. "Colour"
Press the button.
To switch off permanently: press and hold the
button for approximately 3 seconds. Adjusting the brightness
1. "CAR"
Switching the reading lights 2. "Settings"
on/off 3. "Interior lighting"
Press the button. 4. "Brightness"
175
CONTROLS Lights
Dimmed during the journey

The lighting in the interior is dimmed for certain
lights during journeys in the dark.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Dimmed for night driving"
driver profile.
176
Safety CONTROLS
Safety
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver 3 Side airbag

2 Front airbag, front passenger 4 Knee airbag
Front airbags Side airbag

Front airbags protect the driver and front pas‐ In a side-on crash, the side airbag protects the
senger in the event of a head-on collision where side of the body in the chest, pelvic and head
the protection of the seat belts alone would no area.
longer be sufficient.
Knee airbag
Depending on the equipment version:
177
CONTROLS Safety
The knee airbag protects the legs in the event of ▷ Do not install seat covers, cushions or other
a head-on crash. objects on the front seats if they are not spe‐
cifically designed for use on seats with inte‐
Protective function gral side airbags.
▷ Do not hang items of clothing for example
General coats or jackets over the backrests.
Airbags are not activated in every collision, for ex‐ ▷ Do not modify individual components of the
ample, in minor accidents. system or its wiring. This also applies to the
covers of the steering wheel, the dashboard
Information for optimum airbag and seats.
effectiveness ▷ Do not dismantle the airbag system.
Even if all this information is observed, injuries re‐
WARNING sulting from contact with the airbag cannot be
entirely ruled out depending on the situation.
If the seat position is incorrect or the deploy‐
ment area of the airbag is restricted, the airbag The noise caused by the deployment of an air‐
system cannot provide the intended level of bag may lead to temporary hearing loss in vehi‐
protection or may cause additional injuries cle occupants sensitive to noise.
when it deploys. There is a risk of injury or even
death. Observe the following to achieve opti‐ Operational readiness of the
mum protective function. airbag system
▷ Keep a distance from the airbags. Safety notes
▷ Always grip the steering wheel at the steering
wheel rim. Place your hands in the 3 o'clock
WARNING
and 9 o'clock positions to minimise the risk of
injury to hands or arms when the airbag de‐ Individual components of the airbag system
ploys. may be hot after airbag deployment. There is a
risk of injury. Do not touch individual compo‐
▷ Make sure that the front-seat passenger is
nents.
sitting correctly, i.e. with their feet and legs in
the footwell, not resting on the dashboard.
▷ Make sure that vehicle occupants keep their
WARNING
head away from the side airbag.
Work carried out incorrectly can lead to a fail‐
▷ Do not place any other persons, pets or ob‐
ure, malfunction or accidental deployment of
jects between the airbags and occupants.
the airbag system. If there is a malfunction, the
▷ Keep the dashboard and windscreen area on airbag system might not deploy as intended in
the passenger side clear, for example do not an accident, even if the impact is of the appro‐
attach adhesive foil or covers and do not fit priate severity. There is a risk of injury or even
brackets for navigation devices or mobile tel‐ death. Have the airbag system tested, repaired
ephones, for example. or removed and disposed of by a Service Part‐
▷ Do not glue the airbag covers and do not ner of the manufacturer or another qualified
cover or modify them in any way. Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
▷ Do not use the front airbag cover on the front
passenger's side as a tray.
178
Safety CONTROLS
Display in the instrument cluster Deactivating the front passenger

When drive-ready state is switched on, airbags
the warning lamp in the instrument clus‐
ter illuminates briefly to indicate that the
entire airbag system and the belt tensioners are
operational.
Malfunction
▷ The warning lamp does not illuminate
after drive-ready state is switched on.
▷ The warning lamp is permanently illu‐ 1. Insert the key and press inwards where nec‐
minated. essary.
Have the system checked. 2. While the key is pressed inwards, turn it to
the OFF position as far as it will go. Once the
stop position has been reached, remove the
Key switch for front key.
passenger airbags 3. Make sure that the key switch is in the end
position so that the airbags are deactivated.
The front passenger airbags are deactivated.
Principle
The driver's airbags remain active.
When a child restraint system is used on the
If a child restraint system is no longer fitted in the
front passenger seat, the front and side airbags
front passenger seat, reactivate the front passen‐
on the front passenger side can be deactivated
ger airbags so that they are triggered as intended
using the key switch for front passenger airbags.
in the event of an accident.
General The airbag status is displayed by the indicator

lamp on the headliner.
The front and side airbags for the front passen‐
ger can be deactivated and reactivated using the
integrated key from the vehicle key.
Activating the front passenger
airbags
Overview
1. Insert the key and press inwards where nec‐

essary.
The key switch for front passenger airbags is lo‐
cated on the outside of the dashboard.
179
CONTROLS Safety
2. While the key is pressed inwards, turn it to front flap in readiness for the subsequent head
the ON position as far as it will go. Once the impact.
stop position has been reached, remove the
key. Safety notes
3. Make sure that the key switch is in the end
position so that the airbags are activated.
WARNING
The front passenger airbags are reactivated and
The system may trigger inadvertently if contact
can deploy correctly if the need arises.
is made with individual components of the
hinges and front flap locks. There is a risk of in‐
Indicator lamp for front jury or material damage. Do not touch individual
passenger airbags components of the hinges and front flap locks.
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐
bags in the headliner shows the operating status
of the front passenger airbags. WARNING
After switching on the drive-ready state, the light Modifications to the pedestrian protection sys‐
illuminates briefly and then shows whether the tem can lead to a failure, a malfunction or acci‐
airbags are activated or deactivated. dental triggering of the pedestrian protection
system. There is a risk of injury or even death.
Display Function
Do not modify the pedestrian protection sys‐
If the front passenger airbag is tem, its individual components or its wiring. Do
activated, the indicator lamp illu‐ not dismantle the system.
minates for a short period and
then extinguishes.
WARNING
When front passenger airbags Work carried out incorrectly can lead to a fail‐
are deactivated, the indicator ure, malfunction or accidental triggering of the
lamp remains illuminated. system. If there is a malfunction, the system
might not trigger as intended in an accident,
even if the impact is of the appropriate severity.
There is a risk of injury or even death. Have the
system tested, repaired or removed and dis‐
Active pedestrian posed of by a Service Partner of the manufac‐
protection turer or another qualified Service Partner or a
Principle
The active pedestrian protection system raises WARNING
the front flap if the front of the vehicle collides
If the system has triggered or is damaged, its
with a pedestrian. Sensors underneath the
functions will be restricted, or it may no longer
bumper are used for detection.
work at all. There is a risk of injury or even
death.
General
When triggered, the pedestrian protection sys‐
tem creates deformation space underneath the
180
Safety CONTROLS
If the system has triggered or is damaged, have

it checked and renewed at a Service Partner of
Intelligent Safety
the manufacturer or another qualified Service
Partner or a specialist workshop. Principle
Intelligent Safety enables the Driver Assistance
Systems to be operated centrally.
NOTE
Opening the front flap when the pedestrian General
protection system has triggered may damage Depending on the equipment, Intelligent Safety
the front flap or the pedestrian protection sys‐ consists of one or more systems which can help
tem. There is a risk of material damage. Do not to avoid the risk of a collision.
open the front flap after the Check Control ▷ Front-end collision warning with braking func‐
message is displayed. Have checks performed tion.
by a Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐
▷ Person warning with light braking function.
workshop. ▷ Lane Departure Warning.
▷ Lane Change Warning.
System limits Safety notes

The active pedestrian protection system is only
triggered at speeds between approximately
WARNING
30 km/h, 18 mph and 55 km/h, 34 mph.
The system does not relieve you of your per‐
For safety reasons, the system may also trigger
sonal responsibility to assess the visibility con‐
in rare instances where impact with a pedestrian
ditions and traffic situation correctly. There is a
cannot be excluded beyond all doubt, for exam‐
ple in the following situations:
▷ Collision with objects such as a skip or a and intervene actively if the situation warrants it.
boundary post.
▷ Collision with animals.
▷ Stone impact. WARNING
▷ Driving into a snow drift. Displays and warnings do not relieve you of
your personal responsibility. System limitations
Malfunction can mean that warnings or system responses
are not issued or are issued too late, incorrectly
A Check Control message is shown.
or without justification. There is a risk of acci‐
The system has been triggered or is dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic con‐
faulty. ditions. Observe the traffic situation and inter‐
Immediately drive at moderate speed to a Serv‐ vene actively if the situation warrants it.
fied Service Partner or a specialist workshop to
have the system checked and repaired.
181
CONTROLS Safety
If all Intelligent Safety Systems were switched

WARNING off, all systems are now switched on.
Due to system limitations, individual functions "Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
may not work properly when tow-starting/ equipment, the Intelligent Safety Systems can be
towing with activated Intelligent Safety Sys‐ configured individually. The individual settings
tems. There is a risk of accident. Switch off all are activated and saved for the current driver
Intelligent Safety Systems before tow-starting/ profile. As soon as a setting is changed in the
towing. menu, all settings in the menu are activated.
Press the button repeatedly. The set‐

Overview ting switches between the following:
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety Systems are
Button in the vehicle switched on. Basic settings are activated for the
sub-functions, for example the setting for warn‐
ing time.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety Systems are
switched on according to the individual settings.
Some Intelligent Safety Systems cannot be
switched off individually.
Press and hold the button.

All Intelligent Safety Systems are
Intelligent Safety switched off.
Switching on/off Front-end collision warning

Some Intelligent Safety Systems are automati‐ with light braking function
cally active at the start of each journey. Some In‐
telligent Safety Systems are activated depending
on their last setting. Principle
The system can help avoid accidents. If an acci‐
Button Status
dent cannot be avoided, the system helps to re‐
Button illuminates green: all Intelligent duce the collision speed.
Safety Systems are switched on. The system warns of the possible risk of collision
and brakes automatically, as necessary.
Button illuminates orange: some Intel‐
ligent Safety Systems are switched
off or are currently not available. General
The system is controlled using the following sen‐
Button does not illuminate: all Intelli‐
sors, depending on the equipment:
gent Safety Systems are switched off.
▷ Camera in the area of the rear-view mirror.
Press the button. ▷ Radar sensor in front bumper.
The menu for the Intelligent Safety Sys‐ From speeds of approximately 5 km/h, 3 mph,
tems is shown. the system provides a two-stage warning of any
182
Safety CONTROLS
possible risk of collision with vehicles. The timing Overview

of these warnings may vary depending on the
current driving situation. Button in the vehicle
When deliberately moving closer to a vehicle, the
front-end collision warning and braking interven‐
tion are activated later to avoid unwarranted sys‐
tem responses.
Safety notes
WARNING
sonal responsibility to assess the visibility con‐ Intelligent Safety
traffic conditions. Observe the traffic situation Camera
WARNING
Displays and warnings do not relieve you of
can mean that warnings or system responses
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic con‐ The camera is located near the rear-view mirror.
ditions. Observe the traffic situation and inter‐
Keep the windscreen clean and clear in this area.
vene actively if the situation warrants it.
With radar sensor

WARNING
Due to system limitations, individual functions
may not work properly when tow-starting/
towing with activated Intelligent Safety Sys‐
tems. There is a risk of accident. Switch off all
Intelligent Safety Systems before tow-starting/
towing.
The radar sensor is in the lower area of the front

bumper.
Keep the radar sensor clean and unobstructed.
183
CONTROLS Safety
Switching on/off Button Status
Button illuminates green: all Intelligent

Automatic activation
Safety Systems are switched on.
The system is automatically activated at the start
of each journey. Button illuminates orange: some Intel‐
Switching on manually off or are currently not available.
Press the button. Button does not illuminate: all Intelli‐

gent Safety Systems are switched off.
The menu for the Intelligent Safety Sys‐
tems is shown.
If all Intelligent Safety Systems were switched Setting the warning time
off, all systems are now switched on. 1. "CAR"
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the 2. "Settings"
equipment, the Intelligent Safety Systems can be 3. "Driver assistance"
configured individually. The individual settings
4. "Safety and warnings"
are activated and saved for the current driver
profile. As soon as a setting is changed in the 5. "Front-collision warning"
menu, all settings in the menu are activated. 6. Select the desired setting:
▷ "Early"
Press the button repeatedly.
▷ "Medium"
The setting switches between the
following: ▷ "Late": only acute warnings are displayed.
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety Systems are The selected time is saved for the current driver
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the profile.
sub-functions.
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety Systems are Warning with braking function
Display
switched off individually. If there is a risk of collision with a detected vehi‐
cle, a warning symbol is shown in the instrument
cluster and, if applicable, in the Head-Up Display.
Switching off manually
Symbol Action
Symbol illuminates red: advance
warning.
switched off.
Brake and increase the distance.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic

signal sounds: acute warning.
Brake and perform an evasive ma‐
noeuvre if necessary.
184
Safety CONTROLS
Advance warning At speeds above approx. 210 km/h, 130 mph,

An advance warning is given for example if there brake intervention takes the form of a brief jolt.
is an impending risk of collision or the distance There is no automatic deceleration.
from the vehicle ahead is too short. Braking can be discontinued either by pressing
The driver must intervene personally when an the accelerator pedal or by actively moving the
advance warning is given. steering wheel.
Object detection may be limited. Take into ac‐
Acute warning with braking function count the detection range limits and the func‐
tional limitations.
An acute warning is given when the vehicle is ap‐
proaching another object at a high differential
speed and there is an immediate risk of a colli‐ System limits
sion.
The driver must intervene personally when an
Safety note
acute warning is given. Depending on the driving
situation and the vehicle's equipment, the acute WARNING
warning may be supported by a brief jolt in the The system may not respond at all, or may re‐
brakes. spond too late, incorrectly or without justifica‐
If the warning time setting is "Late", the jolt does tion due to system limitations. There is a risk of
not occur. accident or material damage. Observe the in‐
If necessary, the system can also assist by brak‐ formation on the system limits and intervene
ing the vehicle automatically if there is a risk of a actively if necessary.
collision.
An acute warning can be triggered even without
Detection range
a previous advance warning.
Brake intervention
The warning prompts the driver to take action.
When the brake is operated during a warning, the
maximum necessary braking force is applied.
This requires that the brake pedal is depressed
sufficiently quickly and firmly beforehand.
The system can also assist by braking the vehi‐
cle automatically if there is a risk of a collision.
The detection ability of the system is limited.
At low speeds, the vehicle can be braked to a
Only objects detected by the system are taken
stop.
into account.
Manual transmission: when the vehicle is braked
to a stop, the engine may shut off. For this reason, the system may fail to respond
City braking function: brake intervention takes or only respond after a delay.
place at up to approx. 80 km/h, 50 mph. For example it is possible that the following may
With radar sensor: brake intervention takes place not be detected:
at up to approx. 250 km/h, 155 mph. ▷ Slow-moving vehicle when approaching it at
high speed.
185
CONTROLS Safety
▷ Vehicles suddenly cutting in or braking heav‐ Sensitivity of the warnings

ily. The higher the sensitivity of the warning settings,
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. for example warning time, the more warnings are
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead. displayed. As a result, there may also be an in‐
creased number of premature or unjustified
Upper speed limit warnings and responses.
The system is temporarily disabled at speeds
over approx. 250 km/h, 155 mph. Once the
speed drops back below this threshold, the sys‐
Person warning with light
tem becomes responsive again according to its braking function
settings.
Principle
The system can help to avoid accidents with pe‐
The system may have limited functionality in the destrians and cyclists. If an accident cannot be
following situations, for example: avoided, the system helps to reduce the collision
▷ In thick fog, wet conditions or snow. speed.
▷ On sharp bends. The system warns of the possible risk of collision
▷ When Driving Stability Control Systems are in the urban speed range and brakes automati‐
limited or deactivated, for example DSC OFF. cally, as necessary.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐

screen in front of the rear-view mirror is soiled
General
or covered. At speeds above approx. 5 km/h, 3 mph, the sys‐
▷ If the camera has overheated due to exces‐ tem warns of the possible risk of collision with
sively high temperatures and has been tem‐ pedestrians and cyclists.
porarily deactivated. Pedestrians and cyclists are taken into account if
▷ Up to 10 seconds after starting the engine they are located within the detection range of the
using the start/stop button. system.
▷ During the camera calibration process imme‐ The system is controlled using the following sen‐
diately after vehicle delivery. sors, depending on the equipment:
▷ If there is sustained glare due to oncoming ▷ Camera in the area of the rear-view mirror.
light, for example if the sun is low in the sky. ▷ Radar sensor in front bumper.
▷ In the dark.
▷ Depending on the vehicle equipment: if the
radar sensors are soiled or covered.
▷ Depending on the vehicle equipment: after
work performed incorrectly on the vehicle
paintwork near to the radar sensors.
Attaching any objects, for example stickers or
decals, in the area of the radar beam will also re‐
strict radar sensor operation and may even cause
them to fail.
186
Safety CONTROLS
Detection range
WARNING
towing.
Overview
The detection zone in front of the vehicle con‐
sists of two parts:
Button in the vehicle
▷ Central zone, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
▷ Extended zone, arrows 2, to the right and left
of the central area.
There is a risk of collision if persons are in the
central zone. A warning is only given of persons
in the extended zone if they are moving towards
the central zone.
Safety notes Intelligent Safety
WARNING
Camera
WARNING
can mean that warnings or system responses Keep the windscreen clean and clear in this area.
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic con‐
187
CONTROLS Safety
With radar sensor Some Intelligent Safety Systems cannot be


switched off.
Button Status
The radar sensor is in the lower area of the front Button illuminates green: all Intelligent
bumper. Safety Systems are switched on.
Keep the radar sensor clean and unobstructed. Button illuminates orange: some Intel‐
off or are currently not available.
Switching on/off
Button does not illuminate: all Intelli‐
Automatic activation gent Safety Systems are switched off.
of each journey. Warning with braking function
Switching on manually Display
Press the button. If there is a risk of collision with a detected pe‐
The menu for the Intelligent Safety Sys‐ destrian or a cyclist, a warning symbol is shown
tems is shown. in the instrument cluster and, where applicable,
in the Head-Up Display.
If all Intelligent Safety Systems were switched
off, all systems are now switched on. A red symbol is displayed and an acous‐
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the tic warning sounds.
equipment, the Intelligent Safety Systems can be
configured individually. The individual settings Alternatively, depending on the equip‐
are activated and saved for the current driver ment, a red warning triangle illuminates in
profile. As soon as a setting is changed in the the instrument cluster.
menu, all settings in the menu are activated.
Take action yourself immediately by braking or
swerving.
Press the button repeatedly.
The setting switches between the Brake intervention
following:
The warning prompts the driver to take action. If
"ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety Systems are the brake is operated during a warning, maximum
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the braking force will be applied. Braking force assis‐
sub-functions. tance requires that the brake pedal is depressed
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety Systems are sufficiently quickly and firmly beforehand.
switched on according to the individual settings. In addition, the system can assist with a brake in‐
tervention if there is the risk of a collision.
188
Safety CONTROLS
At low speeds, the vehicle can be braked to a Functional limitations

stop. The system may have limited functionality in
Manual transmission: when the vehicle is braked some situations, for example:
to a stop, the engine may shut off. ▷ In thick fog, wet conditions or snow.
Braking can be discontinued either by pressing ▷ On sharp bends.
the accelerator pedal or by actively moving the
steering wheel. ▷ If vehicle stability control systems are deacti‐
vated, for example DSC OFF.
Object detection may be limited. Take into ac‐
count the detection range limits and the func‐ ▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐
tional limitations. screen in front of the rear-view mirror is soiled
or covered.
System limits ▷ If the camera has overheated due to exces‐
sively high temperatures and has been tem‐
Safety note porarily deactivated.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after starting the engine
using the start/stop button.
WARNING
▷ During the camera calibration process imme‐
The system may not respond at all, or may re‐ diately after vehicle delivery.
spond too late, incorrectly or without justifica‐
tion due to system limitations. There is a risk of ▷ If there is sustained glare due to oncoming
accident or material damage. Observe the in‐ light, for example if the sun is low in the sky.
formation on the system limits and intervene ▷ In the dark.
actively if necessary. ▷ Depending on the vehicle equipment: if the
radar sensors are soiled or covered.
▷ Depending on the vehicle equipment: after
Upper speed limit
work performed incorrectly on the vehicle
The system reacts to pedestrians and cyclists if paintwork near to the radar sensors.
your own speed is below approx. 80 km/h,
Attaching any objects, for example stickers or
50 mph.
decals, in the area of the radar beam will also im‐
pair radar sensor operation and may even cause
Detection range
them to fail.
The detection ability of the system is limited.
As a result, the system may fail to give warnings
or may give warnings late. Lane Departure Warning
For example it is possible that the following may
not be detected: Principle
▷ Partially concealed pedestrians. The Lane Departure Warning issues a warning if
▷ Pedestrians who are not detected as such the vehicle leaves the road or its lane.
due to the viewing angle or outline.
▷ Pedestrians outside the detection range. General
▷ Pedestrians less than approximately 80 cm, This camera-based system warns once a mini‐
32 in tall. mum speed has been reached.
189
CONTROLS Safety
The minimum speed is country-specific and is Overview

displayed in the menu for the Intelligent Safety
Systems. Button in the vehicle
Warnings are issued in the form of steering
wheel vibrations. The strength of the steering
wheel vibration can be adjusted.
The system does not issue a warning if the driver
indicates in the corresponding direction before
leaving the driving lane.
Depending on the equipment, if a lane marking is
crossed in the speed range up to 210 km/h, ap‐
prox. 130 mph, the system may intervene not
only by vibrating but also with a brief active steer‐
Intelligent Safety
ing intervention. The system thereby helps to
keep the vehicle in lane.
Camera
Safety notes
WARNING
sonal responsibility to assess the layout of the
road and the traffic situation. There is a risk of
accident. Adapt your driving style to the traffic
conditions. Observe the traffic situation and in‐
tervene actively if the situation warrants it. In
the event of a warning, do not move the steer‐ The camera is located near the rear-view mirror.
ing wheel unnecessarily abruptly.
Keep the windscreen clean and clear in this area.
WARNING Switching on/off

your personal responsibility. System limitations Automatic activation
can mean that warnings or system responses Lane Departure Warning is activated automati‐
are not issued or are issued too late, incorrectly cally at the start of a journey if the function was
or without justification. There is a risk of acci‐ switched on the last time the engine was stop‐
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic con‐ ped.
ditions. Observe the traffic situation and inter‐ Depending on the national-market version, the
vene actively if the situation warrants it. system is automatically activated at the start of
each journey. The basic setting is activated.
Operating requirements Switching on manually

The lane marking must be detected by the cam‐
Press the button.
era in order for the Lane Departure Warning to
be active.
190
Safety CONTROLS
The menu for the Intelligent Safety Systems is 4. "Safety and warnings"
shown. 5. "Lane departure warning"
If all Intelligent Safety Systems were switched 6. Select the desired setting:
off, all systems are now switched on.
▷ "Early"
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the
▷ "Medium"
configured individually. The individual settings ▷ "Reduced": depending on the situation,
are activated and saved for the current driver some warnings are suppressed, for exam‐
profile. As soon as a setting is changed in the ple during overtaking manoeuvres without
menu, all settings in the menu are activated. using turn indicators or when deliberately
crossing lane markings on bends.
Press the button repeatedly. ▷ "Off": no warnings are given.
The setting switches between the The selected setting is saved for the current
following: driver profile.
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the Adjusting the strength of the
sub-functions. steering wheel vibration
"INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety Systems are 1. "CAR"
switched on according to the individual settings. 2. "Settings"
Some Intelligent Safety Systems cannot be 3. "Driver assistance"
4. "Feedback via steering wheel"
5. "Vibration intensity"
The setting is accepted for all Intelligent Safety
All Intelligent Safety Systems are Systems and saved for the current driver profile.
switched off.
Switching steering intervention
Button Status on/off
Button illuminates green: all Intelligent Steering intervention can be separately switched
Safety Systems are switched on. on and off for Lane Change Warning or Lane De‐
parture Warning.
ligent Safety Systems are switched 1. "CAR"
off or are currently not available. 2. "Settings"
Button does not illuminate: all Intelli‐ 3. "Driver assistance"
gent Safety Systems are switched off. 4. "Safety and warnings"
5. "Lane departure warning"
Setting the warning time
6. "Steering intervention"
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings" driver profile.
191
CONTROLS Safety
Display in the instrument cluster Cancellation of the warning

The symbol is illuminated green: a lane For example, the warning is cancelled in the
marking has been detected on at least following situations:
one side of the vehicle and warnings can ▷ Automatically after a few seconds.
be issued. ▷ On returning to the correct lane.
▷ If the vehicle is braking heavily.
Warning function ▷ On indicating.
▷ If Dynamic Stability Control DSC intervenes.
When leaving the lane
If the vehicle leaves the lane and the lane mark‐ System limits
ing is detected, the steering wheel vibrates de‐
pending on the steering wheel vibration setting. Safety note
If the turn indicator is switched on in the corre‐
sponding direction before changing lanes, no
warning is issued. WARNING
The system may not respond at all, or may re‐
Steering intervention spond too late, incorrectly or without justifica‐
tion due to system limitations. There is a risk of
Depending on the equipment, if a lane marking is
accident or material damage. Observe the in‐
crossed in the speed range up to 210 km/h, ap‐
formation on the system limits and intervene
prox. 130 mph, the system may intervene not
actively if necessary.
only by vibrating but also with a brief active steer‐
ing intervention. The steering intervention helps
to keep the vehicle in lane. Steering intervention
can be felt at the steering wheel, and can be
overridden manually at any time. With active The system may have limited functionality in the
steering intervention, the display flashes in the following situations, for example:
instrument cluster. ▷ In thick fog, wet conditions or snow.
▷ When there are missing, worn, poorly visible,
Warning signal merging/separating or ambiguous lane mark‐
Depending on the equipment, if the system exe‐ ings; for example, in areas where there are
cutes an active steering intervention multiple roadworks.
times within 3 minutes without the driver touch‐ ▷ If lane markings are covered by snow, ice, dirt
ing the steering wheel, an acoustic warning is or water.
emitted. A short warning signal sounds on the
▷ On sharp bends or narrow roads.
second steering intervention. A longer warning
signal sounds from the third steering intervention ▷ If lane markings are not white.
onwards. ▷ If lane markings are obscured by objects.
A Check Control message is also displayed. ▷ If the vehicle is too close to the vehicle ahead.
The warning signal and Check Control message ▷ If there is sustained glare due to oncoming
tell the driver to pay more attention to the lane. light, for example if the sun is low in the sky.
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the wind‐
screen in front of the rear-view mirror is soiled
or covered.
192
Safety CONTROLS
▷ If the camera has overheated due to exces‐ Before changing lanes with the turn indicator
sively high temperatures and has been tem‐ switched on, the system issues a warning in the
porarily deactivated. above situations.
▷ Up to 10 seconds after starting the engine The light in the exterior mirror flashes and the
using the start/stop button. steering wheel vibrates.
▷ During the camera calibration process imme‐
diately after vehicle delivery. Safety notes
A Check Control message may be displayed in
the event of limited functionality. WARNING
Lane Change Warning ditions and traffic situation correctly. There is a
Principle traffic conditions. Observe the traffic situation
Lane Change Warning detects vehicles in the and intervene actively if the situation warrants it.
blind spot, or if vehicles are approaching from
behind in the adjacent lane. Different levels of
warning are given in these situations. WARNING
General your personal responsibility. System limitations
dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic con‐
Overview
Operational from a minimum speed, two radar
sensors in the rear bumper monitor the area be‐
hind and next to the vehicle.
The minimum speed is country-specific and is
displayed in the menu for the Intelligent Safety
Systems.
The system indicates when vehicles are in the
blind spot, arrow 1, or are approaching from the
rear in an adjacent lane, arrow 2.
The light in the exterior mirror illuminates at a
dimmed level.
Intelligent Safety
193
CONTROLS Safety
Radar sensors "INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety Systems are


switched off.
The radar sensors are located in the rear
bumper. Button Status
Keep the bumpers clean and unobstructed in the Button illuminates green: all Intelligent
area of the radar sensors. Safety Systems are switched on.

Switching on/off ligent Safety Systems are switched
off or are currently not available.
Automatic activation Button does not illuminate: all Intelli‐
The Lane Change Warning is reactivated auto‐ gent Safety Systems are switched off.
matically at the start of a journey if the function
was switched on the last time the engine was
Setting the warning time
stopped.
1. "CAR"
Switching on manually 2. "Settings"
Press the button. 3. "Driver assistance"
The menu for the Intelligent Safety Sys‐ 4. "Safety and warnings"
tems is shown. 5. "Lane change warning"
If all Intelligent Safety Systems were switched 6. Select the desired setting:
off, all systems are now switched on. ▷ "Early"
"Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the ▷ "Medium"
▷ "Late"
configured individually. The individual settings
are activated and saved for the current driver ▷ "Off": no warning is output for this setting.
profile. As soon as a setting is changed in the The setting is saved for the current driver profile.
menu, all settings in the menu are activated.
Adjusting the strength of the
Press the button repeatedly. steering wheel vibration
The setting switches between the 1. "CAR"
following:
2. "Settings"
switched on. Basic settings are activated for the 3. "Driver assistance"
sub-functions. 4. "Feedback via steering wheel"
194
Safety CONTROLS
5. "Vibration intensity" System limits

The setting is accepted for all Intelligent Safety Safety note
Systems and saved for the current driver profile.
WARNING
Warning function The system may not respond at all, or may re‐
spond too late, incorrectly or without justifica‐
Light in the exterior mirror tion due to system limitations. There is a risk of
formation on the system limits and intervene
Upper speed limit

The system is temporarily disabled at speeds
over approx. 250 km/h, 155 mph.
At speeds below approx. 250 km/h, 155 mph,
the system once again responds according to
Advance warning the setting.
The dimmed light in the exterior mirror indicates
when vehicles are in the blind spot or are ap‐ Functional limitations
proaching from the rear. The system may have limited functionality in the
following situations, for example:
Acute warning ▷ If the speed of the approaching vehicle is sig‐
If the turn indicator is activated while a vehicle is nificantly higher than the driver's own speed.
in the critical area, the steering wheel vibrates ▷ In thick fog, wet conditions or snow.
briefly and the light in the exterior mirror flashes
brightly.
▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up or covered,
The warning is terminated when the other vehi‐
for example by stickers.
cle has left the critical area or the turn signal has
been deactivated. ▷ After work performed incorrectly on the vehi‐
cle paintwork.
Flashing of light ▷ When a projecting load is being transported.
A flashing light when the vehicle is unlocked indi‐ Attaching any objects, for example stickers or
cates that the system is performing a self-test. decals, in the area of the radar beam will also im‐
pair radar sensor operation and may even cause
them to fail.
A Check Control message is displayed in the
event of limited functionality.
Warning displays
Depending on the selected setting for warnings,
for example the warning time, it is possible that
195
CONTROLS Safety
more or fewer warnings will be displayed. As a

result, there may also be an increased number of WARNING
premature warnings about critical situations. Displays and warnings do not relieve you of
Rear collision prevention are not issued or are issued too late, incorrectly
Principle dent. Adapt your driving style to the traffic con‐
The system responds to vehicles approaching ditions. Observe the traffic situation and inter‐
from behind. vene actively if the situation warrants it.
General Overview
Radar sensors
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor

the area behind the vehicle.
If a vehicle is approaching from behind at a rele‐ The radar sensors are located in the rear
vant speed, the system responds as follows: bumper.
▷ The hazard warning lights are switched on to Keep the bumpers clean and unobstructed in the
warn the traffic behind if there is a risk of a area of the radar sensors.
rear collision.
Switching on/off
Safety notes
of each journey.
WARNING The system is deactivated in the following situa‐
The system does not relieve you of your per‐ tions:
sonal responsibility to assess the visibility con‐ ▷ When reversing.
System limits
and intervene actively if the situation warrants it. The system may have limited functionality in the
▷ If the speed of the approaching vehicle is sig‐
nificantly higher than the driver's own speed.
▷ If the approaching vehicle is travelling slowly.
196
Safety CONTROLS

PostCrash – iBrake
▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up or covered, Principle
The system can automatically bring the vehicle
▷ If the sensors' field of view is obscured, for to a standstill in certain accident situations with‐
example due to garage walls, hedges or out the involvement of the driver. The risk of a
mounds of snow. further collision and its consequences can
▷ When a projecting load is being transported. thereby be reduced.
At a standstill
Dynamic brake lights Once the vehicle has come to a halt, the brake is
released automatically.
Principle
The brake lights flash to warn road users behind Harder vehicle braking
the vehicle that an emergency braking manoeu‐ In certain situations, it may be necessary to bring
vre is being performed. This can reduce the risk the vehicle to a standstill more quickly than is
of a rear-end collision. possible with automatic braking.
To do so, brake quickly and firmly. For a brief pe‐
General riod, the braking pressure will be higher than that
achieved with the automatic braking function.
Automatic braking is interrupted.
Cancelling automatic braking

In certain situations, it may be necessary to can‐
cel automatic braking, for example if an avoid‐
ance manoeuvre is required.
Cancel automatic braking:
▷ By depressing the brake pedal.
▷ Normal braking: brake lights illuminate.
▷ By depressing the accelerator pedal.
▷ Heavy braking: brake lights flash.
Shortly before the vehicle comes to a standstill,
the hazard warning lights are activated. Attentiveness assistant
To switch off the hazard warning lights:
▷ Accelerate. General
▷ Press the hazard warning lights button. The system can detect decreasing attentiveness
or the onset of fatigue in the driver on long mo‐
notonous journeys, for example on motorways. In
such situations, the system recommends taking
a break.
197
CONTROLS Safety
Safety note ▷ "Standard": the break recommendation is

given with a defined value.
▷ "Sensitive": the break recommendation is
WARNING
given earlier.
▷ "Off": no break recommendation is given.
sonal responsibility to assess your physical
condition correctly. Increasing inattention or fa‐
tigue might not be detected, or may not be de‐ Display
tected in good time. There is a risk of accident. If the driver shows signs of decreasing attentive‐
Make sure that you, as the driver, are rested ness or of fatigue, a message is shown on the
and alert. Adapt your driving style to the traffic Control Display with the recommendation to take
conditions. a break.
The following settings can be selected during
the display.
Function After a break, another break recommendation
The system is switched on every time drive- cannot be displayed until after approximately
ready state is switched on. 45 minutes at the earliest.
After commencement of the journey, the system
adapts to the driver so that any decrease in at‐ System limits
tention or fatigue can be detected.
The system may have limited functionality in sit‐
This process considers the following criteria: uations such as the following and an incorrect
▷ Personal driving style, for example steering. warning, or no warning at all, may be given:
▷ Driving conditions, for example time of day, ▷ If the time is set incorrectly.
duration of journey. ▷ When the speed is predominantly below ap‐
The system is active from approx. 70 km/h, prox. 70 km/h, 43 mph.
43 mph and can also display a recommendation ▷ If a sporty driving style is adopted, for exam‐
to take a break. ple sharp acceleration or fast cornering.
▷ In active driving situations, for example fre‐
Break recommendations quent lane changes.
▷ In poor road conditions.
Adjusting
▷ In strong crosswinds.
The attentiveness assistant is automatically ac‐
tive every time drive-ready state is switched on The system is reset approximately 45 minutes
and can thus display break recommendations. after the vehicle is stopped, for example when
taking a break during a long motorway journey.
Break recommendations can also be switched
on or off and adjusted via iDrive.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Attentiveness Assistant"
198
Driving Stability Control Systems CONTROLS
Driving Stability Control Systems

Vehicle equipment even more quickly when braking in critical situa‐
tions.
Drive-off assistant
tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐ The system provides support when driving off on
cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ upward gradients.
Driving off
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive off without
Anti-lock Brake System delay.
ABS After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approximately 2 seconds.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking when the Depending on the vehicle's load, the vehicle may
brakes are applied. roll backwards a little.
Steering control is retained even during full brak‐
ing, which enhances active road safety.
ABS is operational each time the engine is star‐
Dynamic Stability Control
ted. DSC
Principle
Brake assist
The system reduces drive power and applies the
brakes on individual wheels, thereby helping,
When the brake pedal is depressed quickly, the
within the limits imposed by physics, to keep the
system automatically applies maximum braking
vehicle safely on course.
power. This keeps the stopping distance as short
as possible in full braking situations. The advan‐
tages offered by the Anti-lock Brake System General
ABS can also be utilised to the full. DSC detects the following unstable driving con‐
The pressure on the brake should be maintained ditions, for example:
for the duration of the full-braking process. ▷ Loss of traction at the rear which can lead to
oversteer.
▷ Loss of grip at the front wheels which can
Adaptive brake assist lead to understeer.
In conjunction with Active Cruise Control ACC,

this system ensures that the brakes respond
199
CONTROLS Driving Stability Control Systems
Safety notes To assist driving stability, re-activate DSC as

soon as possible.
WARNING Deactivating DSC

Hold the button down until DSC OFF is
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
displayed in the instrument cluster and
tion correctly. Due to system limitations, it can‐
the DSC OFF indicator lamp is illuminated.
not respond independently and appropriately in
all traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident.
Adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. Activating DSC
Observe the traffic situation and intervene ac‐
Press the button.
tively if the situation warrants it.
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator
lamps are extinguished.
WARNING
When driving with a roof load, for example with Display
a roof rack, the higher centre of gravity can
mean that driving safety is no longer guaran‐ In the instrument cluster
teed in critical driving situations. There is a risk DSC OFF is displayed in the instrument cluster
of accident or material damage. Do not deacti‐ when DSC is deactivated.
vate Dynamic Stability Control DSC when driv‐
ing with a roof load. Indicator and warning lamps
If the indicator lamp is illuminated: DSC is
Overview deactivated.
Button in the vehicle If the indicator lamp is flashing: DSC is

regulating the acceleration and braking
forces.
If the indicator lamp is illuminated: DSC has
failed.
Dynamic Traction Control

DTC
DSC OFF Principle
DTC is a variant of Dynamic Stability Control
DSC and is optimised for forward momentum.
Deactivate/activate DSC
In special road conditions, for example on un‐
General cleared, snow-covered roads or on loose surfa‐
ces, the system ensures maximum forward mo‐
Driving stability during acceleration and cornering mentum, but with restricted driving stability
is restricted if DSC is deactivated. assistance.
200
Driving Stability Control Systems CONTROLS
General Display
Activating DTC provides maximum traction. Driv‐
ing stability assistance during acceleration and Display in the instrument cluster
cornering is limited. When DTC is activated, TRACTION is displayed
Activating DTC briefly may be useful in the in the instrument cluster.
▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, snow- Indicator and warning lamps
covered roads. The indicator lamp is illuminated: DTC
▷ When starting in deep snow or on a loose has been activated.
surface.
▷ When driving with snow chains. Automatic program change
In certain situations, Dynamic Stability Control
Overview DSC is activated automatically:
▷ If Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go func‐
tion ACC is activated.
▷ When the Intelligent Safety Systems are
braking the vehicle.
▷ In the event of a flat tyre.
M Sport differential
The active M Differential blocks the rear axis
transmission steplessly, depending on the drive
DSC OFF situation. This prevents the spinning of a single
rear wheel in order to provide optimum traction
in all driving situations.
Activate/deactivate DTC The driver is responsible for a driving style ap‐
propriate to the situation.
Activating DTC
Press the button.
TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
Variable sport steering
ment cluster and the DSC OFF indicator lamp is
The variable sport steering facilitates a direct and
illuminated.
agile driving style with little steering effort. The
variable sport steering works independently of
Deactivating DTC the current speed, varying the steering ratio in
line which the steering angle.
Press the button again.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator
light are extinguished.
201
CONTROLS Driver Assistance Systems
Driver Assistance Systems

Vehicle equipment Operation
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Switching on

cific and optional equipment available for the Press the button on the steering wheel.
The current speed is adopted as the speed limit.
tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐ When switching on at a standstill or driving at low
cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ speed, 30 km/h/20 mph is set as the speed limit.
tions and systems. Please comply with the The speedometer marker is set to the current
relevant laws and regulations when using the speed.
corresponding functions and systems. When activating the speed limit it is possible that
Dynamic Stability Control DSC will be switched
on and the drive mode switched to COMFORT.
Manual Speed Limiter
Switching off
Principle Press the button on the steering wheel.
The system can be used to set a speed limit so
that speed restrictions are not exceeded. The system switches off automatically in the
General ▷ When switching the engine off.
The system enables speeds from a value of
▷ When switching on Cruise Control.
30 km/h/20 mph and above to be set as a speed
limit. Below the set speed limit, the vehicle can ▷ When activating some programs using the
be driven without restriction. Driving Experience Control.
The displays turn off.
Overview
Interrupting
Buttons on the steering wheel The system is interrupted in reverse or when roll‐
ing backwards at idle speed.
Button Function
System on/off.
Store current speed.

Speed Limit Assist: adopt the sug‐
gested speed manually.
Rocker switch:
Change the speed limit.
202
Driver Assistance Systems CONTROLS
Change speed limit Warning when the speed limit is

exceeded
Visual warning
If the speed limit is exceeded: the indica‐
tor lamp in the instrument cluster flashes
for as long as you exceed the set speed
limit.
Acoustic warning
Press the rocker switch repeatedly up or down
until the desired speed is set. ▷ A signal sounds if you inadvertently exceed
the set speed limit.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the
resistance point, the speed limit is increased ▷ If the speed limit is reduced to below the
or decreased by 1 km/h, 1 mph. driven speed during the journey, the warning
sounds after a little time.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed be‐
yond the resistance point, the speed limit ▷ If you intentionally exceed the speed limit by
changes to the next multiple of 10 km/h on fully pressing the accelerator pedal, no warn‐
the km/h display or the next multiple of 5 mph ing sounds.
on the mph display in the speedometer.
If the set speed limit has been reached or unin‐ Displays in the instrument
tentionally exceeded, for example when driving cluster
downhill, there is no active brake intervention.
If you set a speed during the journey which is be‐ Display in the speedometer
low the current speed, the vehicle coasts down ▷ Green marker: system is ac‐
to the set speed limit. tive.
The current speed can also be stored by press‐ ▷ Grey mark: the system is inter‐
ing the button: rupted.
Press the button on the steering wheel. ▷ No marker: system is switched
off.
Exceeding the speed limit Indicator lamp

The system gives a warning if the travelling
▷ If the indicator lamp is illuminated: the
speed exceeds the set speed limit.
system is switched on.
You can intentionally exceed the speed limit.
▷ If the indicator lamp is flashing: set
There is no warning in such a case.
speed limit is exceeded.
To intentionally exceed the set speed limit, press
▷ Grey indicator lamp: the system is interrup‐
the accelerator pedal all the way down.
ted.
The limit automatically becomes active again as
soon as the current speed falls below the set
speed limit.
203
Cruise Control
WARNING
The desired speed may be set incorrectly by
Principle mistake or called up accidentally. There is a risk
This system allows a desired speed to be set us‐ of accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
ing the buttons on the steering wheel. The de‐ traffic conditions. Observe the traffic situation
sired speed is then maintained by the system. It and intervene actively if the situation warrants it.
does this by automatically accelerating and brak‐
ing the vehicle as necessary.
Overview
General
The system can be activated from Buttons on the steering wheel
30 km/h/20 mph.
Button Function
Depending on the vehicle setting, the character‐
istics of Cruise Control may change in certain Cruise Control on/off.
areas, for example acceleration in ECO PRO
drive mode is less pronounced.
Safety notes
To resume Cruise Control with last
setting.
WARNING
To interrupt Cruise Control.
tion correctly. Due to system limitations, it can‐ Store current speed.
not respond independently and appropriately in Speed Limit Assist: adopt the sug‐
all traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident. gested speed manually.
Adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions.
Observe the traffic situation and intervene ac‐ Rocker switch:
tively if the situation warrants it. Set the speed.
Switching Cruise Control on/off

WARNING
The risk of an accident may be increased if the Switching on
system is used in certain situations, such as: Depending on the equipment, press the
▷ On stretches of road with many corners corresponding button on the steering
and bends. wheel.
▷ In heavy traffic.
▷ If the road is icy, if there is fog or snow, in The indicator lamps are illuminated in the instru‐
wet conditions or on a loose road surface. ment cluster and the marker in the speedometer
is positioned at the current speed.
There is a risk of accidents or material damage.
Only use the system if it is possible to drive at a Cruise Control is active. The driven speed is
constant speed. maintained and stored as the desired speed.
204
Dynamic Stability Control DSC is switched on, if Setting the speed

necessary.
Maintaining and saving the speed
Switching off
Depending on the equipment, press the
corresponding button on the steering
wheel.
The displays turn off. The stored desired speed

is deleted.
Interrupting Cruise Control

While the system is interrupted, press the rocker
Interrupting manually switch up or down once.
Press the button while the system is ac‐ When the system is switched on, the current
tivated. speed is maintained and stored as the desired
speed.
Interrupting automatically The stored speed is displayed on the speedom‐

eter.
The system is interrupted automatically in the
following situations: Dynamic Stability Control DSC is switched on, if
necessary.
▷ If the driver brakes.
The speed can also be stored by pressing the
▷ Steptronic transmission: if the selector lever
button.
is moved out of selector lever position D.
Press the button.
▷ Manual transmission: if the clutch is pressed
for a few seconds or released with no gear
engaged.
Changing the speed
▷ Manual transmission: if too high a gear has
been engaged for the speed.
▷ If Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated
or Dynamic Stability Control DSC deactiva‐
ted.
Press the rocker switch repeatedly up or down

until the desired speed is set.
If the system is active, the displayed speed is
stored and the vehicle adjusts to the stored
speed when the road is clear.
205
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the Displays in the instrument
resistance point, the desired speed is in‐ cluster
creased or decreased by 1 km/h, 1 mph.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed be‐ Display in the speedometer
yond the resistance point, the desired speed
changes to the next multiple of 10 km/h on ▷ Green indicator: system is ac‐
the km/h display or the next multiple of 5 mph tive, the indicator shows the
on the mph display in the speedometer. desired speed.
The maximum speed which can be set de‐ ▷ Grey mark: system is interrup‐
pends on the vehicle. ted; the mark shows the
stored speed.
▷ When the rocker switch is pressed to the re‐
sistance point and then held there: the vehi‐ ▷ No marker: system is switched off.
cle accelerates or decelerates without the
need to press the accelerator pedal. Indicator lamp
When the rocker switch is released, the vehi‐ ▷ Green indicator lamp: the system is
cle maintains the final speed. Pressing be‐ active.
yond the resistance point accelerates the ve‐
hicle more rapidly. ▷ Grey indicator lamp: the system is in‐
terrupted.
Resuming Cruise Control ▷ No indicator lamp: the system is switched off.
If Cruise Control is interrupted, it can be resumed

by calling up the stored speed. Displays in the Head-Up Display
Before calling up the stored speed, make sure Some information from the system can also be
that the difference between the current speed shown in the Head-Up Display.
and the stored speed is not too great. Otherwise,
The symbol is displayed when the set
there may be unintentional braking or accelera‐
desired speed has been reached.
tion.
With the system interrupted, press the
button. System limits
The desired speed is also maintained when driv‐
Cruise Control is resumed with the stored values. ing downhill. The vehicle may drive slower than
In the following instances, the stored speed is the desired speed on uphill gradients if there is
deleted and therefore cannot be called up again: not enough drive power.
▷ When the system is switched off. In ECO PRO drive mode, it is possible that the
▷ When drive-ready state is switched off. vehicle will drive faster or slower than the desired
speed setting in some situations, for example on
downward or upward gradients.
206
Active Cruise Control with Observe the traffic situation and intervene ac‐
Stop&Go function ACC
Principle WARNING
This system allows you to set a desired speed An unsecured vehicle can start moving and roll‐
and a desired distance from the vehicle in front, ing away. There is a risk of accident. Before
using the buttons on the steering wheel. leaving the vehicle, secure it to prevent it from
When the road ahead is clear, the system main‐ rolling away.
tains the desired speed. The vehicle accelerates Observe the following to ensure that the vehi‐
or brakes automatically. cle is secured against rolling away:
If there is a vehicle driving in front, the system ▷ Apply the parking brake.
adapts the speed of your vehicle in order to ▷ Turn the front wheels towards the kerb on
maintain the set distance from the vehicle ahead. upward or downward gradients.
The speed is adapted as far as the given situa‐
tion allows.
chock.
General
A radar sensor in the front bumper and a camera
on the rear-view mirror are used to detect vehi‐ WARNING
cles ahead.
Depending on the vehicle setting, the character‐ mistake or called up accidentally. There is a risk
istics of Cruise Control may change in certain of accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
areas, for example acceleration in ECO PRO traffic conditions. Observe the traffic situation
drive mode is less pronounced. and intervene actively if the situation warrants it.
The distance can be set in several stages and for
safety reasons is dependent on the respective
speed. WARNING
If the vehicle ahead brakes to a standstill and There is a risk of accident if the difference in
sets off again shortly afterwards, the system is speed relative to other vehicles is excessively
able to recognise this as far as the given condi‐ high. This may occur, for example, in the
tions allow. following situations:
▷ When quickly approaching a slowly mov‐
Safety notes ing vehicle.
▷ If another vehicle suddenly veers into the
WARNING vehicle's own lane.
The system does not relieve you of your per‐ ▷ When quickly approaching stationary vehi‐
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐ cles.
tion correctly. Due to system limitations, it can‐ There is a risk of injury or even death. Observe
not respond independently and appropriately in the traffic situation and intervene actively if the
all traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident. situation warrants it.
Adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions.
207
Overview Camera
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Cruise Control on/off.
Store current speed.

Speed Limit Assist: adopt the sug‐
gested speed manually.
To resume Cruise Control with last Keep the windscreen clean and clear in this area.
setting.
To interrupt Cruise Control. Use

The system can be used to optimum effect on
Increase the distance. well-constructed roads.
Switch distance control on/off. The minimum speed that can be set is
30 km/h/20 mph.
Reduce the distance.
The maximum speed which can be set is limited
Switch distance control on/off.
and depends on the vehicle and its equipment,
Rocker switch: for example.
Set the speed. Higher speeds can be set by switching to Cruise
Control without distance control.
Radar sensor The system can also be activated when the vehi‐
cle is at a standstill.
Switching Cruise Control on/off

and interrupting
Switching on
Press the button on the steering wheel.
The indicator lamps are illuminated in the instru‐

The radar sensor is in the lower area of the front ment cluster and the marker in the speedometer
bumper. is positioned at the current speed.
Keep the radar sensor clean and unobstructed. Cruise Control is active. The driven speed is
maintained and stored as the desired speed.
Dynamic Stability Control DSC is switched on, if
necessary.
208
Switching off Setting the speed

When switching off with the vehicle at a stand‐
still, depress the brake pedal at the same time. Maintaining and saving the speed
Press the button on the steering wheel:
Button on the steering wheel.
The displays turn off. The stored desired speed

is deleted.
Interrupting manually
With the system active, press the button on the
steering wheel:
While the system is interrupted, press the rocker
Button on the steering wheel. switch up or down once. The system is activa‐
ted.
If interrupting the system when the vehicle is at a
The current speed is maintained and stored as
standstill, depress the brake pedal at the same
the desired speed.
time.
The stored speed is displayed on the speedom‐
Interrupting automatically eter.
The system is interrupted automatically in the Dynamic Stability Control DSC is switched on, if
following situations: necessary.
▷ If the driver brakes. The speed can also be stored by pressing the
button.
▷ If the selector lever is moved out of posi‐
tion D. Press the button.
▷ If Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated
or Dynamic Stability Control DSC deactiva‐
ted. Changing the speed
▷ If the vehicle is stationary and the seat belt is
unfastened and the driver's door is opened.
▷ If the system has not detected any objects for
an extended period of time, for example on
roads with little traffic and without defined
boundaries.
▷ If the detection zone of the radar is disrupted,
for example due to contamination or heavy Press the rocker switch repeatedly up or down
rainfall. until the desired speed is set.
▷ After an extended stationary period, if the ve‐
hicle was decelerated to a standstill by the If the system is active, the displayed speed is
system. stored and the vehicle adjusts to the stored
speed when the road is clear.
209
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the Resuming Cruise Control
resistance point, the desired speed is in‐
If Cruise Control is interrupted, it can be resumed
creased or decreased by 1 km/h, 1 mph.
by calling up the stored speed.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed be‐
Before calling up the stored speed, make sure
yond the resistance point, the desired speed
that the difference between the current speed
changes to the next multiple of 10 km/h on
and the stored speed is not too great. Otherwise,
the km/h display or the next multiple of 5 mph
there may be unintentional braking or accelera‐
on the mph display in the speedometer.
tion.
To repeat an action, hold the rocker switch in the
With the system interrupted, press the button on
relevant position.
the steering wheel:
Adjusting the distance Button on the steering wheel.
General Cruise Control is resumed with the stored values.

The distance setting is saved for the current In the following instances, the stored speed is
driver profile. deleted and therefore cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
Safety note ▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.
WARNING Switching between Cruise

The system does not relieve you of your per‐ Control with/without distance
sonal responsibility. System limitations may control
mean that braking is performed too late. There
is a risk of accidents or material damage. Pay Safety note
close attention to the traffic conditions at all
times. Adapt the distance to traffic and weather
conditions and comply with the prescribed safe WARNING
distance by braking if necessary. The system does not respond to traffic travel‐
ling in front of you, but instead maintains the
stored speed. There is a risk of accidents or
Reducing the distance material damage. Adjust the desired speed to
the traffic conditions and brake if necessary.
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
The selected distance is displayed in the instru‐ Switching the Cruise Control mode
ment cluster. Switch Cruise Control without distance control
on and off:
Increasing the distance
▷ Press and hold the button.
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
▷ Press and hold the button.
The selected distance is displayed in the instru‐ Switch on distance control:
ment cluster.
▷ Press the button.
210
Symbol Description
▷ Press the button.
A Check Control message is then displayed. Distance 4.

cluster
General No display of distance control

because the accelerator pedal is
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the dis‐
being pressed.
plays in the instrument cluster may vary.
Display in the speedometer

▷ Green indicator: system is ac‐ Detected vehicle
tive, the indicator shows the
desired speed. Symbol Description
▷ Grey mark: system is interrup‐
Green symbol:
ted; the mark shows the
stored speed. Vehicle ahead detected.
▷ No marker: system is switched off.
Vehicle distance
When the distance to the detected vehicle in‐
The selected distance to the vehicle ahead is
creases, the vehicle symbol in the distance dis‐
displayed.
play moves away.
Symbol Description If necessary, drive off yourself, for example by
pressing the accelerator pedal or rocker switch.
Distance 1.
Distance 2.
Distance 3.
Corresponds to approximately
half of the value of the speed‐
ometer reading, expressed in
metres. Selected when the sys‐
tem is switched on for the first
time.
211
▷ Active Cruise Control switched off.

▷ Display in the Head-Up Display selected.
Symbol Description
Head-Up Display, see page 166.
Green indicator lamp: the sys‐ ▷ Distance too close.
tem is active. ▷ Speed above approximately 70 km/h,
No indicator lamp: the system is 40 mph.
switched off.
Vehicle symbol flashes: System limits

The requirements for system
operation are no longer being
Detection range
met.
The system has been deactiva‐
ted but will continue to brake
until you actively take over by
depressing the brake or acceler‐
ator pedal.
Vehicle symbol and distance bar

flash red and an acoustic signal
sounds:
The system's detection capability and automatic
Brake and perform an evasive braking capacity are limited.
manoeuvre if necessary.
For example two-wheeled vehicles may not be
System interrupted. detected.
Deceleration
The system does not decelerate in the following
situations:
Displays in the Head-Up Display ▷ For pedestrians or similarly slow road users.
▷ Depending on the equipment, at red traffic
Desired speed lights.
Some information from the system can also be ▷ For crossing traffic.
shown in the Head-Up Display. ▷ For oncoming vehicles.
The symbol is displayed when the set
desired speed has been reached.
Distance information
The symbol is shown if the distance from
the vehicle in front is too close.
The distance information is active under the

following circumstances:
212
Vehicles cutting in
When your vehicle is approaching a bend, the

angle of the bend may cause the system to re‐
If another vehicle suddenly cuts in front of you, spond temporarily to vehicles in the other lane. If
the system might not be able to restore the se‐ the system responds by decelerating the vehicle,
lected distance automatically. In some circum‐ you may compensate for this by accelerating
stances, it may also not be possible to restore briefly. When the accelerator pedal is released
the selected distance if you are driving signifi‐ again, the system will resume control of the vehi‐
cantly faster than vehicles in front, for example cle's speed.
when rapidly approaching a lorry. If a vehicle is
clearly detected in front of you, the system
prompts you to intervene by braking, and if nec‐ Driving off
essary by taking evasive action. The vehicle cannot drive off automatically in
some situations, for example:
Cornering ▷ On steep upward gradients.
▷ Before bumps or rises in the road.
In such cases, press accelerator pedal.
Weather
The following restrictions may apply if the
weather or lighting conditions are unfavourable:
▷ Impaired detection of vehicles.
▷ Brief interruptions when vehicles have already
been detected.
If the desired speed is too high for cornering, it
will be reduced slightly in the bend. However, the Examples of unfavourable weather or lighting
system may not detect bends in advance, so conditions:
moderate your speed when cornering. ▷ Wet roads.
The system has a limited detection range. Situa‐ ▷ Snowfall.
tions can arise on tight bends where a vehicle ▷ Slush.
driving in front will not be detected or will be de‐
tected very late. ▷ Fog.
▷ Oncoming light.
Pay attention when driving and respond to the
prevailing traffic conditions. If necessary, inter‐
vene actively, for example by braking, steering or
taking evasive action.
213
Drive power ▷ Manual Speed Limiter.

The desired speed is also maintained when driv‐ ▷ Cruise Control.
ing downhill. The vehicle may drive slower than ▷ Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function
the desired speed on uphill gradients if there is ACC.
not enough drive power.
The speed value is proposed as a new desired
In ECO PRO drive mode, it is possible that the speed for adopting. The relevant system must
vehicle will drive faster or slower than the desired be activated for the speed value to be adopted.
speed setting in some situations, for example on
downward or upward gradients. Safety notes
Malfunction
WARNING
Radar sensor The system does not relieve you of your per‐
The system cannot be activated if the radar sen‐ sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
sor is not correctly aligned, for example if it is tion correctly. Due to system limitations, it can‐
damaged while parking. not respond independently and appropriately in
all traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident.
A Check Control message is displayed if the sys‐ Adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions.
tem has failed. Observe the traffic situation and intervene ac‐
Have the system checked by a Service Partner tively if the situation warrants it.
The system may have limited functionality if the WARNING
radar sensor detection range is partially covered,
for example by the number plate holder.
mistake or called up accidentally. There is a risk
of accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
Camera traffic conditions. Observe the traffic situation
Detection of and response to stationary vehicles and intervene actively if the situation warrants it.
when approaching may be limited in the
▷ During the camera calibration process imme‐ Overview
diately after vehicle delivery.
▷ Failure or soiling of the camera. A Check
Buttons on the steering wheel
Control message is shown.
Button Function
Adopt the suggested speed manually.

Speed Limit Assist
Rocker switch:
Principle Set the speed; see Cruise Control.
When the systems in the vehicle, for example
Speed Limit Info, detect a change in the speed
limit, it is possible to adopt this new speed limit
value for the following systems:
214
Switching on/off Symbol Function

1. "CAR"
Depending on the vehicle equip‐
2. "Settings" ment, the indicator lamp illumi‐
3. "Driver assistance" nates green, together with the
symbol for a cruise control system:
4. If necessary, "Driving"
Speed Limit Assist is active and
5. "Speed Assistant"
detected speed limits can be
6. "Speed limits" adopted manually for the displayed
7. Select the desired setting: system.
▷ "Adjust manually": the detected speed Detected change in speed limit de‐
limit can be adopted manually. tected with immediate effect.
▷ "Show anticipation": detected speed lim‐ Distance information shown along‐
its are displayed in the instrument cluster side the symbol indicates there
without being adopted. might be a change in the speed
▷ "Off": Speed Limit Assist is switched off. limit up ahead.
Other proactive comfort functions – the Indicator lamp is illuminated green:
route-ahead assistant, for example – may the detected speed limit can be
be switched off. adopted with the SET button.
A green tick is displayed once it
Displays in the instrument has been adopted.
cluster
A message is displayed in the instrument cluster
Manual adoption
if the system and Cruise Control are switched on.
A detected speed limit can be applied to Cruise
Control manually.
When the SET symbol is illuminated,
press the button.
Speed adjustment
Principle
It is possible to set whether the speed limit will
be accepted exactly, or with a tolerance.
General
It is possible to set a speed adjustment for all
speeds and an additional speed adjustment for
speeds up to 60 km/h/40 mph.
The additional speed adjustment for speeds up
to 60 km/h/40 mph can be activated or deactiva‐
ted.
215
Adjusting slowly approaches are indicated by means of

1. "CAR" acoustic signals and a display on the Control Dis‐
play.
2. "Settings"
Depending on the equipment: obstacles at the
3. "Driver assistance" side of the vehicle that are detected by the side
4. If necessary, "Driving" ultrasonic sensors may also be reported by the
5. "Speed Assistant" lateral parking aid function.
6. Perform the desired setting:
General
▷ "Adjust speed limits": set tolerance for
speed adjustment with an effect on all The ultrasonic sensors for measuring distances
speeds. are located in the bumpers, and if applicable on
the side of the vehicle.
▷ "2nd adjustment up to": activate or deac‐
tivate additional speed adjustment. Their range is approximately 2 m, 6 ft, depending
on the obstacle and environment.
▷ "Adjust speed limits": if additional speed
adjustment is activated, set a tolerance for An acoustic warning is given when the vehicle is
speeds up to 60 km/h/40 mph. approx. 70 cm, 27 in away from an object and a
collision is imminent.
System limits For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic
warning is given sooner, at a distance of approx.
Speed Limit Assist based on the Speed Limit
1.50 m, 5 ft.
Info system.
Take into account the Speed Limit Info system
Safety notes
limits.
Depending on the country, displayed speed lim‐
its may not be available for acceptance, or may WARNING
only be available to a limited extent, for example The system does not relieve you of your per‐
with speed information from the navigation sys‐ sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tem. tion correctly. Due to system limitations, it can‐
Cruise Control without distance control: depend‐ not respond independently and appropriately in
ing on the system, it may not be possible to all traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident.
adopt speed limits automatically. Adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions.
Observe the traffic situation and intervene ac‐
Speed limits that are ahead may only be adopted
for Active Cruise Control ACC.
Limits of the Speed Limit Information system, WARNING
see page 163.
If the vehicle is travelling at high speed when
Park Distance Control PDC is activated, the
Park Distance Control PDC warning may be delayed due to the physical
conditions. There is a risk of injury or material
damage. Avoid approaching an object at speed.
Principle Avoid moving off at speed while Park Distance
PDC provides assistance when parking the vehi‐ Control PDC is not yet active.
cle. Objects in front of or behind the vehicle as it
216
Overview Automatic activation on detection of obstacles

can be enabled and disabled.
Button in the vehicle 1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Parking and manoeuvring"
5. If necessary, "Automatic PDC activation"
6. "Automatic PDC activation"
Depending on the equipment version, a respec‐
tive camera view is switched on additionally.
Park Assistant button
Automatic deactivation when
moving forwards
Ultrasonic sensors
The system switches off once a certain distance
Ultrasonic sensors of the PDC, or speed is exceeded.
for example in the bumpers.
Switch the system back on if necessary.
Switching on/off manually

Press the Park Assistant button.
▷ Do not cover sensors, for example by stick‐ ▷ On: the LED is illuminated.
ers, a bicycle rack or the like. ▷ Off: the LED is extinguished.
▷ Keep sensors clean and free from ice. The image from the rear-view camera is shown
when reverse gear is engaged and the Park As‐
Switching on/off sistant button is pressed.
Depending on the equipment, the system cannot
Automatic activation be switched off manually when reverse gear is
The system switches on automatically in the engaged.
▷ If selector lever position R is engaged while Warning
the engine is running.
Acoustic signals
▷ Depending on the equipment version: when
approaching detected obstacles, if the speed
General
is below approximately 4 km/h, 2.5 mph. The
distance from the obstacle at which the sys‐ An intermittent sound indicates that the vehicle
tem activates depends on the individual sit‐ is approaching an object. For instance, if an ob‐
uation. ject is identified to the rear left of the vehicle, the
acoustic signal is emitted from the rear left loud‐
speaker.
217
The shorter the distance to an object, the shorter The recording range of the sensors is shown in
the intervals become. green, yellow and red if obstacles are detected
A continuous tone sounds if the distance to a within the range.
detected object is less than approximately Driving path lines are displayed for better estima‐
20 cm, 8 in. tion of the space required.
If there are objects in front of and behind the ve‐ If the rear-view camera image is shown, it is pos‐
hicle at the same time, and they are at a distance sible to change over to PDC or, if required, to an‐
of less than approximately 20 cm, 8 in, an alter‐ other view with obstacle markings:
nating continuous tone sounds.
1. If necessary, push the Controller to the left.
Steptronic transmission: the intermittent tone
2. For example "Parking sensors"
and the continuous tone are switched off when
selector lever position P is engaged. Crossing traffic warning: depending on the
equipment, the PDC display also warns of vehi‐
The intermittent sound switches off a short while
cles approaching from the sides at the front and
after the vehicle comes to a standstill.
rear.
Volume control For further information:
The PDC acoustic signal volume can be adjus‐ Crossing traffic warning, see page 231.
ted.
System limits
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings" Safety note
4. "Parking and manoeuvring" WARNING
5. "Volume PDC signal" The system may not respond at all, or may re‐
6. Set the desired value. spond too late, incorrectly or without justifica‐
The setting is saved for the current driver profile. tion due to system limitations. There is a risk of
Visual warning formation on the system limits and intervene
Limits of the ultrasound

measurement
Certain conditions and objects may push ultra‐
sonic measurement to its physical limits, includ‐
ing the following:
▷ Small children and animals.
▷ Persons wearing certain types of clothing, for
The vehicle's approach to an object is shown on
example a coat.
the Control Display. Objects further away are
shown even before an acoustic signal is given. ▷ External interference with the ultrasound, for
example by passing vehicles or loud ma‐
The display appears as soon as PDC is activated. chines.
218
▷ Sensors which are dirty, iced up, damaged or ▷ In the presence of dense exhaust fumes.
incorrectly adjusted. ▷ In the presence of other ultrasonic sources,
▷ Certain weather conditions; for example, high for example sweeping machines, steam-jet
humidity, wet conditions, snowfall, cold, ex‐ cleaners or neon lights.
treme heat or strong wind. To reduce false warnings, for example in car
▷ Trailer drawbars and tow hitches of other ve‐ washes, switch off automatic activation of Park
hicles. Distance Control PDC when obstacles are de‐
▷ Thin or wedge-shaped objects. tected if necessary.
▷ Moving objects.
Malfunction
▷ Higher protruding objects, for example pro‐
jecting walls. A Check Control message is shown.
▷ Objects with corners, edges and smooth sur‐ A white symbol is shown and the moni‐
faces. toring range of the sensors is shown in
dark colour on the Control Display.
▷ Objects with fine surfaces or structures, for
example fences. Park Distance Control PDC has failed. Have the
▷ Objects with porous surfaces. system checked by a Service Partner of the
▷ Small and low objects such as boxes. manufacturer or another qualified Service Partner
▷ Obstacles and people at the edge of the lane.
▷ Soft obstacles or obstacles covered in foam.
▷ Plants or shrubs. Depending on the
▷ Low objects already indicated, for example equipment version:
kerbs, may enter the sensors' blind areas be‐
fore or after a continuous tone is given.
emergency braking
▷ The system does not take into account loads function, Active PDC
projecting beyond the outline of the vehicle.
Principle
False alarms The emergency brake function of PDC initiates
Under the following conditions, the system may emergency braking if there is an imminent risk of
issue a warning even though there is no obstacle a collision.
in the detection range:
▷ In heavy rain. General
▷ If the sensors are heavily soiled or covered Due to the system limits, a collision cannot be
with ice. prevented under all circumstances.
▷ If the sensors are covered with snow. The function is available at speeds below walking
▷ On rough road surfaces. speed when driving or rolling in reverse.
▷ On uneven surfaces, for example speed Pressing the accelerator pedal interrupts the
bumps. brake intervention.
▷ In large, rectangular buildings with smooth After emergency braking to a stop, it is possible
walls, for example underground car parks. to continue a slow approach to the obstacle. To
approach, lightly depress the accelerator pedal
▷ In washing bays and car washes.
and release it again.
219
If the accelerator pedal is depressed for longer, System limits

the vehicle pulls away. Manual braking is possible
The system limits of the Park Distance Control
at any time.
PDC and the Park Assist apply.
The system uses the ultrasonic sensors of Park
If necessary, deactivate the system via iDrive
Distance Control PDC and Park Assist.
where applicable.
Safety note
With Parking Assistant:
WARNING lateral parking aid
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐ Principle
tion correctly. There is a risk of accident. Adapt
your driving style to the traffic conditions. Addi‐ The system warns about obstacles at the side of
tionally, look directly to check the traffic situa‐ the vehicle.
tion and the area around the vehicle and inter‐
vene actively where appropriate. General
The system uses the ultrasonic sensors of Park
The Safety Information for the Park Distance Distance Control PDC and Park Assist.
Control PDC and Park Assist also applies.
For further information: Safety note
▷ Park Distance Control, PDC, see page 216.
▷ Park Assistant, see page 224. WARNING
Temporary switch-off sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
The emergency braking function can be tion correctly. There is a risk of accident. Adapt
switched off temporarily: your driving style to the traffic conditions. Addi‐
tionally, look directly to check the traffic situa‐
Confirm the message on the Control Display.
If the journey is continued in these environmental vene actively where appropriate.
conditions, no further emergency braking is per‐
formed. The Safety Information for the Park Distance
Settings For further information:
It is possible to set which areas of the vehicle are ▷ Park Distance Control, PDC, see page 216.
protected by the system.
▷ Park Assistant, see page 224.
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
5. "Active PDC emergency interv."
220
Display Safety note
WARNING
tion correctly. There is a risk of accident. Adapt
your driving style to the traffic conditions. Addi‐
tionally, look directly to check the traffic situa‐
vene actively where appropriate.
Obstacle markings are displayed at the sides of
the vehicle to protect the vehicle's flanks.
▷ Coloured markings: warning that obstacles Overview
have been detected.
Depending on the equipment:
▷ Grey markings, hatched surface: no obstacles
have been detected.
button in the vehicle
▷ No markings, black surface: the area adjacent
to the vehicle has not yet been detected.
Lateral parking aid limits

The system only shows stationary obstacles that
were previously detected by the sensors when
driving past.
The system does not detect whether an obstacle
subsequently moves. The markings are shown in Park Assistant button
black after a certain time when the vehicle is sta‐
tionary. The area next to the vehicle needs to be
scanned again. Camera
The system limits of the Park Distance Control
PDC and the Park Assist also apply.
Rear-view camera
Principle
The rear-view camera provides assistance when
reverse parking or manoeuvring. It does this by
showing an image of the area behind the vehicle The camera lens is located in the handle strip of
on the Control Display. the boot lid.
Assistance functions, for example auxiliary lines, Dirt can impair the quality of the image. Clean the
can also be shown on the display. camera lens if required.
221
Switching on/off Display on the Control Display
Automatic activation Toolbars

The system automatically switches on when se‐ Assistance functions can be activated manually
lector lever position R is engaged while the en‐ using the function bars on the sides of the Con‐
gine is running. trol Display.
1. If necessary, tilt the Controller to the right.
Automatic deactivation when
moving forwards 2. With the corresponding equipment:
"Camera picture"
The system switches off once a certain distance
3. ▷ "Parking guide lines".
or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on if necessary. Driving path lines and turning circle lines
are shown.
Depending on the equipment: ▷ "Obstacle mark.".
switching on/off manually Depending on the equipment, the obsta‐
cles detected by Park Distance Control
PDC are displayed by markings.
A number of assistance functions can be active
▷ On: the LED is illuminated.
simultaneously.
▷ Off: the LED is extinguished.
The parking assistance functions are shown on Parking guidance lines
the Control Display.
Driving path lines
Switching the view via iDrive
If the rear-view camera view is not displayed,
change the view via iDrive:
1. If necessary, tilt the Controller to the side.

2. "Rear view camera"
The image from the rear-view camera is shown.
▷ The boot lid is completely closed. The driving path lines help you to estimate the
▷ Keep the detection range of the camera space required when parking and manoeuvring
clear. Projecting loads or carrier systems that on a level road surface.
are not connected to a trailer socket can re‐ The driving path lines are dependent on the
strict the detection area of the camera. steering angle and continuously adapt to steer‐
ing wheel movements.
222
Turning circle lines The colour grading of the obstacle markings is

the same as the Park Distance Control PDC
markings.
Adjusting brightness and

contrast via iDrive
With rear-view camera switched on:
1. If necessary, tilt the Controller to the right.

2. "Camera picture"
The turning circle lines can only be shown in the 3. Perform the desired setting:
camera image together with driving path lines.
▷ "Brightness"
The turning circle lines show the trajectory of the
smallest possible turning circle on a level road ▷ "Contrast"
surface.
Once the steering wheel has been turned be‐
System limits
yond a certain angle, only one turning circle line
is displayed. Deactivated camera
If the camera is deactivated, for example when
the boot lid is opened, the camera image is dis‐
Parking with the help of driving path and
played as grey hatching.
turning circle lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning Detection of objects
circle line is within the boundaries of the park‐
Very low obstacles and higher, protruding ob‐
ing space.
jects such as ledges cannot be detected by the
2. Turn the steering wheel so that the green system.
driving path line covers the corresponding
Depending on the equipment, some assistance
turning circle line.
functions also take account of Park Distance
Control PDC data.
Obstacle marker
Observe the notes in the chapter on Park Dis‐
tance Control PDC.
The objects shown in the Control Display may be
closer than they appear. Do not estimate the dis‐
tance to objects based on the display.
Depending on the equipment, obstacles behind

the vehicle are detected by the Park Distance
Control PDC sensors.
Obstacle markers can be shown in the image
from the rear-view camera.
223
With Parking Assistant: Steptronic transmission

Park Assistant calculates the ideal parking line
Park Assist and takes over the following functions during a
parking operation:
Principle ▷ Steering.
▷ Accelerating and braking.
▷ Changing gear.
The parking operation takes place automatically.
Safety notes
WARNING
The system supports the driver in the following sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
situations: tion correctly. Due to system limitations, it can‐
▷ When parking sideways parallel to the road: not respond independently and appropriately in
parallel parking. all traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident.
▷ When reverse parking perpendicular to the Adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions.
road: perpendicular parking. The system lines Observe the traffic situation and intervene ac‐
up with the middle of the parking space when tively if the situation warrants it.
parking perpendicular to the road.
▷ Depending on the equipment version: when
leaving parallel parking spaces NOTE
Park Assistant may steer across or up onto
General kerbs. There is a risk of material damage. Ob‐
serve the traffic situation and intervene actively
Operation if the situation warrants it.
Operation of Park Assistant is divided into three
In addition, the safety notes apply for Park Dis‐
steps:
tance Control PDC.
▷ Switching on and activating.
▷ Parking space search.
Park Distance Control, PDC, see page 216.
▷ Parking.
The status of the system and the actions re‐
quired are shown on the Control Display.
Ultrasonic sensors measure parking spaces on
both sides of the vehicle.
Manual transmission
The Park Assistant calculates the ideal parking
line and takes over steering during the process
of parking.
224
Overview ▷ Maximum distance from the row of parked

vehicles: 1.5 m, 5 ft.
Suitable parking space
General:
▷ Gap behind an object that is at least 0.5 m,
1.7 ft long.
▷ Gap between two objects, each at least
0.5 m, 1.7 ft long.
Parking parallel to the road:
▷ Minimum length of gap between two objects:
own vehicle length plus approximately 0.8 m,
Park Assistant button 2.6 ft.
▷ Minimum depth: approximately 1.5 m, 5 ft.
Ultrasonic sensors Perpendicular parking:

▷ Minimum length of gap: own vehicle width
plus approximately 0.7 m, 2.3 ft.
▷ Minimum depth: own vehicle length.
Drivers must estimate the depth of perpen‐
dicular parking spaces themselves. Due to
technical limits, the system is only able to
gauge the depth of perpendicular parking
spaces approximately.
The system uses the four side ultrasonic sen‐ For parking
sors, arrows, and the ultrasonic sensors in the ▷ Doors and boot lid are closed.
bumpers to measure parking spaces and distan‐ Steptronic transmission:
ces to obstacles.
▷ Driver's seat belt is fastened.
Operating requirements Switching on with the button

Ultrasonic sensors
The LED is illuminated.
▷ Do not cover the sensors, for example with
stickers. It is possible to display the current status of the
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed. parking space search on the Control Display.
Park Assistant is automatically activated.
For measuring parking spaces
▷ The vehicle must be driving forwards in a Switching on with reverse gear
straight line at speeds up to approximately 1. Engage reverse gear.
35 km/h, 22 mph.
225
It is possible to display the current status of ▷ Suitable parking spaces are shown on the
the parking space search on the Control Dis‐ Control Display on the edge of the roadway
play. next to the vehicle symbol. When Park Assis‐
2. Activate if necessary: "Park Assist" tant is active, suitable parking spaces are
highlighted and an acoustic signal sounds.
Switching on via iDrive ▷ When perpendicular or parallel parking
spaces are clearly detected, the system auto‐
Rear-view camera display or PDC view must be
matically sets the appropriate parking
active.
method. A selection menu is displayed for
1. Tilt the Controller to the right. parking spaces that are large enough for both
2. Activate the Park Assistant on the Control parallel and perpendicular parking. In this
Display: "Park Assist" case, select the desired parking method
manually.
Display on the Control Display ▷ Parking operation active. The system
takes over the steering.
System is activated/deactivated ▷ The parking space search is active whenever
the vehicle is driving forwards at low speed,
Sym‐ Meaning even if the system is deactivated. If the sys‐
bol tem is deactivated, the displays on the Con‐
trol Display may be shown in grey.
Grey: system is not available.
White: system is available but not ac‐ Switching the acoustic signal for
tivated.
suitable parking spaces on/off
System is activated. 1. "CAR"
Parking space search is active. 2. "Settings"
Parking operation is active. The sys‐
tem takes over the steering. 4. "Parking and manoeuvring"
5. "Park Assist"
Parking space search and system 6. "Alert if parking space detected"
status The setting is saved for the current driver profile.
Park Distance Control PDC

acoustic signals
During an automatic parking manoeuvre, Park
Distance Control PDC does not emit an intermit‐
tent tone.
A continuous tone sounds if the distance to a
detected object is less than approximately
20 cm, 8 in.
▷ The Park Assistant is activated and park‐
ing space search is active.
226
Parking with Park Assistant Cancelling automatically

The system automatically cancels in the
Driving into a parking space following situations:
1. Switch on and activate Park Assistant. ▷ If the driver grips the steering wheel or steers
For this, engage reverse gear or press the the vehicle.
Park Assist button and activate the system on ▷ On snow-covered or slippery road surfaces, if
the control display if necessary. necessary.
Park Assistant is activated. ▷ If it encounters objects that are difficult to ne‐
2. Drive forwards past the line of parked vehi‐ gotiate, for example kerbs.
cles at a speed up to approximately 35 km/h, ▷ If objects appear suddenly.
22 mph and at a distance of maximum 1.5 m, ▷ If Park Distance Control PDC shows gaps
5 ft. that are too small.
The status of the parking space search and ▷ When a maximum number of parking at‐
possible parking spaces are shown on the tempts or the parking time is exceeded.
Control Display.
▷ If other functions are selected on the Control
3. Confirm the suggested parking space for the Display.
parking process: select the parking space on
the Control Display. Manual transmission:
The system takes over the steering. ▷ When selecting gear, which does not corre‐
spond to the information on the Control Dis‐
4. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐ play.
play.
▷ At speeds over approximately 10 km/h,
Manual transmission: 6 mph.
To achieve an optimum parking position, wait ▷ If the turn indicator opposite to the desired
for the automatic steering process after parking side is switched on.
changing gear at standstill.
▷ If the boot lid is open.
When parking is complete, selector lever po‐
sition P is engaged. ▷ When doors are open.
Completion of parking is indicated on the ▷ If the parking brake is applied.

Control Display. ▷ When accelerating.
5. Adjust the parking position yourself if neces‐ ▷ If the brake pedal remains pressed for a rela‐
sary. tively long period when the vehicle is station‐
ary.
Cancelling manually ▷ When the driver's seat belt is unfastened.
You can cancel Park Assistant at any time: A Check Control message is shown.
▷ Press the Park Assistant button.
Resuming
▷ "Park Assist": select the symbol on the You can continue a cancelled parking operation if
Control Display. applicable.
To do this, reactivate the Park Assistant and fol‐
low the instructions on the Control Display.
227
Switching off Limits of the ultrasound

The system can be switched off manually: measurement
Certain conditions and objects may push ultra‐
sound measurement to its physical limits.
The ultrasound measurement limits of the Park
System limits Distance Control PDC apply.
Safety note Park Distance Control, PDC, see page 216.
WARNING Malfunction
The system may not respond at all, or may re‐ A Check Control message is shown.
spond too late, incorrectly or without justifica‐ Park Assistant has failed. Have the system
tion due to system limitations. There is a risk of checked by a Service Partner of the manufac‐
accident or material damage. Observe the in‐ turer or another qualified Service Partner or a
formation on the system limits and intervene specialist workshop.
Depending on the
No parking assistance
equipment version: leaving
Park Assistant does not provide assistance in the
following situations: a parking space with the
▷ On sharp bends. Park Assistant
▷ In angled parking spaces.
Principle
Functional limitations The system makes it easier to leave parallel park‐
The system may have limited functionality in the ing spaces.
▷ On uneven road surfaces, for example gravel General
roads.
▷ On slippery surfaces. Manual transmission
▷ On steep upward or downward gradients. The Park Assist calculates the optimum line to
take when driving out of the space and takes
▷ If leaves have collected or snow has drifted or
over the steering during the manoeuvre until the
been piled up in the parking space.
driver can drive out of the space without any fur‐
▷ If the spare wheel has been fitted. ther steering movements.
▷ If there is a change in a measured parking
space. Steptronic transmission
▷ If there are ditches or sudden drops, for ex‐ The Park Assistant calculates the optimum line
ample a quayside. to take when driving out of the space and takes
▷ In some cases, parking spaces may be detec‐ over the following functions during the manoeu‐
ted that are not suitable or suitable parking vre:
spaces may not be detected. ▷ Steering.
228
▷ Accelerating and braking. Steptronic transmission:

▷ Changing gear. When the vehicle is stationary, press the Park
The vehicle manoeuvres automatically until it is Assistant button or engage reverse gear to
in a position where the driver can drive out of the switch on the Park Assistant.
space without any further steering movements. 3. Tilt the Controller to the right as applicable
and activate the Park Assistant on the Control
Safety notes Display: "Park Assist"
4. On the Control Display, confirm the required
direction for leaving the parking space.
WARNING
5. Manual transmission:
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐ Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
tion correctly. Due to system limitations, it can‐ play. The system takes over the steering
not respond independently and appropriately in when manoeuvring in the parking space. A
all traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident. message is displayed at the end of the ma‐
Adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. noeuvre.
Observe the traffic situation and intervene ac‐ Steptronic transmission:
tively if the situation warrants it. The system takes over the manoeuvre. A
message is displayed at the end of the ma‐
The Safety Information for the Park Distance noeuvre.
6. Make sure that it is safe to leave the parking
For further information: space in the current traffic situation and drive
▷ Park Distance Control, PDC, see page 216. off as usual.
▷ Park Assistant, see page 224. The Park Assistant is switched off automati‐
cally.
▷ The vehicle has been parked manually and System limits
objects are detected in front of and behind The system limits of the Park Distance Control
the vehicle. The distance to a detected kerb PDC and the Park Assist apply.
is at least 15 cm, approx. 6 in.
▷ The vehicle has been parked using the Park
Assistant and an object is detected in front of With Parking Assistant:
the vehicle. reversing assistant
▷ The parking space is at least 0.8 m, 2.6 ft lon‐
ger than the vehicle. Principle
▷ The vehicle has been reverse-bay parked. The system supports the driver when reversing,
for example when driving out of tight or blind
Leaving a parking space parking spaces or narrow roads.
1. Switch on drive-ready state. The vehicle saves the driving movements for the
2. Manual transmission: last stretch of road. The vehicle can reverse
Press the Park Assistant button while the ve‐ along this saved stretch with automated steering.
hicle is stationary to switch on the Park Assis‐
tant.
229
General Reversing with automated

The system takes over the steering when revers‐ steering
ing along the saved stretch. 1. When the vehicle is stationary and the drive-
The driver is responsible for operating the accel‐ ready state is switched on, engage reverse
erator pedal and the brake. gear or press the Park Assistant button.
The reversing assistant uses the control func‐ 2. Tilt the Controller to the right.
tions and the sensors of the Park Distance Con‐ 3. "Reversing Assistant"
trol PDC and Park Assist.
The system takes over the steering.
4. Follow the instructions on the Control Display
▷ Park Distance Control, PDC, see page 216. as applicable.
▷ Park Assistant, see page 224. 5. Take your hands off the steering wheel and
carefully drive off using the accelerator pedal
Safety notes and brake.
When reversing, pay attention to the vehicle
WARNING surroundings and, if you encounter an obsta‐
cle, stop immediately and take over control of
the vehicle. Pay attention to the information
on Park Distance Control PDC.
tion correctly. Due to system limitations, it can‐
not respond independently and appropriately in 6. Stop when you reach normal road traffic at
all traffic conditions. There is a risk of accident. the latest and take over control of the vehicle,
Adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. for example by engaging a forward gear.
Observe the traffic situation and intervene ac‐ At the end of the saved stretch of road, a sig‐
tively if the situation warrants it. nal sounds and a message appears prompt‐
ing you to take over control of the vehicle.
The Safety Information for the Park Distance
Control PDC and Park Assist also applies. Cancelling the system
For further information: The system automatically cancels in situations
▷ Park Distance Control, PDC, see page 216. such as the following:
▷ Park Assistant, see page 224. ▷ If the driver grips the steering wheel or steers
the vehicle.
Operating requirements ▷ When a forward gear is engaged.
▷ To save the stretch of road, drive forwards ▷ When drive control systems or Driver Assis‐
without interruption. tance Systems are activated or intervening.
▷ A maximum of 50 metres/ 55 yards can be ▷ If the vehicle is stationary for several minutes.
saved. ▷ If the vehicle leaves the stored lane during re‐
▷ To save the stretch of road, do not drive versing; for example, at the maximum steer‐
faster than 36 km/h/ 22 mph. ing angle.
▷ Dynamic Stability Control DSC is activated. ▷ When the display on the Control Display is
hidden by messages, for example due to in‐
coming calls.
230
System limits The system indicates when other road users are
approaching.
▷ When you reach normal road traffic or if you
encounter an obstacle, stop immediately and
take over control of the vehicle. Safety note
▷ The maximum speed when reversing is limi‐
ted to approximately 9 km/h/ 6 mph.
WARNING
If the maximum speed is exceeded, a warning
is issued and the function may be cancelled.
▷ The system limits of the Park Distance Con‐ ditions and traffic situation correctly. There is a
trol PDC and the Park Assist also apply. risk of accident. Adapt your driving style to the
Various factors can result in sideways deviations traffic conditions. Observe the traffic situation
when reversing along the saved stretch of road. and intervene actively if the situation warrants it.
These factors include, for example:
▷ Steering wheel movements when the vehicle
is stationary during the process of saving the
Overview
stretch.
▷ The speed is not adapted to the stretch of
road in question.
▷ Road conditions, for example gradients or
slopes.
Crossing traffic warning

Principle
At blind exits or when leaving perpendicular park‐
Park Assistant button
ing spaces, the system detects other road users
approaching from the side earlier than is possible
from the driver's seat.
Radar sensors
General
The radar sensors are located in the rear

bumper.
Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
the area behind the vehicle.
231
Keep the bumpers clean and unobstructed in the Warning

area of the radar sensors.
General
Switching on/off The Control Display shows the corresponding
image, an acoustic signal sounds, if necessary,
Activating/deactivating the system and the light in the exterior mirror flashes.
With the button Light in the exterior mirror

1. Press the Park Assistant button.
3. "Settings"
4. "Cross-traffic alert"
5. "Activate function"
Via iDrive
1. "CAR"
The light in the exterior mirror flashes if other ve‐
2. "Settings"
hicles are detected by the rear sensors when the
3. "Driver assistance" vehicle is reversing.
5. "Cross-traffic alert" Display in the Park Distance Control
6. "Activate function" PDC view
Automatic activation
If the system was activated on the Control Dis‐
play, it is switched on automatically as soon as
Park Distance Control PDC or Panorama View is
active and a gear is engaged.
The system is switched on at the rear when re‐
verse gear is engaged.
Switching off automatically In the Park Distance Control PDC view, the rele‐
The system switches off automatically in the vant boundary area flashes red if the sensors de‐
following situations: tect vehicles.
▷ If walking speed is exceeded.
▷ When a certain distance is exceeded. Acoustic warning
▷ When Park Assistant is actively parking the In addition to the visual display, a warning signal
vehicle. sounds when your own vehicle is moving in the
corresponding direction.
232
System limits
The system may have limited functionality in the
▷ If the approaching vehicle is travelling very
fast.
▷ On sharp bends.
▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up or covered,
▷ If the sensors' field of view is obscured, for
example due to garage walls, hedges or
mounds of snow.
▷ When a projecting load is being transported.
▷ If crossing objects are moving very slowly.
▷ If there are other objects in the field of view of
the sensors that conceal the crossing traffic.
233
CONTROLS Driving comfort
Driving comfort
Vehicle equipment The shock absorber settings are assigned to the
different driving modes of the Driving Experience
Control.
cific and optional equipment available for the For further information:
model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ Driving Experience Control, see page 147.
tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐ Performance Control
tions and systems. Please comply with the Performance Control increases the agility of the
relevant laws and regulations when using the vehicle.
corresponding functions and systems. Individual wheels are braked to increase agility
for a sporty driving style.
Suspension components
Engine sound
The suspension components have been opti‐
mised for the vehicle and its area of use, thus en‐ Depending on the equipment and the national-
suring the best possible driving experience. market version, it may be possible to configure
the sound of the electric motor if necessary.
Adaptive M suspension 1. "CAR"

2. "Settings"
Principle 3. "General settings"
The Adaptive M suspension is a controllable 4. "Engine sound"
sports suspension. 5. Select the desired setting.
The system reduces unwanted vehicle move‐ The setting is saved for the current driver profile.
ments when a dynamic driving style is used or
when driving on uneven roads.
General
Depending on road conditions and driving style,
driving dynamics and driving comfort are en‐
hanced.
Configuration
The system offers various shock absorber set‐
tings, from comfortable travel to dynamic driving.
234
Air conditioning CONTROLS
Air conditioning
Vehicle equipment Automatic air conditioning
Overview
Buttons in the vehicle
Interior air quality

The air quality in the vehicle is improved by the Climate functions
following components:
▷ Emissions-tested interior. Button Function
▷ Microfilter. Temperature.
▷ Air-conditioning system for regulating tem‐
perature, air flow and recirculated-air mode. Air-conditioning mode.
Depending on the equipment version:
▷ Microfilter/activated carbon filter. Maximum cooling.
▷ Automatic air recirculation control AUC.
▷ Independent ventilation. AUTO programme.
Switch off.

move condensation.
235
CONTROLS Air conditioning
Button Function 4. "Heating/ventilation"

5. "Driver"
Seat heating, see page 119.
6. "Temperature:"
7. Set the desired temperature.
Air flow, manual.
Avoid switching between different temperature
settings in rapid succession. The automatic air
Individual functions – for example, temperature – conditioning may not have sufficient time to ad‐
can also be operated using spoken commands. just to the set temperature.
Switching on/off Cooling function
Switching on Principle
Press any button, with the following exceptions: Interior air is cooled and dried and then heated
again depending on the temperature setting.
▷ Switch off.
The interior can only be cooled when drive-ready
▷ Rear window heating.
state is switched on.
▷ Lower side of air flow button.
▷ Seat heating. Switching on/off
Press the button.
Switching off
Complete system:
Depending on the weather conditions, the wind‐
Press the button until the control illumi‐ screen and the side windows may mist over for a
nates. short time when the drive-ready state has been
switched on.
The cooling function is switched on automati‐
Temperature
cally in the AUTO programme.
Principle When the automatic air conditioning is in opera‐
tion, condensation develops and exits under‐
The automatic air conditioning adjusts to the set
neath the vehicle.
temperature as quickly as possible, using maxi‐
mum cooling or heating power if necessary. The
temperature is then maintained. Maximum cooling effect
Adjusting Principle
Using the button: When drive-ready state is switched on, the sys‐
tem is set to lowest temperature, optimum air
Press the upper or lower side of the flow and recirculated-air mode.
button to set the desired temperature.
Via iDrive:
General
The function is available at an outside tempera‐
1. "CAR" ture above approximately 0 ℃/32 ℉ and when
2. "Settings" drive-ready state is switched on.
236
Switching on/off Recirculated-air mode

Press the button.
Principle
The LED is illuminated when the sys‐
tem is switched on. If the air outside the vehicle has an unpleasant
odour or contains pollutants, the air supply to the
The air flows from the side nozzles for the upper interior of the vehicle can be shut off. The air in‐
body area. Therefore open the side nozzles. side the vehicle is then recirculated.
The air flow can be adapted when the pro‐
gramme is active. Operation
Using the button:
AUTO programme Press the button.
The LED is illuminated when recircula‐
Principle
ted-air mode is switched on. The outside air sup‐
The AUTO programme cools, ventilates or heats ply is shut off.
the interior automatically.
When recirculated-air mode is switched off, fresh
It does this by automatically regulating the air air is directed into the vehicle's interior.
flow, air distribution and temperature depending
on the interior temperature and the selected Via iDrive:
temperature setting.
1. "CAR"
Switching on/off 2. "Settings"
Using the button: 3. "Climate comfort"

4. "Air quality"
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated when the AUTO
programme is switched on. ▷ "Air recirculation"
▷ "Automatic"
Via iDrive:
▷ "Fresh air"
1. "CAR" The recirculated-air mode automatically switches
2. "Settings" off after a given time depending on the ambient
3. "Climate comfort" conditions, to avoid condensation.
4. "Heating/ventilation" Continuous use of recirculated-air mode wor‐
sens air quality inside the vehicle and increases
5. "Automatic"
condensation on the windows.
Depending on the selected temperature and ex‐
If there is condensation, shut down recirculated-
ternal influences, the air is directed towards the
air mode or remove the condensation.
windscreen, the side windows the upper body
and into the footwell.
Air flow, manual
Principle
Point the side nozzles at the side windows.
The air flow for air conditioning can be set man‐
The AUTO programme is automatically switched ually.
off when the air distribution is set manually.
237
General Switching on/off

To be able to adjust the air flow manually, first Press the button.
switch off the AUTO programme.
tem is switched on.
Adjusting
Press upper or lower side of button: re‐ The air flow can be adjusted manually when the
duce or increase air flow. system is switched on.
If there is condensation on the window,
Selected air flow is shown on the climate display. press the button or switch on the cool‐
In order to protect the battery the air flow rate is ing function. Ensure that air can flow towards the
reduced, if necessary. windscreen.
To adjust the air distribution

Rear window heating
manually
Press the button. The LED is illumina‐
Principle ted.
The air distribution for air conditioning can be set The function is available when drive-ready state
manually. is switched on.
The rear window heating is switched off auto‐
Adjusting matically after a while.
Press the button repeatedly to select a

programme: Microfilter
▷ Windows, upper body area and footwell. The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the in‐
coming air.
▷ Upper body area and footwell.
Have this filter replaced during maintenance of
▷ Footwell. the vehicle.
▷ Windows and footwell.
▷ Windows.
▷ Windows and upper body.
▷ Upper body area.
Selected air distribution is shown on the climate
display.
Defrosting the windscreen and

removing condensation
Principle
Ice and condensation are quickly removed from
the windscreen and the front side windows.
238
Automatic air conditioning Button Function
with extended functionality Seat heating, see page 119.
Overview Air-conditioning mode.

Call up the air conditioning
Buttons in the vehicle menu for the following settings,
for example: upper body tem‐
perature adjustment, independ‐
ent ventilation, cooling function.
Individual functions – for example, temperature –

can also be operated using spoken commands.
Calling up the air conditioning

menu
Press the button.
Climate functions
The air conditioning menu is displayed.
Button Function
Air conditioning functions such as the following
Temperature. are available via the Climate menu:
▷ Air quality.
▷ Heating/ventilation.
▷ Independent ventilation/Auxiliary heating.
Maximum cooling.
▷ Cooling function.
It is possible to make individual settings for some
AUTO programme.
air conditioning functions; for example, switching
on/off, setting the intensity.
Air flow, manual.
Switch off. Switching on/off
AUTO programme intensity.
Switching on
Press any button, with the following exceptions:
▷ Menu/air conditioning mode.
move condensation. ▷ Rear window heating.
▷ Seat heating.
239
Switching off The ventilation air flow in the upper body area
provides noticeable heating or cooling depend‐
Hold down the button until the control
ing on the set temperature.
shuts down.
The set interior temperature for driver and front
seat passenger is not changed by this.
Temperature
Adjusting
Principle 1. "CAR"
The automatic air conditioning adjusts to the set 2. "Settings"
temperature as quickly as possible, using maxi‐
mum cooling or heating power if necessary. The 3. "Climate comfort"
temperature is then maintained. 4. "Heating/ventilation"
5. "Temperature adjustment"
Adjusting 6. Set the desired temperature.
Using the button:
Press the upper or lower side of the Cooling function
button to set the desired temperature.
Principle
Via iDrive:
Interior air is cooled and dried and then heated
1. "CAR" again depending on the temperature setting.
2. "Settings" The interior can only be cooled when drive-ready
3. "Climate comfort" state is switched on.
4. "Heating/ventilation"
Switching on/off
5. "Driver" or "Front passenger"
Using the button:
6. "Temperature:"
Press the button.
7. Set the desired temperature.
8. "OK" Via iDrive:
Avoid switching between different temperature
1. "CAR"
settings in rapid succession. The automatic air
conditioning may not have sufficient time to ad‐ 2. "Settings"
just to the set temperature. 3. "Climate comfort"
Ventilation temperature 5. "Climate control (A/C)"
General Depending on the weather conditions, the wind‐

screen and the side windows may mist over for a
The temperature of the ventilation in the upper
short time when the drive-ready state has been
body area can be adjusted.
switched on.
The temperature is adjusted on an individual ba‐
sis, for example towards the blue for colder and
towards the red for warmer.
240
When the automatic air conditioning is in opera‐ Via iDrive:

1. "CAR"
neath the vehicle.
2. "Settings"
Maximum cooling effect 3. "Climate comfort"
Principle 5. "Driver"
When drive-ready state is switched on, the sys‐ 6. "Automatic"
tem is set to lowest temperature, optimum air
flow and recirculated-air mode. Depending on the selected settings and external
influences, the air is directed towards the wind‐
screen, the side windows, the upper body and
General
into the footwell.
The function is available at an outside tempera‐
ture above approximately 0 ℃/32 ℉ and when
drive-ready state is switched on.
Point the side nozzles at the side windows.
Switching on/off A fogging sensor also controls the programme
so that window condensation is avoided as much
Press the button.
as possible.
The AUTO programme is automatically switched
tem is switched on.
off when the air distribution is set manually.
The air flows from the side nozzles for the upper
body area. Therefore open the side nozzles. Intensity
The air flow can be adapted when the pro‐ With the AUTO programme switched on, the in‐
gramme is active. tensity can be adjusted. This changes the auto‐
matic control for the air flow.
AUTO programme Using the button:
Press top or bottom side of button: re‐
Principle duce or increase intensity.
The AUTO programme cools, ventilates or heats
the interior automatically. Via iDrive:
The air flow, air distribution and temperature are 1. "CAR"
regulated automatically depending on the interior 2. "Settings"
temperature, the selected temperature setting
and the selected intensity setting. 3. "Climate comfort"
Switching on/off 5. "Driver"
Using the button: 6. "Level"
Press the button. 7. Set the desired intensity.
The LED is illuminated when the AUTO The selected intensity is shown on the climate
programme is switched on. display.
241
Automatic air recirculation The LED is illuminated when recirculated-air

control AUC mode is switched on. The outside air supply is
shut off.
Principle When recirculated-air mode is switched off, fresh
air is directed into the vehicle's interior.
Automatic air recirculation control AUC detects
pollutants in the outside air. The supply of out‐ Via iDrive:
side air is shut off and the interior air is recircula‐
ted. 1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
General 3. "Climate comfort"
When the system is activated, a sensor detects 4. "Air quality"
pollutants in the outside air and controls shut-off
automatically.
▷ "Air recirculation"
When the system is deactivated, outside air
flows into the interior continuously. ▷ "Fresh air"
Continuous use of recirculated-air mode wor‐ The recirculated-air mode automatically switches
sens air quality inside the vehicle and increases off after a given time depending on the ambient
condensation on the windows. conditions, to avoid condensation.
Continuous use of recirculated-air mode wor‐
Switching on/off sens air quality inside the vehicle and increases
1. "CAR" condensation on the windows.
2. "Settings" If there is condensation, shut down recirculated-

air mode or remove the condensation.
4. "Air quality" Air flow, manual
5. "Automatic"
If there is condensation, shut down recirculated- Principle
air mode or remove the condensation. The air flow for air conditioning can be set man‐
ually.
Recirculated-air mode
General
Principle To be able to adjust the air flow manually, first
If the air outside the vehicle has an unpleasant switch off the AUTO programme.
odour or contains pollutants, the air supply to the
interior of the vehicle can be shut off. The air in‐ Adjusting
side the vehicle is then recirculated.
Press upper or lower side of button: re‐
duce or increase air flow.
Adjusting
Using the button: The selected air flow is shown on the climate
display.
Press the button.
In order to protect the battery the air flow rate is
reduced, if necessary.
242
To adjust the air distribution Defrosting the windscreen and

manually removing condensation
Principle Principle
The air distribution for air conditioning can be set Ice and condensation are quickly removed from
manually. the windscreen and the front side windows.
Adjusting Switching on/off

Press the button repeatedly to select a Press the button.
programme: The LED is illuminated when the sys‐
tem is switched on.
▷ Windows, upper body area and footwell.
▷ Upper body area and footwell. The air flow can be adjusted manually when the
▷ Footwell. system is switched on.
▷ Windows and footwell. If there is condensation, press the but‐
▷ Windows. ton or switch on the cooling function to
use the condensation sensor. Ensure that air can
▷ Windows and upper body. flow towards the windscreen.
▷ Upper body area.
The selected air distribution is shown on the cli‐
Rear window heating
mate display.
Press the button. The LED is illumina‐
SYNC programme ted.
The function is available when drive-ready state
Principle is switched on.
The following settings on the driver's side can be The rear window heating is switched off auto‐
transferred to the front passenger's side: matically after a while.
▷ Temperature.
▷ Air flow. Microfilter/activated carbon filter
▷ Air distribution. The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the in‐
▷ AUTO programme. coming air.
The activated carbon filter also removes gaseous
Switching on/off pollutants from the outside air entering the vehi‐
1. "CAR" cle.
2. "Settings" Have this combined filter replaced during main‐

tenance of the vehicle.
4. "Synchronise"
The programme is automatically switched off if
the settings are changed on the front passenger
side.
243
Ventilation Independent ventilation

Principle Principle
The direction of the various air flows can be set The independent ventilation allows the tempera‐
individually. ture of the interior to be adjusted before the jour‐
ney starts. Depending on the set temperature
Setting the ventilation and ambient temperature, the interior is ventila‐
ted or heated using any available residual heat
General from the engine.
The direction of the air flows can be set for direct

or indirect ventilation. General
Open the side nozzles and position them in a The system can be switched on and off directly
way that ensures effective climate control. or for a preselected departure time.
The switch-on time is calculated based on the
Direct ventilation outside temperature. The system will switch on
in good time before the preselected departure
Align the air flow directly onto the vehicle occu‐
time.
pants. The air flow provides noticeable heating or
cooling depending on the set temperature.
Indirect ventilation ▷ The vehicle is in rest or standby state and not
Do not align the air flow directly onto the vehicle in drive-ready state.
occupants. The vehicle interior is cooled or ▷ The battery must be sufficiently charged.
heated indirectly depending on the set tempera‐ When activated, the independent ventilation
ture. uses power from the vehicle battery. As a re‐
sult, the maximum operating time is restricted
Ventilation at front to protect the battery. After the engine is
started or after driving a short distance, the
system will be available again.
▷ Ensure that the date and time are set cor‐
rectly in the vehicle.
▷ Open the vents to allow the air to enter the
passenger compartment.
Switching on/off directly
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐ General

rows 1. The system can be switched on or off in various
▷ Knurled wheel for steplessly opening and ways.
closing the side nozzles, arrows 2. The system switches off automatically after a
while. It continues to run for a short time after it
has been switched off.
244
Using the button ▷ One-off departure time: the time can be set.
System is switched on once.
General
▷ Departure time with day of the week: the time
If the vehicle is in standby state, the independent and day of the week can be set.
ventilation can be switched on or off via the but‐
The system is switched on in good time be‐
tons of the automatic air conditioning.
fore the set departure time on the required
days of the week.
Switching on
Preselection of departure time is done in two
Press any button, except:
stages:
▷ Rear window heating.
▷ Set the departure times.
▷ Activate the departure time.
▷ Seat heating.
At least 10 minutes should pass between adjust‐
▷ Menu. ing/activating the departure time and the sched‐
uled departure time, so the climate control has
Switching off enough time to work.
Press and hold the down button.
Setting the departure time
The system switches off after leaving and lock‐
Via iDrive
ing the vehicle.
1. "CAR"
Via iDrive 2. "Settings"
1. "CAR" 3. "Climate comfort"
2. "Settings" 4. "Auxiliary heating/ventilation"
3. "Climate comfort" 5. "Departure schedule"
4. "Auxiliary heating/ventilation" 6. Select the required departure time.
5. "Start now" 7. Set the departure time.
8. Select the day of the week if necessary.
Display
9. "OK"
Symbol Description
Activating the departure time
Symbol on the climate dis‐
play. Operating requirements
Flashing: independent venti‐ If a departure time is to control when the inde‐
lation is switched on. pendent ventilation is switched on, the relevant
departure time must be activated first.
Departure time
Via iDrive
Principle 1. "CAR"
To ensure a pleasant interior temperature in the 2. "Settings"

vehicle at the start of the journey, it is possible to 3. "Climate comfort"
set different departure times.
245
4. "Auxiliary heating/ventilation"
5. "Departure schedule" WARNING
6. Activate the required departure time. When the standing air conditioning is operating,
high temperatures can be generated under the
Display body, for example because of the exhaust sys‐
tem. If flammable materials come into contact
The symbol on the climate display sig‐
with hot parts of the exhaust system, these ma‐
nals that a departure time has been activated.
terials can catch fire. There is a risk of fire.
Make sure that no flammable materials, for ex‐
ample leaves, grass, gas, petrol, oil or other
Standing air conditioning flammable objects, can come into contact with
via Remote Engine Start vehicle parts when the standing air conditioning
is operating.
Principle
Standing air conditioning cools or warms the in‐ Operating requirements
terior to a comfortable temperature before start‐
▷ Vehicle is in rest or standby state and not in
ing to drive. In addition, the system cools, venti‐
drive-ready state.
lates or heats automatically depending on the
internal, external and set desired temperature. ▷ Battery must be sufficiently charged.
Any snow and ice can be easier to remove. ▷ For safety reasons, the system can only be
The system starts the engine automatically for switched on twice in succession. The system
this purpose and lets it run for a limited time. will be available again once the drive-ready
state has been activated and deactivated
Safety notes again.
▷ Level in the tank is sufficient.
DANGER ▷ Front flap is closed.
A blocked exhaust pipe or inadequate ventila‐ ▷ Ensure that the date and time are set cor‐
tion can allow harmful exhaust fumes to pollute rectly in the vehicle.
the area around the vehicle or enter it. The ex‐ ▷ Open the vents to allow the air to enter the
haust fumes contain pollutants which are col‐ passenger compartment.
ourless and odourless. In enclosed spaces or
spaces with inadequate ventilation, the exhaust Enabling automatic engine start
fumes can also build up outside the vehicle. The automatic engine start must be enabled be‐
There is a risk of death. Keep the exhaust pipe fore using the system.
clear and ensure sufficient ventilation. Do not
switch on the standing air conditioning in en‐ This enables the engine to switch on automati‐
closed or poorly ventilated spaces, for example cally in order to control the interior climate.
closed garages. Via iDrive:
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
4. "Aux. climate control/ventil."
246
5. If applicable, "Remote Engine Start" After the vehicle key is pressed, it will take
6. "Engine start for climate control" around 3 seconds for the engine to switch on.
7. Confirm the disclaimer. To switch the system off, press the button again
three times.
Vehicle acknowledgement
signals Climate control for a specified
The system switch-on is acknowledged by two departure time
flashes.
The side lights remain switched on while the General
system is switched on. To ensure a pleasant interior temperature in the
vehicle at the start of the journey, it is possible to
Switching on/off directly set scheduled departure times in the system.
▷ One-off departure time: the scheduled depar‐
General ture time can be set.
The system can be switched on or off directly in The system is switched on as a one-off.
various ways: ▷ Departure time with day of the week: the
▷ Via iDrive. scheduled departure time and day of the
▷ With the vehicle key. week can be set.
The system can also be switched off directly by Preselection of departure time is done in two
pressing the start/stop button without pressing stages:
the brake pedal. ▷ Set the departure times.
The system switches off automatically after ap‐ ▷ Activate the departure time.
prox. 15 minutes. The system is switched on around 10 minutes
For safety reasons, the system can only be before the set departure time and remains on for
switched on twice in succession. The system will up to around 5 minutes after the set departure
be available again once the drive-ready state has time.
been activated and deactivated again. At least 10 minutes should pass between adjust‐
ing/activating the departure time and the sched‐
Via iDrive uled departure time, so the climate control has
1. "CAR" enough time to work.
2. "Settings" For safety reasons, the system can only be
3. "Climate comfort" switched on once. The system will be available
again once the drive-ready state has been activa‐
4. "Aux. climate control/ventil." ted and deactivated again.
5. "Start now" Observe the information regarding the intended
use of the vehicle.
Via vehicle key
The system can be switched on and off using
Your own safety, see page 8.
the vehicle key.
Press the vehicle key button three times
within 1 second.
247
Setting the departure time
Via iDrive
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
5. Select the required departure time.
6. Set the departure time.
7. Select the day of the week if necessary.
Activating the departure time
If a desired departure time is to control when the
system is switched on, the relevant departure
time must be activated first.
Via iDrive
1. "CAR"
2. "Settings"
5. Activate the required departure time.
, Symbol on the automatic air condition‐
ing system signals when a departure time is ac‐
tive
Display in the instrument cluster
Symbol Description
The engine runs for the purpose

of operating the standing air
conditioning. The vehicle is not
ready to drive.
248
Interior equipment CONTROLS
Interior equipment
Vehicle equipment Safety note
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ WARNING

Parts of the body can be trapped when operat‐
ing radio-controlled systems with the
integrated universal remote control, for example
garage door. There is a risk of injury or material
damage. During programming and operation,
make sure that the area of movement of the
system concerned is kept clear. Also follow the
safety notes supplied with the hand-held trans‐
mitter.
Integrated universal remote Compatibility

control This symbol on the packaging or in the
operating instructions of the system to
Principle be operated indicates that the system is
The universal remote control integrated in the generally compatible with the integrated univer‐
rear-view mirror can be used to operate up to sal remote control.
3 functions of radio-controlled systems; for ex‐ A list of compatible hand-held transmitters is
ample, garage door drives, barriers or lighting available on the Internet: www.homelink.com
systems.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
Corporation.
General
The integrated universal remote control does not
The integrated universal remote control replaces
support the frequency band 27 MHz to 40 MHz.
up to 3 different hand-held remotes. To use the
opener, the buttons on the rear-view mirror must
be programmed with the desired functions. The Controls on the rear-view mirror
hand-held remote of the relevant system is nee‐
ded for programming.
If you sell the vehicle, delete the saved functions
beforehand for your own security.
If possible, do not attach the aerial of the radio-
controlled system, for example the garage door
drive, near to metallic objects; this is to ensure
optimum functioning.
▷ Buttons, arrow 1.
▷ LED, arrow 2.
249
CONTROLS Interior equipment
▷ Hand-held transmitter arrow 3; required for ▷ The LED does not flash green after
programming. 60 seconds: programming could not be
completed.
Programming Repeat steps 3 to 6.

To program other functions on other buttons, re‐
General peat steps 3 to 5.
The battery in the hand-held transmitter must be
fully charged during programming to ensure the Special instruction for alternating-
integrated universal remote control will have the code radio systems
optimum range. If the radio-controlled system cannot be oper‐
ated after repeated programming, check whether
1. Switch on standby state.
the system to be operated is equipped with an
2. Initial operation: alternating-code radio system.
Simultaneously press and hold the two outer To do so, consult the user manual of the system.
buttons on the rear-view mirror for approxi‐
For systems with an alternating-code radio sys‐
mately 10 seconds until the LED on the rear-
tem, the integrated universal remote control and
view mirror flashes green rapidly. All current
the system must also be synchronised.
programming for the buttons on the rear-view
mirror is deleted. Information on synchronisation can be found in
the user manual of the system you wish to set.
3. On the rear-view mirror, press the button you
wish to program. The LED on the rear-view To make synchronisation easier, enlist the assis‐
mirror flashes orange slowly. tance of a second person.
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter of the system Synchronise integrated universal remote control
you wish to operate approximately 2.5 to with system:
30 cm, 1 to 12 in away from the buttons on 1. Park your vehicle within the range of the radio
the rear-view mirror. The distance required remote-controlled system.
depends on the hand-held transmitter.
2. Program the corresponding button on the
5. Press and hold the button of the desired rear-view mirror as described.
function on the hand-held transmitter.
3. Locate and press the synchronisation button
6. ▷ The LED is illuminated green: program‐ on the system being set, for example on the
ming is complete. garage door. The next step must be carried
Release the button. out within approximately 30 seconds.
▷ The LED flashes rapidly: programming is 4. Hold down the programmed button on the
not complete. rear-view mirror for 3 seconds and then re‐
Press and hold the button on the rear- lease. Repeat this step as needed up to three
view mirror for 2 seconds, then release. times to complete synchronisation. When
Repeat this process three times to com‐ synchronisation is completed, the program‐
plete programming. med function is performed.
If the integrated universal remote control

is still not operational, continue from Spe‐
cial instruction for alternating-code radio
systems.
250
Reprogramming individual Operation

buttons
1. Switch on standby state. WARNING
2. On the rear-view mirror, press and hold the Parts of the body can be trapped when operat‐
button being programmed. ing radio-controlled systems with the
3. After approximately 20 seconds, when the integrated universal remote control, for example
LED on the rear-view mirror starts to flash or‐ garage door. There is a risk of injury or material
ange, release the button. damage. During programming and operation,
make sure that the area of movement of the
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter of the system
system concerned is kept clear. Also follow the
you wish to operate approximately 2.5 to
safety notes supplied with the hand-held trans‐
30 cm, 1 to 12 in away from the buttons on
mitter.
the rear-view mirror. The distance required
depends on the hand-held transmitter.
The system, for example the garage door, can be
5. Press and hold the button of the desired operated using the button on the rear-view mir‐
function on the hand-held transmitter. ror when drive-ready state or standby state is
6. The LED can illuminate in various ways. switched on. To do this, press and hold the but‐
▷ The LED is illuminated green: the pro‐ ton within the reception range of the system until
gramming process is complete. the function is triggered. The LED on the rear-
view mirror illuminates continuously when the
Release the button.
radio signal is being transmitted.
▷ The LED flashes rapidly: the hand-held
transmitter has been detected, but pro‐
Deleting saved functions
gramming is not complete.
All saved functions are deleted. It is not possible
Press and hold the button on the rear-
to delete functions individually.
view mirror for 2 seconds, then release.
Repeat this process three times to com‐ Simultaneously press and hold the two outer
plete programming. buttons on the rear-view mirror for approximately
10 seconds until the LED flashes green rapidly.
If the integrated universal remote control
is still not operational, continue from Spe‐
cial instruction for alternating-code radio
systems.
Sun visor
▷ The LED does not flash green after
60 seconds: programming could not be
Glare protection
completed. Fold the sun visor downwards or upwards.
Repeat steps 3 to 6.
Protection from glare at the side
If the programming process is not complete, the
previous programming will be retained.
Folding out
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unhook the sun visor from its holder and
pivot it sideways to the side window.
251
Folding up Emptying
To close the sun visor, proceed in reverse order.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located behind a cover in the
sun visor. The mirror light switches on when the
cover is opened.
Ashtrays
With the cover closed, take hold of the ashtray by
Centre console the handle on the side, arrow 1, and lift it out, ar‐
row 2.
Opening
1. Push the cover forward.
Lighter
Safety notes
WARNING
Contact with the hot heating element or the hot
socket of the lighter can cause burns. Flamma‐
ble materials can catch fire if the lighter is drop‐
ped or is held against objects. There is a risk of
2. Fold the cover of the ashtray upwards. fire and injury. There is a risk of material dam‐
age. Take hold of the lighter by its handle. En‐
sure that children do not use the lighter.
NOTE
If metallic objects fall into the socket, they can
cause a short circuit. There is a risk of material
damage. After using the socket, re-fit the
lighter or socket cover.
252
Centre console To avoid damage to the socket, do not insert an

incompatible plug.
Safety notes
WARNING
Devices and cables, for example portable navi‐
gation devices, that are located in the deploy‐
ment range of the airbags may impede airbag
deployment or be thrown around the vehicle in‐
Push the cover forward. terior when the airbag is deployed. There is a
risk of injury. Make sure that devices and cables
are not in the deployment range of the airbags.
NOTE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery may
operate with high voltages and high currents
which can overload or damage the 12-volt on-
board network. There is a risk of material dam‐
age. Only connect battery chargers for the ve‐
The lighter is located between the ashtray and hicle battery to the jump-starting connections
the wireless charging dock. in the engine compartment.
Operation
NOTE
Press in the lighter.
If metallic objects fall into the socket, they can
The lighter can be removed when
cause a short circuit. There is a risk of material
it pops back out.
damage. After using the socket, re-fit the
lighter or socket cover.
Sockets Centre console

1. Push the cover forward.
Principle
The cigarette lighter attachment can be used as
a socket for electrical devices when standby
state or drive-ready state is switched on.
General
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
253
2. The socket is located between the ashtray In the centre console

and the wireless charging dock. Pull off the
cover.
NOTE
Objects in the storage compartment, for exam‐
ple large USB connectors, can block or damage
the cover on opening and closing. There is a
risk of material damage. When opening and
closing, make sure that the area of movement
of the cover is kept clear.
USB port
General
Please comply with the notes on connecting mo‐
bile devices to the USB port in the chapter on
USB connections. Push the cover forward.
USB connections, see page 81.
In the centre armrest
The USB port is located between the ashtray

and the wireless charging tray.
Properties:
▷ USB port type A.
There is a USB port in the centre armrest.
▷ For charging external devices.
Properties:
▷ Charging current: maximum 1.5 A
▷ USB port type C.
▷ For data transfer.
▷ For charging mobile devices.
▷ Charging current: max. 3 A.
▷ With BMW Live Cockpit Professional: For
data transfer.
254
Wireless charging dock ing mobile devices, make sure there are no ob‐
jects between the device and the dock.
Principle
The wireless charging dock permits the following NOTE
functions to be performed wirelessly:
The dock is designed for mobile telephones up
▷ Charging of Qi-compatible mobile phones or to a certain size. Using excessive force when
other mobile devices which support the Qi inserting the mobile telephone may damage
standard. the dock or the mobile telephone. There is a
▷ Connection of the mobile telephone to the risk of material damage. Observe the maximum
external aerial. dimensions for the mobile telephone. Do not
This ensures better network reception and a force the mobile telephone into the dock.
consistent reproduction quality, depending
on the country.
Overview
General Tray in the centre console:
When inserting the mobile telephone, make sure

there are no objects between it and the wireless
charging dock.
During charging, the surface of the dock and the
mobile telephone can become hot. At higher
temperatures, the charging current through the
mobile telephone may be reduced; in exceptional
cases, the charging process is temporarily inter‐
rupted. Observe the relevant information in the
operating instructions for the mobile telephone. 1 LED
The charge indicator shows on the Control 2 Storage area
Display whether a mobile telephone with Qi ca‐
pability is being charged.
Safety notes ▷ The mobile telephone must support and be
compatible with the required Qi standard.
If the mobile telephone does not support the
WARNING
Qi standard, the mobile telephone can be
When charging a Qi-compatible device in the charged using a special Qi-compatible charg‐
wireless charging dock, any metal objects loca‐ ing pad.
ted between the device and the dock can be‐
come very hot. If storage media or electronic
cards, for example smart cards, cards with ▷ Note the maximum dimensions of the mobile
magnetic strips or cards for transmitting sig‐ telephone.
nals, are placed between the device and the ▷ Only use protective sleeves and covers up to
dock, this may impair card function. There is a a maximum thickness of 2 mm, 0.07 in, oth‐
risk of injury and material damage. When charg‐ erwise the charging function may be im‐
paired.
255
▷ The mobile telephone to be charged is loca‐ if a mobile telephone with Qi capability has been
ted in the middle of the dock. left in the wireless charging dock when exiting
the vehicle.
Operation The forgotten phone warning is shown in the in‐
strument cluster.
Inserting the mobile telephone
TThe maximum size for the mobile phone is ap‐ Activating
proximately 154.5 x 80 x 18 mm, 6.06 x 3.1 x 1. "CAR"
0.7 in. 2. "Settings"
1. Open the cover of the dock. 3. "General settings"
2. Place the mobile telephone in the centre of 4. "Wireless charging tray"
the dock with the display facing upwards. 5. Activate reminder.
3. Close the cover of the dock.
System limits
Removing the mobile telephone If the mobile phone or the vehicle interior is ex‐
1. Open the cover of the dock. posed to excessively high temperatures, the
2. Remove the mobile telephone. charging functions of the mobile telephone
might be restricted and functions might no lon‐
LED displays ger work.
Col‐ Meaning
our
Blue The mobile telephone is charging.

The blue LED stays illuminated once
the inserted Qi-compatible mobile tel‐
ephone is fully charged.
Or‐ The mobile telephone is not charging.

ange The mobile phone may be exposed to
excessively high temperatures or there
may be foreign bodies in the charging
dock.
Red The mobile telephone is not charging.

Contact a Service Partner of the manu‐
facturer or another qualified Service
Forgotten phone warning
General
If the vehicle is equipped with the forgotten
phone warning function, a warning can be output
256
Storage compartments CONTROLS
Storage compartments
Vehicle equipment Glove compartment on
driver's side
model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ Safety note
WARNING
cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ The glove compartment protrudes into the in‐
tions and systems. Please comply with the terior when it is opened. Objects in the glove
relevant laws and regulations when using the compartment may be thrown around the inte‐
corresponding functions and systems. rior during the journey, for example in the event
of an accident or when braking or taking eva‐
sive action. There is a risk of injury. Immediately
Storage facilities close the glove compartment after using it.
General Opening
The vehicle interior contains multiple storage
compartments for stowing objects.
Safety notes
WARNING
Loose objects or devices connected by a cable
to the vehicle, for example mobile telephones,
may be thrown around the interior during the
journey, for example in the event of an accident Pull the handle.
or when braking or carrying out an evasive ma‐
noeuvre. There is a risk of injury. Ensure that
Closing
loose objects or devices connected by cable to
the vehicle are secured in place in the interior. Shut the lid.
NOTE
Anti-slip mats can damage the instrument
panel. There is a risk of material damage. Do
not use anti-slip mats.
257
CONTROLS Storage compartments
Glove compartment on the Integrated key, see page 92.
passenger side
Pockets in the doors
Safety note
General
WARNING There are storage compartments in the doors.
The glove compartment protrudes into the in‐
terior when it is opened. Objects in the glove Safety note
compartment may be thrown around the inte‐
rior during the journey, for example in the event WARNING
of an accident or when braking or taking eva‐
Breakable objects, for example glass bottles or
sive action. There is a risk of injury. Immediately
glasses, may get broken in the event of an acci‐
close the glove compartment after using it.
dent or when braking or taking evasive action.
Shards may scatter throughout the interior.
There is a risk of injury or material damage. Do
Opening
not use breakable objects during a journey.
Only stow breakable objects in closed storage
compartments.
Storage compartment in
the centre console
Opening
Pull the handle.
The lighting in the glove compartment comes
on.
Closing
Shut the lid.
Locking
The glove compartment can be locked with an
integrated key. This prevents access to the glove Push the cover forward.
compartment.
After the glove compartment has been locked, Closing
the vehicle key can be handed over without the Pull back the cover on the handle strip.
integrated key, for example if the car is being
parked by a valet service.
258
Storage compartments CONTROLS
Centre armrest Overview
General
There is a storage compartment in the centre
armrest between the seats.
Opening
The cup holder is located in the centre armrest.
Opening
Press the button.

The lighting in the centre armrest comes on.
Closing
Push the cover down until it engages.
Press the button.
The lighting in the centre armrest comes on.
Cup holders
Safety note Closing
Push the cover down until it engages.
WARNING
Unsuitable containers placed in the cupholders Storage compartment
may damage the cupholders or be flung into
the interior, for example in the event of an acci‐
behind the seats
dent or when braking or carrying out evasive
manoeuvres. Spilt liquids can distract the driver Safety note
from the road and lead to an accident. Hot bev‐
erages may damage the cupholders or cause
WARNING
scalding. There is a risk of injury or material
damage. Do not force objects into the cuphol‐ Incorrectly stowed objects may slip or be
der. Use lightweight, sealable and shatterproof thrown into the interior, for example in the
containers. Do not transport hot drinks. event of an accident or when braking or carry‐
ing out an evasive manoeuvre. Vehicle occu‐
pants could be struck and injured. There is a
259
CONTROLS Storage compartments
risk of injury. Stow and secure objects and the

load correctly.
General
A storage compartment is located behind the
seats.
Adjusting the net
Move the top edge of the net to the right height.

Take hold of the net as close to the edge as pos‐
sible, next to the bracket. There will be initial re‐
sistance to overcome.
260
Luggage compartment CONTROLS
Luggage compartment
Vehicle equipment
WARNING
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Loose objects or devices connected by a cable
cific and optional equipment available for the to the vehicle, for example mobile telephones,
model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ may be thrown around the interior during the
ment and functions which are not installed in journey, for example in the event of an accident
your vehicle, for example on account of the op‐ or when braking or carrying out an evasive ma‐
tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐ noeuvre. There is a risk of injury. Ensure that
cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ loose objects or devices connected by cable to
tions and systems. Please comply with the the vehicle are secured in place in the interior.
WARNING
Loads Incorrectly stowed objects may slip or be

thrown into the interior, for example in the
event of an accident or when braking or carry‐
Safety notes ing out an evasive manoeuvre. Vehicle occu‐
pants could be struck and injured. There is a
risk of injury. Stow and secure objects and the
WARNING
load correctly.
A high gross vehicle weight can make the tyres
overheat, causing internal damage and a sud‐
den loss of tyre inflation pressure. Handling
NOTE
characteristics may be adversely affected, for
example reduced directional stability, longer Liquids in the boot may cause damage. There
stopping distance and modified steering char‐ is a risk of material damage. Ensure that no liq‐
acteristics. There is a risk of accident. Please uids leak out into the boot.
comply with the permitted load index of the
tyre, and do not exceed the permitted gross ve‐
hicle weight. Stowing and securing loads in
the vehicle
▷ Wrap protective material around any sharp
WARNING corners and edges on the load.
If the permitted total weight and the permitted ▷ Heavy load: stow as far forward and as low
axle loads are exceeded, the operational safety down as possible, ideally directly behind the
of the vehicle is no longer guaranteed. There is luggage compartment partition wall.
a risk of accident. Do not exceed the permitted ▷ Small and lightweight loads: secure with re‐
total weight and permitted axle loads. taining straps, a luggage net or other suitable
straps.
▷ Large and heavy loads: secure with lashing
straps.
261
CONTROLS Luggage compartment
Lashing eyes in the Tensioning strap

luggage compartment There is a tensioning strap on the right-hand trim
panel for securing small objects.
General
Load-securing equipment, for example lashing
straps, tensioning straps or luggage nets, must Net
be secured to the lashing eyes in the luggage
compartment.
Lashing eyes
Smaller objects can be stowed in the net on the

left-hand side. Move the net down to transport
larger objects. Take hold of the net as close to
the edge as possible, next to the bracket. There
Four lashing eyes are located in the luggage will be initial resistance to overcome.
compartment for securing loads.
A storage compartment is located in the luggage
compartment floor behind the net.
Bag holders
Side storage compartment,
General right
There is a bag holder on the left and right side in
the luggage compartment.
General
Safety note There is a storage compartment on the right side
of the luggage compartment.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the bag holders can present a
danger, for example if objects are flung around
in the event of braking and evasive manoeu‐
vres. There is a risk of injury and material dam‐
age. Only hang light objects, for example shop‐
ping bags, on the bag holders. Only transport
heavy luggage in the boot if suitably secured.
262
Luggage compartment CONTROLS
Opening 2. Pull the handle and fold the cover down.
Unlock the cover on the right-hand side trim, ar‐ 3. In the luggage compartment: open the cover
row 1, and open, arrow 2. fully. The cover is fixed by a magnet.
Through-loading system
Principle
The through-loading system makes it possible to
transport lengthy objects, for example skis.
Opening the through-loading

system
1. Slide the net down. Take hold of the net as
close to the edge as possible, next to the
bracket. There will be initial resistance to
overcome.
263
DRIVING HINTS Driving precautions
Driving precautions
Vehicle equipment ▷ With petrol engines, 4500 rpm and 160 km/h,
100 mph.
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ Generally avoid kick-down and driving under full
cific and optional equipment available for the load.
ment and functions which are not installed in From 2000 km, 1200 miles onwards
your vehicle, for example on account of the op‐ Engine and road speeds can be gradually in‐
tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐ creased.
tions and systems. Please comply with the Tyres
Due to the manufacturing process, new tyres do
not achieve their full road grip immediately.
Drive moderately for the first 300 km, 200 miles.
Running in
Brake system
General Brake discs and pads only achieve their full ef‐
Moving parts need to adjust to each other. fectiveness after approximately 500 km,
300 miles. Drive moderately during this running-
The following notes will help to maximise the ve‐ in period.
hicle's lifetime and efficiency.
Do not use Launch Control when running in. Clutch
The clutch only begins to function optimally at
Safety note approximately 500 km, 300 miles. Engage the
clutch gently during this running-in period.
WARNING
New parts and components can cause safety After fitting new parts
and Driver Assistance Systems to respond with Please comply with the running-in procedures
a delay. There is a risk of accident. After new again if the components previously referred to
parts have been installed or if the vehicle is are renewed.
new, drive moderately and take action promptly
if necessary. Please comply with running-in
procedures for the corresponding parts and
components.
Engine, gearbox and differential
Up to 2000 km, 1200 miles

Do not exceed the maximum engine revs and
speed:
264
Driving precautions DRIVING HINTS
General driving information Hot exhaust system
Closing the boot lid WARNING

High temperatures may occur under the vehicle
Safety note body during driving, for example because of the
exhaust system. Contact with the exhaust sys‐
tem can lead to burns. There is a risk of injury.
WARNING
Do not touch the hot exhaust system, including
When open, the boot lid protrudes above the the exhaust pipe.
vehicle, and in the event of an accident, braking
or evasive action, it can endanger vehicle occu‐
pants and other road users, or damage the ve‐
WARNING
hicle. There is also a risk of exhaust fumes en‐
tering the interior of the vehicle. There is a risk If flammable materials, for example leaves or
of injury or material damage. Do not drive with grass, come into contact with hot parts of the
the boot lid open. exhaust system, these materials can catch fire.
There is a risk of fire and injury. Never remove
the heat shields fitted here or apply underbody
Driving with the boot lid open protection to them. Make sure that when driv‐
If there is no alternative to driving with the tail‐ ing, idling or parking, no flammable materials
gate open: can come into contact with hot vehicle parts.
▷ When the convertible top is closed, close all

the windows. Exhaust gas particle filter
▷ Adjust the blower to a high setting.
▷ Maintain a moderate speed. Principle
The exhaust gas particle filter collects soot parti‐
Ice on the windows cles. The soot particles are burned at high tem‐
peratures to clean the exhaust gas particle filter
as necessary.
NOTE
The window lowers a little when the door han‐ General
dle is pulled. If there is frost, the window may
The cleaning process takes a few minutes, dur‐
freeze up and cannot then be lowered. There is
ing which the following may occur:
a risk of material damage. Make sure that the
window lowers when the door handle is pulled. ▷ The engine may temporarily run a little
Remove any snow or ice from the window. Do roughly.
not open the door by force. ▷ A slightly higher engine speed may be re‐
quired to achieve the usual power output.
▷ There may be a small amount of smoke from
the exhaust, even after stopping the engine.
▷ Noise, for example caused by the radiator fan
running, may be heard, even some minutes
after stopping the engine.
265
It is normal for the radiator fan to keep running nected directly to an external aerial in order to
for several minutes, even after short trips. eliminate reciprocal interference and to divert
the radiation away from the vehicle's interior.
Cleaning the exhaust gas particle
filter while driving
Various driver profiles ensure that the exhaust
Aquaplaning
gas particle filter is self-cleaning. If, in addition to On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can
the self-cleaning function, the exhaust gas parti‐ form between the tyres and the road.
cle filter needs to be actively cleaned while driv‐ This situation, known as aquaplaning, means that
ing, a Check Control message is displayed. the tyre can actually lose contact completely with
Proceed as follows the next time you drive out‐ the road surface and the vehicle can neither be
side of built-up areas for around 30 minutes. steered, nor the brakes properly applied.
▷ Deactivate cruise Control systems.
Driving through water
▷ Take your foot off the accelerator repeatedly
and allow the vehicle to roll in overrun mode.
General
Making use of coasting, see page 270.
Please comply with the following when driving
▷ If possible, drive at alternating speeds. through water:
▷ Deactivate the Automatic Start/Stop function.
Radio signals
▷ Only drive through still water.
▷ Only drive through water up to a max. depth
WARNING of 25 cm, 9.8 in.
Certain vehicle functions may be affected by in‐ ▷ Drive through water at a walking speed of no
terference from high-frequency radio signals. more than 5 km/h, 3 mph.
Such signals are output from a series of trans‐
mission systems, for example from air traffic
Safety note
beacons or relay stations for mobile telecom‐
munications.
We recommend you consult your Service Cen‐ NOTE
tre should you experience any difficulties. Driving through excessively deep water too fast
can result in water entering the engine com‐
partment, electrical system or transmission.
Mobile communication in the There is a risk of material damage. When driv‐
vehicle ing through water, do not exceed the maximum
water depth and speed specified above.
WARNING
There is a possibility of reciprocal interference Safe braking
between the vehicle electronics and mobile
radio devices. Radiation is generated when mo‐ General
bile radio devices are transmitting. There is a The vehicle is equipped with an Anti-lock Brake
risk of injury or material damage. If possible, System ABS as standard.
only use mobile radio devices, for example mo‐
Perform full braking in situations that require it.
bile telephones, in the interior if they are con‐
266
Driving precautions DRIVING HINTS
The vehicle remains steerable. Any obstacles Downhill gradients

can be avoided by steering as smoothly as possi‐
ble. General
A pulsing of the brake pedal and hydraulic regu‐ When driving on long or steep downhill
lating sounds indicate that the Anti-lock Brake stretches, use the gear in which the least braking
System ABS is functioning. is required. Otherwise the brake system can
In certain braking situations, the perforated brake overheat and the braking effect is reduced.
discs can cause functional noise. However, the Engine braking effect can be additionally in‐
functional noises have no effect on the efficiency creased by manually shifting down, even into first
and operational safety of the brakes. gear, if applicable.
Objects in the range of movement of Safety notes

the pedals
WARNING
WARNING Even slight but continuous pressure on the
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the brake pedal can cause overheating, brake pad
pedal travel or block a pedal that has been wear or even brake system failure. There is a
pressed. There is a risk of accident. Ensure that risk of accident. Avoid excessive loads on the
items in the vehicle are stowed securely and brake.
cannot get into the driver's footwell. Only use
floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and
can be securely fastened to the floor. Do not WARNING
use loose floor mats, and do not place several
When idling or with the engine switched off,
floor mats on top of one another. Make sure
safety-relevant functions, for example engine
that there is sufficient space for the pedals. En‐
braking effect or steering and braking force as‐
sure that floor mats are securely reattached af‐
sistance, are either restricted or not available at
ter removal, for example for cleaning.
all. There is a risk of accident. Do not drive at
idle speed or with the engine switched off.
Wet roads
In wet weather, on gritted roads and in heavy Corrosion of the brake discs
rain, apply the brakes lightly every few kilome‐
Corrosion of the brake discs and contamination
tres/miles.
of the brake pads increase in the following cir‐
Ensure that you do not obstruct other road users cumstances:
when doing so.
▷ Low mileage.
The heat generated by braking dries the brake
▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
discs and brake pads and protects them against
used.
corrosion.
▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
This helps to maintain the brake power so that it
is available immediately when needed. ▷ Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents.
During braking, corroded brake discs may cause
brake judder which usually cannot be eliminated.
267
Condensation when vehicle is

parked
When the automatic air conditioning is in opera‐
neath the vehicle.
Driving on a racing track
WARNING
The vehicle is not designed for use in motor‐
sport competitions or similar. There is a risk of
accident. Do not use the vehicle in motorsport
competitions or similar.
The higher mechanical and thermal loads in‐

volved in driving on racing tracks lead to in‐
creased wear. This wear is not covered by the
warranty.
Before and after driving on a racing track, have
the vehicle checked at a Service Partner of the
manufacturer or another qualified Service Partner
268
Saving fuel DRIVING HINTS
Saving fuel
Vehicle equipment Tyres
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ General

cific and optional equipment available for the Tyres can have differing effects on consumption
model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ figures. Consumption can be affected by the size
ment and functions which are not installed in of the tyres, for example.
tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐ Check tyre inflation pressure
cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ regularly
Check and, if necessary, correct the tyre inflation
pressures at least twice a month and before set‐
ting off on a longer journey.
Insufficient tyre inflation pressure enlarges the
Reducing fuel consumption rolling resistance and thus increases fuel con‐
sumption and tyre wear.
General Observe the correct tyre inflation pressure and

the ECO tyre inflation pressure where applicable.
The vehicle possesses wide-ranging technolo‐
gies for reducing consumption and emission lev‐ For further information:
els. Tyre inflation pressure information, see
Fuel consumption depends on various factors. page 278.
A number of measures, such as a moderate driv‐

ing style and regular maintenance, can influence
Drive off immediately
fuel consumption and reduce the burden on the Do not warm up the engine with the vehicle at a
environment. standstill, but instead set off straight away, driv‐
ing at moderate engine speeds.
Remove unnecessary loads This brings the cold engine up to operating tem‐
Extra weight increases fuel consumption. perature as quickly as possible.
Remove add-on accessories Think ahead

after use Anticipating the road situation and adopting a
smooth driving style will reduce fuel consump‐
Add-on accessories on the vehicle can adversely
tion.
affect its aerodynamic performance and increase
fuel consumption. Avoid accelerating and braking unnecessarily.
Keep an appropriate distance from the vehicle
Close windows ahead.
Open windows increase drag and consequently
fuel consumption. Avoid high engine speeds
Driving at low engine speeds reduces fuel con‐
sumption and wear.
269
DRIVING HINTS Saving fuel
Pay attention to the optimum shift indicator in Have maintenance work carried
the vehicle, if fitted. out
Have the vehicle serviced regularly to achieve
Make use of overrun mode optimal economy and lifetime. BMW recom‐
When approaching a red traffic light, take your mends having maintenance work carried out by a
foot off the accelerator and allow the vehicle to BMW Service Partner.
coast to a stop.
Please also see the BMW Maintenance System.
On downward stretches, take your foot off the
accelerator and allow the vehicle to roll.
The fuel supply is interrupted in overrun mode. ECO PRO
Switch off the engine if stopping Principle
for longer periods ECO PRO supports an efficient driving style. To
do this, the engine management and comfort
Stopping the engine functions, such as for example the air condition‐
When you stop the vehicle for longer periods, for ing power, are adjusted.
example at traffic lights, railway crossings or in Steptronic transmission: the engine is discon‐
traffic jams, switch off the engine. nected from the gearbox in selector lever posi‐
tion D under certain circumstances. The vehicle
Auto Start Stop function rolls when idling to optimise consumption. Selec‐
The Auto Start Stop function of the vehicle shuts tor lever position D remains engaged.
off the engine automatically during a stop. In addition, context-sensitive information, ECO
If the engine is switched off and then started PRO tips, can be displayed to assist with a fuel-
again, the fuel consumption and emissions are efficient driving style.
reduced compared with a permanently running In the instrument cluster, the extension of the
engine. Savings can be made just by stopping range achieved as a result can be displayed as a
the engine for a few seconds. bonus range.
Fuel consumption also depends on other factors,
such as driving style, road condition, mainte‐ General
nance or environmental factors, for example. The system comprises the following
EfficientDynamics functions and
Switch off functions which are EfficientDynamics displays:
not currently required ▷ ECO PRO bonus range.
Functions such as seat heating or rear window ▷ ECO PRO seat air conditioning.
heating require a great deal of energy and in‐
▷ ECO PRO air conditioning.
crease fuel consumption, especially in city traffic
and stop-and-go traffic. ▷ ECO PRO light and sight.
Switch these functions off if they are not re‐ ▷ ECO PRO Limit
quired. ▷ Route-ahead assistant.
The ECO PRO drive mode supports energy-sav‐ ▷ Coasting drive state.
ing use of comfort functions. These functions are ▷ Driving style analysis.
automatically deactivated wholly or partially.
270
Overview Enabling/disabling ECO PRO

functions
The following ECO PRO functions can be activa‐
ted / deactivated:
▷ "ECO PRO seat heating"
▷ "ECO PRO climate control"
▷ "ECO PRO light and sight"
The settings are saved for the current driver pro‐
file.
Button
Coasting
The coasting function enables the engine to be
operated at idle when decelerating in order to
Activating ECO PRO
optimise consumption.
Press the button. ECO PRO is displayed
in the instrument cluster. ECO PRO seat air conditioning
The output from the seat heating is reduced
Configuring ECO PRO when ECO PRO is activated.
INDIVIDUAL
ECO PRO air conditioning
Via the Driving Experience Control The air conditioning is adjusted for efficient con‐
1. Activating ECO PRO. sumption.
2. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL" To achieve this, the set temperature is adjusted

slightly and the interior is heated or cooled more
slowly to reduce consumption.
Via iDrive
1. "CAR"
ECO PRO light and sight
2. "Settings"
The power output of the exterior mirror and the
3. "Driving mode" rear window heating is reduced.
4. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL" Depending on the equipment, the dynamic ECO
5. Select the desired setting. light function is activated additionally.
Resetting settings
ECO PRO Limit Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the default set‐
ting:
▷ "ECO PRO limit": activate ECO PRO limit.
"Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD"
An ECO PRO tip is shown when the speed of
the set ECO PRO limit is exceeded.
▷ "Notification at:"
Set the required speed for the ECO PRO General
limit.
When activating the ECO PRO drive mode, the
display changes to a special display.
271
ECO PRO bonus range The following information is also displayed, de‐
pending on the situation:
An extension of range can be
achieved due to adjusted driving ▷ Depending on the equipment version: the
style. route covered in the coasting drive state.
The range extension can be dis‐ ▷ The total time with the engine switched off
played as bonus range in the in‐ during automatic engine stops.
strument cluster. ▷ A optimum shift indicator as recommendation
The bonus range is contained in the efficiency to engage a more efficient gear.
display.
If the bonus range is shown in grey, the current Display on the Control Display
driving style is inefficient.
General
The display turns blue as soon as all the condi‐
tions for driving with optimised consumption are Information about the current effectiveness of
met. the ECO PRO functions can be displayed as an
energy flow.
The intervals for resetting the bonus range de‐
pend on the journey data settings. Displaying energy flow information
1. "CAR"
Consumption display
2. "Driving information"
Full Black Panel Display:
3. "Energy flow"
Following functions are displayed:
▷ Auto Start Stop function.
▷ Energy recuperation.
▷ Coasting.
Route-ahead assistant
A pointer in the consumption display provides in‐ Principle
formation about the current driving style:
The function helps to save fuel and supports an
▷ The current consumption in relation to the anticipatory driving style. Using the navigation
average consumption is displayed. data, certain sections of the route ahead can be
▷ Pointer in the area arrow 1: display of the en‐ detected early and information can be shared
ergy recuperation achieved when coasting or with the driver.
when braking.
▷ Pointer in area arrow 2: display when acceler‐ General
ating. The recognised sections of the route, such as
If the acceleration is inefficient, the area between built-up areas or bends ahead, for example, re‐
average consumption and current consumption quire a reduction in speed.
is coloured red. The alert is also given if the section of the route
ahead cannot yet be detected when driving.
272
The alert is shown until the section of the route Symbol Section of the road in front
is reached.
Corner.
If an alert is given, vehicle speed can then be re‐
duced in an efficient way by removing your foot
from the accelerator and allowing the vehicle to
Roundabout.
coast until the section of road is reached.
Depending on the situation, the system also in‐
dependently used the engine brake by interrupt‐
ing the coasting function. Display in the Head-Up Display
The advance notice alert can also be
Operating requirements shown in the Head-Up Display.
▷ ECO PRO driving mode is activated.
▷ The navigation data is up to date. Display on the Control Display
An alert is shown in the driving style analysis dis‐
Activating/deactivating play on the Control Display if there is a corre‐
1. "CAR" sponding section of the route.
2. "Settings"
1. "CAR"
2. "Driving information"
4. If necessary, "Driving"
3. "Driving style analysis"
5. "Speed Assistant"
6. "Speed limits" Using route-ahead assistant
7. Select the desired setting. A section of the route ahead is shown:
For further information: 1. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
Speed Limit Assist, see page 214. 2. Allow the vehicle to coast until you reach the
section of road displayed.
Display 3. Adjust the speed by braking as necessary.

System limits
An alert regarding a section of the route The function is not available in the following sit‐
ahead is given as a recommendation to uations:
use the coasting function.
▷ The speed is below 50 km/h, 30 mph.
An additional symbol shows the detected section ▷ With a temporary and variable speed limit,
of the route: such as at road works.
Symbol Section of the road in front ▷ In the case of navigation data that is invalid,
outdated or not available.
Speed limit or town entrance.
▷ With Active Cruise Control.
Junction or turn, exit from a fast

road.
273
Coasting ▷ The system does not detect any obstructive

traffic situations or routes.
▷ Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function,
Principle ACC, not activated.
The engine is automatically disconnected from
the gearbox in selector lever position D under Operation via shift paddles
certain circumstances. The vehicle continues to
roll in neutral to reduce consumption. Selector
Principle
lever position D remains engaged.
The coasting state can be controlled using the
This vehicle condition is called coasting. shift paddles.
As soon as the brake or accelerator pedal is
pressed, the engine is automatically connected Activating/deactivating coasting via
again. shift paddles
1. Pull the right-hand shift paddle to shift to the
General top gear.
Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO drive 2. To activate coasting mode, actuate the right-
mode and the COMFORT drive mode. hand shift paddle again.
Coasting is automatically activated by calling up Actuate the left-hand shift paddle to deactivate.
the ECO PRO drive mode or COMFORT drive
mode via the Driving Experience Control and
cannot be deactivated.
Display
A precautionary driving style helps to use the
ECO PRO driving mode: Display in
function frequently and supports the consump‐
the instrument cluster
tion-reducing effect of coasting.
The route covered in coasting mode is dis‐
played.
The function is available in the speed range from
approx. 25 km/h, 16 mph to 160 km/h, 100 mph.
The coasting drive state is shown in the energy
The function is active if the following conditions flow display during the journey.
are met:
The route covered in coasting mode is displayed
▷ System detects a calm and smooth driving in the journey data.
style.
▷ Accelerator pedal is not pressed or accelera‐
tor pedal is released.
▷ Brake pedal not pressed or only pressed
lightly.
▷ Selector lever in selector lever position D.
▷ Engine and gearbox are at operating temper‐
ature.
▷ System detects an appropriate distance to
vehicles in front. Blue colour: coasting drive state.
274
Displaying energy flow information Calling up the driving style

1. "CAR" analysis
2. "Driving information" 1. "CAR"
3. "Energy flow" 2. "Driving information"
3. "Driving style analysis"
System limits
The function is not available, if one of the Display on the Control Display
following conditions is met: The display of the driving style analysis shows
▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated. the efficiency of the driving style.
▷ Driving in the handling limit range or on up‐ The more efficient the driving style, the more
ward or downward gradients. bars are shown in colour and the faster the bo‐
▷ Battery charge state temporally too low or too nus range increases.
high power requirement in the on-board net‐ If the driving style is inefficient, on the other
work. hand, a reduced number of bars are shown.
Driving style analysis

Principle
The function helps you to develop a particularly
efficient driving style and to save fuel.
To do this, the driving style is analysed. The eval‐
uation is performed in various categories and is
shown on the Control Display.
Using this display, the individual driving style can
be adjusted to save fuel.
General
The current trip is evaluated.
To support an efficient driving style, ECO PRO
tips are shown during the journey.
Adapting the driving style can increase the range
of the vehicle.
This gain in range is shown as a bonus range on
the instrument cluster and Control Display.
The function is available in ECO PRO drive
mode.
275
MOBILITY Refuelling
Refuelling
Vehicle equipment Safety notes
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ NOTE

If the range drops below 50 km, 30 miles, the
engine may no longer be supplied with suffi‐
cient fuel. Engine function is no longer ensured.
There is a risk of material damage. Refuel in
good time.
corresponding functions and systems. NOTE
Fuels are poisonous and aggressive substan‐
ces. Overfilling the fuel tank can damage the
Notes when refuelling fuel system. If fuel comes into contact with
paintwork, it can damage it. The environment is
General polluted. There is a risk of material damage.
Avoid overfilling.
Before refuelling, observe the notes on the fuel
grade.
When refuelling, insert the filler nozzle fully into
the filler neck. Lifting the filler nozzle during refu‐ Fuel tank cap
elling results in the following:
▷ The supply of fuel is stopped too soon. Opening
▷ Fuel vapour recovery is less effective. 1. To open the fuel tank filler flap, push on the
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle cuts out upper edge, arrow. The fuel tank filler flap
for the first time. opens.
Please comply with the safety regulations dis‐
played at filling stations.
Fuel quality, see page 307.
276
Refuelling MOBILITY
2. Turn the fuel tank cap anticlockwise. Have the fuel filler flap unlocked by a Service
3. Place the fuel tank cap in the holder on the

fuel tank filler flap.
Closing
WARNING
The retaining strap of the fuel tank cap may be‐
come trapped and crushed when turning the
cap to close it. It will then not be possible to
close the cap properly. Fuel or fuel vapours can
leak out. There is a risk of injury or material
damage. Make sure that the retaining strap
does not get trapped and crushed when clos‐
ing the cap.
1. Fit the tank cap and turn clockwise until it is

clearly heard to click into place.
2. Press on the fuel filler flap until it engages.
Emergency release
In certain situations, it may be necessary to un‐
lock the fuel filler flap manually, for example if
there is an electrical fault.
277
MOBILITY Wheels and tyres
Wheels and tyres

Vehicle equipment Tyre inflation pressure
information
cific and optional equipment available for the On the door pillar
Tyre inflation pressure The tyre inflation pressures are shown on the
door pillar of the driver's door.
General The tyre inflation pressure data is valid for the

tyre sizes and recommended tyre makes which
A tyre's condition and inflation pressure influence have been rated by the vehicle manufacturer as
the following: suitable for the vehicle concerned.
▷ Lifetime of the tyre. If the tyre's speed code cannot be found, then
▷ Driving safety. the tyre inflation pressure for the corresponding
▷ Driving comfort. tyre size applies.
▷ Fuel consumption. The tyre inflation pressures stated for the re‐
spective load conditions apply depending on the
Safety note vehicle's actual load condition. Example: for a
partially loaded vehicle, the optimum tyre inflation
pressure is the one stated for a partially loaded
WARNING vehicle.
A tyre with too little or no tyre inflation pressure When the vehicle is partially loaded, the lowest
can heat up significantly and sustain damage. possible fuel consumption can be achieved with
Handling characteristics, for example steering the ECO tyre inflation pressure.
and braking, will be impaired as a result. There More information regarding wheels and tyres can
is a risk of accident. Check the tyre inflation be obtained from a Service Partner of the manu‐
pressure regularly and adjust as necessary, for facturer or another qualified Service Partner or a
example twice a month or before any long jour‐ specialist workshop.
ney.
278
Wheels and tyres MOBILITY
For Australia/New Zealand Checking using tyre inflation

pressure inscriptions on the door
WARNING pillar
The inflation pressures on the tyre label are ap‐ 1. Determine the specified tyre inflation pres‐
plicable only for tyres explicitly mentioned on sures for the tyres installed on the vehicle.
the label. Inflation pressures for tyres that may 2. Check the tyre inflation pressure in all four
be covered by the label – by size, speed cate‐ tyres, using a pressure gauge, for example.
gory and load rating/load index – but not explic‐ 3. Correct the tyre inflation pressure if the cur‐
itly mentioned on the label may be different. rent tyre inflation pressure deviates from the
Please obtain adequate inflation pressures in specified tyre inflation pressure.
accordance with the tyre manufacturer's speci‐
4. Check whether all valve caps are screwed
fications from your tyre dealer.
onto the tyre valves.
The tyre inflation pressure inscriptions on the
On the control display tyre inflation pressure sign on the door pillar only
relate to cold tyres or tyres at the same tempera‐
The current tyre inflation pressure values and the
ture as the ambient temperature.
specified tyre inflation pressure values for the
mounted tyres can be displayed on the control Only check the tyre inflation pressures when the
display. tyres are cold, i.e.:
To ensure that they are displayed correctly, the ▷ If the vehicle has been driven a distance of no
tyre sizes must be stored in the system and must more than 2 km, 1.25 miles.
have been set for the fitted tyres. ▷ If the vehicle has not moved again for at least
The current tyre inflation pressure value is shown 2 hours after a journey.
on each tyre. Regularly check the tyre inflation pressure of the
The specified tyre inflation pressure value is lo‐ spare wheel in the luggage compartment and
cated towards the bottom of the control display. correct the pressure if necessary.
Checking the tyre inflation Checking using the tyre inflation

pressure pressure information on the Control
Display
General 1. "CAR"
Tyres heat up while driving. The tyre inflation 2. "Vehicle status"
pressure increases with the temperature of the 3. "Tyre Pressure Monitor"
tyre.
4. Check if the current tyre inflation pressures
Tyres have a natural, uniform loss of tyre inflation match the specified tyre pressure value.
pressure.
5. Correct the tyre inflation pressure if the cur‐
Inflating devices can display a pressure that may rent tyre inflation pressure deviates from the
be up to 0.1 bar too low. specified tyre inflation pressure.
After adjusting the tyre inflation

pressure
For runflat indicator RPA:
279
Reinitialise the runflat indicator RPA. Minimum tread depth

With the Tyre Pressure Monitor:
The corrected tyre inflation pressures are applied
automatically. Make sure that the correct tyre
settings have been made.
For tyres that cannot be found in the tyre infla‐
tion pressure information on the control display,
reset the Tyre Pressure Monitor.
Speed code
Wear indicators are distributed around the cir‐
Designation Maximum speed cumference of the tyre. These wear indicators
have the legally prescribed minimum height of
Q up to 160 km/h, 100 mph
1.6 mm, 0.06 in.
R up to 170 km/h, 106 mph
The positions of the wear indicators are identi‐
S up to 180 km/h, 112 mph fied on the tyre's side wall by TWI, Tread Wear
Indicator.
T up to 190 km/h, 118 mph
H up to 210 km/h, 131 mph

Tyre damage
F up to 240 km/h, 150 mph
W up to 270 km/h, 167 mph General

Y up to 300 km/h, 186 mph Inspect tyres regularly for damage, the presence
of foreign bodies and wear.
(Y) above 300 km/h/186 mph
Vehicle behaviour that may indicate tyre damage
or other faults:
Tyre tread ▷ Unusual vibrations.

▷ Unusual tyre or running noises.
Summer tyres ▷ Unusual vehicle response, such as pro‐

nounced pulling to the left or right.
The tyre tread depth should not be less than
3 mm, 0.12 in, otherwise there is a high risk of Damage can be caused by the following situa‐
aquaplaning. tions, for example:
▷ Driving over kerbs.
Winter tyres ▷ Road damage.
The tyre tread depth should not be less than ▷ Insufficient tyre inflation pressure.
4 mm, 0.16 in, its suitability for winter use is limi‐ ▷ Overloading the vehicle.
ted.
▷ Incorrect tyre storage.
280
Safety notes Replacement of wheels and

tyres
WARNING
If the tyres are damaged, the tyre inflation pres‐ Fitting and balancing
sure may be reduced, which in turn could
cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There Have the wheel fitted and balanced by a Service
is a risk of accident. If you suspect tyre damage Partner of the manufacturer or another qualified
while you are driving, immediately reduce Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
speed and bring the vehicle to a stop. Have the
wheels and tyres checked. To do so, carefully Wheel/tyre combination
drive to a Service Partner of the manufacturer
or another qualified Service Partner or a spe‐ General
cialist workshop. If necessary, have the vehicle Information on the correct wheel/tyre combina‐
towed or transported there. Do not repair dam‐ tion and rim designs for the vehicle can be ob‐
aged tyres. Have them replaced. tained from a Service Partner of the manufac‐
WARNING
Tyres can become damaged by running over Safety notes
obstacles, for example kerbs or road damage,
at high speed. Larger wheels have a smaller WARNING
tyre cross-section. The smaller the tyre cross-
Wheels and tyres that are not suitable for the
section, the higher the risk of tyre damage.
vehicle can damage parts of the vehicle. For ex‐
There is a risk of accident and material dam‐
ample they could come into contact with the
age. If possible, drive around obstacles or drive
bodywork on account of their dimensional tol‐
over them slowly and carefully.
erances, despite having the same nominal size.
There is a risk of accident. The manufacturer of
the vehicle recommends using wheels and
Age of tyres tyres that have been rated as suitable for the
vehicle concerned.
Recommendation
Irrespective of the tyre tread depth, change tyres WARNING
after 6 years at the latest.
Mounted steel wheels can lead to technical
problems, for example wheel studs may work
Date of manufacture loose and brake discs may be damaged. There
The date of manufacture of the tyre is indicated is a risk of accident. Do not install steel wheels.
on the tyre sidewall.
Designation Date of manufacture
DOT … 2120 21st week of 2020
281
Retreaded tyres
WARNING
Incorrect wheel and tyre combinations impair WARNING
the vehicle's driving characteristics and inter‐
fere with the proper functioning of various sys‐ Retreaded tyres may have different tyre car‐
tems, such as the Anti-lock Brake System ABS casses. Their durability may be reduced due to
or Dynamic Stability Control DSC. There is a their advanced age. There is a risk of accident.
risk of accident. To maintain good vehicle han‐ Do not use retreaded tyres.
dling, always fit tyres of the same make and
tread pattern to all wheels. The manufacturer of The vehicle manufacturer advises against the
the vehicle recommends using wheels and use of retreaded tyres.
tyres that have been rated as suitable for the
vehicle concerned. After a tyre has been dam‐ Winter tyres
aged, refit the same wheel/tyre combination as
the original. General
Winter tyres are recommended if driving in winter
conditions.
Recommended makes of tyre
Although tyres known as all-season tyres with an
M+S label have better winter characteristics than
summer tyres, they do not normally match the
performance of winter tyres.
Maximum speed of winter tyres

If the vehicle is capable of maximum speeds
higher than the speed permitted for the winter
tyres, an information label stating the maximum
permitted speed for the tyres fitted must be dis‐
Certain makes of tyre are recommended by the played in the driver's field of view. The label is
manufacturer of the vehicle for each tyre size. available from a Service Partner of the manufac‐
The tyre brands can be identified by a star on the turer or another qualified Service Partner or a
side wall of the tyre. specialist workshop.
If winter tyres are fitted, observe and do not ex‐
New tyres ceed the respectively permitted maximum
speed.
Due to the manufacturing process, new tyres do
not achieve their full road grip immediately.
Replacing run-flat tyres
Drive moderately for the first 300 km, 200 miles.
When changing from run-flat tyres to standard
tyres, make sure that a spare wheel or a flat tyre
kit is available in the vehicle. Additional informa‐
tion is available from a Service Partner of the
282
Swapping over front and rear Observe the notes on continuing to drive with a
wheels flat tyre.
Safety note
WARNING
Swapping of wheels between axles on vehicles
WARNING
with differently sized tyres or rims on the front
and rear may cause tyre damage and damage A run-flat tyre which has low tyre inflation pres‐
to the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Do sure or no tyre inflation pressure at all will
not swap over wheels between axles on vehi‐ change the vehicle's handling characteristics,
cles with differently sized tyres or rims on the for example there may be reduced directional
front and rear. stability when braking, longer braking distances
and different self-steering characteristics.
There is a risk of accident. Drive with care and
Storing tyres do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h, 50 mph.
Tyre inflation pressure

Label
Do not exceed the maximum tyre inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the tyre's side wall.
Tyre storage
▷ Store wheels and tyres in a cool, dry and dark
place when not in use.
▷ Protect the tyres against contamination from
oil, grease and solvents.
▷ Do not leave tyres in plastic bags.
▷ Remove dirt from the wheels or tyres. The tyres are identified by Runflat System Com‐
ponent RSC on the tyre's side wall.
Run-flat tyres
Remedying flat tyres
Principle
In the event of a complete loss of tyre inflation Safety measures
pressure, run-flat tyres enable you to continue
▷ Park the vehicle on a firm surface and as far
driving, with certain restrictions.
away from moving traffic as possible.
General ▷ Switch on the hazard warning lights.
The wheels are fitted with tyres which are self- ▷ Apply the parking brake to prevent the vehi‐
supporting to a limited degree. They may also cle rolling away.
have special rims. ▷ Engage the steering wheel lock with the
The reinforced side wall means that the tyre wheels in the straight-ahead position.
keeps the vehicle mobile to a degree even if tyre
inflation pressure has been lost.
283
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the ve‐ Overview

hicle and guide them out of the danger area,
for example behind the crash barrier. Storage
▷ Set up the warning triangle an appropriate
distance away.
Mobility System
Principle
With the Mobility System, minor tyre damage
can be quickly sealed, to allow you to drive on.
For this purpose, liquid sealant is pumped into The Mobility Set is located in the luggage com‐
the tyres which encloses the damage from the partment behind the right side trim panel.
inside when it hardens.
Sealant container
General
▷ Please observe the notes on the application
of the Mobility System which are on the com‐
pressor and the sealant container.
▷ Applying the Mobility System can be ineffec‐
tive for tyre damage larger than approximately
4 mm.
▷ Contact a Service Partner of the manufac‐
specialist workshop if you are unable to put
▷ Sealant container, arrow 1.
the tyre back in operation.
▷ Filler hose, arrow 2.
▷ Foreign bodies that have penetrated the tyre
should remain inside the tyre. Only remove Note the use-by date on the sealant container.
foreign objects if they are visibly protruding
from the tyre. Compressor
▷ Remove the speed limit sticker from the seal‐
ant container and attach to the steering
wheel.
▷ Using sealants can damage the wheel elec‐
tronics. In this case, have the electronics re‐
placed at the next opportunity.
▷ The compressor can be used to check the
tyre inflation pressure.
1 Unlocking sealant container

2 Sealant container holder
284
3 Tyre inflation pressure indicator

NOTE
4 Reduce tyre inflation pressure button
The compressor can overheat if operated for
5 On/Off button
too long. There is a risk of material damage. Do
6 Compressor not let the compressor run for longer than
7 Plug/cable for socket 10 minutes.
8 Connecting hose
Filling
Safety measures 1. Shake the sealant container.
▷ Park the vehicle on a firm surface and as far
away from moving traffic as possible.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning lights.
▷ Apply the parking brake to prevent the vehi‐
cle rolling away.
▷ Engage the steering wheel lock with the
wheels in the straight-ahead position.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the ve‐
hicle and guide them out of the danger area,
for example behind the crash barrier. 2. Pull filler hose completely from the cover of
▷ Set up the warning triangle an appropriate the sealant container. Do not kink the hose.
distance away.
Filling with sealing compound
Safety notes
DANGER
A blocked exhaust pipe or inadequate ventila‐
tion can allow harmful exhaust fumes to enter
the vehicle. The exhaust fumes contain pollu‐ 3. Push the sealant container into the bracket
tants which are colourless and odourless. In en‐ on the compressor housing, until it audibly
closed spaces, exhaust fumes can also build up engages.
outside the vehicle. There is a risk of death.
Keep the exhaust pipe clear and ensure suffi‐
cient ventilation.
285
4. Screw the filler hose of the sealant container Checking and adjusting the tyre
onto the tyre valve of the faulty wheel. inflation pressure
Checking
1. Switch off compressor.
2. Read off the tyre inflation pressure as shown
on the tyre pressure indicator.
To be able to continue the journey, a tyre infla‐
tion pressure of at least 2 bar must be reached.
Removing and storing the sealant

5. Insert the plug into the socket in the vehicle container
interior while the compressor is switched off.
1. Unscrew the filler hose of the sealant con‐
tainer from the tyre valve.
2. Press the red unlocking device.
3. Remove the sealant container from the com‐
pressor.
4. Pack and store the sealant container to avoid
soiling the boot.
Minimum tyre inflation pressure is

not reached
6. Switch on the compressor with standby state
or drive-ready state switched on. 1. Unplug the connector from the socket in the
vehicle interior.
2. Drive forwards and backwards by 10 m,
400 inches, to distribute the sealant in the
tyre.
3. Screw the connecting hose of the compres‐
sor directly onto the tyre valve.
Let the compressor run for approximately 10 mi‐

nutes to fill the sealing compound and achieve a
tyre inflation pressure of approximately 2.0 bar.
The tyre inflation pressure may rise to approxi‐
mately 5 bar during the filling process of the
sealing compound. Do not switch off the com‐
pressor during this step.
286
4. Insert the plug into the socket in the vehicle Adjusting

interior. 1. Stop in a suitable area.
2. Screw the connecting hose of the compres‐
sor directly onto the tyre valve.
5. Switch on the compressor with standby state

or drive-ready state switched on.
If the tyre inflation pressure of at least 2 bar is 3. Insert the plug into the socket in the vehicle
not reached, contact a Service Partner of the interior.
manufacturer or a qualified Service Partner or
a specialist workshop.
If the tyre inflation pressure of at least 2 bar is
reached, see Minimum tyre inflation pressure
is reached.
6. Unscrew the connecting hose of the com‐
pressor from the tyre valve.
7. Unplug the connector from the socket in the
vehicle interior.
8. Store Mobility System in the vehicle. 4. Correct tyre inflation pressure to at least
2.0 bar:
Minimum tyre inflation pressure is ▷ To increase the tyre inflation pressure:
reached switch on the compressor with standby
1. Unscrew the connecting hose of the com‐ state or drive-ready state switched on.
pressor from the tyre valve. ▷ To reduce tyre inflation pressure: press
2. Unplug the connector from the socket in the the button on the compressor.
vehicle interior. 5. Unscrew the connecting hose of the com‐
3. Store Mobility System in the vehicle. pressor from the tyre valve.
4. Immediately drive for approximately 6. Unplug the connector from the socket in the
10 km/5 mi to evenly distribute the sealing vehicle interior.
compound in the tyre. 7. Store Mobility System in the vehicle.
Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h/50 mph.
If possible, do not drive slower than Resuming with journey
20 km/h/12 mph. Do not exceed maximum permitted speed of
80 km/h, 50 mph.
Reinitialise the runflat indicator RPA.
Reset the Tyre Pressure Monitor.
287
Have the punctured tyre and the sealant con‐ Use

tainer of the Mobility System replaced as soon as
Snow chains may only be used in pairs on the
possible.
rear wheels with tyres of the following sizes:
▷ 255/45 R17.
▷ Runflat indicator RPA, see page 295.
▷ 225/50 R17.
▷ Tyre Pressure Monitor, see page 288.
▷ 255/40 R18.
Observe the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐
Snow chains tions.
Do not initialise the runflat indicator RPA with
snow chains fitted, as it may give incorrect read‐
Safety notes
ings.
Do not reset the Tyre Pressure Monitor with
WARNING snow chains fitted, as it may give incorrect read‐
If snow chains are fitted to unsuitable tyres, the ings.
snow chains can come into contact with parts When driving with snow chains fitted, activate
of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident or ma‐ Dynamic Traction Control DTC briefly as re‐
terial damage. Only fit snow chains on tyres quired in order to optimise traction.
which have been approved by the manufacturer
as being suitable for snow chains.
Maximum speed with snow
chains
When snow chains are fitted, do not exceed
WARNING
50 km/h, 30 mph.
Insufficiently tensioned snow chains can dam‐
age tyres and vehicle components. There is a
risk of accident or material damage. Ensure that Tyre Pressure Monitor
snow chains are always adequately tensioned.
Re-tension them if necessary in accordance
with the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐ Principle
tions. The system monitors the tyre inflation pressure
in the four fitted tyres. The system warns if the
tyre inflation pressure in one or more tyres has
Fine-link snow chains dropped.
The vehicle manufacturer recommends using
fine-link snow chains. Certain fine-link snow General
chains have been tested, found safe for use in Sensors in the tyre valves measure the tyre infla‐
traffic and rated as suitable by the manufacturer tion pressure and tyre temperature.
of the vehicle.
The system detects the fitted tyres automati‐
Information regarding suitable snow chains is cally. The system shows the preset specified
available from a Service Partner of the manufac‐ pressures on the control display and compares
turer or another qualified Service Partner or a them to the current tyre inflation pressures.
If the vehicle is fitted with tyres which are not lis‐
ted in the tyre inflation pressure information on
the vehicle, for example tyres with special appro‐
288
val, the system must be actively reset. The cur‐ ▷ After changing the tyre setting.
rent tyre inflation pressures are then accepted as ▷ In the case of tyres with special approval:
the specified values.
▷ After every tyre or wheel change, a reset
When operating the system, please also comply must be carried out when the tyre inflation
with the information and notes in the chapter on pressures are correct.
tyre inflation pressure.
▷ A reset must be carried out after the tyre
For further information: inflation pressure has been adjusted to a
Tyre inflation pressure, see page 278. new value.
▷ Wheels with wheel electronics.
Safety note
Tyre settings
WARNING
The display showing the specified tyre inflation
General
pressures does not replace the tyre inflation If the system does not detect the tyres automati‐
pressure information on the vehicle. If incorrect cally, the specifications for the fitted tyres can be
data has been entered into the tyre settings, entered in the tyre settings.
the specified tyre inflation pressures will also be The tyre sizes of the fitted tyres can be found in
incorrect. As a result, reliable signalling of a loss the tyre inflation pressure information on the ve‐
of tyre inflation pressure can no longer be guar‐ hicle or directly on the tyres.
anteed. There is a risk of injury and material The tyre data does not have to be re-entered if
damage. Make sure that the tyre sizes of the the tyre inflation pressure is corrected.
fitted tyres are displayed correctly and that they
match the specifications on the tyres and in the For summer and winter tyres, the tyre data last
tyre inflation pressure information. entered for each type is saved. This means that
the settings can be retrieved again after a tyre or
wheel change.
Adjusting the settings
The following requirements must be met for the
system, otherwise reliable signalling of a loss of 1. "CAR"
tyre inflation pressure is not ensured: 2. "Vehicle status"
▷ After each tyre or wheel change, the system 3. "Tyre Pressure Monitor"
has detected the fitted tyres, updated the rel‐ 4. "Tyre settings"
evant information and, after a short journey,
5. "Tyre selection"
shown it on the Control Display.
6. "Manual"
If the system does not detect the tyres auto‐
matically, enter the specifications for the fit‐ 7. "Tyre type"
ted tyres in the tyre settings. ▷ "Summer"
▷ The Tyre Pressure Monitor only becomes ac‐ ▷ "Winter/all-season"
tive after a journey of several minutes:
8. Select the type of tyre mounted on the rear
▷ After a tyre or wheel change. axle.
▷ After a reset, in the case of tyres with spe‐ In the case of tyres with special approval:
cial approval.
"Other tyres".
289
See the Performing a reset section for how to tive of the weather conditions, tyre temperatures
proceed. and length of journey.
9. Select the load status of the vehicle once tyre The displayed specified pressure may vary and
size has been selected. differ from the value stated in the tyre inflation
10. "Save tyre settings" pressure information on the door pillar of the
driver's door. The tyre inflation pressure can thus
The measurement of the current tyre inflation
be corrected to the value of the displayed speci‐
pressure is started. The progress of the meas‐
fied pressures.
urement is shown.
The specified pressure is adjusted immediately if
the load status is changed in the tyre settings.
Status display
Current status Tyre statuses

The status of the system, for example whether
General
the system is active, can be shown on the Con‐
trol Display. The status of the system and tyres is indicated
by the wheel colour and a message on the con‐
1. "CAR" trol display.
2. "Vehicle status" If applicable, existing messages are not deleted if
3. "Tyre Pressure Monitor" the nominal pressure is not reached on correc‐
The current status is displayed. tion of the tyre inflation pressure.
Current tyre inflation pressure All wheels green

The current tyre inflation pressure is displayed ▷ The system is active and refers to the nomi‐
for each tyre. nal pressures for the warning.
The current tyre inflation pressures can vary de‐ ▷ In the case of tyres with special approval: the
pending on vehicle operation or outside temper‐ system is active and is using the tyre inflation
ature. pressures saved during the last reset for the
warning.
Current tyre temperature
One to four wheels yellow
Depending on the model, the current tyre tem‐
peratures are shown. There is a flat tyre or major loss of tyre inflation
pressure in the tyres shown.
The current tyre temperatures can change as a
result of vehicle operation or the outside temper‐
Wheels grey
ature.
Tyre pressure losses might not be detected.
Specified pressure Possible causes:
The specified pressure for the tyres on the front ▷ Malfunction.
and rear axle is displayed. ▷ The tyre inflation pressure is being measured,
The calculated pressure takes account of the after confirmation of the tyre settings.
temperature effects caused by vehicle operation ▷ In the case of tyres with special approval: a
and the outside temperature. The appropriate system reset is being performed.
specified pressure is always displayed irrespec‐
290
Tyres with special approval: Safety note

performing a reset
1. "CAR" WARNING
2. "Vehicle status" A damaged standard tyre with too little or no
3. "Tyre Pressure Monitor" tyre inflation pressure impairs driving character‐
istics, for example steering and braking. Tyres
4. Make sure that the correct tyre settings have
with run-flat properties allow a limited level of
been made.
stability to be maintained. There is a risk of ac‐
Tyre settings, see page 289. cident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is
5. Switch on drive-ready state but do not drive fitted with standard tyres. Comply with the
off. notes on run-flat tyres and continuing to drive
6. Reset the tyre inflation pressure: "Perform with these tyres.
reset".
7. Drive off. If a tyre inflation pressure check is
The wheels are shown grey and the following ap‐ required
pears on the display: "Resetting tyre
pressure…". Message
After driving for several minutes, the set tyre in‐ A symbol with a Check Control message is
flation pressures are accepted as the specified shown on the Control Display.
tyre inflation pressures. The reset is completed
Symbol Possible cause
automatically during the journey.
If the reset was successful, the wheels are The tyre was not inflated properly,
shown in green on the Control Display and the for example insufficient air was
following appears: "Reset successful." added or there was a natural, even
You can interrupt your journey at any time. The loss of tyre inflation pressure.
reset resumes automatically when you continue
your journey. Measure
Check the tyre inflation pressure and adjust as
Messages: for tyres without necessary.
special approval
If the tyre inflation pressure is
General insufficient
Dynamic Stability Control DSC will be activated if
necessary as soon as a message for low tyre in‐ Message
flation pressure appears. A yellow warning lamp is illuminated in
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐

sage is shown on the Control Display.
291
Symbol Possible cause Messages: in the case of tyres

There has been a loss of tyre infla‐
with special approval
tion pressure.
General
Dynamic Stability Control DSC will be activated if
Measure necessary as soon as a message for low tyre in‐
1. Reduce speed. Do not exceed a speed of flation pressure appears.
130 km/h, 80 mph.
2. At the next opportunity, for example at a filling Safety note
station, check the tyre inflation pressure in all
four tyres and correct if necessary. WARNING
A damaged standard tyre with too little or no
If there is a significant loss of tyre tyre inflation pressure impairs driving character‐
inflation pressure istics, for example steering and braking. Tyres
with run-flat properties allow a limited level of
Message stability to be maintained. There is a risk of ac‐
A yellow warning lamp is illuminated in cident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is
the instrument cluster. fitted with standard tyres. Comply with the
notes on run-flat tyres and continuing to drive
In addition, a symbol with the affected tyre is with these tyres.
shown in a Check Control message on the Con‐
trol Display.
If a tyre inflation pressure check is
required
There is a flat tyre or substantial loss
of tyre inflation pressure. Message
A symbol with a Check Control message is
shown on the Control Display.
Action
1. Reduce your speed and carefully stop the ve‐ Sym‐ Possible cause
hicle. Avoid heavy braking and sudden steer‐ bol
ing manoeuvres. The tyre was not inflated properly, for
2. Check whether the vehicle is equipped with example insufficient air was added.
standard tyres or run-flat tyres. The system has detected a wheel
The symbol identifying run-flat tyres is a cir‐ change, but no reset has been per‐
cle with the letters RSC on the tyre sidewall. formed.
Run-flat tyres, see page 283. The tyre inflation pressure has drop‐
3. Follow the description of what to do when the ped compared to the last reset.
vehicle gets a flat tyre. No reset has been performed on the
What to do in the event of a flat tyre, see system. The system is using the tyre
page 293. inflation pressures saved during the
last reset for the warning.
292
Measure Symbol Possible cause

1. Check the tyre inflation pressure and adjust
There is a flat tyre or substantial loss
as necessary.
of tyre inflation pressure.
2. Perform a reset of the system.
No reset has been performed on the
system. The system is using the tyre
If the tyre inflation pressure is
inflation pressures saved during the
insufficient last reset for the warning.
Message
Action
A yellow warning lamp is illuminated in
1. Reduce your speed and carefully stop the ve‐
hicle. Avoid heavy braking and sudden steer‐
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐ ing manoeuvres.
sage is shown on the Control Display. 2. Check whether the vehicle is equipped with
standard tyres or run-flat tyres.
The symbol identifying run-flat tyres is a cir‐
There has been a loss of tyre infla‐ cle with the letters RSC on the tyre sidewall.
tion pressure. Run-flat tyres, see page 283.
No reset has been performed on the 3. Follow the description of what to do when the
system. The system is using the tyre vehicle gets a flat tyre.
inflation pressures saved during the
last reset for the warning. What to do in the event of a flat tyre, see
page 293.
Measure
What to do in the event of a flat
1. Reduce speed. Do not exceed a speed of
tyre
130 km/h, 80 mph.
2. At the next opportunity, for example at a filling Standard tyres
station, check the tyre inflation pressure in all
1. Identify the damaged tyre.
four tyres and correct if necessary.
Check the tyre inflation pressure in all four
3. Perform a reset of the system.
tyres, for example using the tyre pressure in‐
dicator of a flat tyre kit.
If there is a significant loss of tyre
In the case of tyres with special approval: if all
inflation pressure
four tyres are inflated to the correct tyre infla‐
Message tion pressures, the Tyre Pressure Monitor
might not have been reset. Perform a reset.
If no tyre damage can be found, contact a
Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐
In addition, a symbol with the affected tyre is
workshop.
shown in a Check Control message on the Con‐
trol Display. 2. Repair the flat tyre, for example using a flat
tyre kit or by changing the wheel.
293
The use of sealant, for example a flat tyre kit, can Driving properties with damaged tyres
damage the wheel electronics. Have the elec‐ On a journey with damaged tyres, handling char‐
tronics replaced at the next opportunity. acteristics change and may result in the following
situations, for example:
Run-flat tyres ▷ The vehicle losing traction more quickly.
Safety note ▷ Longer stopping distances.
▷ Different self-steering characteristics.
WARNING Adapt your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering or
driving over obstacles, for example kerbs or pot‐
A run-flat tyre which has low tyre inflation pres‐
holes.
sure or no tyre inflation pressure at all will
change the vehicle's handling characteristics,
Final tyre failure
for example there may be reduced directional
stability when braking, longer braking distances Vibration or loud noises during the journey may
and different self-steering characteristics. be an indication that the tyre has finally failed.
There is a risk of accident. Drive with care and Reduce your speed and stop the vehicle. Parts of
do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h, 50 mph. the tyre may detach, which might lead to an acci‐
dent.
Do not continue driving, but instead contact a
Maximum speed
If a tyre is damaged you can continue your jour‐ qualified Service Partner or a specialist work‐
ney, but do not exceed a maximum speed of shop.
80 km/h, 50 mph.
System limits
Continuing a journey with a flat tyre
Note the following if you continue a journey with Temperature
a flat tyre:
The tyre inflation pressure depends on the tem‐
1. Avoid heavy braking and sudden steering perature of the tyre.
manoeuvres. The pressure increases as the temperature of
2. Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h, 50 mph. the tyre increases, for example while driving or
3. As soon as there is an opportunity, check the when exposed to sunlight.
tyre inflation pressure in all four tyres. The pressure decreases when the tyre tempera‐
ture drops.
Possible driving distance with a deflated Due to the system's inherent warning thresholds,
tyre therefore, this behaviour may cause a warning to
The possible driving distance varies depending be triggered when significant temperature drops
on the load and stresses the vehicle is subjected occur.
to, for example speed, the nature of the road sur‐ After a temperature-related warning, the speci‐
face, outside temperature. The driving distance fied pressures are displayed again on the control
may be shorter or, if a more careful driving style display after driving a short distance.
is adopted, may also be longer.
If the vehicle is moderately loaded and subjected
to low stress, it is possible to travel up to 80 km,
50 miles.
294
Sudden loss of tyre inflation of the corresponding wheel. The discrepancy will
pressure be detected and reported as a flat tyre.
No warning can be given in the event of extreme, The system does not measure the tyre inflation
sudden tyre failure caused by external factors. pressure as such.
Reset not carried out Operating requirements

Tyres with special approval: the system will not The following requirements must be met for the
function correctly if a reset has not been carried system, otherwise reliable signalling of a loss of
out, for example, a flat tyre may be reported even tyre inflation pressure is not ensured:
though the tyre pressure is correct. ▷ After every tyre or wheel change, an initialisa‐
tion must be carried out once the tyre infla‐
Malfunction tion pressures are correct.
▷ An initialisation must be carried out after the
Message tyre inflation pressure has been adjusted to a
The yellow warning lamp flashes and is new value.
then illuminated continuously. A Check
Control message is shown. Tyre pres‐ Status display
sure losses may not be detected. It is possible to display the current status of the
runflat indicator RPA, for example to check
Action whether the RPA is active.
▷ A wheel without wheel electronics is moun‐ 1. "CAR"

ted, for example spare wheel: have the 2. "Vehicle status"
wheels checked if necessary.
3. "Flat Tyre Monitor"
▷ Fault due to systems or devices with the
The status is displayed.
same radio frequency: the system is auto‐
matically reactivated upon leaving the field of
interference. Initialisation required
▷ In the case of tyres with special approval: the An initialisation must be performed in the
system was unable to complete the reset. following situations:
Perform a system reset again. ▷ After adjusting the tyre inflation pressure.
Malfunction: have the system checked. ▷ After a tyre or wheel change.
Initialising
Runflat indicator RPA Initialisation saves the set tyre inflation pressures
as reference values for subsequent detection of
Principle a flat tyre. Initialisation is started by confirming
The system identifies a loss of tyre inflation pres‐ the correct tyre inflation pressures.
sure by comparing the rotational speeds of the When driving with snow chains fitted, do not initi‐
individual wheels during the journey. alise the system.
If a tyre loses inflation pressure, its diameter 1. "CAR"
changes. This in turn alters the rotational speed
2. "Vehicle status"
295
3. "Flat Tyre Monitor" Action

4. Switch on drive-ready state but do not drive 1. Reduce your speed and carefully stop the ve‐
off. hicle. Avoid heavy braking and sudden steer‐
5. Start the initialisation: "Perform reset" ing manoeuvres.
6. Drive off. 2. Check whether the vehicle is equipped with
standard tyres or run-flat tyres.
Initialisation is completed during the journey; this
process can be interrupted at any time. The symbol identifying run-flat tyres is a cir‐
cle with the letters RSC on the tyre sidewall.
Initialising resumes automatically when you con‐
tinue your journey. Run-flat tyres, see page 283.
Messages What to do in the event of a flat

tyre
General
Dynamic Stability Control DSC is activated if Standard tyres
necessary as soon as the message for a flat tyre 1. Identify the damaged tyre.
appears. To do this, check the tyre inflation pressure in
all four tyres, for example using the tyre pres‐
Safety note sure indicator of a flat tyre kit.
If all four tyres are inflated to the correct tyre
WARNING inflation pressures, the runflat indicator RPA
A damaged standard tyre with too little or no might not have been initialised. In this case
tyre inflation pressure impairs driving character‐ initialise the system.
istics, for example steering and braking. Tyres If it is not possible to identify tyre damage,
with run-flat properties allow a limited level of contact a Service Partner of the manufacturer
stability to be maintained. There is a risk of ac‐ or another qualified Service Partner or a spe‐
cident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is cialist workshop.
fitted with standard tyres. Comply with the 2. Repair the flat tyre, for example using a flat
notes on run-flat tyres and continuing to drive tyre kit or by changing the wheel.
with these tyres.
Run-flat tyres
Flat tyre message Safety note
WARNING
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control mes‐ A run-flat tyre which has low tyre inflation pres‐
sage is shown on the Control Display. sure or no tyre inflation pressure at all will
change the vehicle's handling characteristics,
Symbol Possible cause for example there may be reduced directional
There is a flat tyre or substantial loss stability when braking, longer braking distances
of tyre inflation pressure. and different self-steering characteristics.
There is a risk of accident. Drive with care and
do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h, 50 mph.
296
Maximum speed Final tyre failure

If a tyre is damaged you can continue your jour‐ Vibration or loud noises during the journey may
ney, but do not exceed a maximum speed of be an indication that the tyre has finally failed.
80 km/h, 50 mph. Reduce your speed and stop the vehicle. Parts of
the tyre may detach, which might lead to an acci‐
Continuing a journey with a flat tyre dent.
Note the following if you continue a journey with Do not continue driving, but instead contact a
a flat tyre: Service Partner of the manufacturer or another
1. Avoid heavy braking and sudden steering qualified Service Partner or a specialist work‐
manoeuvres. shop.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h, 50 mph.

System limits
3. As soon as there is an opportunity, check the
tyre inflation pressure in all four tyres. In the following situations, the system could be
slow to respond or operate incorrectly:
If all four tyres are inflated to the correct tyre
inflation pressures, the runflat indicator might ▷ A natural, even loss of tyre inflation pressure
not have been initialised. In this case initialise in all four tyres that occurs over time will not
the system. be detected. Therefore check the tyre infla‐
tion pressure at regular intervals.
Possible driving distance with a deflated ▷ No warning can be given in the event of sud‐
tyre den tyre failure caused by external factors.
The possible driving distance varies depending ▷ The system has not been initialised.
on the load and stresses the vehicle is subjected ▷ When driving on snow-covered or slippery
to, for example speed, the nature of the road sur‐ surfaces.
face, outside temperature. The driving distance
▷ Dynamic driving style: drive wheels slipping,
may be shorter or, if a more careful driving style
high lateral acceleration.
is adopted, may also be longer.
▷ When driving with snow chains.
If the vehicle is moderately loaded and subjected
to low stress, it is possible to travel up to 80 km,
50 miles.
Wheel change
Driving properties with damaged tyres
On a journey with damaged tyres, handling char‐
General
acteristics change and may result in the following For run-flat tyres or when using a flat tyre kit, it is
situations, for example: not always necessary to change a wheel immedi‐
▷ The vehicle losing traction more quickly. ately if tyre inflation pressure is lost due to a flat
tyre.
▷ Longer stopping distances.
If required, the tools for changing wheels are
▷ Different self-steering characteristics. available as optional accessories from a Service
Adapt your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering or Partner of the manufacturer, another qualified
driving over obstacles, for example kerbs or pot‐ Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
holes.
297
Safety notes
WARNING
DANGER The jack is only optimised for raising the vehi‐

cle and for use with the jacking points on the
The jack is only intended for raising the vehicle vehicle. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift an‐
briefly during a wheel change. Even if the safety other vehicle or other items with the jack.
measures are complied with, there is a risk of
the raised vehicle falling over due to the jack
slipping. There is a risk of injury or even death.
If the vehicle is raised with the jack, do not lie WARNING
underneath the vehicle and do not start the en‐ If the jack has not been guided into the jacking
gine. point provided, the vehicle might be damaged
when the jack is extended, or the jack could
slip. There is a risk of injury or material damage.
DANGER When extending, make sure that the jack is gui‐
ded into the jacking point adjacent to the
Supports such as wooden blocks under the wheelhouse.
jack can prevent it from achieving its load ca‐
pacity due to the restricted height. The load ca‐
pacity of the wooden blocks may be exceeded,
causing the vehicle to tip over. There is a risk of WARNING
injury or even death. Do not place supports un‐ A vehicle raised with a jack can fall from the
der the vehicle jack. jack if lateral forces are applied. There is a risk
of injury and material damage. If the vehicle is
raised, do not apply any lateral forces to the ve‐
WARNING hicle or pull the vehicle with sudden move‐
ments. Have any wheel that is jammed re‐
The jack, issued by the vehicle manufacturer, is moved by a Service Partner of the
provided in order to perform a wheel change in manufacturer or another qualified Service Part‐
the event of a breakdown. The jack is not de‐ ner or a specialist workshop.
signed for frequent use; for example, changing
from summer to winter tyres. Using the jack
frequently may cause it to become jammed or
damaged. There is a risk of injury and material Vehicle jack: Australian/New Zealand
damage. Only use the jack to change an emer‐ standard AS/NZS 2693
gency wheel or a spare wheel when the vehicle 2007 – "Vehicle jacks" contains the following
gets a flat tyre. warning note, which BMW hereby adopts: "...
no person should place any portion of their
body under a vehicle that is supported by a
WARNING jack".
On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for example The jack supplied with your vehicle should not
snow, ice, tiles or similar, the jack may slip. be used for any purpose other than wheel
There is a risk of injury. Perform the wheel changing and should never be used in conjunc‐
change on a level, firm and non-slip surface if at tion with a vehicle support stand. Raising the
all possible. vehicle for the purpose of inspection should
only be performed in a controlled workshop en‐
vironment on a hoist by trained personnel.
298
The following warning instructions from stand‐ On a slight downhill slope

ard AS/NZS 2693:2007 are repeated here: the
jack should be used on level firm ground wher‐
ever possible. It is recommended that the
wheels of the vehicle be chocked, and that no
person should remain in a vehicle that is being
jacked.
The jack of your BMW is maintenance-free.
Please observe the information marked on the
jack.
If it is necessary to change a wheel on a slight
downhill slope, place chocks and other suitable
Protecting the vehicle against objects, for example stones, under the wheels of
rolling the front and rear axles against the direction of
roll.
General
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that the
Thiefproof wheel studs
vehicle should additionally be protected against
rolling away during a wheel change.
Principle
On a level surface The wheel locking bolts have a special coding.
The blots can only be released with the adapter
that matches the coding.
Overview
The adapter of the locking wheel bolts can be
found in the on-board tool kit or in an oddments
tray in the on-board tool kit.
Place chocks or other suitable objects in front of

and behind the wheel directly opposite to the
one being changed.
▷ Locking wheel bolt, arrow 1.

▷ Adapter, arrow 2.
Unscrewing
1. Place the adapter on the locking wheel bolt.
2. Unscrew the locking wheel bolt.
299
3. After unscrewing the wheel stud, remove the Jacking points

adapter again.
Screwing on
1. Place the adapter on the locking wheel bolt. If
necessary, turn the adapter until it fits on the
locking wheel bolt.
2. Screw on the locking wheel bolt. The tighten‐
ing torque is 140 Nm.
3. After screwing on the wheel stud, remove the
adapter again and stow it. The jacking points are located in the marked po‐
sitions.
Preparing the vehicle
▷ Park the vehicle on firm and non-slip ground
at a safe distance from traffic.
▷ Switch on the hazard warning lights.
▷ Engage a gear or select selector lever posi‐
tion P.
▷ As soon as the traffic permits, have all vehicle
occupants get out of the vehicle and guide
them out of the danger area, for example be‐
hind the crash barrier.
▷ Depending on the equipment, take the wheel
change tools and, if necessary, the spare
wheel out of the vehicle.
▷ If applicable, set up warning triangle or flash‐
ing light at the correct distance.
▷ Additionally protect the vehicle against rolling
away.
▷ Undo the wheel studs by half a turn.
300
Raising vehicle 4. Remove your hand from the jack as soon as

the jack is under load and continue to turn
the jack crank or lever with one hand.
WARNING
5. Make sure that the base of the vehicle jack is
Your hands or fingers could get trapped when extended perpendicular to and at right angles
using the jack. There is a risk of injury. Keep underneath the jacking point.
your hands in the described position when us‐
ing the jack, and do not change this position.
1. Hold the jack with one hand, arrow 1, and

grasp the jack crank or lever with your other
hand, arrow 2.
6. Make sure that the base of the jack is exten‐

ded perpendicular to and at right angles be‐
low the jacking point.
2. Guide the jack into the rectangular recess of

the jacking point closest to the wheel to be
changed.
7. Raise by cranking until the jack is supported

on the ground with its entire surface and the
wheel in question is at most 3 cm, 1.2 inches
off the ground.
Fitting a wheel
3. Turn the jack crank or lever clockwise to ex‐
tend the jack. Only fit one emergency wheel at most, as re‐
quired.
1. Unscrew the wheel studs.

2. Remove the wheel.
3. Put on the new wheel or emergency wheel
and tighten at least two wheel studs cross‐
wise until finger-tight.
If non-original light alloy wheels not from the
vehicle manufacturer are fitted, the wheel
301
studs belonging to the wheels may also have Additionally, regularly check the tyre inflation
to be used. pressure of the emergency wheel in the boot
4. Tighten the remaining wheel studs until fin‐ and correct the pressure if necessary.
ger-tight and then tighten all the wheel studs
crosswise. Safety note
5. Turn the jack crank anticlockwise to retract
the jack and lower the vehicle. WARNING
6. Remove the jack and stow it securely. The spare wheel has special dimensions. When
driving with an spare wheel, the driving proper‐
After changing the wheel ties may change, for example reduced direc‐
1. Tighten the wheel studs crosswise. The tional stability when braking, longer braking dis‐
tightening torque is 140 Nm, 101 lb ft. tance and modified self-steering behaviour in
the limit range. There is a risk of accident. Drive
2. Stow the faulty wheel in the luggage com‐
with care and do not exceed a speed of
partment, if necessary.
80 km/h, 50 mph.
Due to its size, the faulty wheel cannot be ac‐
commodated under the boot floor.
3. Check tyre inflation pressure at the next op‐ Overview
portunity and correct as necessary.
4. Reinitialise the runflat indicator RPA.
Reset the Tyre Pressure Monitor.
5. Check the tight fit of the wheel studs using a
calibrated torque wrench.
6. Drive to the nearest Service Partner of the
manufacturer or another qualified Service
Partner or a specialist workshop to have the
damaged tyre replaced.
The spare wheel and the tools for changing
wheels are located in a bag in the luggage com‐
Not for Australia/New partment.
Zealand:Spare wheel
Principle
In case of a flat tyre, the emergency wheel can
be used as a replacement for the defective tyre.
The emergency wheel is intended for short-term
use until the defective wheel has been replaced.
General
Only fit one emergency wheel at most.
302
Removing spare wheel

1. Release the lashing strap at the buckle, ar‐
row 1.
2. Unhook the lashing straps from the lashing

eyes.
3. Remove the bag containing the spare wheel
and the tools for changing wheels from the
luggage compartment, arrow 2.
4. Open the bag, take out the spare wheel and
the tools for changing wheels.
Inserting the spare wheel

1. Stow the spare wheel and the tools for
changing wheels in the bag.
2. Place the bag in the luggage compartment.
3. Hook the lashing straps onto the lashing
eyes.
4. Tie the lashing straps. Make sure that it is
seated correctly and firmly.
303
MOBILITY Engine compartment
Engine compartment
Overview
1 Filler neck for washing fluid 5 Additional coolant tank cooling

2 Starting assistance, negative battery terminal 6 Engine coolant tank
3 Starting assistance, positive battery terminal 7 Vehicle identification number
4 Oil filler neck
304
Engine compartment MOBILITY
Bonnet
WARNING
Safety notes opening and closing the bonnet. There is a risk
of injury. When opening and closing, make sure
WARNING that the area of movement of the bonnet is
Incorrectly performed work in the engine com‐ kept clear.
partment can damage components and poses
a safety risk. There is a risk of accidents or ma‐
terial damage. Have work in the engine com‐ NOTE
partment undertaken by a Service Partner of Wipers which are folded away from the wind‐
the manufacturer or another qualified Service screen can become trapped if the front flap is
Partner or a specialist workshop. opened. There is a risk of material damage. Be‐
fore opening the bonnet, make sure that the
wipers are fitted with wiper blades and are in
WARNING contact with the windscreen.
The engine compartment contains moving
components. Certain components in the en‐
gine compartment can also move when the ve‐ NOTE
hicle is switched off, for example the radiator When closing, the front flap must lock into
fan. There is a risk of injury. Do not reach into place on both sides. Applying additional pres‐
an area where there are moving parts. Keep ar‐ sure can damage the front flap. There is a risk
ticles of clothing and hair away from moving of material damage. Open the front flap again
parts. and close it firmly. Avoid applying additional
pressure.
WARNING
The front flap has protruding parts on the in‐ Opening
side, for example locking hooks. There is a risk 1. Pull the lever, arrow 1.
of injury. When the front flap is open, watch out Front flap is unlocked.
for protruding parts and keep these areas clear.
WARNING
If the bonnet is not correctly locked, it can
come open during the journey and impair visi‐
bility. There is a risk of accident. Stop immedi‐
ately and close the bonnet correctly.
2. After releasing the lever, pull the lever again,

arrow 2.
The front flap can be opened.
305
MOBILITY Engine compartment
3. Watch out for any protruding parts on the

front flap.
Closing
Allow the front flap to drop from a height of ap‐

proximately 50 cm, approx. 20 in.
The front flap must engage on both sides.
306
Operating fluids MOBILITY
Operating fluids
Vehicle equipment The engine has knock control. This means that
different petrol grades can be used.
cific and optional equipment available for the Safety notes
ment and functions which are not installed in NOTE
The fuel system and engine can be damaged
by even small quantities of the wrong fuel and
by the wrong fuel additives. In addition, the cat‐
alytic converter will be permanently damaged.
There is a risk of material damage. For petrol
engines, do not refuel with or add the following:
▷ Leaded petrol.
Fuel quality ▷ Metallic additives, for example manganese
or iron.
General After filling with the wrong fuel, do not press
the start/stop button. Contact a Service Partner
Depending on the region, many filling stations
sell fuel that is adapted to winter or summer con‐
ditions. Fuel that is sold in winter helps with cold
starting, for example.
Petrol NOTE
Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel system and
General engine. There is a risk of material damage. Do
not refuel with fuel with a higher ethanol con‐
For optimal fuel consumption, the petrol should
tent than recommended. Do not refuel with fuel
be sulphur-free or have a low sulphur content.
containing methanol, for example M5 to M100.
Fuels labelled on the pump as containing metal
must not be used.
You can fill up with fuels with a maximum ethanol NOTE
content of 25 %, for example E10 or E25.
Fuel below the specified minimum quality can
adversely affect engine function or lead to en‐
gine damage. There is a risk of material dam‐
age. Do not refuel below the specified mini‐
mum quality.
Petrol grade
The engine is designed to run on petrol as per
DIN EN 228.
307
MOBILITY Operating fluids
Super, RON 95. Safety notes

M Performance model:
Super Plus with RON 98. NOTE
Use this fuel to achieve the rated performance Too little engine oil causes engine damage.
and consumption figures. There is a risk of material damage. Top up with
engine oil immediately.
Minimum grade
Unleaded petrol, RON 91.
NOTE
Too much engine oil can damage the engine or
the catalytic converter. There is a risk of mate‐
rial damage. Do not add too much engine oil. If
there is too much engine oil, have the engine
oil level corrected by a Service Partner of the
manufacturer or another qualified Service Part‐
ner or a specialist workshop.
Electronic oil measurement

Engine oil
General
General Electronic oil measurement uses two measuring
procedures:
Engine oil consumption depends on the driving
style and operating conditions. ▷ Monitoring.
Therefore check the engine oil level regularly ▷ Detailed measurement.
each time you fill up with fuel by taking a detailed When frequently making short trips or using a
measurement. dynamic driving style, for example taking corners
Engine oil consumption may increase due to the at high speed, perform a detailed measurement
following, for example: at regular intervals.
▷ Dynamic driving style.
Monitoring
▷ Running in the engine.
▷ Engine idling. Principle
▷ Use of engine oil grades rated as unsuitable. The engine oil level is monitored electronically
Different Check Control messages are shown on during the journey and can be shown on the
the Control Display, depending on the engine oil Control Display.
level. If the engine oil level is outside its permissible
operating range, a Check Control message is
shown.
A current measurement is available after approxi‐
mately 30 minutes of normal driving.
308
Displaying the engine oil level 3. "Engine oil level"

1. "CAR" 4. "Engine oil level measurement"
2. "Vehicle status" 5. "Start measurement"
3. "Engine oil level" The engine oil level is checked and shown on a
The engine oil level is displayed. scale.
System limits Adding engine oil

When frequently making short trips or using a
dynamic driving style, it may not be possible to General
measure the oil level. In this case, the measure‐ Do not top up engine oil unless a message is dis‐
ment for the last, sufficiently long journey is dis‐ played in the instrument cluster. The top-up
played. amount is specified in the message on the Con‐
trol Display.
Detailed measurement Only replenish with suitable types of engine oil.
Safely stop the vehicle and switch off drive-ready
Principle
state before topping up with engine oil.
The engine oil level is checked when the vehicle
Do not add too much engine oil.
is stationary and is shown on a scale.
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible Safety notes
operating range, a Check Control message is
shown.
WARNING
General Service products, for example oils, greases,
During measurement, the idle speed is increased coolants and fuels, can contain substances that
slightly. are harmful to health. There is a risk of injury or
even death. Please comply with the instructions
Operating requirements on the containers. Do not allow service prod‐
ucts to come into contact with clothing, skin or
▷ Vehicle is standing on level ground.
eyes. Do not pour service products into other
▷ Manual transmission: gear lever in neutral po‐ bottles. Keep service products out of the reach
sition, clutch and accelerator pedal not of children.
pressed.
▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever in se‐
lector lever position N or P and accelerator NOTE
pedal not pressed.
Too little engine oil causes engine damage.
▷ Drive-ready state is switched on by pressing There is a risk of material damage. Top up with
the start/stop button. engine oil immediately.
▷ Engine is running and is at operating temper‐
ature.
Carrying out a detailed measurement

1. "CAR"
2. "Vehicle status"
309
Safety notes
NOTE
Too much engine oil can damage the engine or NOTE
the catalytic converter. There is a risk of mate‐
Oil additives can damage the engine. There is a
rial damage. Do not add too much engine oil. If
risk of material damage. Do not use oil addi‐
there is too much engine oil, have the engine
tives.
oil level corrected by a Service Partner of the
manufacturer or another qualified Service Part‐
ner or a specialist workshop.
NOTE
Using the wrong engine oil can result in engine
Overview malfunctions and damage. There is a risk of
The oil filler neck is in the engine compartment. material damage. When selecting the engine
For further information: oil, make sure that it is the correct specification.
Overview, see page 304.

Suitable engine oil grades
Adding engine oil
Engine oils with the following oil specifications
1. Open bonnet. can be used.
Opening, see page 305.
Petrol engine
2. Turn the cap anticlockwise to open.
BMW Longlife-04.
BMW Longlife-12 FE.
BMW Longlife-17 FE+.
Alternative engine oil grades

If suitable engine oils are not available, up to 1 li‐
tre, 2 pints, of an engine oil with the following oil
specification can be used for topping up:
3. Add engine oil. Petrol engine
4. Tighten cap.
ACEA C2.
Engine oil grades for topping up ACEA C3.
General Viscosity classes

Engine oil quality is a critical factor in the service When selecting an engine oil, make sure that the
life of the engine. engine oil belongs to one of the following viscos‐
Only replenish with the types of engine oil that ity classes:
are listed.
Viscosity classes
Some engine oil grades may not be available in
all countries. SAE 0W-20.
SAE 5W-20.
310
Viscosity classes Coolant

SAE 0W-30.
General
SAE 5W-30.
Coolant is a mixture of water and an additive.
SAE 0W-40.
Not all commercially available additives are suita‐
SAE 5W-40. ble for the vehicle. Do not mix additives of differ‐
ent colours. Comply with the 50:50 mixing ratio
Viscosity classes with a high viscosity grade can of water to additive. Information regarding suita‐
increase fuel consumption. ble additives is available from a Service Partner of
the manufacturer or another qualified Service
Further information on suitable engine oil specifi‐ Partner or a specialist workshop.
cations and viscosity classes can be obtained
from a Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐
Safety notes
workshop.
WARNING
Oil change If the cooling system is opened when the en‐
gine is hot, coolant can escape and cause
NOTE scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only open the
cooling system when the engine has cooled
If the engine oil is not changed at the correct down.
time, engine wear may increase which could
cause engine damage. There is a risk of mate‐
rial damage. Do not exceed the service date in‐
dicated in the vehicle. WARNING
Additives are harmful to health and using the
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends wrong additives can damage the engine. There
having the engine oil changed by a Service Part‐ is a risk of injury and material damage. Do not
ner of the manufacturer or another qualified allow additives to come into contact with cloth‐
Service Partner or a specialist workshop. ing, skin or eyes, and do not swallow them.
Only use suitable additives.
Coolant level
General
Depending on the motorisation, there will be one
or two coolant expansion tank(s) in the engine
compartment. Check the coolant levels and top
up.
The coolant level is shown by the Max. mark in
the filler neck of the coolant tank.
Overview, see page 304.
311
To check the coolant level Washer fluid

1. Allow the engine to cool down.
2. Open bonnet. General
Opening, see page 305. All washer jets are supplied from one reservoir.
3. Turn cap on coolant tank slightly anticlock‐ Use a mixture of tap water and screenwash con‐
wise, then allow the pressure to escape. centrate for the windscreen washer system, if
4. Open cap on coolant tank. necessary with the addition of antifreeze.
5. The coolant level is correct if it is just below Recommended minimum fill level: 1 litre,
the Max. mark in the filler neck. 1.7 Imp. pints.
Safety notes
WARNING
Some antifreezes can contain toxic substances,
and are flammable. There is a risk of fire and in‐
jury. Please comply with the instructions on the
containers. Keep antifreezes away from sour‐
ces of combustion. Do not pour service prod‐
6. Tighten cap. ucts into other bottles. Keep service products
out of the reach of children.
Replenishing the coolant
1. Allow the engine to cool down.
2. Open bonnet. WARNING
Opening, see page 305. Washer fluid can ignite on contact with hot
parts of the engine and catch fire. There is a
3. Turn cap on coolant tank slightly anticlock‐
risk of injury or material damage. Only top up
wise, then allow the pressure to escape.
washer fluid when the engine has cooled down.
4. Open cap on coolant tank. Then fully close the cap of the washer fluid res‐
5. If necessary, slowly top up to the correct ervoir.
level; do not overfill.
6. Tighten cap.
7. Have the cause of coolant loss rectified as NOTE
soon as possible. Silicone additives mixed with the washer fluid
for their water beading effect on the windows
Disposal may damage the washer system. There is a risk
of material damage. Do not add silicone addi‐
When disposing of coolant and coolant
tives to the washer fluid.
additives, comply with the relevant envi‐
ronmental protection regulations.
312
NOTE
Mixing different screenwash concentrates or
antifreezes may damage the washer system.
There is a risk of material damage. Do not mix
different screenwash concentrates or antifree‐
zes. Please comply with the instructions and
mixing ratios stated on the containers.
Overview
The reservoir for the washer fluid is located in

the engine compartment.
Malfunction
Using undiluted cleaning fluid concentrate or an‐
tifreeze based on alcohol may result in false
readings at low temperatures below
-15 ℃/+5 ℉.
313
MOBILITY Maintenance
Maintenance
Vehicle equipment General
Information on service requirements can be
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ shown on the control display.
cific and optional equipment available for the For further information:
Service requirements, see page 159.
tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐ Service data in the vehicle key
cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ Information on maintenance requirements is
tions and systems. Please comply with the continuously stored in the vehicle key. The Serv‐
relevant laws and regulations when using the ice Partner can read out this data and suggest a
corresponding functions and systems. programme of maintenance for your vehicle.
It is therefore important to give the service advi‐
sor the vehicle key that was last used to drive the
BMW Maintenance System vehicle.
The maintenance system indicates what mainte‐

Periods out of use
nance measures are required and thereby assists
in maintaining the road safety and operational Periods when the vehicle is out of use with its
safety of the vehicle. battery disconnected are not taken into account.
The exact work required and the maintenance in‐ In such cases, have any time-dependent mainte‐
tervals may vary depending on the national-mar‐ nance procedures, for example those concerning
ket version. Labour, spare parts, operating mate‐ the brake fluid and, where applicable, the engine
rials and wear materials are charged separately. oil and microfilter/activated charcoal filter, upda‐
Additional information is available from a Service ted by a Service Partner of the manufacturer or
Partner of the manufacturer or another qualified another qualified Service Partner or a specialist
Service Partner or a specialist workshop. workshop.
Condition Based Service Service history

CBS
Maintenance and repairs
Have maintenance and repairs carried out by a
Principle Service Partner of the manufacturer or another
Sensors and special algorithms monitor the con‐ qualified Service Partner or a specialist work‐
ditions in which the vehicle is used. CBS uses shop.
this information to determine what maintenance
is required.
Entries
The system therefore allows the scope of the
The maintenance work carried out is entered in
maintenance work to be adapted to the individual
the maintenance records and the vehicle data.
usage profile.
314
Maintenance MOBILITY
As with a service booklet, the entries provide evi‐

dence of regular maintenance.
Socket for on-board
If an entry is made in the electronic service his‐
diagnosis OBD
tory of the vehicle, service-relevant data is saved
both in the vehicle and in the central IT systems General
of BMW AG, Munich. Devices connected to the OBD socket trigger
After a change of vehicle ownership, the new ve‐ the alarm system when the vehicle is locked. Re‐
hicle owner will be able to view the data entered move any devices connected to the OBD socket
in the electronic service history. Similarly, a Serv‐ before locking the vehicle.
fied Service Partner or a specialist workshop can Safety note
also view the data entered in the electronic serv‐
ice history.
NOTE
Objection Incorrect use of the OBD on-board diagnosis
socket can cause malfunctions in the vehicle.
The vehicle owner has the right to contact a
There is a risk of material damage. Only have
service and maintenance work involving the
qualified Service Partner or a specialist workshop
OBD on-board diagnosis socket carried out by
and request that no entries are made in the elec‐
a Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐
tronic service history and that no data relating to
his/her time as owner is subsequently stored in
workshop or other authorised persons. Only
the vehicle or transmitted to the vehicle manu‐
connect devices that have been tested and
facturer. In such cases, no entries will be made in
found to be safe for use with the OBD on-
the vehicle's electronic service history.
board diagnosis socket.
Displays
Services that have been entered can be dis‐ Position
played on the control display.
Service requirements, see page 159.
For Australia/New Zealand:

maintenance
No maintenance work other than normal mainte‐
nance is required to keep the emission levels of The OBD socket for checking emissions-rele‐
your vehicle within the design limits. vant components is located on the driver's side.
Engine warning light

▷ When the warning light flashes:
There is an engine malfunction that
could damage the catalytic converter.
315
MOBILITY Maintenance
Have the vehicle checked as soon as

possible.
▷ When the warning light illuminates:
This indicates a deterioration in exhaust
emissions. Have the vehicle checked as soon
as possible.
Vehicle recycling
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
handing the vehicle in at a take-back point nomi‐
nated by the manufacturer at the end of its life
cycle. The regulations concerning the returning
of end-of-life vehicles may vary from country to
country. Additional information is available from a
qualified Service Partner or a specialist work‐
shop.
316
Replacing parts MOBILITY
Replacing parts
Vehicle equipment fold in or switch on the wiper without a wiper
blade installed.
model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ NOTE
ment and functions which are not installed in Wipers which are folded away from the wind‐
your vehicle, for example on account of the op‐ screen can become trapped if the front flap is
tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐ opened. There is a risk of material damage. Be‐
cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ fore opening the bonnet, make sure that the
tions and systems. Please comply with the wipers are fitted with wiper blades and are in
relevant laws and regulations when using the contact with the windscreen.
Replacing
On-board tool kit 1. To replace the wiper blades, move the wipers
to the fold-out position.
Fold-out position of the wipers, see
page 140.
2. Lift the wipers away from the windscreen and
hold them securely.
The on-board tool kit is located on the right in

the luggage compartment, under a cover.
Unlock the cover on the right-hand side trim, ar‐
row 1, and open, arrow 2.
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out wiper

Wiper blades blade, arrow 2.
Safety notes
NOTE
The windscreen may sustain damage if a wiper
falls onto it without the wiper blade fitted. There
is a risk of material damage. Hold the wiper
firmly when changing the wiper blade. Do not
317
MOBILITY Replacing parts
4. Insert the new wiper blade and press into the Headlight glass
holder until it engages.
During cool or humid weather, the headlight
5. Fold in the wipers. glass can mist over on the inside. When driving
with the lights switched on, the condensation
disappears after a short time. There is no need to
Bulbs and lights replace the headlight glass.
If moisture increasingly forms, for example if
General there are water droplets in the lamp despite the
Lights and bulbs are an important aspect of driv‐ headlights being switched on, have the head‐
ing safety. lights checked.
All headlights and other lights use LED or laser
technology.
Vehicle battery
Some equipment versions have light-emitting di‐
odes behind a cover as a light source. These
light-emitting diodes are similar to conventional General
lasers and are classified by legislation as Class 1 The battery is maintenance-free.
light-emitting diodes. More information regarding the battery can be
In the case of a defect, the manufacturer of the obtained from a Service Partner of the manufac‐
vehicle recommends having respective work car‐ turer or another qualified Service Partner or a
ried out by a Service Partner of the manufacturer specialist workshop.
or another qualified Service Partner or a special‐
ist workshop. Safety notes
Safety notes DANGER

Touching live components can result in an
WARNING electric shock. There is a risk of injury or even
Concentrated laser light can cause irritation or death. Do not touch any components that
lasting damage to the retina of the eye. There could be live.
is a risk of injury. The manufacturer of the vehi‐
cle recommends having work on the lighting
system, including bulb exchange, performed by WARNING
a Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐
Vehicle batteries that are classified as unsuita‐
ble may damage systems or result in functions
workshop.
no longer being carried out. There is a risk of
injury or material damage. Only use vehicle bat‐
teries that have been classified as suitable by
WARNING the vehicle manufacturer.
Intense brightness can irritate or harm the ret‐
ina of the eye. There is a risk of injury. Do not
look directly into the headlights or other light Registering the battery with the
sources. Do not remove covers from LEDs. vehicle
having a Service Partner of the manufacturer or
318
another qualified Service Partner or an author‐ Replacing the battery

ised workshop register the vehicle battery with
the vehicle after the battery has been replaced. General
Once the battery has been registered again, all
comfort functions will be available without re‐
only having the vehicle battery replaced by a
striction and any Check Control messages relat‐
ing to the comfort functions will no longer be dis‐
qualified Service Partner or an authorised work‐
played.
shop. If the battery is not replaced correctly, the
vehicle may not recognise it properly and perfect
Hazard symbols functioning cannot be guaranteed.
The following hazard symbols can be found on
the vehicle battery: Notes on removal
Symbol Meaning Observe the following notes on removing the ve‐
hicle battery:
No smoking, no naked flames,
▷ Park the vehicle and switch off consumers.
no sparks.
▷ First disconnect the power at the negative
Wear protective goggles. terminal. Then disconnect the power at the
positive terminal.
Keep away from children. Notes on installation

Observe the following notes on installing the ve‐
hicle battery:
Risk of acid burns: wear gloves,
▷ Remove any foreign bodies from the battery
do not tilt the battery.
holder.
Rinse any splashes of acid with ▷ Only install the battery in the intended posi‐
water immediately. If acid comes tion in the vehicle.
into contact with eyes or is swal‐ ▷ Keep the battery and vehicle connection con‐
lowed, seek medical attention tacts clean.
immediately. ▷ First connect the power at the positive termi‐
No direct sunlight, no frost. nal. Then connect the power at the negative
terminal.
▷ Use the connections, connectors and covers
Follow the user manual. provided.
▷ Connect a hose to the gas outlet opening if
necessary.
Explosive gas mixture. Do not
seal any openings on the bat‐
tery.
Initial operation
The battery is operational. No special precau‐
tions are required for start-up.
319
MOBILITY Replacing parts
Charging the battery Power failure

Following an electrical power failure, some
General equipment will have to be reinitialised or individ‐
Ensure the battery is sufficiently charged to ual settings will need to be updated, for example:
guarantee the entire lifetime of the battery. ▷ With memory function: save positions again.
Charge the battery under the following situations: ▷ Time: update.
▷ If the inspection glass on the top of the bat‐ ▷ Date: update.
tery is black.
▷ If there is insufficient starting power. Storing the battery
The following conditions can have a negative ef‐ Observe the following information on storing ve‐
fect on battery performance: hicle batteries:
▷ Frequently driving short distances. ▷ Store the battery in a cool and dry place.
▷ If the vehicle is not used for a period of one ▷ Protect the battery from direct sunlight and
month or longer. frost.
▷ Only clean the battery with a damp, anti-static
Safety note cloth.
▷ Store the battery upright and secure it
NOTE against falling over.
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery may ▷ Install the oldest batteries first.
operate with high voltages and high currents ▷ Do not remove the protective cap from the
which can overload or damage the 12-volt on- contacts.
board network. There is a risk of material dam‐
▷ Charge or install the battery by the date on
age. Only connect battery chargers for the ve‐
the battery label at the latest. Once fully
hicle battery to the jump-starting connections
charged, the battery will work for another
in the engine compartment.
10 months.
Battery charger Disposing of the old battery

Battery chargers developed especially for the ve‐ Dispose of old batteries at a Service
hicle and suitable for the on-board network can Partner of the manufacturer or another
be obtained from a Service Partner of the manu‐ qualified Service Partner or a specialist
facturer or another qualified Service Partner or a workshop or hand them in to an authorised col‐
specialist workshop. lecting point.
Batteries filled with acid should be transported
Charging the battery upright. Protect batteries against falling over
Only charge the battery via the jump-starting when in transit.
connections in the engine compartment and with
the engine switched off.
Warranty
See the vehicle purchase contract for informa‐
Jump-starting connections, see page 327. tion on the battery warranty.
320
Fuses
General
The fuses are located at different positions in the
vehicle.
Safety note
Unlock the cover on the right-hand side trim, ar‐
WARNING
row 1, and open, arrow 2.
Incorrect or repaired fuses can overload electri‐
cal cables and components. There is a risk of The fuse box may be located behind sound insu‐
fire. Do not repair blown fuses or replace them lation.
with fuses with a different colour or amp rating. Information on the fuse types and locations, as
well as the positions of any other fuse boxes, is
available on the Internet: www.bmw.com/fuse‐
In the interior card.
The fuses are located in the interior, behind a Where applicable, information on the fuse types
cover in the front seat passenger footwell. and locations is also found on a separate sheet in
the fuse box.
Other fuse boxes

There are other fuse boxes in the vehicle. In the
event of a fault, contact a Service Partner of the
Replacing fuses
Undo fastenings, arrow, and open cover. The vehicle manufacturer recommends having
fuses changed by a Service Partner of the manu‐
The fuse box is located at the front right.
facturer or another qualified Service Partner or a
Inside the luggage compartment
The fuses are located behind a cover on the
right-hand side in the luggage compartment.
321
MOBILITY Help in case of a breakdown
Help in case of a breakdown

Vehicle equipment To remove, release the mounts.

cific and optional equipment available for the First-aid kit
General
tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐ Some items in the kit have a limited life.
cation. This also applies to safety-relevant func‐ Check the use-by dates of the contents regularly
tions and systems. Please comply with the and replace any items that have expired in good
relevant laws and regulations when using the time.
Storage
The first-aid kit is located in the net on the left
Hazard warning lights side of the boot.
BMW Emergency Service

Principle
BMW Group breakdown assistance can be con‐
tacted if you require help in the event of a break‐
down.
The button is located in the centre console. General

In the case of a breakdown, data on the vehicle
condition can be transferred to the BMW break‐
Warning triangle down assistance. It is possible that malfunctions
can be remedied directly.
There are various ways of contacting BMW
breakdown assistance.
▷ Via a Check Control message.
Supplementary text messages, see
page 153.
▷ Calling with a mobile phone.
▷ Via the BMW Connected app.
Depending on the national-market version and
The warning triangle is located inside the boot vehicle type, a different roadside assistance pro‐
lid.
322
Help in case of a breakdown MOBILITY
vider can be assigned via the ConnectedDrive

customer portal if necessary.
BMW Accident Assistance
Operating requirements Principle

▷ Activated ConnectedDrive contract, equip‐ BMW Group Accident Assistance can be contac‐
ment with intelligent emergency call or BMW ted if help is required in the event of an accident.
ConnectedDrive services.
▷ Mobile reception.
General
▷ Standby state is switched on. If the vehicle sensors detect a minor to moder‐
ately severe accident, which did not trigger any
airbags, a Check Control message is displayed in
Starting manually the instrument cluster. A corresponding text
When equipped with Teleservices, support is message also appears on the Control Display.
provided first through Teleservice Diagnosis and
When BMW Accident Assistance is activated,
then by Teleservice Assistance if required.
data on the vehicle condition is transferred to
1. "APPS" BMW.
2. "Installed apps" Depending on the national-market version and
3. "BMW Assistance" vehicle type, a different accident assistance pro‐
vider can be assigned via the ConnectedDrive
4. If necessary, "BMW Roadside Assistance" customer portal if necessary.
A voice connection is established.
Teleservice Diagnosis ▷ Activated ConnectedDrive contract, equip‐
Teleservice Diagnosis enables the detailed vehi‐ ment with intelligent emergency call or BMW
cle data required for diagnosis to be transferred ConnectedDrive services.
via mobile communications. This data is transfer‐ ▷ Mobile reception.
red automatically. It may be necessary to ap‐
prove this on the Control Display. ▷ Standby state is switched on.
Teleservice Assistance Starting BMW Accident

Teleservice Assistance is a country-specific fea‐
Assistance
ture that allows BMW breakdown assistance to
carry out a more in-depth diagnosis of the vehi‐ If an accident is detected
cle via mobile communications. automatically
Teleservice Assistance can be started after a re‐ A text message prompting the driver to call
quest by BMW breakdown assistance. BMW Accident Assistance is shown on the Con‐
trol Display.
1. Park the vehicle safely.
The connection can be established directly:
"Call BMW Accident Assistance"
3. Control Display is switched on.
The Check Control message for BMW Accident
4. Confirm Teleservice Assistance. Assistance can also be called up from the saved
Check Control messages for a certain length of
time.
323
For further information: Overview

Check Control, see page 152.
Starting manually
BMW Accident Assistance can also be contac‐
ted independently of the automatic accident de‐
tection function.
1. "APPS"
2. "Installed apps"
3. "BMW Assistance" SOS button.
4. "BMW Accident Assistance"
Follow the displays on the Control Display. A
voice connection is established. Operating requirements
▷ Emergency call system is functional.
Emergency call
▷ If the vehicle is equipped with intelligent
emergency call: the SIM card integrated in
Statutory emergency call the vehicle is activated.
Principle Automatic triggering

The system can be used to trigger an emer‐ In certain circumstances, for example deploy‐
gency call automatically or manually in emer‐ ment of the airbags, an emergency call may be
gency situations. placed automatically immediately after an acci‐
dent of corresponding severity. An automatic
General emergency call is not affected by pressing the
Press the SOS button in an emergency only. SOS button.
The emergency call establishes a connection to
a public emergency call number. Manual triggering
This depends on factors such as the specific 1. Tap on cover flap.
mobile telephone network and national regula‐ 2. Press and hold the SOS button until the LED
tions. in the button area is illuminated green.
The emergency call is placed using the SIM card ▷ The LED is illuminated green when the emer‐
integrated in the vehicle and cannot be switched gency call has been activated.
off. If a cancellation request is displayed on the
For technical reasons, it might not be possible to Control Display, the emergency call can be
make an emergency call in highly adverse condi‐ cancelled.
tions. If the situation permits, wait in the vehicle un‐
til voice contact has been established.
▷ The LED flashes green when the connection
to the emergency number has been estab‐
lished.
324
In the case of an emergency call, data is sent mobile telephone network and national regula‐
to the public rescue coordination centre in or‐ tions.
der to decide what rescue measures are re‐ For technical reasons, it might not be possible to
quired. The data may include, for example, make an emergency call in highly adverse condi‐
the current position of the vehicle, if this can tions.
be determined.
For information on data transfer and storage: Overview
Statutory emergency call system, see
page 15.
Even if the vehicle occupants can no longer
hear the rescue coordination centre through
the loudspeakers, the rescue coordination
centre may still be able to hear the vehicle
occupants speak.
The rescue coordination centre ends the emer‐
gency call.
SOS button.
Malfunction
The emergency call function may be impaired.
The LED near the emergency call button illumi‐ Operating requirements
nates for approx. 30 seconds. A Check Control ▷ Standby state is switched on.
message is shown. ▷ Emergency call system is functional.
Have the system checked by a Service Partner ▷ If the vehicle is equipped with intelligent
of the manufacturer or another qualified Service emergency call: the SIM card integrated in
Partner or a specialist workshop. the vehicle is activated.
Intelligent emergency call Automatic triggering

In certain circumstances, for example deploy‐
Principle ment of the airbags, an emergency call may be
The system can be used to trigger an emer‐ placed automatically immediately after an acci‐
gency call automatically or manually in emer‐ dent of corresponding severity. An automatic
gency situations. emergency call is not affected by pressing the
SOS button.
General
Press the SOS button in an emergency only. Manual triggering
The intelligent emergency call system estab‐ 1. Tap on cover flap.
lishes a connection with the BMW emergency 2. Press and hold the SOS button until the LED
call centre. in the button area is illuminated green.
Even if no emergency call through BMW is pos‐ ▷ The LED is illuminated green when the emer‐
sible, in some cases an emergency call may still gency call has been activated.
be established to a public emergency call num‐ If a cancellation request is displayed on the
ber. This depends on factors such as the specific Control Display, the emergency call can be
cancelled.
325
If the situation permits, wait in the vehicle un‐ Safety note

til voice contact has been established.
▷ The LED flashes green when the connection
WARNING
to the emergency number has been estab‐
lished. Incorrect use of the fire extinguisher can cause
injury. There is a risk of injury. Observe the in‐
When an emergency call is made via BMW,
formation below when using the fire extin‐
data is sent to the emergency call centre in
guisher:
order to decide what rescue measures are re‐
quired, e.g. the current position of the vehicle, ▷ Do not inhale the extinguishing agent. If
if this can be determined. the extinguishing agent is inhaled, move
the casualty out into the fresh air. If the
If questions asked by the emergency call
casualty experiences breathing difficulties,
centre remain unanswered, rescue measures
contact a doctor immediately.
are implemented automatically.
▷ Do not allow the extinguishing agent to
Even if the vehicle occupants can no longer
come into contact with the skin. Pro‐
hear the emergency call centre through the
longed contact with the extinguishing
loudspeakers, the emergency call centre may
agent can cause the skin to dry out.
still be able to hear the vehicle occupants
speak. ▷ Do not allow the extinguishing agent to
come into contact with the eyes. In the
The emergency call centre ends the emergency
event of contact with the eyes, rinse them
call.
immediately with plenty of water. In case
of prolonged discomfort, contact a doctor.
Fire extinguisher
Removing the fire extinguisher
Principle Open the buckles on the retaining strap.
The fire extinguisher can be used to put out vehi‐
cle fires. Using the fire extinguisher
To use the fire extinguisher, follow the manufac‐
General turer's instructions on the fire extinguisher and
Depending on the vehicle's equipment and the the information supplied with it.
country variant, the vehicle may have a fire extin‐
guisher. Stowing the fire extinguisher
1. Insert the fire extinguisher into the holder.
Overview 2. Hook in and close the buckles.
The fire extinguisher is located at the front of the
front passenger seat. Maintenance and refilling
Have the fire extinguisher checked every 2 years
by a Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐
workshop.
Take note of the next maintenance date for the
fire extinguisher.
326
Replace the fire extinguisher after use or have it Jump-starting connections

refilled.
The jump-starting connection in the engine
compartment serves as the battery positive ter‐
minal.
Starting assistance
A special connection on the body serves as the
negative battery terminal in the engine compart‐
General ment.
If the vehicle battery is discharged, the engine For further information:
can be started from another vehicle's battery us‐
Overview of the engine compartment, see
ing two jump leads. Only use jump leads with
page 304.
fully insulated terminal clamps.
Open the lid of the positive battery terminal.
Safety notes
Connecting the cables
Before starting, switch off all unnecessary power
DANGER
consumers, for example the radio, on both vehi‐
Touching live components can result in an cles.
electric shock. There is a risk of injury or even
death. Do not touch any components that 1. Open the cover of the jump-starting connec‐
could be live. tion.
2. Connect a terminal clamp on the positive/+
jump lead to the positive terminal of the bat‐
WARNING tery or the corresponding jump-starting con‐
nection on the other vehicle.
Connecting the jump leads in the wrong se‐
quence can cause sparks. There is a risk of in‐ 3. Connect the second terminal clamp to the
jury. Please comply with the correct sequence battery's positive terminal or to the corre‐
when connecting. sponding jump-starting connection on the
vehicle being started.
4. Connect a terminal clamp on the negative/–
NOTE jump lead to the negative terminal of the bat‐
tery or the corresponding engine or body
Contact between the bodywork of the two ve‐
earth connection on the other vehicle.
hicles can result in a short circuit during starting
assistance. There is a risk of material damage. 5. Connect the second terminal clamp to the
Make sure there is no contact between the negative terminal of the battery or to a corre‐
bodywork. sponding engine or body earth connection on
the vehicle being started.
Preparations
1. Check whether the battery in the other vehi‐
cle shows 12 volts. Information about the
voltage is provided on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the other vehicle.
3. Switch off any power consumers in both ve‐
hicles.
327
Starting the engine Towing or pushing the vehicle

Never use spray products to start the engine. A broken-down vehicle can be towed or pushed.
1. Start the engine of the other vehicle and al‐ Observe the following notes:
low it to run for a few minutes at a slightly ▷ Make sure that the standby state is switched
higher idle speed. on, otherwise low-beam headlights, rear
2. Start the engine of the vehicle to be started in lights, turn indicators and wipers would not
the usual way. be available.
If an initial attempt to start the engine fails, ▷ Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle
wait a few minutes before trying again to al‐ raised, otherwise the steering can turn.
low the discharged battery to recharge. ▷ When the engine is not running, there is no
3. Allow both engines to run for a few minutes. power assistance. The steering and brakes
will require extra effort to operate.
4. Disconnect the jump leads in reverse order to
connection. ▷ Greater steering wheel movements are nec‐
essary.
Check the battery and have it recharged if nec‐
essary. ▷ The towing vehicle must not be lighter than
the towed vehicle, otherwise it may be unable
to keep the towed vehicle reliably under con‐
Tow-starting/towing away trol.
▷ Do not exceed a towing speed of 50 km/h,
30 mph.
Safety note
▷ Do not exceed a towing distance of 50 km,
30 miles.
WARNING
Rolling or pushing the vehicle, see page 142.
Towing truck
towing.
Manual transmission
Safety notes
NOTE
Have your vehicle transported by a towing truck
The vehicle may be damaged when raising and
with a hoisting frame, or hoisted onto a load area.
securing it.
There is a risk of material damage.
▷ Raise the vehicle with suitable equipment.
▷ Do not raise or secure the vehicle by its
towing eye, body parts or chassis parts.
328
Steptronic transmission: Towing other vehicles

transporting the vehicle
General
General Switch on the hazard warning lights in line with
Do not have the vehicle towed. local regulations.
If the electrical system of the vehicle being
Safety notes towed has failed, the vehicle must be made iden‐
tifiable to other road users, for instance by plac‐
ing a sign or the warning triangle in the rear win‐
NOTE
dow.
If the vehicle is towed with one axle raised, the
With Safe Share function: to remove a broken-
vehicle can be damaged. There is a risk of ma‐
down vehicle from a dangerous area, it can be
terial damage. Only have the vehicle transpor‐
towed over a short distance at a maximum speed
ted on a truck bed.
of 10 km/h, approx. 6 mph.
Safety notes
NOTE
The vehicle may be damaged when raising and
WARNING
securing it.
If the gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle
There is a risk of material damage.
is less than that of the vehicle being towed, the
▷ Raise the vehicle with suitable equipment. towing eye may be torn off or it may not be
▷ Do not raise or secure the vehicle by its possible to control the vehicle. There is a risk of
towing eye, body parts or chassis parts. accident. Make sure that the gross vehicle
weight of the towing vehicle is greater than the
weight of the vehicle being towed.
Pushing the vehicle
To remove a broken-down vehicle from danger,
it can be pushed for a short distance.
NOTE
If the tow bar or the towing rope is not attached
Rolling or pushing the vehicle, see page 143. correctly, other vehicle parts can be damaged.
There is a risk of material damage. Attach the
Towing truck tow bar or towing rope to the towing eye cor‐
rectly.
Tow bar
The towing eyes of both vehicles should be on
the same side.
If it is impossible to avoid attaching the tow bar at
an angle, note the following:
▷ Clearance may be limited when cornering.
Only have the vehicle transported on a truck bed. ▷ Lateral forces will be generated if the tow bar
is installed at an angle.
329
Towing rope On-board tool kit, see page 317.

Note the following if using a towing rope:
Safety note
▷ Use nylon ropes or straps that will allow the
vehicle to be towed smoothly.
▷ Fasten the towing rope so it is not twisted. NOTE
▷ Check the towing eye and towing rope fas‐ If the towing eye is not used as intended, the
tening regularly. vehicle or towing eye may be damaged. There
is a risk of material damage. Observe the notes
▷ Do not exceed a towing speed of 50 km/h,
on using the towing eye.
30 mph.
▷ Do not exceed a towing distance of 5 km,
3 miles. Thread for towing eye
▷ Ensure that the towing rope is taut when the
towing vehicle drives off.
Towing eye
General
Press the marking on the edge of the cover to

push it out.
Tow-starting
Do not attempt to tow-start the vehicle.
Always keep the screw-on towing eye in the ve‐ If necessary, start the engine using the starting
hicle. aid.
The towing eye can be screwed in at the front or Have the cause of the starting problems rectified
rear of the vehicle. by a Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐
The towing eye is located in the toolkit.
workshop.
▷ Only use the towing eye supplied with the ve‐
hicle and make sure that it is screwed in fully
and is tight. Starting assistance, see page 327.
▷ Only use the towing eye for towing on paved
roads.
▷ Avoid transverse loads on the towing eye, for
example do not raise the vehicle by the tow‐
ing eye.
▷ Check the towing eye fastening regularly.
330
General care MOBILITY
General care
Vehicle equipment Distances and temperature
▷ Maximum temperature: 60 ℃/140 ℉.
This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ ▷ Minimum distance to sensors, cameras,
cific and optional equipment available for the seals: 30 cm, 12 in.
ment and functions which are not installed in Automatic car washes
Safety notes
relevant laws and regulations when using the NOTE
corresponding functions and systems. If high-pressure washers are used, water may
penetrate the area around the windows. There
is a risk of material damage. Do not drive in
Washing the vehicle high-pressure washers.
General
Regularly remove foreign bodies, for example NOTE
leaves, from the area below the windscreen with The vehicle can be damaged if automatic
the bonnet raised. washing bays or car washes are used incor‐
Wash the vehicle frequently, especially in winter. rectly. There is a risk of material damage. Ob‐
Heavy soiling and road salt can cause damage to serve the following notes:
the vehicle. ▷ Textile car washes or systems using soft
brushes are preferable, to avoid damage
Steam-jet cleaners and high- to the paintwork.
pressure cleaners ▷ Do not drive into automatic car washes
washing or washing bays with guide rails
Safety note higher than 10 cm, 4 in, to avoid damage
to the body.
NOTE ▷ Note the maximum tyre width of the guide

rail to avoid damage to tyres and rims.
When cleaning with high-pressure cleaners, ex‐
cessive pressure or excessive temperatures ▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors to avoid dam‐
can damage various components. There is a aging them.
risk of material damage. Maintain a sufficient ▷ Deactivate the wipers and the rain sensor
distance and do not spray for an extended pe‐ (if fitted) to avoid damage to the wiper sys‐
riod of time. Comply with the instructions for tem.
the high-pressure cleaner.
331
MOBILITY General care
▷ Do not treat the convertible top with wax. After washing the vehicle
Ensure that a program without wax or a
After the vehicle has been washed, briefly apply
special convertible program is available, to
the brakes to dry them, otherwise braking effec‐
avoid damage to the convertible top.
tiveness may be temporarily reduced. The heat
generated by braking dries the brake discs and
Entering a car wash with a brake pads and protects them against corrosion.
Steptronic transmission Completely remove residues on the windscreens
to avoid affecting visibility due to smearing and to
Safety note reduce wiping noise and wiper blade wear.
NOTE
Vehicle care
gaged when standby state is switched off.
There is a risk of material damage. Do not Care products
switch off standby state in car washes.
General
BMW recommends using care and cleaning
General products from BMW. Suitable care products are
The vehicle must be able to roll freely whilst in available from a Service Partner of the manufac‐
the car wash. turer or another qualified Service Partner or a
Some car washes require you to get out of the specialist workshop.
vehicle. It is not possible to lock the vehicle from
the outside in selector lever position N. If an at‐ Safety note
tempt is made to lock the vehicle, a signal
sounds. WARNING
For further information: Cleaning agents can contain hazardous sub‐
Rolling or pushing the vehicle, see page 143. stances or constitute a health risk. There is a
risk of injury. When cleaning the interior, open
Exiting from a car wash the doors or windows. Use only products that
Make sure that the vehicle key is in the vehicle. are intended for cleaning the vehicle's interior.
Observe the notes on the packaging.
Switch on drive-ready state.
Drive-ready state, see page 44. Vehicle paintwork
Headlights General
Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not use Regular care promotes driving safety and pre‐
abrasive or corrosive cleaning agents. serves your vehicle's value. Environmental ef‐
fects in areas with high air pollution or natural
Soak impurities such as insect residues with
contaminants, for example tree resin or pollen,
shampoo and wash off with water.
may affect the vehicle paintwork. Take such fac‐
Remove ice with a de-icer spray; do not use an tors into consideration when deciding on the fre‐
ice scraper. quency and scope of vehicle care measures.
332
Immediately remove aggressive substances, for Safety note

example spilled fuel, oil, grease or bird droppings
to prevent paintwork damage and discolouration.
NOTE
Matt paintwork Stain removers, paint thinners, solvents, petrol
and similar substances may damage the
Only use cleaning and care products that are
convertible top or the rubber. There is a risk of
suitable for vehicles with matt paintwork.
material damage. Only use suitable cleaners,
for example special convertible top cleaners, to
Care of the convertible top remove stains from the convertible top.
General
The appearance and service life of the Cleaning the convertible top
convertible top depend on proper care and oper‐ For stubborn dirt, and particularly with light-col‐
ation. oured convertible tops, use a special convertible
Observe the following notes: top cleaning agent.
▷ Use a microfibre cloth to clean the roof lining. For cleaning, proceed as follows:
Lightly moisten the cloth with water, if neces‐
1. Spray the convertible top cleaner onto the
sary.
convertible top. Observe the manufacturer's
▷ Do not soak the roof lining. instructions.
▷ To avoid water stains, spots of mould and 2. Work the convertible top cleaner into a lather
chafe marks, do not keep the convertible top with a wet sponge, using circular movements.
enclosed in its compartment for an extended
3. Rinse the vehicle with plenty of water or finish
period of time. Do not fold up the convertible
by washing the vehicle in a car wash. Ob‐
top or stow it in its compartment when it is
serve notes on car washes.
wet or frozen.
After three to five washes, treat the convertible
▷ If any water stains appear on the roof lining,
top with impregnating agent.
remove them using a microfibre cloth and an
interior cleaner. Suitable cleaning and care products are available
from a Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐
▷ For long periods of storage in enclosed
rooms, ensure adequate ventilation.
workshop.
▷ Park the vehicle in the shade to protect
against intensive solar radiation, so that paint, Leather care
rubber and textiles fibres are not affected.
Remove dust from the leather at regular intervals
▷ Remove bird droppings immediately, other‐ with a cloth or vacuum cleaner.
wise the corrosive effect attacks the
Dust and road dirt will otherwise become worked
convertible top and damages the rubber
into pores and folds, resulting in considerable
seals.
abrasion and causing the leather surface to be‐
▷ Remove dried-on tree resin or bird droppings come prematurely brittle.
from the roof with a special tree resin re‐
In order to protect against discolouration, for ex‐
mover and a soft brush.
ample from clothing, clean and care for the
leather approximately every two months.
333
MOBILITY General care
Clean light-coloured leather more frequently as it Chrome surfaces

has the tendency to soil faster. Carefully clean chrome-like surfaces with plenty
Use leather cleaner, otherwise dirt and grease of water and add shampoo if need be, particularly
will attack the protective coating of the leather. if they have been exposed to road salt.
Care of upholstery fabrics Rubber parts

The surfaces of rubber parts can be contamina‐
General ted or lose their shine due to environmental influ‐
Regularly clean the upholstery with a vacuum ences. Only use water and suitable care prod‐
cleaner. ucts for cleaning.
In the event of heavy soiling, for example stains Rubber parts subjected to high wear and tear
caused by drinks, use a soft sponge or a lint-free should be treated regularly with rubber care
microfibre cloth with suitable interior cleaning products. Do not use silicone-based care prod‐
agents. ucts for treating rubber seals, otherwise these
Clean the upholstery up to the seams using wide could be damaged and become a source of
wiping actions. Avoid rubbing vigorously. noise.
Safety note Fine wood parts

Clean fine wood trims and fine wood parts with a
damp cloth only. Then dry them with a soft cloth.
NOTE
Open Velcro fasteners on articles of clothing Kenaf
can damage the seat covers. There is a risk of
Treat parts made from kenaf fibres with a suita‐
material damage. Make sure that any Velcro
ble care product only.
fasteners on your clothing are closed.
Plastic parts
Care of special parts
NOTE
Light alloy wheels Cleaning agents containing alcohol or solvents,
When cleaning the wheels while they are instal‐ such as nitro thinners, cold cleaners, fuel or
led on the vehicle, only use neutral rim cleaner similar can damage plastic parts. There is a risk
with a pH value between 5 and 9. Do not use of material damage. Clean with a microfibre
abrasive cleaners or steam cleaners above cloth. Lightly moisten the cloth with water, if
60 ℃/140 ℉. Observe the manufacturer's in‐ necessary.
structions.
Corrosive, acidic or alkaline cleaners may destroy Clean with a microfibre cloth.
the protective coatings of adjacent parts, for ex‐ Lightly moisten the cloth with water if necessary.
ample brake discs. Do not soak the headliner.
After cleaning, briefly apply the brakes to dry
them. The heat generated by braking dries the
brake discs and brake pads and protects them
against corrosion.
334
Seat belts Sensors and camera lenses

Clean sensors or camera lenses using a cloth
WARNING moistened with a small amount of glass cleaner.
Chemical cleaners can cause irreparable dam‐
age to the fabric of the seat belts. The protec‐
Displays, screens and protective
tive function of the seat belts will be lost. There glass of the Head-Up Display
is a risk of injury or even death. Only use a mild
soap and water solution for cleaning the seat NOTE
belts.
Chemical cleaners, moisture or fluids of all
kinds can damage the surface of displays and
Dirt on the belt straps can interfere with the ac‐
screens. There is a risk of material damage.
tion of the reel and is a safety hazard.
Clean with a clean, anti-static microfibre cloth.
Only clean the belt straps with a mild soap solu‐
tion while still fitted to the vehicle.
Do not allow seat belts to retract until they are NOTE
dry.
Incorrect cleaning can damage the surfaces of
displays. There is a risk of material damage.
Carpets and foot mats Avoid applying excessive pressure and do not
use abrasive materials.
WARNING
Clean with a clean, anti-static microfibre cloth.
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or block a pedal that has been Clean the protective glass of the Head-Up Dis‐
pressed. There is a risk of accident. Ensure that play with a microfibre cloth and commercially
items in the vehicle are stowed securely and available dishwashing liquid.
cannot get into the driver's footwell. Only use
floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and Laying up the vehicle
can be securely fastened to the floor. Do not Special measures need to be taken if putting the
use loose floor mats, and do not place several vehicle out of use for longer than three months.
floor mats on top of one another. Make sure Additional information is available from a Service
that there is sufficient space for the pedals. En‐ Partner of the manufacturer or another qualified
sure that floor mats are securely reattached af‐ Service Partner or a specialist workshop.
ter removal, for example for cleaning.
Floor mats can be removed from the vehicle to

enable the interior to be cleaned more thor‐
oughly.
In the event of heavy soiling, clean floor carpets
using a microfibre cloth and water or textile
cleaner. Rub back and forth in the direction of
travel to prevent matting.
335
REFERENCE Technical data
Technical data
General
The technical data and specifications in the tion plates on the vehicle or can be requested
Owner's Handbook are reference figures. Data from a Service Partner of the manufacturer or an‐
relating to a specific vehicle can deviate from other qualified Service Partner or a specialist
this, for example, due to selected optional equip‐ workshop.
ment, national-market versions or country-spe‐ The information in the vehicle documents always
cific measurement methods. Detailed values can takes precedence over the information in the
be found in the permit documents, on informa‐ Owner's Handbook.
Dimensions
Dimensions can vary depending on the model spoiler. The heights can deviate, for example,
version, equipment or country-specific measure‐ due to selected optional equipment, tyres, loads
ment method. and suspension design.
The heights specified do not take into account
add-on parts such as a roof aerial, roof rails or
BMW Z4 Roadster
Width with mirrors mm (in) 2024 (79.7)
Width without mirrors mm (in) 1864 (73.4)
Height mm (in) 1304 (51.3)
Length mm (in) 4324 (170.2)
Wheelbase mm (in) 2470 (97.2)
Smallest turning circle dia. m (ft) 11.0 (36.1)
336
Technical data REFERENCE
Weights
Z4 sDrive20i
Kerb weight ready for road, with 75 kg, 165 lb, load,
tank 90 % full, no optional extras
Manual transmission kg (lb) 1495 (3296)
Steptronic transmission kg (lb) 1505 (3318)
Permitted gross weight
Payload
Front axle load limit
Rear axle load limit
Z4 sDrive30i
Kerb weight ready for road, with 75 kg, 165 lb, load, kg (lb) 1505 (3318)
Permitted gross weight kg (lb) 1740 (3836)
Payload kg (lb) 310 (683)
Front axle load limit kg (lb) 830 (1830)
Rear axle load limit kg (lb) 935 (2061)
337
REFERENCE Technical data
Z4 M40i powered by BMW M — a)
a) The information is only valid for type code HF51 or HF52.

The type code can be found in the vehicle identification number, in the fourth to seventh characters
from the left.
Z4 M40i powered by BMW M — b)
b) The information is only valid for type code HF91 or HF92.

The type code can be found in the vehicle identification number, in the fourth to seventh characters
from the left.
Filling capacities
BMW Z4 Roadster
Fuel tank, approximately. Litres (gal) 52.0 (11.4)
Observe the additional information on fuel qual‐

ity, see page 307.
338
Seats for child restraint systems REFERENCE
Seats for child restraint systems

Vehicle equipment on the seats in question in accordance with the
ECE-R 16 and ECE-R 129 standard.
cific and optional equipment available for the Left-hand drive vehicles:
model series. It may therefore describe equip‐ Suitability of child restraint
ment and functions which are not installed in systems for each vehicle seat
your vehicle, for example on account of the op‐ If the vehicle is equipped with i-Size, the value af‐
tional equipment selected or the country specifi‐ ter the / applies to the vehicle.
Usability as per ECE-R 16

General
For the manufacturers of child seats: information
about which child restraint systems can be used
Seat position 1 3 - Airbag ON 3 -a, b)

Airbag OFF
Seat position suitable for universal fas‐ No No yes/yes

tening with a belt.
i-Size seat position. No No no/yes
Seat position suitable for side mount‐ No No no/no

ing: L1/L2.
Largest rear-facing No No R1/R2

mounting: R1/R2X/R2/R3.
Largest front-facing No No F2/F3

mounting: F2X/F2/F3.
Largest suitable booster mount: B2/B3. No No B2/B3
339
REFERENCE Seats for child restraint systems
Seat position 1 3 - Airbag ON 3 -a, b)

Airbag OFF
A seat position without i-Size approval is not compatible with an i-Size support stand.
A seat position with lower ISOFIX anchors, but with no Top Tether, is not available.
There are no seat belt buckles for adults between the two bottom ISOFIX anchors.
a) Only use i-Size child restraint system if equipped with i-Size child seat mountings.
b) Only use ISOFIX child restraint system if equipped with ISOFIX child safety seat fasteners.
Seat number Position in the vehicle Seat number Position in the vehicle
1 Front left 8 3rd seat row centre
2 Front centre 9 3rd seat row right
3 Front right
Right-hand drive vehicles:
4 2nd seat row left
suitability of child restraint
5 2nd seat row centre systems for each vehicle seat
6 2nd seat row right If the vehicle is equipped with i-Size, the value af‐
ter the / applies to the vehicle.
7 3rd seat row left
Seat position 1 - Airbag ON 1 -a, b) 3

Airbag OFF
Seat position suitable for universal fas‐ No yes/yes No

tening with a belt.
i-Size seat position. No no/yes No
Seat position suitable for side mount‐ No no/no No

ing: L1/L2.
Largest rear-facing No R1/R2 No

mounting: R1/R2X/R2/R3.
Largest front-facing No F2/F3 No

mounting: F2X/F2/F3.
Largest suitable booster mount: B2/B3. No B2/B3 No
340
Seats for child restraint systems REFERENCE
Seat position 1 - Airbag ON 1 -a, b) 3

Airbag OFF
A seat position without i-Size approval is not compatible with an i-Size support stand.
A seat position with lower ISOFIX anchors, but with no Top Tether, is not available.
There are no seat belt buckles for adults between the two bottom ISOFIX anchors.
a) Only use i-Size child restraint system if equipped with i-Size child seat mountings.
b) Only use ISOFIX child restraint system if equipped with ISOFIX child safety seat fasteners.
Seat number Position in the vehicle
1 Front left
2 Front centre
3 Front right
4 2nd seat row left
5 2nd seat row centre
6 2nd seat row right
7 3rd seat row left
8 3rd seat row centre
9 3rd seat row right
341
REFERENCE Appendix
Appendix
General Wireless Charging
Paraguay
Here is where any updates to the Owner's
Handbook for the vehicle are listed.
Updates after going to

press
After the copy deadline for the integrated Own‐
er's Handbook in the vehicle, the following chap‐
ters were updated in the printed Owner's
Handbook: 2019-10-I-0577
▷ Notes: vehicle identification number. 2019-10-I-0578
▷ Mobility: wheels and tyres: tyre pressure 2019-10-I-0579
monitor: tyre settings.
Ukraine
License Texts and Certifications
Alarm System
Brazil
СПРОЩЕНА ДЕКЛАРАЦІЯ ПРО

ВІДПОВІДНІСТЬ
Molex CVS Dabendorf GmbH заявляє, що тип
радіообладнання WCH-189 відповідає
Технічному регламенту радіообладнання;
07804-19-07403
повний текст декларації про відповідність
Este equipamento não tem direito à proteção доступний на веб-сайті за такою адресою:
contra interferência prejudicial e não pode causar http://www.molex.com/docc
interferência em sistemas devidamente autoriza‐
Технічна інформація
dos.
Бездротова зарядка:
діапазони частот: 111кГц
Максимальна сила магнітного поля:
42дБмкА/м
342
Appendix REFERENCE
Поблизу польовий зв'язок:

діапазони частот: 13.56MГц
Максимальна сила магнітного поля:
42дБмкА/м
Виробник продукції
Виробник: Molex CVS Dabendorf GmbH
Адреса: Märkische Strasse 72, 15806 Zossen,
Німеччина
Телефон: +49 3377 316-0
343
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
A Air quality 235
Alarm, false 102
ABS Anti-lock Brake System 199 Alarm system 101
Acceleration assistant, see Launch Control 146 All-season tyres, see Winter tyres 282
Accessories and parts 9 Alternating-code hand-held transmitter 250
ACC, see Active Cruise Control 207 Amazon Alexa Car Integration 57
Activated carbon filter 243 Ambient lighting 175
Activation, airbags 179 Amount of air, automatic air condition‐
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function ing 237, 242
ACC 207 Android Auto, connection to vehicle 81
Active front flap, see Active pedestrian protec‐ Android Auto preparation, connection to vehi‐
tion 180 cle 81
Active Guard Plus, see Intelligent Safety 181 Android Auto preparation, smartphone integra‐
Active Guard, see Intelligent Safety 181 tion 81
Active M Sport differential 201 Angle, backrest 112
Active PDC, see Emergency braking func‐ Antifreeze protection, see Washer fluid 312
tion 219 Antifreeze, see Washer fluid 312
Active pedestrian protection 180 Anti-lock Brake System ABS 199
Active shock absorber adjustment, see Adaptive Anti-theft alarm system, see Alarm system 101
M suspension 234 Anti-theft security system, locking wheel
Active speech processing, voice input 55 bolts 299
Adapting the content, iDrive 51 Anti-theft system, locking 85
Adaptive brake assist 199 Anti-trap mechanism, windows 103
Adaptive brake light, see Dynamic brake Apple CarPlay preparation, connection to vehi‐
lights 197 cle 80
Adaptive Headlights 172 Apple CarPlay preparation, smartphone integra‐
Adaptive M suspension 234 tion 80
ADAPTIVE, see Driving Experience Control 149 Apps, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐
Additives, engine oil grades 310 tertainment, Communication 6
Adjusting the engine sound 234 Aquaplaning 266
Adjusting the sound of the engine 234 Ashtray 252
Age of tyres 281 Assistant for leaving a parking space 228
Airbags 177 Attentiveness assistant 197
Airbags, indicator/warning lamp 178 AUC automatic air recirculation control AUC 242
Airbag switch, see Key switch 179 Audio, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Air conditioning 235 Entertainment, Communication 6
Air conditioning function, air conditioning 240 AUTO H button, see Parking brake 134
Air distribution, manual 238, 243 Automatic activation, see Regulation climate
Air outlets, see Ventilation 244 control 120
Air pressure, tyres 278 Automatic air conditioning 235, 239
344
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
Automatic air recirculation control AUC 242 Bonnet 305

Automatic car wash 331 Bonus range, ECO PRO 272
Automatic dimming, see High beam assis‐ Boot lid 97
tant 172 Boot lid, vehicle key 86
Automatic driving lights control 169 Boot, see Luggage compartment 261
Automatic gearbox, see Steptronic transmis‐ Bottle holder, see Cupholder 259
sion 142 Brake assist 199
Automatic Hold, see Parking brake 134 Brake assist, adaptive 199
Automatic locking 100 Brake discs, see Brake system 264
Automatic parking function, exterior mirror 117 Brake lights, adaptive, see Dynamic brake
Automatic start-stop function 131 lights 197
Automatic unlocking 100 Brake lights, dynamic 197
Automating habits, BMW Intelligent Personal As‐ Brake pads, see Brake system 264
sistant 59 Brake system 264
AUTO programme, automatic air condition‐ Braking, notes 266
ing 237, 241 Braking safely 266
AUTO programme, intensity 241 Breakdown, help 322
Auto Start Stop function 131 Break recommendations, see Attentiveness as‐
Average consumption, see Journey data 164 sistant 197
Avoiding false alarms 102 Brightness, Control Display 66
Axle loads, permitted 337 Bulbs and lights 318
Buttons on the steering wheel 38
B Button SOS, see Intelligent emergency call 325
Button SOS, see Statutory emergency call 324
Backrest angle 112 Button, start/stop 131
Backrest contour, see Lumbar support 112
Backrest, seats 110 C
Backrest width 113
Bag holders 262 Camera-based assistance systems, see Intelli‐
Bar for tow-starting/towing 329 gent Safety 181
Battery changing, vehicle key 86 Camera lenses, care 335
Battery, disposing of 320 Camera, rear-view camera 221
Battery, vehicle 318 CANCEL button, Active Cruise Control 207
Belts, see Seat belts 113 CANCEL button, cruise control 204
Black ice, see Outside temperature warning 158 Can holder, see Cupholder 259
Blower, see Amount of air 237, 242 Care, Head-Up Display 335
Bluetooth connection 77 Care, light-alloy wheels 334
Blu-ray, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Care of upholstery fabrics 334
Entertainment, Communication 6 Care products 332
BMW Accident Assistance 323 Care, vehicle 332
BMW Digital Key 89 Caring Car, BMW Intelligent Personal Assis‐
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant 58 tant 59
BMW Maintenance System 314 Caring for displays, monitors 335
BMW Roadside Assistance 322 Car key, see Vehicle key 83
BMW Services, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐ Carpet, care 335
gation, Entertainment, Communication 6 CarPlay, connection to vehicle 80
345
Carrying children 121 Compatible devices, see Suitable devices 75

Carrying children safely 121 Compressor 284
Car wash, automatic 331 Concierge Service, see Owner's Handbook for
Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust system 265 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
CBS Condition Based Service 314 Condensation when vehicle is parked 268
Central key, see Vehicle key 83 Condensation, windscreen 238, 243
Central locking system 93 Condition Based Service CBS 314
Central screen, see Control Display 49 Connected Command, BMW Intelligent Personal
Centre armrest 259 Assistant 59
Centre console 40 ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Handbook for
Changes, technical, see Your own safety 8 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Changing bulbs, see Lights and bulbs 318 Connecting a device 74
Changing gear, Steptronic transmission 142 Connecting electrical devices, see Sockets 253
Changing, wheels and tyres 281 Connecting, mobile devices 74
Charging a smartphone, see Wireless charging Connection point, starting assistance 327
dock 255 Connections, Screen Mirroring 79
Charging dock for smartphones, see Wireless Consumption display, ECO PRO 272
charging dock 255 Consumption display, widget in the instrument
Chassis number, see Vehicle identification num‐ cluster 152
ber 18 Consumption, see Current consumption 152
Check Control 152 Consumption, see Journey data 164
Child restraint systems, i-Size 124 Contacts, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Child restraint systems, see Carrying children Entertainment, Communication 6
safely 121 Continuing a journey with a flat tyre 294, 297
Child seat classes, see ISOFIX child restraint Control Display 49
systems 124 Control Display, brightness 66
Child seat mounting 122 Controller 49
Child seat mountings, ISOFIX 123 Control systems, driving stability 199
Child seats, see Carrying children safely 121 Convertible, convertible top 104
Chrome-plated surfaces, care 334 Convertible, roof 104
Chrome surfaces, care 334 Convertible top 104
Cigarette lighter 252 Convertible, wind deflector 109
Cleaning displays, monitors 335 Converting the headlights, see Right-hand/left-
Cleaning, Head-Up Display 335 hand traffic 174
Closing with a smartphone, see BMW Digital Coolant 311
Key 89 Coolant level 311
Coasting 274 Coolant temperature, see Engine tempera‐
Coasting in idle 274 ture 158
Comfort Access 94 Cooling effect, maximum 236, 241
Comfort closing, vehicle key 85 Cooling system 311
Comfort entry, see Unlocking 84 Cornering light 172
Comfort opening, vehicle key 84 Corrosion of brake discs 267
COMFORT, see Driving Experience Control 147 Crossing traffic warning 231
Communication, see Owner's Handbook for Cruise Control, active with Stop&Go func‐
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 tion 207
Compact wheel, see Emergency wheel 302 Cruise control, see Active Cruise Control 207
346
Cruise Control, see Cruise Control 204 Display, iDrive 46

Cruise Control with distance control, see Active Displaying notifications, BMW Intelligent Per‐
Cruise Control 207 sonal Assistant 58
Cruise Control without distance control, see Display in the windscreen, see Head-Up Dis‐
Cruise Control 204 play 166
Cupholder 259 Display lighting, see Instrument lighting 174
Cupholder, front 259 Displays 150
Current consumption 152 Displays and symbols 7
Customer support, see Owner's Handbook for Displays, ECO PRO 271
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Disposal, coolant 312
Disposal, vehicle battery 320
D Disposing of the old battery 320
Distance warning, see PDC 216
Damage, tyres 280 Downhill gradients 267
Data protection, settings 68 Drive mode, see Driving Experience Control 147
Data, see Deleting personal data 68 Drive-off assistant 199
Data storage medium, see Vehicle data and data Driver assistance, driving, see Intelligent
protection 9 Safety 181
Data, technical 336 Driver assistance, see Intelligent Safety 181
Date 64 Drive-ready state, engine start 44
Daytime driving lights 171 Drive-ready state, rest state and standby
DCC, see Cruise Control 204 state 43
Deactivation, airbags 179 Driver profiles 69
Defrosting, see Defrosting the wind‐ Driver profile, setting up 69
screen 238, 243 Driver profiles, welcome screen 69
Defrosting, windscreen 238, 243 Driving 131
Deleting personal data 68 Driving Assistant, see Intelligent Safety 181
Departure schedule, see Independent ventila‐ Driving comfort 234
tion 244 Driving Experience Control 147
Departure time, independent ventilation 245 Driving hints 265
Departure time, standing air conditioning 247 Driving information, general 265
Desired speed, see Active Cruise Control 207 Driving information, running in 264
Destination entry, see Owner's Handbook for Driving lights control, automatic 169
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Driving mode, ECO PRO 270
Device list 75 Driving path lines, rear-view camera 222
Diagnosis connection 315 Driving Stability Control Systems 199
Differential lock 201 Driving style analysis, ECO PRO 275
Digital Key, see BMW Digital Key 89 Driving through water 266
Dimensions 336 Drying air, see Air conditioning function 240
Dimming exterior mirror 117 DSC Dynamic Stability Control 199
Dimming rear-view mirror 117 DTC, Dynamic Traction Control 200
Dipping headlights, see High beam assis‐ Dynamic brake lights 197
tant 172 Dynamic damping, see Adaptive M suspen‐
Direction indicators, see Turn indicators 137 sion 234
Direct selection buttons, see Favourites but‐ Dynamic ECO lighting function 171
tons 48 Dynamic Stability Control DSC 199
347
Dynamic Traction Control DTC 200 Engine oil, replenishing 309

Engine oil temperature 158
E Engine start, see Drive-ready state 44
Engine start, see Starting aid 327
ECO lighting function, dynamic 171 Engine temperature 158
ECO PRO 270 Entering an address, Navigation, see Owner's
ECO PRO, bonus range 272 Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐
ECO PRO, driving style analysis 275 munication 6
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL, see Driving Experience Entering letters and numbers 47
Control 147 Entertainment, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
ECO PRO, route-ahead assistant 272 gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
ECO PRO, see Driving Experience Control 147 Equipment, interior 249
Efficiency display, widget in the instrument clus‐ ESP, Electronic Stability Programme, see
ter 152 DSC 199
Electrical power window switches 103 Exchanging, wheels and tyres 281
Electric steering wheel lock 118 Exhaust gas particle filter 265
Electronic oil measurement 308 Exhaust, see Exhaust system 265
Electronic Stability Programme, ESP, see Exhaust system 265
DSC 199 Experience Modes, BMW Intelligent Personal
E-mail, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Assistant 59
Entertainment, Communication 6 Exterior lights when unlocking 84
Emergency assistance, see BMW Accident As‐ Exterior lights with the vehicle locked 85
sistance 323 Exterior mirror, automatically dimming 117
Emergency assistance, see BMW Roadside As‐ Exterior mirror, automatic parking function 117
sistance 322 Exterior mirror, Interior mirror, external 116
Emergency braking function when parking, Ac‐ Exterior mirror internal 117
tive PDC 219 Exterior mirrors, malfunction 116
Emergency braking, see PostCrash – iBrake 197 External start, see Starting aid 327
Emergency call 324 Eye for towing 330
Emergency release, fuel filler flap 277 Eyes, see Lashing eye in the boot 262
Emergency release, transmission lockout 146
Emergency running properties, tyres 283 F
Emergency service, see BMW Accident Assis‐
tance 323 Factory settings, see Resetting vehicle configu‐
Emergency service, see BMW Roadside Assis‐ ration 66
tance 322 Failure message, see Check Control 152
Emergency wheel 302 False alarm, see Avoiding false alarms 102
Energy recuperation 152 Fan run-on, see Exhaust gas particle filter 265
Engine, automatic start-stop function 131 Fastening seat belts, see Seat belts 113
Engine compartment 304 Fatigue warning function 197
Engine coolant 311 Fault displays, see Check Control 152
Engine idling when driving, see Coasting 274 Favourites buttons, iDrive 48
Engine oil change 311 Filler neck for engine oil 309
Engine oil filler neck 309 Filter, see Microfilter 238
Engine oil grades for topping up 310 Filter, see Microfilter/activated carbon filter 243
Engine oil level, checking electronically 308 Fine wood parts, care 334
348
Fire extinguisher 326 Fuel tank capacity 338

First-aid kit 322 Fuel tank filler flap 276
First steps, see Setup assistant 69 Fuel tank, see Capacities 338
Flat tyre, continuing a journey 294, 297 Fuses 321
Flat tyre, flat tyre monitor RPA 295
Flat tyre message, RPA 296 G
Flat tyre message, Tyre Pressure Monitor 292
Flat tyre monitor RPA 295 Garage door opener, see Integrated universal re‐
Flat tyre, remedying 283 mote control 249
Flat tyre, see Tyre Pressure Monitor 288 Gearbox, see Manual gearbox 141
Flat tyre warning lamp, RPA 296 Gearbox, see Steptronic transmission 142
Flat tyre warning light, Tyre Pressure Moni‐ Gearshift, see Manual gearbox 141
tor 292 General driving information 265
Flat tyre, wheel change 297 General settings 64
Flood, driving through 266 Glare protection, see Sun visor 251
Floor carpet, care 335 Glove box 258
Fog lights, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 318 GPS, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for
Fold-out position, windscreen wiper 140 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Foot brake 266
Foot mats, care 335 H
Fording depth, water 266
Front airbags 177 Handbrake, see Parking brake 134
Front collision warning, see Collision warn‐ Hand-held transmitter, alternating-code 250
ing 182 Hands-free system, see Owner's Handbook for
Front collision warning, see Intelligent Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Safety 181 Hazard warning lights 322
Front collision warning, see Pedestrian warn‐ Head Light, adaptive 172
ing 186 Headlight courtesy delay feature 171
Front-end collision warning with City braking Headlight flasher 138
function 182 Headlight glass 318
Front-end collision warning with light braking Headlights, care 332
function 182 Head restraints and seats 110
Front head rests 115 Head-Up Display 166
Front neck supports, see Front head rests 115 Head-Up Display, care 335
Front passenger's side exterior mirror, tilting Head-Up Display, saving position, see Memory
down, see Automatic parking function 117 function 118
Front passenger airbags, deactivation/activa‐ Heavy transported loads, stowing 261
tion 179 Height, vehicle 336
Front passenger airbags, indicator lamp 180 Help in case of a breakdown 322
Front seats 110 Help in driving off, see Drive-off assistant 199
Fuel 307 High beam assistant 172
Fuel filler flap, manual release 277 High-beam headlights 138
Fuel gauge 156 Hill Start Assist, see Drive-off assistant 199
Fuel quality 307 Holder for beverages 259
Fuel recommendation 307 Home lights, switching on 86
Fuel tank cap 276
349
HomeLink, see Integrated universal remote con‐ Interior light when unlocking 84
trol 249 Interior light with the vehicle locked 85
Home page, see Internet 6 Interior mirror 117
Horn 38 Interior movement detector 102
Hotel function, see Parking service mode 98 Internet connection 78
Hot exhaust system 265 Internet hotspot 78
Internet site 6
I Interval Display, see Service requirements 159
i-Size child restraint systems 124
iBrake – PostCrash 197 ISOFIX, child seat mountings 123
Ice warning, see Outside temperature warn‐
ing 158 J
Identification number, see Vehicle identification
number 18 Jacking points 300
iDrive 46 Journey data 164
Ignition key, see Vehicle key 83 Joystick, Steptronic transmission 142
Important considerations 121 Jump-starting connections 327
Independent ventilation 244 Jump starting, see Starting aid 327
Indicator and warning lamps 153
Indicator lamp, front passenger airbags 180 K
Individual air distribution 238, 243
Individual settings, see Driver profiles 69 Kenaf, care 334
Inductive charging, smartphone, see Wireless Key card, see BMW Digital Key 89
charging dock 255 Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 94
Inflation pressure, tyres 278 Key, mechanical 92
Inflation pressure warning RPA, tyres 295 Key, see BMW Digital Key 89
Information window, Control Display 66 Key, see Vehicle key 83
Initialising, runflat indicator RPA 295 Key switch for front passenger airbags 179
Input comparison 47 Kick-down, Steptronic transmission 142
Input, iDrive 46 Knee airbag 177
Instrument cluster 150
Instrument cluster switch, see Turn indica‐ L
tors 137
Instrument cluster switch, see Wiper sys‐ Labelling of recommended tyres 282
tem 138 Labelling of run-flat tyres 283
Instrument lighting 174 Lane boundary, warning 189
Integrated key 92 Lane Change Warning 193
Integrated Owner's Handbook in the vehicle 20 Lane Departure Warning 189
Integrated universal remote control 249 Language, setting 65
Intelligent emergency call 325 Lashing eyes in the boot 262
Intelligent Personal Assistant 58 Lashing straps, see Lashing eyes in the
Intelligent Safety 181 boot 262
Intended use 8 Lateral parking aid without Surround View 220
Intensity, AUTO programme 241 Launch Control 146
Interior equipment 249 Laying up the vehicle 335
Interior light 175 Laying up, vehicle 335
350
Leather care 333 Manual operation, amount of air 237, 242

LED headlights, replacing, see Lights and Manual operation, fuel filler flap 277
bulbs 318 Manual operation, Steptronic transmission 142
Left-hand traffic, light setting 174 Map update, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐
Length, vehicle 336 tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Light-alloy wheels, care 334 Matt paintwork, care 333
Lighter 252 Maximum cooling effect 236, 241
Lighter, front 253 Maximum speed, display, see Speed Limit
Light in exterior mirror, see Crossing traffic warn‐ Info 161
ing 231 Maximum speed, winter tyres 282
Lighting 169 Media of the Owner's Handbook 20
Light in the exterior mirror, see Lane Change Medical supplies, see First-aid kit 322
Warning 193 Memory function 118
Lights 169 Menu, instrument cluster, see Selection
Light switch 169 lists 164
LIM button, see Manual Speed Limiter 202 Messages 66
List of all messages 66 Messages, see Check Control 152
Loading 261 Microfilter 238, 243
Loading the boot, see Stowing transported Minimum tread depth, tyres 280
loads 261 Mirror, vanity 252
Locking, automatic 100 Mobile communication in the vehicle 266
Locking, see Opening and closing 83 Mobile devices, managing 75
Locking settings 99 Mobile phone, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
Locking, vehicle key 85 gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Locking wheel bolts 299 Mobile Service, see BMW Accident Assis‐
Lock, wheel studs 299 tance 323
Logging on, mobile devices, see Connec‐ Mobile Service, see BMW Roadside Assis‐
tions 74 tance 322
Low-beam headlights 170 Mobile telephone, connecting 74
Luggage compartment 261 Mobile telephone, see Owner's Handbook for
Luggage compartment lid, see Boot lid 97 Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Lumbar support 112 Mobility System 284
MODE button, see Active Cruise Control 207
M Mode, ECO PRO 270
Moisture in the headlights, see Headlight
Maintenance 314 glass 318
Maintenance requirement, see CBS Condition Monitor, see Control Display 49
Based Service 314 Mounting child restraints 122
Maintenance, see Service requirements 159 MP3 player, see Owner's Handbook for naviga‐
Maintenance System, BMW 314 tion, entertainment, communication 6
Make-up mirror 252 M Sport differential, active 201
Malfunction displays, see Check Control 152 M suspension, adaptive, see Adaptive M suspen‐
Malfunction, vehicle key 87 sion 234
Managing devices 75 Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 38
Manual gearbox 141 Multimedia, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐
Manual operation, air distribution 238, 243 tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
351
N P
Navigation, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐ Paintwork, vehicle care 332
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Park Assistant 224
Net, boot 262 Park Distance Control PDC 216
Neutral cleaner, see Light-alloy wheels, care 334 Parking aid, see PDC 216
New wheels and tyres 281 Parking Assistant, see Park Assistant 224
No Passing Information, see Speed Limit Parking, Automatic Hold, see Parking brake 134
Info 161 Parking brake 134
Notes 6 Parking lights 170
Nylon rope for tow-starting/towing 330 Parking service mode 98
Particle filter, see Exhaust gas particle filter 265
O Part replacement 317
Parts and accessories 9
OBD on-board diagnosis 315 Payload, technical data 337
Obstacle marker, rear-view camera 222 PDC Park Distance Control 216
Octane number, see Petrol grade 307 Pedestrian protection, active 180
Odometer, see Journey data 164 Performance Control 234
Oil change 311 Performance display, instrument cluster 157
Oil change interval, see Service require‐ Personal data, deleting 68
ments 159 Personal profile, see Driver profiles 69
Oil filler neck 309 Personal settings 68
Oil grades for topping up, engine 310 Person warning with braking function 186
Oil level, checking electronically 308 Petrol 307
Oil, replenishing 309 Petrol grade 307
On-board computer, see Journey data 164 Petrol particle filter, see Exhaust gas particle fil‐
On-board diagnosis OBD 315 ter 265
On-board literature, printed 20 Place for children 121
On-board monitor, see Control Display 49 Plasters, see First-aid kit 322
On-board tool kit 317 Plastic parts, care 334
Opening and closing 83 Pockets, doors 258
Opening with a smartphone, see BMW Digital PostCrash – iBrake 197
Key 89 Power display, see Sport displays 166
Operating menus, iDrive 46 Power failure 320
Operating principle, iDrive 46 Powermeter, see Performance display 157
Operation, app 59 Power window switches 103
Operation via voice control 54 Pressure, tyres 278
Optional equipment, see Vehicle equipment 7 Pressure warning RPA, tyres 295
Outside air, see AUC 242 Prevention of rear collision 196
Outside temperature 158 Printed on-board literature 20
Overheating of the engine, see Engine tempera‐ Profiles, see Driver profiles 69
ture 158 Protection function, windows, see Anti-trap
Overtaking restrictions 161 mechanism 103
Owner's Handbook on language, BMW Intelli‐
gent Personal Assistant 60
Owner's Handbook, printed 20
352
R Replacing parts 317

Replacing rear light, see Bulbs and lights 318
Racing track 268 Replacing tail lights, see Bulbs and lights 318
Radiator fan, see Exhaust gas particle filter 265 Replacing the wiper blades 317
Radio, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, RES CNCL button, Active Cruise Control,
Entertainment, Communication 6 ACC 207
Radio signals 266 RES CNCL button, cruise control 204
Rain sensor 139 Reserve warning, see Range 159
Range 159 Reservoir for washer fluid 312
Rear collision warning, see Prevention of rear Resetting settings, vehicle 66
collision 196 Resetting, Tyre Pressure Monitor 291
Rear fog light 174 Resetting, vehicle configuration 66
Rear fog light, replacing, see Lights and Resetting, vehicle settings 66
bulbs 318 Reset, Tyre Pressure Monitor 291
Rear-view camera 221 Restraint systems for children, see Carrying chil‐
Rear-view mirror, automatic-dim 117 dren safely 121
Rear window heating 238, 243 Rest state, standby state and drive-ready
Recirculated-air mode 237, 242 state 43
Recirculating air filter, see Microfilter/activated RESUME button, Active Cruise Control 207
carbon filter 243 RESUME button, cruise control 204
Recirculation, see Recirculated-air Retreaded tyres 282
mode 237, 242 Reuse, recycling 316
Recommended makes of tyre 282 Reversing assistant 229
Recycling 316 Revolution counter 157
Refuelling 276 Right-hand traffic, light setting 174
Regulation climate control 120 Rolling away in idle, see Coasting 274
Remote control for audio, see Owner's RON, petrol grade 307
Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐ Roof lining 42
munication 6 Roof load, permitted 337
Remote control, see Vehicle key 83 Roof, see Convertible top 104
Remote control, universal 249 Rope for tow-starting/towing 330
Remote Engine Start, see Standing air condition‐ Roundabout light 172
ing 246 Route-ahead assistant 272
Remote services, app, see Owner's Handbook Route, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐ Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
tion 6 RPA flat tyre monitor 295
Remote Software Upgrade 61 RSC Runflat System, see Run-flat tyres 283
Replacement of parts 317 RTTI, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐
Replacement, wheels and tyres 281 tertainment, Communication 6
Replacement wheel, see Emergency wheel 302 Rubber parts, care 334
Replacing bulbs, see Lights and bulbs 318 Run-flat tyres 283
Replacing front lights, see Bulbs and lights 318 Run Flat tyres, see Run-flat tyres 283
Replacing headlights, see Bulbs and lights 318 Running in 264
Replacing light-emitting diodes, see Bulbs and Run-on of fan, see Exhaust gas particle filter 265
lights 318
Replacing lights, see Bulbs and lights 318
353
S Settings, steering wheel 118

Setup assistant 69
Safe seating position 110 Shift Lights, revolution counter 157
Safe Share function, see BMW Digital Key/key Shift paddles on the steering wheel 142
card 89 Shift point indicator 160
Safety systems, see Airbags 177 Shock absorber adjustment, active, see Adaptive
Safety systems, see Intelligent Safety 181 M suspension 234
Saving energy, see Shift point indicator 160 Side airbag 177
Saving fuel 269 Side lights 170
Saving mirror position, see Memory func‐ Side nozzles, see Ventilation 244
tion 118 Side protection without Surround View, see Lat‐
Saving seat position, see Memory function 118 eral parking aid 220
Saving steering wheel position, see Memory Signal horn, horn 38
function 118 Signals on unlocking, see Acknowledgement
Screen Mirroring, connection 79 signals 100
Screen, see Control Display 49 Sizes, see Dimensions 336
Sealant, see Mobility System 284 Smallest turning radius, vehicle 336
Seat belt reminder for driver and front passenger Smartphone, connecting 74
seat 115 Smartphone integration, Android Auto prepara‐
Seat belts 113 tion 81
Seat belts, care 335 Smartphone integration, Apple CarPlay prepara‐
Seat heating 119 tion 80
Seat heating, regulation climate control 120 Smartphone, operating via voice control 57
Seats and head restraints 110 Smartphone, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐
Seats, front 110 tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Securing the tailgate, see Parking service Smokers package 252
mode 98 SMS, see Short messages, see Owner's
Securing, transported loads 261 Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐
Selection list in the instrument cluster 164 munication 6
Selector lever, Steptronic transmission 142 Snow chains 288
Sensors, care 335 Socket for on-board diagnosis OBD 315
Service history 160 Sockets, electrical devices 253
Service requirements 159 Software update, see Remote Software Up‐
Service requirement, see CBS Condition Based grade 61
Service 314 Software upgrade, see Remote Software Up‐
Services, ConnectedDrive, see Owner's grade 61
Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐ Software version, see Remote Software Up‐
munication 6 grade 61
Service, see BMW Accident Assistance 323 Soot particle filter, see Exhaust gas particle fil‐
Service, see BMW Roadside Assistance 322 ter 265
SET button, Active Cruise Control 207 SOS button, see Intelligent emergency call 325
SET button, cruise control 204 SOS button, see Statutory emergency call 324
Setting, Control Display 66 Sound output, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
Settings, general 64 gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Settings, locking/unlocking 99 Sound, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation,
Settings, seats and head restraints 110 Entertainment, Communication 6
354
Spanner, see On-board tool kit 317 Stopping the engine, see Drive-ready state 44
Spare wheel, see Emergency wheel 302 Storage compartment, centre console 258
Speech recognition 54 Storage compartments 257
Speed Limit Assist 214 Storage facilities 257
Speed Limit Device, Manual Speed Limiter 202 Storage, see Laying up the vehicle 335
Speed limit, display, see Speed Limit Info 161 Storage, tyres 283
Speed limiter, manual 202 Stowing, transported loads 261
Speed Limit Info 161 Suitable devices 75
Speed warning 65 Suitable mobile telephones 75
Sport displays 166 Summer tyres, tread 280
SPORT INDIVIDUAL, see Driving Experience Sun visor 251
Control 147 Supplementary handbook 20
SPORT PLUS, see Driving Experience Con‐ Supplementary text message 153
trol 147 Suspension, electronic, see Adaptive M suspen‐
Sport programme, Steptronic transmission 142 sion 234
SPORT, see Driving Experience Control 147 Suspension settings, see Driving Experience
Sports steering, variable 201 Control 147
Sport suspension, see Adaptive M suspen‐ Switches, see Driving area 38
sion 234 Switch for driving dynamics, see Driving Experi‐
Stability control systems 199 ence Control 147
Standard equipment, see Vehicle equipment 7 Symbols and displays 7
Standby state, rest state and drive-ready SYNC programme, automatic air condition‐
state 43 ing 243
Standing air conditioning via Remote Engine
Start 246 T
Start/stop button 131
Starting aid 327 Tailgate, see Boot lid 97
Starting assistance, see DSC 199 Tank display 156
Starting, see Drive-ready state 44 Technical changes, see Your own safety 8
Starting the engine, see Drive-ready state 44 Technical data 336
Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Handbook for Telephone, connecting 74
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Telephone, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐
Status indicator, tyres 290 tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Status information, iDrive 47 Teleservices, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐
Status of the Owner's Handbook 7 tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Status, vehicle 166 Television, TV, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
Statutory emergency call 324 gation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Steering column adjustment 118 Temperature, automatic air condition‐
Steering wheel, buttons 38 ing 236, 240
Steering wheel heating 118 Temperature display, see Outside tempera‐
Steering wheel heating, regulation climate con‐ ture 158
trol 120 Temperature, engine oil 158
Steering wheel, setting 118 Tension belt, see Lashing eyes in the boot 262
Steptronic sport transmission, see Steptronic Tensioning straps, boot 262
transmission 142 Text message, Check Control 153
Steptronic transmission 142 Thigh support 112
355
Third-party providers 57 Tyre pressure test, see Tyre Pressure Moni‐

Through-loading system 263 tor 288
Tilt alarm sensor 102 Tyre repair kit, see Mobility System 284
Tilting down the front passenger's side exterior Tyre replacement 281
mirror, see Automatic parking function 117 Tyres and wheels 278
Time 64 Tyre sealant, see Mobility System 284
Tools 317 Tyre settings 289
Torque display, see Sport displays 166 Tyres with emergency running properties 283
Total weight, permitted 337 Tyre tread 280
Touchpad, Controller 52
Tourist function, see Right-hand/left-hand traf‐ U
fic 174
Tow bar 329 Units of measure 65
Tow fitting, see Towing eye 330 Units, see Units of measure 65
Towing away 328 Universal remote control 249
Towing eye 330 Unloaded weight 337
Towing rope 330 Unlock-button, Steptronic transmission 142
Towing, see Tow-starting and towing 328 Unlocking, automatic 100
Tow-starting 328 Unlocking, see Opening and closing 83
Traction control 200 Unlocking, settings 99
TRACTION, driving dynamics 200 Unlocking, vehicle key 84
Traffic information, see Owner's Handbook for Updates after going to press 7
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Upgrade, see Remote Software Upgrade 61
Transmission lockout, unlocking electroni‐ USB connection 81
cally 146 USB port, position in the vehicle 254
Transported loads, stowing and securing 261 Use, intended 8
Tread, tyres 280
Trip distance recorder, see Journey data 164 V
Triple turn signal 138
Turn indicator, indicator lamp 155 Valet parking mode, see Parking service
Turn indicators, high-beam headlights, headlight mode 98
flasher 137 Vanity mirror 252
Turn indicators, replacing bulbs, see Bulbs and Variable sports steering 201
lights 318 Vehicle acknowledgement signals 100
Turning circle lines, rear-view camera 222 Vehicle battery 318
Turning radius, vehicle 336 Vehicle breakdown, see Help in case of a break‐
TV, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐ down 322
tertainment, Communication 6 Vehicle care 332
Tyre damage 280 Vehicle configuration, resetting 66
Tyre inflation pressure 278 Vehicle data and data protection 9
Tyre makes, recommendation 282 Vehicle equipment 7
Tyre pressure 278 Vehicle identification number 18
Tyre Pressure Monitor 288 Vehicle key 83
Tyre pressure monitoring, see RPA 295 Vehicle key, additional 87
Tyre Pressure Monitor, reset 291 Vehicle key, changing batteries 86
Tyre Pressure Monitor, resetting 291 Vehicle key, integrated key 92
356
Vehicle key, loss 87 Widgets, iDrive 47

Vehicle key, malfunction 87 Width, vehicle 336
Vehicle paintwork, care 332 Wi-Fi connection 78
Vehicle, running in 264 Wi-Fi connection, see WLAN connection 78
Vehicle status 166 Wi-Fi hotspot 78
Vehicle wash 331 Wind deflector 109
Ventilation 244 Window, defrosting 238, 243
Ventilation, see Independent ventilation 244 Windscreen, defrosting 238, 243
Vents, see Ventilation 244 Windscreen washer jets 140
Video, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Windscreen washing system, see Wiper sys‐
Entertainment, Communication 6 tem 138
VIN, see Vehicle identification number 18 Windscreen wipers, see Wiper system 138
Voice control 54 Winter storage, see Laying up the vehicle 335
Voice control, see BMW Intelligent Personal As‐ Winter tyres 282
sistant 58 Winter tyres, tread 280
Voice control system 54 Wiper, fold-out position 140
Voice input 54 Wipers, see Wiper system 138
Wiper system 138
W Wiping fluid, see Washer fluid 312
Wireless charging dock for smartphones 255
Wake word 54 Wireless charging, smartphone, see Wireless
Warning and indicator lamps 153 charging dock 255
Warning lamp in exterior mirror, see Crossing WLAN connection 78
traffic warning 231 Wood parts, care 334
Warning lamp in the exterior mirror, see Lane Wordmatch principle, see Input comparison 47
Change Warning 193
Warning messages, see Check Control 152 Y
Warning of crossing traffic 231
Warning triangle 322 Your own safety 8
Warranty 8
Washer fluid 312
Washer jets, windows 140
Washing fluid, see Washer fluid 312
Washing the vehicle 331
Water on streets 266
Water, see Condensation when vehicle is
parked 268
Website, see Internet 6
Weights 337
Welcome lights 171
Welcome light when unlocking 84
Welcome screen, driver profiles 69
Wheelbase, vehicle 336
Wheel change 297
Wheel replacement 281
Wheels and tyres 278
357
*BL5A11294002*
01405A11294 en
The Ultimate
Driving Machine
BMW DRIVER'S GUIDE APP.

Your customised vehicle information in an app.
Optimised for smartphones & tablets. Can be used offline.
*BL5A11294002*
01405A11294 en

BMW Owner&#39;s+Handbook 01405A11294

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BMW Owner&#39;s+Handbook 01405A11294

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LINK:

CONTENT & A-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01405A11294 - VI/20

After a vehicle software update – for example, a Remote Software Up‐

© 2020 Bayerische Motoren Werke

Symbols and displays Vehicle equipment

These include, for example: Credit rating

▷ Fulfilling contractual obligations for the provi‐ Interests

Transaction and interaction data ▷ When responding to the customer regarding

▷ Status reports relating to the vehicle and its Personal settings

Service data components and systems may be read out, for

Mobile devices BMW ConnectedDrive

In addition to the intelligent emergency call sys‐ SIM card

Sent information Statutory emergency call system

Engine compartment Windscreen

The vehicle identification number is on the type

Left-hand side of type plate

The vehicle identification number is on the type

Owner's Handbook media

Media overview Supplementary Owner's

Validity of Owner's Handbook Integrated Owner's

After a software update in the 1. Press the button.

3. "Owner's Handbook" ▷ "Operating tips"

Context-sensitive help Calling up

Calling up when using iDrive

1. Press the button.

Calling up when a Check Control

Central locking buttons.

Press the button on the vehicle key. To unlock

Fully grip the handle of a vehicle door. Overview

With Steptronic transmission:

Convertible top switch

The windows are lowered and the convertible

Closing Driver's door

The windows are lowered, the convertible top

Displays, control functions

1 Light switch element

Indicator and warning lamps

To call up the previous screen.

To call up the Options menu.

1 Gearshift lever Activating the voice control system

iDrive It is possible that no further spoken commands

To call up the main menu.

To call up the Apps menu.

To call up the Media/Radio menu.

To call up the Communication menu.

To call up the navigation map.

To call up the destination entry menu

Adjustment and operation

Electrically adjustable seats

1. Fold the lever downwards.

▷ Height of the Head-Up Display. Navigation destination entry

Retrieving settings Press the Controller or tilt it upwards to ac‐

Connecting mobile telephone

Connecting the mobile telephone via

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is shown 4. Enter the numbers.

Telephony Operating requirements

▷ Via iDrive: ▷ The data connection may need to be activa‐

▷ Via the touchscreen: tap the corresponding 3. "New device"

the mobile device display, and confirm that

Drive-ready state ▷ With Automatic Hold activated: press the ac‐

Reverse gear Cancelling the selector lever lock

Engaging selector lever positions D, Press the button.

Activate sport programme/manual operation:

BMW Owner's+Handbook 01405A11294

BMW Owner's+Handbook 01405A11294